UP Bar Reviewer 2013 - Mercantile Law

LETTERS OF CREDIT

Definition and Nature ............. 1 DEFINITION ................................................................. 2 PURPOSE .................................................................... 2 ESSENTIAL REQUISITES .............................................. 2 NATURE ...................................................................... 2 TYPES OF LETTERS OF CREDIT ................................... 2 AS TO THE TYPE OF THE MAIN CONTRACT ................................ 2 AS TO REVOCABILITY.......................................................... 2 AS TO THE OBLIGATION ASSUMED BY CORRESPONDENT BANK ...... 2

Parties to a Letter of Credit ... 2 RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES ............. 2

Basic Principles of Letter of Credit ................... 3

DOCTRINE OF INDEPENDENCE ....................................3 FRAUD EXCEPTION PRINCIPLE ....................................3 DOCTRINE OF STRICT COMPLIANCE ............................3 TRUST RECEIPTS LAW

Concept of Trust Receipt Transaction ............................. 6

LOAN/SECURITY FEATURE ......................................... 6 OWNERSHIP OF THE GOODS, DOCUMENTS AND INSTRUMENTS UNDER A TRUST RECEIPT .......... 6

Rights of the Entruster .......... 6 VALIDITY OF THE SECURITY INTEREST AS AGAINST THE CREDITORS OF THE ENTRUSTEE/ INNOCENT PURCHASERS FOR VALUE ........................ 6

Obligation and Liability of the Entrustee ...................... 7 OBLIGATIONS OF THE ENTRUSTEE .............................. 7 LIABILITIES OF THE ENTRUSTEE .................................. 7

Remedies Available................ 7

REQUISITES OF NEGOTIABILITY .................................. 9 IN WRITING AND SIGNED BY THE MAKER OR DRAWER ................. 9 CONTAINING AN UNCONDITIONAL PROMISE TO PAY OR ORDER TO PAY ............................................................. 9 PAYABLE ON DEMAND OR AT A FIXED OR DETERMINABLE TIME ... 10 PAYABLE TO ORDER OR TO BEARER ....................................... 11 IF BILL OF EXCHANGE, DRAWEE MUST BE NAMED OR DESIGNATED WITH REASONABLE CERTAINTY ...................... 11

Kinds of Negotiable Instruments............................12 PROMISSORY NOTE ....................................................12 KINDS OF PROMISSORY NOTES.............................................12 BILL OF EXCHANGE.....................................................12 KINDS OF BILLS OF EXCHANGE .............................................12

Completion and Delivery ......13 INSERTION OF DATE ................................................... 13 COMPLETION OF BLANKS........................................... 13 INCOMPLETE AND UNDELIVERED INSTRUMENTS ..... 13 COMPLETE AND UNDELIVERED INSTRUMENTS ......... 13 INCOMPLETE AND DELIVERED INSTRUMENTS .......... 13

Signature................................13 SIGNING IN TRADE NAME ........................................... 13 SIGNATURE OF AGENT ............................................... 13 SIGNATURE PER PROCURATION ........................................... 13 LIABILITY........................................................................ 13 INDORSEMENT BY MINOR OR CORPORATION .......... 14 FORGERY ................................................................... 14 PERSONS PRECLUDED FROM SETTING UP DEFENSE OF FORGERY . 14 RULES ON FORGERY ......................................................... 14 ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT UNDER MISTAKE ........................ 15 WHEN DRAWEE MAY RECOVER FROM DRAWED ....................... 15 WHEN DRAWEE MAY NOT RECOVER FROM HOLDER .................. 15 BETWEEN DRAWEE BANK AND COLLECTING BANK .................... 15

Consideration ....................... 16 Accommodation Party ......... 16 LIABILITY ................................................................... 16 ACCOMMODATION PARTY AS SURETY ...................... 16

Negotiation ........................... 16

Warehouseman’s Lien............ 7

NEGOTIATION DISTINGUISHED FROM ASSIGNMENT .................................................. 16 MODES OF NEGOTIATION .......................................... 16 BY DELIVERY .................................................................. 16 BY INDORSEMENT COMPLETED BY DELIVERY............................ 17

NEGOTIABLE INTRUMENTS LAW

Rights of the Holder .............. 17

Definition ................................. 9 Forms and Interpretation ...... 9

HOLDER IN DUE COURSE........................................... 18 WHO ARE HDCS ............................................................... 18 REQUISITES OF A HOLDER IN DUE COURSE ............................. 18 DEFENSES AGAINST THE HOLDER ............................ 19 PRESUMPTION IN FAVOR OF DUE COURSE HOLDING ................. 19

HOLDER NOT IN DUE COURSE .............................................. 19

Liabilities of Parties .............. 19 PARTIES PRIMARILY LIABLE ..................................... 20 MAKER ......................................................................... 20 ACCEPTOR .................................................................... 20 PARTIES SECONDARILY LIABLE ................................ 20 DRAWER ...................................................................... 20 INDORSERS ................................................................... 20 WARRANTIES ............................................................ 20

Presentment for Payment ... 21 NECESSITY OF PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT .......... 21 PARTIES TO WHOM PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT SHOULD BE MADE...................................................... 21 DISPENSATION WITH PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT ........................................................... 21 DISHONOR BY NON-PAYMENT .................................. 21

Notice of Dishonor................ 21 PARTIES TO BE NOTIFIED ..........................................22 PARTIES WHO MAY GIVE NOTICE OF DISHONOR .......22 EFFECT OF NOTICE .....................................................22 FORM OF NOTICE .......................................................22 WAIVER ......................................................................22 DISPENSATION WITH NOTICE ....................................22 EFFECT OF FAILURE TO GIVE NOTICE ........................22

Discharge of Negotiable Instrument ........22 DISCHARGE OF NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT .............. 23 BY PAYMENT IN DUE COURSE .............................................. 23 BY INTERNATIONAL CANCELLATION ...................................... 23 BY OTHER ACTS THAT DISCHARGE A SIMPLE CONTRACT FOR PAYMENT OF MONEY ................................................... 23 BY REACQUISITION OF PRINCIPAL DEBTOR IN HIS OWN RIGHT ...... 23 BY MATERIAL ALTERATION ................................................. 23

DISCHARGE OF PARTIES SECONDARILY LIABLE ........ 23 GROUNDS UNDER SEC. 120 ................................................. 23 OTHER GROUNDS............................................................. 23 RIGHT OF PARTY WHO DISCHARGED INSTRUMENT .. 23 RENUNCIATION BY HOLDER ...................................... 23

Material Alteration .............. 24 CONCEPT................................................................... 24 EFFECT OF MATERIAL ALTERATION ......................... 24

Acceptance .......................... 24 DEFINITION ............................................................... 24 MANNER ................................................................... 24 EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE ..................................................... 24 IMPLIED ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 24 TIME FOR ACCEPTANCE ............................................ 24 RULES GOVERNING ACCEPTANCE ............................ 24

Presentment for Acceptance ......................25 TIME/PLACE/MANNER OF PRESENTMENT ............... 25 WHEN MADE .................................................................. 25 HOW MADE .................................................................... 25 EFFECT OF FAILURE TO MAKE PRESENTMENT ......... 25 DISHONOR BY NON-ACCEPTANCE ............................ 25

Promissory Notes ................ 26 Checks .................................. 26 DEFINITION ............................................................... 26 KINDS ........................................................................ 26 PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT ................................. 26 TIME ............................................................................ 26 EFFECT OF DELAY ............................................................ 26 INSURANCE CODE

Concept of Insurance ...........29 CONTRACT OF INSURACE .......................................... 29 INSURANCE ................................................................... 29 DEFINITION .................................................................... 29 PRE-NEED PLANS ............................................................ 29 DOING OR TRANSACTING AN INSURANCE BUSINESS ........................................ 29

Elements of the Contract ....29 Characteristics/Nature of Insurance Contracts ........ 30 Classes ................................. 30 MARINE ...................................................................... 31 TWO MAJOR DIVISIONS ...................................................... 31 BOTTOMRY V. RESPONDENTIA ............................................. 31 RISKS THAT MAY BE INSURED AGAINST .................................. 31 PERILS OF THE SEA V. PERILS OF THE SHIP .............................. 31 LIABILITY OF MARINE INSURER ............................................ 31 ABANDONMENT ............................................................... 31 FIRE ........................................................................... 32 RISKS IN FIRE INSURANCE ................................................. 32 MEASURE OF INDEMNITY ................................................... 32 SURETYSHIP .............................................................. 32 DEFINITION .................................................................... 32 WHEN CONSIDERED AS INSURANCE...................................... 32 BOND NECESSARY TO SECURE PERFORMANCE OF OBLIGATION .... 32 LIFE ............................................................................ 32 TYPES OF LIFE INSURANCE ................................................. 32

VARIOUS LIFE INSURANCE PLANS ......................................... 33 RISKS IN LIFE INSURANCE .................................................. 33

COMPULSORY MOTOR VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE................................................................ 33 NATURE AND PURPOSE ..................................................... 33 CLAIMS ......................................................................... 33 RELEVANT CLAUSES IN MOTOR VEHICLE INSURANCE ................ 34 CASUALTY ................................................................. 34 RISKS IN CASUALTY INSURANCE ......................................... 34 LIABILITY V. INDEMNITY .................................................... 34 NO ACTION CLAUSE ......................................................... 34

Insurable Interest .................34 DEFINITION ............................................................... 34 RATIONALE ............................................................... 34 WHEN INSURABLE INTEREST SHOULD EXIST ............35 CHANGE OF INTEREST ...............................................35 INSURABLE INTEREST IN LIFE/HEALTH ....................35 INTEREST IN ONE’S OWN LIFE ..............................................35 INTEREST IN LIFE OF ANOTHER ............................................35 BENEFICIARY ..................................................................36 INTEREST IN HEALTH ........................................................36 TRANSFER OF POLICY ........................................................36 INSURABLE INTEREST IN PROPERTY.........................36 NATURE OF INTEREST .......................................................36 MEASURE OF INSURABLE INTEREST IN PROPERTY .................... 37 TIME OF EXISTENCE .......................................................... 37 TRANSFER OF POLICY ........................................................ 37 DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN INSURABLE INTERESTS IN PROPERTY AND IN LIFE .................................................. 37

DOUBLE INSURANCE AND OVER INSURANCE ........... 37 DOUBLE INSURANCE ......................................................... 37 RE-INSURANCE .............................................................. 38 DOUBLE INSURANCE V. REINSURANCE ................................. 38 MULTIPLE OR SEVERAL INTERESTS ON SAME PROPERTY ................................................ 38 OPEN MORTGAGE OR LOSS PAYABLE MORTGAGE CLAUSE .......... 38 UNION MORTGAGE OR STANDARD MORTGAGE CLAUSE ............. 39

Perfection of the Contract of Insurance ..........................39 FORM OF INSURANCE POLICY .................................. 39 OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE/CONSENSUAL ................ 39 DELAY IN ACCEPTANCE ..................................................... 39 DELIVERY OF POLICY ........................................................ 39 PREMIUM PAYMENT ................................................. 39 DEFINITION ................................................................... 39 AUTHORITY OF AGENT TO RECEIVE PREMIUM ......................... 40 EFFECT OF PAYMENT BY POSTDATED CHECK .......................... 40 EFFECT OF NON-PAYMENT OF PREMIUM ............................... 40 EXCUSES FOR NON-PAYMENT OF PREMIUM ........................... 40 NON-DEFAULT OPTIONS IN LIFE INSURANCE .......... 40 CASH SURRENDER VALUE ................................................. 40 ALTERNATIVE TO OBTAINING CASH SURRENDER VALUE ............ 40 REINSTATEMENT OF A LAPSED POLICY OF LIFE INSURANCE ................................................... 41 REFUND OF PREMIUMS ............................................. 41 WHEN RETURN OF PREMIUMS CAN BE MADE ........................... 41

Rescission of Insurance Contracts ............................... 41 CONCEALMENT ......................................................... 41 DEFINITION .................................................................... 41 PROOF OF FRAUD IN CONCEALMENT ..................................... 41 TEST OF MATERIALITY....................................................... 41 EFFECTS OF CONCEALMENT ............................................... 41 CONCEALMENT IN MARINE INSURANCE V. ORDINARY INSURANCE 42 NON-MEDICAL INSURANCE ................................................ 42 MATTERS WHICH NEED TO BE DISCLOSED EVEN IN THE ABSENCE OF INQUIRY ....................................... 42 MATTERS WHICH DO NOT NEED TO BE DISCLOSED .................... 42

MISREPRESENTATION/OMISSIONS .......................... 42 DEFINITION .................................................................... 42 KINDS OF REPRESENTATIONS ............................................. 43 REQUISITES OF MISREPRESENTATION ................................... 43 PROOF OF FRAUD IN MISREPRESENTATION ............................ 43 TEST OF MATERIALITY....................................................... 43 WHEN MISREPRESENTATION IS MADE ................................... 43 EFFECT OF MISREPRESENTATION......................................... 43 CONCEALMENT V. MISREPRESENTATION ............................... 43 BREACH OF WARRANTIES ......................................... 43 PURPOSE OF WARRANTIES ................................................ 43 KINDS OF WARRANTIES ..................................................... 43 CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................... 44 EFFECT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY....................................... 44 WARRANTIES IN FIRE INSURANCE ........................................ 44 WARRANTY V. REPRESENTATION ........................................ 44

Claims Settlement and Subrogation.................. 44 CONCEPT OF LOSS ..................................................... 44 DEFINITION .................................................................... 44 CAUSES OF LOSS ............................................................. 44 LIABILITY FOR LOSS .......................................................... 44 REQUISITES FOR RECOVERY FROM INSURANCE ....................... 45 NOTICE AND PROOF OF LOSS.................................... 45 NOTICE OF LOSS .............................................................. 45 FORM OF NOTICE ............................................................. 45 PROOF OF LOSS .............................................................. 45 FORM OF PROOF ............................................................. 45 GUIDELINES ON CLAIMS SETTLEMENT ..................... 45 HOW CLAIMS ARE PAID/SETTLED ........................................ 45 UNFAIR CLAIMS SETTLEMENT; SANCTIONS............................. 46 PRESCRIPTION OF ACTION ................................................. 46 SUBROGATION ................................................................ 46 THE INSURANCE COMMISSIONER ......................................... 47 TRANSPORTATION LAWS

Common Carriers ................ 49 DILIGENCE REQUIRED OF COMMON CARRIERS ........ 50 DILIGENCE REQUIRED ....................................................... 50 DEFINITION .................................................................... 50 REASONS ...................................................................... 50

LIABILITIES OF COMMON CARRIERS ........................ 50 GOODS ......................................................................... 50 PASSENGERS ................................................................. 50 PRINCIPLES AS TO THE LIABILITY OF COMMON CARRIERS ........... 51 PRESUMPTION OF NEGLIGENCE ........................................... 51 KABIT SYSTEM................................................................. 51

Vigilance Over Goods ............. 4

EXEMPTING CAUSES .................................................. 51 REQUIREMENT OF ABSENCE OF NEGLIGENCE .......................... 52 ABSENCE OF DELAY ......................................................... 52 DUE DILIGENCE TO PREVENT OR LESSEN THE LOSS .................. 52 CONTRIBUTORY NEGLIGENCE .................................. 52 DURATION OF LIABILITY ........................................... 52 DELIVERY OF GOODS TO COMMON CARRIER ............................53 ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE DELIVERY ...................................53 TEMPORARY UNLOADING OR STORAGE .................................53 STIPULATION FOR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ............53 VOID STIPULATIONS ........................................................ 54 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO FIXED AMOUNT .......................... 54

KINDS .......................................................................... 61 SIMPLE AVERAGE ............................................................ 61 GENERAL AVERAGE .......................................................... 61 COLLISION ..................................................................... 62

CARRIAGE OF GOODS BY SEA ACT ............................ 63 APPLICATION ................................................................. 63 NOTICE OF LOSS OR DAMAGE.............................................. 63 PERIOD OF PRESCRIPTION ................................................. 63 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ................................................... 63

The Warsaw Convention ..... 64 APPLICABILITY .......................................................... 64 INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORTATION .................................. 6 PERIOD COVERED .............................................................. 6 LIABILITY OF CARRIER FOR DAMAGES ..................................... 6 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ............................................ 5 LIABILITY TO PASSENGERS ................................................... 6 LIABILITY FOR CHECKED BAGGAGE ......................................... 6 LIABILITY FOR HAND-CARRIED BAGGAGE ................................. 6 WILLFUL MISCONDUCT ............................................... 5

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN ABSENCE OF DECLARATION OF GREATER VALUE ......................................................... 54

LIABILITY FOR BAGGAGE OF PASSENGERS .............. 54 CHECKED-IN BAGGAGE ..................................................... 55 BAGGAGE IN POSSESSION OF PASSENGERS ............................ 55

Safety of Passengers ........... 55 VOID STIPULATIONS ................................................. 55 DURATION OF LIABILITY ........................................... 56 WAITING FOR CARRIER OR BOARDING OF CARRIER .................. 56 ARRIVAL AT DESTINATION ................................................. 56 LIABILITY FOR ACTS OF OTHERS .............................. 56 EMPLOYEES ................................................................... 56 OTHER PASSENGERS AND STRANGERS .................................. 57 EXTENT OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES ........................ 57 DAMAGES RECOVERABLE .................................................. 58

Bill of Lading ........................ 58

CORPORATION CODE

Corporation ........................... 67 DEFINITION ............................................................... 67 ATTRIBUTES OF THE CORPORATION ........................ 67 AN ARTIFICIAL BEING ........................................................ 67 CREATED BY OPERATION OF LAW ......................................... 67 HAS THE RIGHT OF SUCCESSION .......................................... 67 HAS THE POWERS, ATTRIBUTES AND PROPERTIES EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED BY LAW OR INCIDENT TO ITS EXISTENCE ............... 67

Classes of Corporations ....... 67 STOCK CORPORATION .............................................. 67 NON-STOCK CORPORATION...................................... 67 OTHER CORPORATIONS ............................................ 67

THREE-FOLD CHARACTER ........................................ 58 DELIVERY OF GOODS ................................................ 58 PERIOD OF DELIVERY ....................................................... 59 DELIVERY WITHOUT SURRENDER OF BILL OF LADING ................ 59 REFUSAL OF CONSIGNEE TO TAKE DELIVERY .......................... 59 PERIOD FOR FILING CLAIMS ..................................... 59 PERIOD FOR FILING ACTIONS ................................... 59 OVERLAND TRANSPORTATION AND COASTWISE SHIPPING ......... 59 INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF GOODS BY SEA ........................ 59

Nationality of Corporations 69

Maritime Commerce ........... 59

DOCTRINE OF SEPARATE JURIDICAL PERSONALITY ... 5 LIABILITY FOR TORTS AND CRIMES ....................................... 70 RECOVERY OF MORAL DAMAGES ......................................... 70 DOCTRINE OF PIERCING THE CORPORATE VEIL ........ 70 GROUNDS FOR APPLICATION OF DOCTRINE ............................ 70 TEST IN DETERMINING APPLICABILITY .................................... 71

CHARTER PARTIES.................................................... 59 BAREBOAT/DEMISE CHARTER ............................................ 60 TIME CHARTER ............................................................... 60 VOYAGE/TRIP CHARTER ................................................... 60 LIABILITY OF SHIP OWNERS AND SHIPPING AGENTS ............................................ 60 LIABILITY FOR ACTS OF CAPTAIN ......................................... 60 EXCEPTIONS TO LIMITED LIABILITY ....................................... 61 ACCIDENTS AND DAMAGES IN MARITIME COMMERCE .......................................... 61 AVERAGES ..................................................................... 61

PLACE OF INCORPORATION TEST ............................. 69 CONTROL TEST .......................................................... 69 GRANDFATHER RULE ................................................ 70

Corporate Juridical Personality ............................70

Incorporation and Organization................... 71

PROMOTER................................................................. 71 LIABILITY OF PROMOTER .................................................... 71

LIABILITY OF CORPORATION FOR PROMOTER’S CONTRACTS........ 71

NUMBER AND QUALIFICATIONS OF INCORPORATORS ................................................. 71 CORPORATE NAME – LIMITATIONS ON USE .............. 71 CORPORATE NAME ........................................................... 71 CORPORATE TERM .................................................... 72 MINIMUM CAPITAL STOCK AND SUBSCRIPTION REQUIREMENT........................................................... 72 MINIMUM CAPITAL STOCK .................................................. 72 SUBSCRIPTION REQUIREMENT ............................................ 72 ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION ................................. 72 NATURE AND FUNCTION OF ARTICLES ................................... 72 CONTENTS ..................................................................... 72 AMENDMENT .................................................................. 73 NON-AMENABLE ITEMS ..................................................... 73 REGISTRATION AND ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION ..................................................74 REGISTRATION OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION.....................74 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION BY SEC..............74 GROUNDS FOR DISAPPROVING AOI .......................................74 ADOPTION OF BY-LAWS.............................................74 WHEN ADOPTION IS MADE ..................................................74 EFFECT OF FAILURE TO FILE BY-LAWS WITHIN THE PERIOD .........74 NATURE AND FUNCTION OF BY-LAWS....................................74 REQUISITES OF VALID BY-LAWS ...........................................74 BINDING EFFECTS ............................................................74 AMENDMENT OR REVISION .................................................74

Corporate Powers ................. 75

GENERAL POWERS, THEORY OF GENERAL CAPACITY ............................... 75 SPECIFIC POWERS, THEORY OF SPECIFIC CAPACITY................................. 75 EXTEND OR SHORTEN THE CORPORATE TERM ......................... 75 INCREASE OR DECREASE CAPITAL STOCK ............................... 75 INCUR, CREATE OR INCREASE BONDED INDEBTEDNESS ............. 75 DENY PREEMPTIVE RIGHT................................................... 76 SELL OR DISPOSE OF SUBSTANTIALLY ALL ITS ASSETS ............... 76 ACQUIRE ITS OWN SHARES ................................................. 76 INVEST IN ANOTHER CORPORATION OR BUSINESS .................... 76 DECLARE DIVIDENDS ........................................................ 76 ENTER INTO MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS ................................ 76 ULTRA VIRES ACTS ........................................................... 77 DOCTRINE OF INDIVISIBILITY OF SUBSCRIPTION ....................... 77 HOW EXERCISED ........................................................ 77 BY THE SHAREHOLDERS..................................................... 77 BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS .............................................78 BY THE OFFICERS .............................................................78 TRUST FUND DOCTRINE ............................................78

Board of Directors and Trustees ......................... 79 DOCTRINE OF CENTRALIZED MANAGEMENT ............ 79 BOARD IS SEAT OF CORPORATE POWERS ............................... 79 PRINCIPLE ON DELEGATION OF BOARD POWERS ..................... 80 BUSINESS JUDGMENT RULE ..................................... 80 CONSEQUENCES OF THE BUSINESS JUDGMENT RULE ................ 80 REMEDIES IN CASE OF MISMANAGEMENT .............................. 80 TENURE, QUALIFICATIONS AND DISQUALIFICATIONS OF DIRECTORS OR TRUSTEES................................... 80 TENURE........................................................................ 80

QUALIFICATIONS .............................................................80 DISQUALIFICATIONS ......................................................... 81

ELECTIONS ................................................................ 81 CUMULATIVE VOTING........................................................ 81 STRAIGHT VOTING ........................................................... 81 QUORUM ....................................................................... 81 REMOVAL .................................................................. 81 FILLING OF VACANCIES ............................................. 81 VACANCY BY REMOVAL, BY EXPIRATION OF TERM, OR WHEN THE REMAINING DIRECTORS DO NOT CONSTITUTE A QUORUM ......................................... VACANCY BY REASON OF INCREASE IN THE NUMBER OF THE DIRECTORS/TRUSTEES ........................................... VACANCY BY OTHER CAUSES...............................................

81

81 81 COMPENSATION ........................................................ 81 COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS AS CORPORATE OFFICERS ......... 81 FIDUCIARY DUTIES AND LIABILITY RULES ................ 82 DUTIES ......................................................................... 82 SOLIDARY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES ...................................... 82 LIABILITY FOR WATERED STOCKS ......................................... 82 PERSONAL LIABILITIES ...................................................... 82 SPECIAL FACTS DOCTRINE ................................................. 83 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CRIMES ................................... 83 INSIDE INFORMATION ............................................... 83 CONTRACTS............................................................... 83 BY SELF-DEALING DIRECTORS WITH THE CORPORATION ............ 83 BETWEEN CORPORATIONS WITH INTERLOCKING DIRECTORS....... 84 MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS ................................................ 84 EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE ............................................ 84 CREATION ..................................................................... 84 LIMITATION ON ITS POWERS ............................................... 84 MEETINGS.................................................................. 84 REGULAR OR SPECIAL ....................................................... 84 WHO PRESIDES ............................................................... 84 QUORUM ....................................................................... 84 RULE ON ABSTENTION ...................................................... 84

Stockholders and Members ....................... 85 RIGHTS OF STOCKHOLDERS AND MEMBERS ............ 85 DOCTRINE OF EQUALITY OF SHARES ..................................... 85 PARTICIPATION IN MANAGEMENT ............................ 85 PROXY .......................................................................... 85 VOTING TRUST ................................................................ 86 CASES WHEN STOCKHOLDERS’ ACTION IS REQUIRED ................ 86 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS .............................................. 88 RIGHT TO DIVIDENDS ........................................................ 88 RIGHT OF APPRAISAL ....................................................... 88 RIGHT TO INSPECT ........................................................... 89 PRE-EMPTIVE RIGHT ........................................................ 89 RIGHT TO VOTE ............................................................... 90 RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL .................................................. 90 REMEDIAL RIGHTS .................................................... 90 INDIVIDUAL SUIT ............................................................. 90 REPRESENTATIVE SUIT ..................................................... 90 DERIVATIVE SUIT ............................................................. 90 OBLIGATIONS OF A STOCKHOLDER .......................... 91 LIABILITY TO THE CORPORATION FOR UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION ..... 91 LIABILITY TO THE CORPORATION FOR INTEREST ON UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION IF SO REQUIRED BY THE BY-LAWS ..... 91 LIABILITY FOR WATERED STOCKS ......................................... 91 LIABILITY FOR DIVIDENDS UNLAWFULLY PAID ......................... 92

LIABILITY FOR ASSUMING TO ACT AS A CORPORATION KNOWING IT TO BE WITHOUT AUTHORITY ..............................

92 MEETINGS ................................................................. 92 REGULAR OR SPECIAL ...................................................... 92 WHO CALLS THE MEETINGS................................................ 92 QUORUM ...................................................................... 93 MINUTES OF THE MEETINGS ............................................... 93

Capital Structure ..................93 SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENTS .................................. 93 CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................... 93 STATUS AS SHAREHOLDER ................................................ 93 TYPES OF SUBSCRIPTION CONTRACTS .................................. 93 INTEREST ON UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION ................................... 94 CONSIDERATION FOR STOCKS ................................. 94 LIMITATIONS ON CONSIDERATION ....................................... 94 SHARES OF STOCK .................................................... 94 NATURE OF STOCK .......................................................... 94 SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENTS ............................................. 94 CONSIDERATION FOR SHARES OF STOCK ............................... 94 WATERED STOCK ............................................................ 94 SITUS OF THE SHARES OF STOCK ......................................... 95 CLASSES OF SHARES OF STOCK ........................................... 95 PAYMENT OF BALANCE OF SUBSCRIPTION .............. 96 CALL BY BOARD OF DIRECTORS........................................... 96 NOTICE REQUIREMENT ...................................................... 97 SALE OF DELINQUENT SHARES ............................................ 97 CERTIFICATE OF STOCK ............................................. 97 NATURE OF CERTIFICATE ................................................... 97 UNCERTIFICATED SHARES ................................................. 98 NEGOTIABILITY ............................................................... 98 ISSUANCE ..................................................................... 98 LOST OR DESTROYED CERTIFICATES..................................... 98 STOCK AND TRANSFER BOOK .................................. 99 CONTENTS .................................................................... 99 WHO MAY MAKE VALID ENTRIES.......................................... 99 DISPOSITION AND ENCUMBRANCE OF SHARES ....... 99 ALLOWABLE RESTRICTIONS ON THE SALE OF SHARES ............... 99 SALE OF PARTIALLY PAID SHARES ....................................... 99 SALE OF A PORTION OF SHARES NOT FULLY PAID .................... 99 SALE OF ALL OF SHARES NOT FULLY PAID .............................. 99 SALE OF FULLY PAID SHARES ............................................. 99 REQUISITES OF A VALID TRANSFER ...................................... 99 INVOLUNTARY DEALINGS WITH SHARES ................................ 99

Dissolution and Liquidation................... 100 MODES OF DISSOLUTION......................................... 100 VOLUNTARY ................................................................. 100 INVOLUNTARY .............................................................. 100 METHODS OF LIQUIDATION ......................................101 BY THE CORPORATION ITSELF ............................................101 CONVEYANCE TO A TRUSTEE WITHIN A 3-YEAR PERIOD .............101 BY MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE OR REHABILITATION RECEIVER ... 102 LIQUIDATION AFTER 3 YEARS ............................................ 102

Other Corporations ............ 102 CLOSE CORPORATIONS ........................................... 102 CHARACTERISTICS OF A CLOSE CORPORATION ....................... 102 VALIDITY OF RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER OF SHARES ............ 102

ISSUANCE OR TRANSFER OF STOCK IN BREACH OF QUALIFYING CONDITIONS .............................. 103 WHEN BOARD MEETING IS UNNECESSARY OR IMPROPERLY HELD .................................................... 103 PRE-EMPTIVE RIGHT ...................................................... 103 AMENDMENT OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION .................... 103 DEADLOCKS ................................................................. 104

NON-STOCK CORPORATIONS.................................. 106 DEFINITION .................................................................. 106 PURPOSES ................................................................... 106 TREATMENT OF PROFITS ................................................. 106 DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS UPON DISSOLUTION ...................... 106 RELIGIOUS CORPORATIONS .................................... 106 CORPORATION SOLE ...................................................... 106 NATIONALITY ............................................................... 106 RELIGIOUS SOCIETIES ..................................................... 106 FOREIGN CORPORATIONS....................................... 106 BASES OF AUTHORITY OVER FOREIGN CORPORATIONS ............ 106 NECESSITY OF A LICENSE TO DO BUSINESS ............................107 PERSONALITY TO SUE ......................................................107 SUABILITY OF FOREIGN CORPORATIONS .............................. 108 INSTANCES WHEN UNLICENSED FOREIGN CORPORATIONS MAY BE ALLOWED TO SUE ISOLATED TRANSACTIONS .............. 108 GROUNDS FOR REVOCATION OF LICENSE ............................. 108

Mergers and Consolidations ............ 108 DEFINITION AND CONCEPT ..................................... 108 CONSTITUENT V. CONSOLIDATED CORPORATION .. 109 PLAN OF MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION .................. 109 ARTICLES OF MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION ........... 109 PROCEDURE ............................................................ 109 EFFECTIVITY ............................................................ 109 LIMITATIONS ........................................................... 109 EFFECTS ................................................................... 110 SECURITIES REGULATION CODE

State Policy .......................... 112 Securities Required to be Registered .................. 112 Procedure for Resigtration of Securities ......................... 113 Prohibitions on fraud, manipulation and insider trading .............. 114 MANIPULATION OF SECURITY PRICES ..................... 114 SHORT SALES ........................................................... 114 FRAUDULENT TRANSACTIONS ................................ 115 INSIDER TRADING .................................................... 115

Protection of Investors ........ 115 TENDER OFFER RULE ............................................... 115 RULE ON PROXY SOLICITATION ................................ 116 DISCLOSURE RULE.................................................... 116 DISCLOSURE BY THE ISSUER .............................................. 116 DISCLOSURE BY EQUITY HOLDERS ....................................... 116 DISCLOSURE BY INSIDER ................................................... 117

Civil Liability ......................... 117 CIVIL LIABILITIES ON ACCOUNT OF FALSE REGISTRATION STATEMENT..................................... 117 WHO MAY BE LIABLE ........................................................ 117 WHO MAY SUE ................................................................ 117 CIVIL LIABILITIES ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH PROSPECTUS, COMMUNICATIONS AND REPORTS ... 117 LIABILITY OF SELLERS/OFFERORS ....................................... 117 LIABILITY OF MAKERS OF FALSE MISLEADING STATEMENTS ....... 117 CIVIL LIABILITY OF FRAUD IN CONNECTION WITH SECURITIES TRANSACTIONS .................................... 117 WHO MAY BE LIABLE ........................................................ 117 WHO MAY SUE ................................................................ 117 CIVIL LIABILITY FOR MANIPULATION OF SECURITY PRICES ...................................................................... 118 WHO MAY BE LIABLE ........................................................ 118 WHO MAY SUE ................................................................ 118 CIVIL LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO COMMODITY FUTURES CONOTRACTS AND PRE-NEED PLANS ...... 118 WHO MAY BE LIABLE ........................................................ 118 WHO MAY SUE ................................................................ 118 CIVIL LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT OF INSIDER TRADING ............................................... 118 LIABILITY FOR NON-DICLOSURE ......................................... 188 LIABILITY FOR COMMUNICATING NON-PUBLIC INFORMATION ABOUT ISSUER ............................................................... 118 LIABILITY OF CONTROLLING PERSONS, AIDER AND ABETTOR AND OTHER SECONDARY LIABILITY ................................................................... 118 LIABILITY OF CONTROLLING PERSONS .................................. 118 LIABILITY OF DIRECTOR/OFFICER FOR DELAY IN THE FILING OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS................................................ 118 LIABILITY OF AIDER/ABETTOR ............................................ 118 BANKING LAWS

The New Central Bank Act 123 STATE POLICIES ....................................................... 123 SALIENT FEATURES ................................................. 123 CREATION OF THE BANGKO SENTRAL NG PILIPINAS ........................................................... 123 NATURE OF THE BSP ....................................................... 123 RESPONSIBILITY AND PRIMARY OBJECTIVE ............ 123 PRIMARY OBJECTIVES ..................................................... 123 OTHER RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................ 123 MONETARY BOARD.................................................. 123 POWERS AND FUNCTIONS ................................................ 123 COMPOSITION ............................................................... 123 MEMBERS .................................................................... 123 QUALIFICATIONS ........................................................... 123 DISQUALIFICATIONS ....................................................... 123 PROHIBITION ON MEMBERS OF THE MB................................ 124

GROUNDS FOR REMOVAL OF ANY MEMBER OF THE MB ............ VACANCIES, HOW FILLED ................................................. SALARIES .................................................................... MEETINGS ................................................................... CIVIL LIABILITY OF MEMBERS OF THE MB ..............................

124 124 124 124 124 HOW THE BSP HANDLES BANKS IN DISTRESS ........ 124 CONSERVATORSHIP ....................................................... 124 RECEIVERSHIP ...............................................................125 LIQUIDATION/CLOSURE ...................................................125 HOW THE BSP HANDLES EXCHANGE CRISIS ............126 LEGAL TENDER POWER ....................................................126 RATE OF EXCHANGE ........................................................126

Law on Secrecy of Bank Deposits ................ 126 PURPOSE ..................................................................126 PROHIBITED ACTS ....................................................126 DEPOSITS COVERED .................................................126 EXCEPTIONS ............................................................. 127 OTHER EXCEPTIONS ........................................................ 127 NOT CONSIDERED AS EXCEPTIONS ...................................... 127 GARNISHMENT OF DEPOSITS .................................. 128 CONFIDENTIALITY OF FOREIGN CURRENCY DEPOSITS.............................................. 128 PENALTIES FOR VIOLATION .....................................129

General Banking Law of 2000 ............................... 129 POLICY ......................................................................129 DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF BANKS .........129 CORE BANKING FUNCTIONS...............................................129 CLASSIFICATION OF BANKS ...............................................129 DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN BANKS, QUASI-BANKS AND TRUST ENTITIES .......................129 AS OPPOSED TO QUASI-BANKS ..........................................129 AS OPPOSED TO TRUST ENTITIES ....................................... 130 BANK POWERS AND LIABILITIES ............................. 130 BANKING AND INCIDENTAL POWERS................................... 130 DILIGENCE REQUIRED OF BANKS ............................. 131 FIDUCIARY NATURE OF BANKS ........................................... 132 STIPULATION ON INTERESTS ................................... 132 GRANT OF LOANS AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 132 RATIO OF NET WORTH TO TOTAL RISK ASSETS........................ 132 SINGLE BORROWER’S LIMIT .............................................. 133 RESTRICTIONS ON INSIDER LENDING ...................................134 LOAN-LOSS PROVISIONING ...............................................134 RESERVES ....................................................................134 PDIC INSURANCE ............................................................134 EQUITY INVESTMENT LIMITS .............................................. 135 PENALTIES FOR VIOLATION ..................................... 135 FINE/IMPRISONMENT ...................................................... 135 ADMINISTRATIVE SANCTIONS ............................................ 135

Philippine Deposit Insurance Corporation Act .................. 136 BASIC POLICY ........................................................... 136 CONCEPT OF INSURED DEPOSITS ............................ 136

LIABILITY OF DEPOSITORS....................................... 136 DEPOSIT LIABILITIES REQUIRED TO BE INSURED WITH PDIC ....... 136 COMMENCEMENT OF LIABILITY .......................................... 136 DEPOSIT ACCOUNT NOT ENTITLED TO PAYMENT ..................... 136 EXTENT OF LIABILITY ...................................................... 137 DETERMINATION OF INSURED DEPOSIT ............................... 137 CALCULATION OF LIABILITY .............................................. 137

Foreign Currency Deposit Act ......................... 138 CONFIDENTIALITY.................................................... 138 PRIVILEGES .............................................................. 138 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CODE

Intellectual Property Rights, In General ............................ 140 STATE POLICIES ....................................................... 140 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS ......................... 140 DEFINITION .................................................................. 140 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS UNDER THE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CODE ............................................................ 140

DIFFERENCES BETWEE COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS AND PATENTS .......................................................... 140 PATENTABLE INVENTIONS ................................................ 140 TRADEMARK ................................................................ 140 TRADE NAME ................................................................ 140 COPYRIGHT .................................................................. 140 OTHER FORMS OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY ......................... 140 TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER ARRANGEMENTS ............ 141

Patents ................................. 141 PATENTABLE INVENTIONS ....................................... 141 INVENTION PATENT ......................................................... 141 STATUTORY CLASSES OF UTILITY MODELS ............................. 141 GROUNDS FOR CANCELLATION OF UTILITY MODELS ................. 141 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN ........................................................ 141 LAY-OUT (TOPOGRAPHIES) OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS.............. 142 NON-PATENTABLE INVENTIONS ............................. 142 OWNERSHIP OF A PATENT ...................................... 142 RIGHT TO A PATENT ........................................................ 142 FIRST-TO-FILE RULE ....................................................... 142 INVENTIONS CREATED PURSUANT TO A COMMISSION .............. 142 RIGHT OF PRIORITY ........................................................ 142 GROUND FOR CANCELLATION OF A PATENT .......... 143 REQUIREMENT OF THE PETITION ........................................ 143 NOTICE OF HEARING ....................................................... 143 EFFECT OF CANCELLATION OF PATENT OR CLAIM ................... 143 REMEDY OF THE TRUE AND ACTUAL INVENTOR ..... 143 TIME TO FILE ACTION IN COURT ......................................... 143 REMEDY OF PERSONS NOT HAVING THE RIGHT TO A PATENT ..... 143 RIGHTS CONFERRED BY A PATENT .......................... 143 LIMITATIONS OF PATENT RIGHTS............................ 143 PRIOR USER ................................................................. 144 USE BY THE GOVERNMENT ............................................... 144 PATENT INFRINGEMENT .......................................... 144 CONTRIBUTORY INFRINGER .............................................. 144 DOCTRINE OF PATENT EXHAUSTION .................................... 144

TESTS IN PATENT INFRINGEMENT ...................................... 144 DEFENSES IN ACTION FOR INFRINGEMENT ........................... 145

LICENSING ............................................................... 145 VOLUNTARY ................................................................. 145 COMPULSORY ............................................................... 146 ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSMISSION OF RIGHTS ....... 147 ASSIGNMENT OF RIGHTS .................................................. 147 TRANSMISSION OF RIGHTS................................................ 147 REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORDING OF ASSIGNMENT ................. 147 EFFECT OF NON-RECORDING OF ASSIGNMENT WITH THE IPO ..... 147

Trademarks ..........................147 DEFINITION OF MARKS, COLLECTIVE MARKS, TRADE NAMES.......................................................... 147 MARKS ........................................................................ 147 COLLECTIVE MARKS ....................................................... 148 TRADE NAME................................................................ 148 FUNCTIONS OF A TRADEMARK .......................................... 148 ACQUISITION OF OWNERSHIP OF MARK ................. 148 ACQUISITION OF OWNERSHIP OF TRADENAME ...... 148 NON-REGISTRABLE MARKS .................................... 148 DOCTRINE OF SECONDARY MEANING .................................. 149 PRIOR USE OF MARK AS A REQUIREMENT ............. 149 USE OF MARK AS A REQUIREMENT ..................................... 149 NON-USE OF MARK WHEN EXCUSED ................................... 149 TESTS TO DETERMINE CONFUSING SIMILARITY BETWEEN MARKS .................................................... 149 DOMINANCY TEST .......................................................... 149 HOLISTIC TEST .............................................................. 149 AS TO THE GOODS OR SERVICES IN CONNECTION WITH WHICH THE MARKS ARE USED (DODCTRINE OF RELATED GOODS/SERVICES) 149

WELL-KNOWN MARKS ............................................ 149 DETERMINANTS ............................................................ 149 PROTECTION EXTENDED TO WELL-KNOWN MARKS ................. 150 RIGHTS CONFERRED BY A WELL-KNOWN MARK ..................... 150 RIGHTS CONFERRED BY REGISTRATION ................. 150 LIMITATIONS ON SUCH RIGHTS .......................................... 150 ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER OF APPLICATION AND REGISTRATION ....................................................... 150 PROTECTION LIMITED TO GOODS SPECIFIED IN REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE .......................................... 151

USE BY THIRD PARTIES OF NAMES, ETC. SIMILAR TO REGISTERED MARK ............................................. 151 INFRINGEMENT AND REMEDIES .............................. 151 TRADEMARK INFRINGEMENT ............................................. 151 FALSE DESIGNATIONS OF ORIGIN; FALSE DESCRIPTION OR REPRESENTATION ...................................................... 151 INFRINGEMENT OF NAME AND MARKS OF OWNERSHIP STAMP ON CONTAINERS ...................................................152 DAMAGES .....................................................................152 REQUIREMENT OF NOTICE ................................................152 OTHER REMEDIES AVAILABLE ............................................152 LIMITATIONS TO ACTIONS FOR INFRINGEMENT .......................152

UNFAIR COMPETITION ............................................. 153 TRADE NAMES OR BUSINESS NAMES ..................... 154 WHAT MAY NOT BE USED AS TRADE NAME ........................... 154 COLLECTIVE MARKS ................................................ 154 GROUNDS FOR CANCELLATION ......................................... 154

Copyrights ........................... 154 DEFINITION ............................................................. 154 BASIC PRINCIPLES ................................................... 154

COPYRIGHTABLE WORKS ........................................ 155 ORIGINAL LITERARY AND ARTISTIC WORKS ........................... 155 DERIVATIVE WORKS........................................................ 155 NON-COPYRIGHTABLE WORKS................................ 156 UNPROTECTED SUBJECT MATTER ....................................... 156 WORKS OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES................. 156 WORKS OF THE PUBLIC DOMAIN ........................................ 156 USEFUL ARTICLES .......................................................... 156 RIGHTS OF COPYRIGHT OWNER .............................. 156 COPYRIGHT OR ECONOMIC RIGHTS ..................................... 156 MORAL RIGHTS ............................................................. 157 RIGHTS TO PROCEED IN SUBSEQUENT TRANSFER ................... 157 NEIGHBORING RIGHTS ..................................................... 158 PERFORMER’S RIGHTS .................................................... 158 RIGHTS OF PRODUCERS OF SOUND RECORDING ..................... 158 RIGHTS OF BROADCASTING ORGANIZATIONS ........................ 158 RULE ON OWNERSHIP OF COPYRIGHT .................... 159 OWNERSHIP OF COPYRIGHT .............................................. 159 DURATION OF COPYRIGHT ................................................ 160 PRESUMPTION OF AUTHORSHIP ........................................ 160 TRANSFER OR ASSIGNMENT OF COPYRIGHT .......................... 160 LIMITATIONS ON COPYRIGHT ................................... 161 DOCTRINE OF FAIR USE .................................................... 161 COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT ............................................... 161 SPECIAL LAWS

Chattel and Real Estate Mortgage Laws ................... 165 Anti-Money Laundering Act ................... 165 DEFINITION .............................................................. 165 POLICY OF THE LAW ................................................. 165 COVERED INSTITUTIONS ......................................... 165 OBLIGATIONS OF COVERED INSTITUTIONS ............. 165 CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION ............................................. 165 RECORD KEEPING .......................................................... 165 REPORTING OF COVERED AND SUSPICIOUS TRANSACTIONS ...... 165 COVERED TRANSACTIONS ....................................... 166 SUSPICIOUS TRANSACTIONS................................... 166 WHEN IS MONEY LAUNDERING COMMITTED .......... 166 UNLAWFUL ACTIVITIES OR PREDICATE CRIMES...... 166 ANTI-MONEY LAUNDERING COUNCIL...................... 166 FUNCTIONS .............................................................. 166 FREESING OF MONETARY INSTRUMENT OR PROPERTY .......................................................... 167 AUTHORITY TO INQUIRE INTO BANK DEPOSITS ...... 167

Foreign Investments Act .... 167 POLICY OF THE LAW ................................................. 167 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................ 167 FOREIGN INVESTMENT .................................................... 167 DOING BUSINESS IN THE PHILIPPINES .................................. 167 EXPORT ENTERPRISE ...................................................... 168 DOMESTIC MARKET ENTERPRISE........................................ 168 REGISTRATION OF INVESTMENTS ON NON-PHILIPPINE NATIONALS ............................ 168

FOREIGN INVESTMENTS IN EXPORT ENTERPRISE .. 168 FOREIGN INVESTMENTS IN DOMESTIC MARKET ENTERPRISE ....................... 168 FOREIGN INVESTMENT NEGATIVE LIST ................... 168

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

LETTERS OF CREDIT

PAGE 1

BAR OPERATIONS COMMISSION

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

LETTERS OF CREDIT

Definition and Nature


(a) First Contract between the party applying for the L/C (buyer/importer/account party) and the party for whose benefit the L/C is issued (seller/exporter/beneficiary). (b) Second Contract between the buyer and the issuing bank. This contract is sometimes called the "Application and Agreement" or the "Reimbursement Agreement". (c) Third Contract between the issuing bank and the seller, in order to support the contract, under (a) above (Reliance Commodities v. Daewoo, 1993).

DEFINITION Letters of credit (L/C) are those issued by one merchant to another, or for the purpose of attending to a commercial transaction. (Art. 567, Code of Commerce) A letter of credit is one whereby one person requests some other person to advance money or give credit to a third person, and promises that he will repay the same to the person making the advancement, or accept the bills drawn upon himself for the like amount. (Campos, Notes and Selected Cases on Negotiable Instruments Law)

TYPES OF LETTERS OF CREDIT AS TO THE TYPE OF THE MAIN CONTRACT

(1) Commercial L/C – The main transaction involves a contract of sale. The credit is payable upon the presentation by the seller of documents that show he has taken affirmative steps to comply with the sales agreement. The beneficiary of a commercial credit must demonstrate by documents that he has performed his contract (Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004). (2) Standby L/C – Used in non-sale settings. The credit is payable upon certification of a party's nonperformance of the agreement. The creditor-beneficiary of the standby credit must certify that the debtor-applicant has not performed the principal obligation. (Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004).

A written instrument whereby the writer requests or authorizes the addressee to pay money or deliver goods to a third person and assumes responsibility for payment of debt therefor to the addressee (Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004). An engagement by a bank or other person made at the request of a customer that the issuer shall honor drafts or other demands of payment upon compliance with the conditions specified in the credit (Prudential Bank v. Intermediate Appellate Court, 1992). PURPOSE Its purpose is to substitute for, and support, the agreement of the buyer-importer to pay money under a contract or other arrangement, but does not necessarily constitute as a condition for the perfection of such arrangement (Reliance Commodities, Inc. v. Daewoo Industrial Co., Ltd., 1993)

AS TO REVOCABILITY

ESSENTIAL REQUISITES OF LETTERS OF CREDIT (1) Issued in favor of a definite person and not to order. (2) Limited to a fixed and specified amount, or to one or more undetermined amounts, but within a maximum the limits of which has to be stated exactly.

AS TO THE OBLIGATION ASSUMED BY CORRESPONDENT BANK

(1) Revocable L/C – One which can be revoked by the issuing bank without the consent of the buyer and seller (2) Irrevocable L/C – One which the issuing bank cannot revoke without the consent of the buyer and seller (Feati Bank and Trust Co. v. CA, 1991) (1) Unconfirmed L/C – One which continues to be the obligation of the issuing bank (2) Confirmed L/C – One which is supported by the absolute assurance to the beneficiary that the confirming bank will undertake the issuing bank's obligation as its own according to the terms and conditions of the credit (Feati Bank and Trust Co. v. CA, 1991)

Those which do not have one of these conditions shall be mere letters of recommendation. (Art. 568, Code of Commerce) NATURE (1) Financial device – L/Cs are developed by merchants as a convenient and relatively safe mode of dealing with sales of goods to satisfy the seemingly irreconcilable interests of a seller, who refuses to part with his goods before he is paid, and a buyer, who wants to have control of the goods before paying. (Bank of America, NT&SA v. Court of Appeals, 1993)

Parties to a Letter of Credit RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES There are at least three parties to a letter of credit: (1) Buyer/Exporter/Account Party – one who procures the letter of credit and obliges himself to reimburse the issuing bank upon receipt of documents of title. (2) Issuing Bank – the bank which undertakes: (a) to pay the seller upon receipt of the draft and proper documents of title; and (b) to surrender the documents to the buyer upon reimbursement.

A letter of credit is one of the modes of payment, set out in Sec. 8, Central Bank Circular No. 1389, "Consolidated Foreign Exchange Rules and Regulations," dated 13 April 1993, by which commercial banks sell foreign exchange to service payments for, e.g., commodity imports (Reliance Commodities v. Daewoo, 1993).

The obligation of the issuing bank to pay the seller is direct, primary, absolute, definite and solidary with the buyer, in the absence of stipulation in the letter of credit (MWSS v. Daway, 2004)

(2) Composite of three distinct contracts – An L/C transaction involves three distinct but intertwined relationships: PAGE 2

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

LETTERS OF CREDIT

(3) Seller/Importer/Beneficiary – one who ships the goods to the buyer in compliance with a contract of sale and delivers the documents of title and draft to the issuing bank to recover payment.


the documents or superimposed thereon, nor do they assume any liability or responsibility for the description, quantity, weight, quality, condition, packing, delivery, value or existence of the goods represented by any documents, or for the good faith or acts and/or omissions, solvency, performance or standing of the consignor, the carriers, or the insurers of the goods, or any other person whomsoever (Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004; Bank of America, NT&SA v. Court of Appeals, 1993).

Depending on the transaction, the number of parties to the letter of credit may be increased. Thus, the different types of correspondent banks: (4) Advising/Notifying Bank – the bank which conveys to the seller the existence of the credit.

The concept of guarantee vis-a-vis the concept of an irrevocable credit are inconsistent with each other. In the first place, the guarantee theory destroys the independence of the bank's responsibility from the contract upon which it was opened. In the second place, the nature of both contracts is mutually in conflict with each other. In contracts of guarantee, the guarantor's obligation is merely collateral and it arises only upon the default of the person primarily liable. On the other hand, in an irrevocable credit the bank undertakes a primary obligation. (Feati v. CA, 1991)

The bank assumes no liability except to notify and/or transmit to the seller the existence of the letter of credit. A notifying bank is not a privy to the contract of sale between the buyer and the seller, its relationship is only with that of the issuing bank and not with the beneficiary to whom he assumes no liability. The bank may suggest to the seller its willingness to negotiate, but this fact alone does not imply that the notifying bank promises to accept the draft drawn under the documentary credit (Feati Bank and Trust Co. v. CA, 1991).

The independent nature of the letter of credit may be: (1) Independent in toto - the credit is independent from the justification aspect and is a separate obligation from the underlying agreement; (2) Only as to the justification aspect like in a commercial letter of credit or repayment standby, which is identical with the same obligations under the underlying agreement. (Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004; Bank of America, NT&SA v. Court of Appeals, 1993).

(5) Confirming Bank – the bank which lends credence to the letter of credit issued by a lesser known issuing bank. The bank assumes a direct obligation to the seller and its liability is a primary one as if the bank itself had issued the letter of credit (Feati Bank and Trust Co. v. CA, 1991).

FRAUD EXCEPTION PRINCIPLE The principle that limits the application of the independence principle only to instances where it would serve the commercial function of the credit and not when fraud attends the transaction.

(6) Negotiating Bank – the bank which discounts the draft presented by the seller. The bank buys or discounts a draft under the letter of credit. Its liability is dependent upon the stage of the negotiation. If before negotiation, it has no liability with respect to the seller but after negotiation, a contractual relationship will then prevail between the negotiating bank and the seller (Feati Bank and Trust Co. v. CA, 1991).

In the case of Transfield Philippines v. Luzon Hydro, 2004, the petitioner alleged misrepresentation as constituting fraud. The Court, however, made no ruling as to whether the same indeed constitutes fraud. The case asserts that the "fraud exception" exists when the beneficiary, for the purpose of drawing on the credit, fraudulently presents to the confirming bank, documents that contain, expressly or by implication, material representations of fact that to his knowledge are untrue. In such a situation, petitioner insists, injunction is recognized as a remedy available to it.

(7) Paying Bank – the bank which undertakes to encash the drafts drawn by the seller.

Basic Principles of Letter of Credit

Citing Dolan's treatise on letters of credit, petitioner argues that the independence principle is not without limits and it is important to fashion those limits in light of the principle's purpose, which is to serve the commercial function of the credit. If it does not serve those functions, application of the principle is not warranted, and the common law principles of contract should apply. (Transfield Phils. v. Luzon Hydro, 2004)

DOCTRINE OF INDEPENDENCE The principle of independence assures the seller or the beneficiary of prompt payment independent of any breach of the main contract and precludes the issuing bank from determining whether the main contract is actually accomplished or not.

DOCTRINE OF STRICT COMPLIANCE The settled rule in commercial transactions involving letters of credit requires that the documents tendered by the seller must strictly conform to the terms of the letter of credit.

Under this principle, banks assume no liability or responsibility for the form, sufficiency, accuracy, genuineness, falsification or legal effect of any documents, or for the general and/or particular conditions stipulated in PAGE 3

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

LETTERS OF CREDIT

Otherwise, the issuing bank or the concerned correspondent bank is not obliged to perform its undertaking under the contract. The tender of documents by the beneficiary (seller) must include all documents required by the letter. A correspondent bank which departs from what has been stipulated under the letter of credit, as when it accepts a faulty tender, acts on its own risks and it may not thereafter be able to recover from the buyer or the issuing bank, as the case may be, the money thus paid to the beneficiary (Feati v. CA, 1991).

PAGE 4


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRUST RECEIPTS LAW

PAGE 5


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRUST RECEIPTS LAW

Concept of Trust Receipt Transaction


entruster and includes title, whether or not expressed to be absolute, whenever such title is in substance taken or retained for security only. “Accordingly, in order to secure that the banker shall be repaid at the critical point — that is, when the imported goods finally reach the hands of the intended vendee — the banker takes the full title to the goods at the very beginning; he takes it as soon as the goods are bought and settled for by his payments or acceptances in the foreign country, and he continues to hold that title as his indispensable security until the goods are sold.”

A Trust Receipt Transaction is any transaction by and between an entruster and another person as entrustee, whereby the entruster, who owns or holds absolute title or security interests over certain specified goods, documents or instruments, releases the same to the possession of the entrustee upon the latter's execution and delivery to the entruster of a signed document called a trust receipt [Sec. 4, PD 115 (Trust Receipts Law)].

“[I]n a certain manner, (trust receipt contracts) partake of the nature of a conditional sale as provided by the Chattel Mortgage Law, that is, the importer becomes absolute owner of the imported merchandise as soon as he has paid its price. The ownership of the merchandise continues to be vested in the owner thereof or in the person who has advanced payment, until he has been paid in full, or if the merchandise has already been sold, the proceeds of the sale should be turned over to him by the importer or by his representative or successor in interest.” (Prudential Bank v. NLRC, 1995)

A Trust Receipt is a written or printed document signed by the entruster wherein the entrustee binds himself: (1) to hold the designated goods, documents or instruments in trust for the entruster; and (2) to sell or otherwise dispose of the goods, documents or instruments with the obligation to turn over to the entruster the proceeds thereof to the extent of the amount owing to the entruster or as appears in the trust receipt or the goods, documents or instruments themselves if they are unsold or not otherwise disposed of, in accordance with the terms and conditions specified in the trust receipt (Sec. 4)

Note: In the earlier cases of Vintola v. IBAA (1987) and Abad v. Court of Appeals (1990), the Supreme Court held that the entrustee becomes the absolute owner of the goods, documents and instruments, the entruster being a mere security holder.

LOAN/SECURITY FEATURE A letter of credit-trust receipt arrangement is endowed with its own distinctive features and characteristics. Under that set-up, a bank extends a loan covered by the letter of credit, with the trust receipt as a security for the loan. In other words, the transaction involves a loan feature represented by the letter of credit, and a security feature which is in the covering trust receipt. A trust receipt, therefore, is a security agreement, pursuant to which a bank acquires a "security interest" in the goods (Vintola v. IBAA, 1987)

Rights of the Entruster VALIDITY OF THE SECURITY INTEREST AS AGAINST THE CREDITORS OF THE ENTRUSTEE/ INNOCENT PURCHASERS FOR VALUE The entruster shall have the following rights: (1a) Right to the proceeds from the sale of the goods, documents or instruments released under a trust receipt to the entrustee to the extent of the amount owing to the entruster or as appears in the trust receipt; OR (1b) Right to the return of the goods, documents or instruments in case of non-sale; AND (2) Right to the enforcement of all other rights conferred on him in the trust receipt provided such are not contrary to the provisions of the TRL. (3) Right to cancel the trust and take possession of the goods, documents or instruments subject of the trust or of the proceeds realized therefrom at any time upon default or failure of the entrustee to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the trust receipt or any other agreement between the entruster and the entrustee. (4) Right to sell the goods, documents or instruments at public or private sale at least five days notice to the defaulting entrustee of the intention to sell. (5) Right to purchase the goods, documents or instruments at a public sale. (6) Right to recover the deficiency from the entrustee should the proceeds of the sale not be sufficient (Sec. 7)

A trust receipt arrangement does not involve a simple loan transaction between a creditor and debtor-importer. Apart from a loan feature, the trust receipt arrangement has a security feature that is covered by the trust receipt itself. That second feature is what provides the much needed financial assistance to our traders in the importation or purchase of goods or merchandise through the use of those goods or merchandise as collateral for the advancements made by a bank. The title of the bank to the security is the one sought to be protected and not the loan which is a separate and distinct agreement (People v. Nitafan, 1992) OWNERSHIP OF THE GOODS, DOCUMENTS AND INSTRUMENTS UNDER A TRUST RECEIPT Entrustee is the factual owner of the goods, documents and instruments (Prudential Bank v. NLRC). Entruster is the real owner of the goods, documents and instruments “A trust receipt transaction, within the meaning of this Decree, is any transaction…whereby the entruster, who owns or holds absolute title or security interests over certain specified goods, documents or instruments...” (Sec. 4) Note: “Security Interest” means a property interest in goods, documents or instruments to secure performance of some obligations of the entrustee or of some third persons to the PAGE 6

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRUST RECEIPTS LAW

Obligation and Liability of the Entrustee


(2) In case of loss of the goods, documents, instruments Entruster may claim damages from the entrustee (Sec.10) (3) In case of failure to turn over proceeds of the sale of the goods, documents or instruments or to return the same in case of non-sale - Entruster may file a criminal complaint for estafa (Art. 315 (b) of the Revised Penal Code) against the entrustee (Sec. 13)

OBLIGATIONS OF THE ENTRUSTEE (1) To hold the goods, documents or instruments in trust for the entruster and shall dispose of them strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the trust receipt; (2) To receive the proceeds in trust for the entruster and turn over the same to the entruster to the extent of the amount owing to the entruster or as appears on the trust receipt; (3) To insure the goods for their total value against loss from fire, theft, pilferage or other casualties; (4) To keep said goods or proceeds thereof whether in money or whatever form, separate and capable of identification as property of the entruster; (5) To return the goods, documents or instruments in the event of non-sale or upon demand of the entruster; and (6) To observe all other terms and conditions of the trust receipt not contrary to the provisions of the TRL. (Sec. 9)

Warehouseman’s Lien A warehouseman shall have a lien on goods deposited or on the proceeds thereof in his hands: (1) For all lawful charges for storage and preservation of the goods; (2) For all lawful claims for money advanced, interest, insurance, transportation, labor, weighing, coopering and other charges and expenses in relation to such goods; (3) For all reasonable charges and expenses for notice, and advertisements of sale; and (4) For sale of the goods where default had been made in satisfying the warehouseman's lien (Sec. 27)

LIABILITIES OF THE ENTRUSTEE (1) Liability for Loss - The risk of loss shall be borne by the entrustee. Loss of goods, documents or instruments which are the subject of a trust receipt, pending their disposition, irrespective of whether or not it was due to the fault or negligence of the entrustee, shall not extinguish his obligation to the entruster for the value thereof (Sec. 10) (2) Liability for failure to turn over proceeds of sale or to return – The failure shall constitute the crime of estafa, punishable under Art. 315 (b) of the Revised Penal Code (Sec. 13)

Notes: (1) General rule: A warehouseman shall have lien only for charges for storage of goods subsequent to the date of the receipt. (2) Exception: When the receipt expressly enumerated other charges provided under Sec. 27 even though the amounts thereof are not stated in the receipt. (Sec. 30) However, whether a warehouseman has or has not a lien upon the goods, he is entitled to all remedies allowed by law to a creditor against a debtor for the collection from the depositor of all charges and advances which the depositor has expressly or impliedly contracted with the warehouseman to pay (Sec. 32).

Note: Penal sanction if offender is a corporation: If the violation or offense is committed by a corporation, partnership, association or other juridical entities, the penalty shall be imposed upon the directors, officers, employees or other officials or persons therein responsible for the offense, without prejudice to the civil liabilities arising from the criminal offense (Sec. 13)

(1) Against what property the lien may be enforced: (a) Against all goods, whenever deposited, belonging to the person who is liable as debtor for the claims in regard to which the lien is asserted, and (b) Against all goods belonging to others which have been deposited at any time by the person who is liable as debtor for the claims in regard to which the lien is asserted if such person had been so entrusted with the possession of goods that a pledge of the same by him at the time of the deposit to one who took the goods in good faith for value would have been valid (Sec. 28)

Remedies Available (1) In case of default or failure of the entrustee to comply with the trust receipt agreement - Entruster may cancel the trust receipt agreement, take possession of the goods, documents, instruments, and sell the same at any private or public sale at least five days from notice of intention to sell to the entrustee.

(2) Satisfaction of the lien by sale: In accordance with the terms of a notice so given, a sale of the goods by auction may be had to satisfy any valid claim of the warehouseman for which he has a lien on the goods.

The proceeds of any such sale, whether public or private, shall be applied (a) to the payment of the expenses thereof; (b) to the payment of the expenses of re-taking, keeping and storing the goods, documents or instruments; (c) to the satisfaction of the entrustee's indebtedness to the entruster (Sec. 7) PAGE 7

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS LAW

PAGE 8


UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Definition


One who signs in a trade or assumed name will be liable to the same extent as if he had signed in his own name (Sec. 18).

Written contract for the payment of money, by its form and on its face, intended as substitute for money and intended to pass from hand to hand to give the holder in due course (HDC) the right to hold the same and collect the sum due.

Signature of any party may be made by duly authorized agent; no particular form of appointment necessary (Sec. 19) "In writing" - includes print; written or typed. Section 191 of the NIL provides that the word “’written’ includes printed, and ‘writing’ includes print.”

Instruments are negotiable when they conform to all the requirements prescribed by the NIL (Act 2031, 03 February 1911).

Reason: Since an instrument is a document, there must be something in written form that can be transferred from person to person. (Abad)

Although considered as medium for payment of obligations, negotiable instruments are not legal tender (Sec. 60, New Central Bank Act, R.A. 7653).

Signature is binding and may be in one’s handwriting, printed, engraved, lithographed or photographed so long as it is intended or adopted as the signature of the signer or made with his authority.

Q: Can the delivery of a negotiable instrument discharge an obligation? A: Settled is the rule that payment must be made in legal tender. A check is not legal tender and, therefore, cannot constitute a valid tender of payment. Since a negotiable instrument is only a substitute for money and not money, the delivery of such an instrument does not, by itself, operate as payment. Mere delivery of checks does not discharge the obligation under a judgment. The obligation is not extinguished and remains suspended until the payment by commercial document is actually realized. (BPI vs. Royeca, 2008, Nachura)

It may appear on any part of the instrument. However, if the signature is so placed upon the instrument that it is not clear in what capacity the person intended to sign, he is deemed an indorser. (Sec. 17[f]) CONTAINING AN UNCONDITIONAL PROMISE TO PAY OR ORDER TO PAY

An unqualified order or promise to pay is unconditional, though coupled with: (1) An indication of a particular fund out of which reimbursement is to be made, or a particular account to be debited with the amount; or (2) A statement of the transaction which gives rise to the instrument.

Notes: (1) Negotiable instruments shall produce the effect of payment only when they have been encashed or when through the fault of the creditor they have been impaired. (Art. 1249, Civil Code) (2) BUT a CHECK which has been cleared and credited to the account of the creditor shall be equivalent to a delivery to the creditor of cash.

But an order or promise to pay out of a particular fund is not unconditional (Sec. 3). Unconditional The promise or order to pay, to be unconditional, must be unqualified.

Forms and Interpretation

Must not be dependent upon a contingent event that is not certain to happen. (Abad)

REQUISITES OF NEGOTIABILITY An instrument to be negotiable must conform to the following requirements: (1) It must be in writing and signed by the maker or drawer; (2) Must contain an unconditional promise or order to pay a sum certain in money; (3) Must be payable on demand, or at a fixed or determinable future time; (4) Must be payable to order or to bearer; and (5) Where the instrument is addressed to a drawee, he must be named or otherwise indicated therein with reasonable certainty (Sec. 1).

Fact that the condition appearing on the instrument has been fulfilled will not convert it into a negotiable one (see Sec. 4) A negotiable instrument is conditional when reference to the fund clearly indicates an intention that such fund alone should be the source of payment. (Metropolitan Bank vs. CA, 1991) Fund for Reimbursement

Section 184 (defining a promissory note) and Section 126 (defining a bill of exchange) contain the same requisites in Section 1.

Indicating a Particular Fund (non-negotiable)

(1) The drawee pays the There is only one act —the payee from his own funds drawee pays directly from afterwards. the particular fund indicated. (2) The drawee pays himself from the particular fund indicated.

IN WRITING AND SIGNED BY THE MAKER OR DRAWER

No person is liable on the instrument whose signature does not appear thereon. PAGE 9

UP COLLEGE OF LAW



Particular fund indicated is Particular fund indicated is not the direct source of the direct source of payment. payment. (Sundiang and Aquino)

Negotiable: If the option to require something to be done in lieu of payment of money is with the holder

Order or promise to pay As to promissory note: Promise to pay should be express on the face of the instrument

Purpose: to inform the holder of the instrument of the date when he may enforce payment thereof.

PAYABLE ON DEMAND OR AT FIXED OR DETERMINABLE TIME

On demand: An instrument is payable on demand: (1) Where it is expressed to be payable on demand, or at sight, or on presentation; or (2) In which no time for payment is expressed.

The word "promise" is not absolutely necessary. Any expression equivalent to a promise is sufficient. Mere acknowledgment of a debt is insufficient

Where an instrument is issued, accepted, or indorsed when overdue, it is, as regards the person so issuing, accepting, or indorsing it, payable on demand (Sec. 7).

As to bill of exchange: Order – command made by the drawer addressed to the drawee ordering the latter to pay the payee or the holder a sum certain in money; the instrument is, by its nature, demanding a right.

Note: Holder may call for payment any time; maker has an option to pay at any time, and the refusal of the holder to accept payment will terminate the running of interest, if any, but the obligation to pay the note remains.

Words which are equivalent to an order are sufficient. A mere request or authority to pay does not constitute an order. Although the mere use of polite words like "please" does not of itself deprive the instrument of its characteristics as an order, its language must clearly indicate a demand upon the drawee to pay.

At a fixed time: Only on the stipulated date, and not before, may the holder demand its payment. Should he fail to demand payment, the instrument becomes overdue but remains valid and negotiable. It is merely converted to a demand instrument with respect to the person who issued, accepted, or indorsed it when overdue. (Sec. 7)

Sum payable must be certain The sum payable is a sum certain, although it is to be paid: (1) with interest; or (2) by stated installments; or (3) by stated installments, with a provision that, upon default in payment of any installment or of interest, the whole shall become due; or (4) with exchange, whether at a fixed rate or at the current rate; or (5) with costs of collection or an attorney's fee, in case payment shall not be made at maturity (Sec. 2).

At a determinable future time: An instrument is payable at a determinable future time, which is expressed to be payable: (1) At a fixed period after date or sight; or (2) On or before a fixed or determinable future time specified therein; or (3) On or at a fixed period after the occurrence of a specified event which is certain to happen, though the time of happening be uncertain.

Note: A sum is certain if from the face of the instrument it can be determined even if it requires mathematical computation. (Sundiang and Aquino)

An instrument payable upon a contingency is not negotiable, and the happening of the event does not cure the defect (Sec. 4).

Payable in money Capable of being transformed into money, since negotiable instruments are intended to be substitutes for money

Note: Requires that the maturity of the instrument can be absolutely determined with certainty. (Abad) Examples: At a fixed period after date or sight, e.g., “30 days after date.”

“Money” as used in the law is not necessarily limited to “legal tender” as defined by law but includes any particular kind of current money. (see, Sec. 6(e) and PNB v. Zulueta)

On or before a fixed or determinable future time specified therein, e.g., “payable on or before December 1, 2000”

An agreement to pay in foreign currency is valid. (RA 8183)

On or at a fixed period after the occurrence of a specified event which is certain to happen, though the time of happening be uncertain, e.g., “payable within 60 days after the death of Jose”

Non-negotiable: An instrument which contains an order or promise to do an act in addition to the payment of money (with the exception of certain acts enumerated in Sec. 5) Payable in personal property like merchandise, shares of stock or gold.

Effect of acceleration provisions: If option (absolute or conditional) to accelerate maturity is on the maker, still NEGOTIABLE.

Maker or the person primarily liable has the option to require something to be done in lieu of payment of money. (Campos) PAGE 10

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


If option to accelerate is on the holder and can be exercised only after the happening of a specified event/act over which he has no control (conditional), still NEGOTIABLE


Fictitious payee rule: It is not necessary that the person referred to in the instrument is really non-existent or fictitious to make the instrument payable to bearer. The person to whose order the instrument is made payable may in fact be existing but he is still fictitious or non-existent under Sec. 9(c) of the NIL if the person making it so payable does not intend to pay the specified persons.

Note: If option is absolute, non-negotiable. Insecurity Clauses: Provisions in the contract which allow the holder to accelerate payment “if he deems himself insecure.” The instrument is rendered non-negotiable. (Sundiang and Aquino)

A check drawn payable to the order of cash is a check payable to bearer, and the bank may pay it to the person presenting it for payment without the drawer's indorsement. (Ang Tek Lian vs. CA, 1950)

Provisions extending time of payment: General rule: Negotiability not affected. Effect is similar with that of an acceleration clause at the option of the maker.

Payable to order: The instrument is payable to order where it is drawn payable to the order of a specified person or to him or his order. It may be drawn payable to the order of: (1) A payee who is not maker, drawer, or drawee; or (2) The drawer or maker; or (3) The drawee; or (4) Two or more payees jointly; or (5) One or some of several payees; or (6) The holder of an office for the time being.

Exception: Where a note with a fixed maturity provides that the maker has the option to extend time of payment until the happening of contingency, the instrument is NOT negotiable. The time for payment may never come at all. PAYABLE TO ORDER OR TO BEARER (ASKED IN 1998)

Must contain words of negotiability: For example: (1) “Pay to the order of Juan Cruz”, or “I promise to pay to the order of Juan Cruz” (2) “Pay to Juan Cruz or order”, or “I promise to pay Juan Cruz or order”

Where the instrument is payable to order, the payee must be named or otherwise indicated therein with reasonable certainty (Sec. 8).

Note: Need not follow the language of the law, but any term which clearly indicates an intention to conform to the legal requirements is sufficient.

Notes: Without the words "to order" or "to the order of" the instrument is payable only to the person designated therein and is therefore non-negotiable. (Consolidated Plywood Industries vs. IFC Leasing, 1987)

Negotiability determined from the face of the instrument: The negotiability or non-negotiability of an instrument is determined from the face of the instrument itself. Where words "or bearer" printed on a check are cancelled by the drawer, instrument becomes not negotiable. (Caltex vs. CA, 1992)

For order instruments - negotiation requires delivery and indorsement of the transferor. (Sec. 30) Where the maker is the payee: (1) In effect making himself liable to himself. Thus, the instrument produces no legal effect. (2) Will produce legal effects only once the payee-maker indorses the instrument to another person because such indorsement will then give rise to rights and obligations. (Abad)

Payable to bearer: The instrument is payable to bearer: (1) When it is expressed to be so payable; or (2) When it is payable to a person named therein or bearer; or (3) When it is payable to the order of a fictitious or nonexisting person, and such fact was known to the person making it so payable; or (4) When the name of the payee does not purport to be the name of any person; or (5) When the only or last indorsement is an indorsement in blank (Sec. 9).

IF BILL OF EXCHANGE, DRAWEE MUST BE NAMED OR DESIGNATED WITH REASONABLE CERTAINTY

(1) Applies only to bill of exchange (2) A bill may be addressed to 2 or more drawees jointly whether they are partners or not, but not to 2 or more drawees in the alternative or in succession (Sec. 128).

Examples: (1) Expressed to be so payable - "I promise to pay the bearer the sum" (2) Payable to a person named therein or bearer -"Pay to A or bearer" (3) Payable to the order of a fictitious person or nonexisting person, and such fact was known to the person making it so payable - “Pay to John Doe or order" (4) Name of payee does not purport to be the name of any person – "Pay to cash"; "Pay to sundries." (5) Only or last indorsement is an indorsement in blank.

Examples: (1) “To Juan Cruz and Jose Reyes” – negotiable (2) “To Juan Cruz or Jose Reyes” – not negotiable; no certainty as to drawee Determination of negotiability: In determining the negotiability of an instrument, the instrument in its entirety and by what appears on its face must be considered. It must comply with the requirements of Sec. 1 of the Negotiable Instruments Law. (Caltex Phils. v. CA, 1992) The acceptance of a bill of exchange is not important in the determination of its negotiability. The nature of acceptance

Note: May be negotiated by mere delivery PAGE 11

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


is important only on the determination of the kind of liabilities of the parties involved. (PBCOM vs. Aruego, 1993) Omissions and Provisions That Do Not Affect Negotiability

Additional Provisions That Do Not Affect Negotiability

(1) Non-dating of the instrument (2) Non-specification of value given, or that any value had been given (3) Non-specification of place where it is drawn or place where it is payable (4) Bears a seal (5) Designation of particular kind of currency in which payment is to be made. (Sec. 6)

(1) Authorizes the sale of collateral securities on default; (2) Authorizes confession of judgment on default; (3) Waives the benefit of law intended to protect the debtor; or (4) Allows the creditor the option to require something in lieu of money. (Sec. 5)


KINDS OF BILLS OF EXCHANGE

(1) Draft – used synonymously with bill of exchange although it normally refers to a bill of exchange used in documentary exchange like letters of credit transactions. (2) Inland and foreign bill – an Inland bill is a bill which is, or on its face purports to be, both drawn and payable within the Philippines. Any other bill is a foreign bill. (3) Time draft – draft that is payable at a fixed date. (4) Sight or demand draft – payable when the holder presents it for payment. (5) Trade acceptance – used in contracts of sale where the seller as drawer orders the buyer (as drawee) to pay a sum certain to the same seller (payee). (6) Banker’s acceptance – a time draft across the face which the drawee has written the word accepted. (Sundiang and Aquino) (7) Check - A bill of exchange drawn on a bank payable on demand (Sec. 185). It is the most common form of bill of exchange.

Note: Negotiability is affected when instrument contains a promise or order to do any act in addition to the payment of money.

Instances when a bill of exchange may be treated as a promissory note: (1) The drawer and the drawee are the same person; (2) Drawee is a fictitious person; (3) Drawee does NOT have the capacity to contract (Sec. 130) (4) Where the bill is drawn on a person who is legally absent; (5) Where the instrument is so ambiguous that there is doubt whether it is a bill or note, the holder may treat it as either at his election (Sec. 17[e])

Kinds of Negotiable Instruments PROMISSORY NOTE (Sec. 184) (1) An unconditional promise in writing (2) Made by one person to another (3) Signed by the maker (4) Engaging to pay on demand, or at a fixed or determinable future time (5) A sum certain in money to order or to bearer (6) Where a note is drawn to the maker's own order, it is not complete until indorsed by him.

Promissory Note

Bill of Exchange

Unconditional promise

Unconditional order

Involves 2 parties

Involves 3 parties

Maker is primarily liable

Drawer is only secondarily liable

Only one presentment: for Two presentments: for payment acceptance and for payment

KINDS OF PROMISSORY NOTES

Bill of Exchange

(1) Certificate of deposit – a form of promissory note which is a written acknowledgment of a bank of its receipt of a certain sum with a promise to repay the same. (2) Bonds – a certificate or evidence of a debt on which the issuing company or governmental body promises to pay the bondholders a specified amount of interest for a specified length of time, and to repay the loan on the expiration date. (3) Debenture – a promissory note or bond backed by the general credit of a corporation and usually not secured by a mortgage or lien on any specific property. (Sundiang and Aquino)

Check

Not necessarily drawn on It is necessary that a check a deposit. The drawee need be drawn on a bank deposit. not be a bank Otherwise, there would be fraud. Death of a drawer of a BOE, with the knowledge of the bank, does not revoke the authority of the drawee to pay.

Death of the drawer of a check, with the knowledge of the bank, revokes the authority of the banker to pay.

May be presented for Must be presented for payment within reasonable payment within a reasonable time after its last negotiation. time after its issue.

BILL OF EXCHANGE (Sec. 126) (1) An unconditional order in writing (2) Addressed by one person to another (3) Signed by the person giving it (4) Requiring the person to whom it is addressed to pay on demand or at a fixed or determinable future time (5) A sum certain in money to order or to bearer

May be payable on demand Always payable on demand or at a fixed or determinable future time

PAGE 12

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Completion and Delivery


COMPLETE AND UNDELIVERED INSTRUMENTS (Sec. 16) Every contract on a negotiable instrument is incomplete and revocable until delivery of the instrument for the purpose of giving effect thereto.

Two steps involved in the execution of negotiable instruments (1) Writing of the instrument completely in accordance with the requisites of negotiability under Sec. 1. (2) Delivery of the instrument by the maker or the drawer to the payee in order to give legal effect thereto. (Abad)

Between immediate parties and as regards a remote party other than a holder in due course, the delivery, in order to be effectual, must be made either by or under the authority of the party making, drawing, accepting, or indorsing.

INSERTION OF DATE (Sec. 13) Any holder may insert the true date of issue or acceptance of an instrument where: (1) The instrument is expressed to be payable at a fixed period after date is issued undated; or (2) The acceptance of an instrument payable at a fixed period after sight is undated.

When the instrument is in the hands of HDC, a valid delivery thereof by all parties prior to him so as to make them liable to him is conclusively presumed. INCOMPLETE AND DELIVERED INSTRUMENTS (Sec. 14) (1) Holder has prima facie authority to fill up the instrument. (2) The instrument must be filled up strictly in accordance with the authority given and within reasonable time (3) HDC may enforce the instrument as if filled up according to (2) above.

The insertion of a wrong date does not avoid the instrument in the hands of a subsequent holder in due course; but as to him, the date so inserted is to be regarded as the true date. The instrument is not invalid for the reason only that it is ante-dated or post-dated, provided this is not done for an illegal or fraudulent purpose. The person to whom an instrument so dated is delivered acquires the title thereto as of the date of delivery (Sec. 12).

Signature

COMPLETION OF BLANKS (Sec. 14) Where the instrument is wanting in any material particular, the person in possession thereof has a prima facie authority to complete it by filling up the blanks therein.

General rule: One whose signature does not appear on the instrument shall not be liable thereon. Exceptions: (1) The principal who signs through an agent (2) The forger (3) One who indorses in a separate instrument (allonge) OR where an acceptance is written on a separate paper (4) One who signs his assumed or trade name (5) A person negotiating by delivery (as in the case of a bearer instrument) is liable to his immediate indorsee.

A signature on a blank paper delivered by the person making the signature in order that the paper may be converted into a negotiable instrument operates as a prima facie authority to fill it up as such for any amount. For such instrument to be enforceable against any person who became a party thereto prior to its completion, it must be filled up strictly in accordance with the authority given and within a reasonable time.

SIGNING IN TRADE NAME One who signs in a trade or assumed name will be liable to the same extent as if he had signed in his own name (Sec. 18)

When subsequently negotiated to a holder in due course (HDC), there is a presumption that such instrument is filled up strictly in accordance with the authority given and within reasonable time.

SIGNATURE OF AGENT Signature of any party may be made by duly authorized agent, established as in ordinary agency.

INCOMPLETE AND UNDELIVERED INSTRUMENTS (Sec. 15) Where an incomplete instrument has not been delivered, it will not be a valid contract in the hands of any holder, as against any person whose signature was placed thereon before delivery if completed and negotiated without authority. Non-delivery of an incomplete instrument is a real defense.

SIGNATURE PER PROCURATION

Operates as notice that the agent has limited authority to sign, and the principal is bound only in case the agent in so signing acted within the actual limits of his authority (Sec. 21) LIABILITY

Note: A drawee bank whose negligent custody of the checks, after partial execution, contributed to its escape, is stopped from raising the real defense under Sec. 15.

General rule: Where a person adds to his signature words indicating that he signs on behalf of a principal, then he is not liable if he was duly authorized.

PAGE 13

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Exceptions: (1) Mere addition of words describing him as an agent without disclosing his principal (Sec. 20) (2) Where a broker or agent negotiates an instrument without indorsement, he incurs all liabilities in Sec. 65, unless he discloses name of principal and the fact that he is only acting as an agent. (Sec. 69)


General rule: When a signature is forged or made without the authority of the person, only the forged signature (not the instrument itself and the other genuine signatures) is wholly inoperative Effects: (1) No right to retain the instrument (2) No right to give a discharge therefor (3) No right to enforce payment thereof against any party thereto can be acquired through or under such signature

INDORSEMENT BY MINOR OR CORPORATION The indorsement or assignment of the instrument by a corporation or by an infant (minor) passes the property therein, notwithstanding that from want of capacity, the corporation or infant may incur no liability thereon (Sec. 22).

Exception: The party against whom it is sought to be enforced is precluded from setting up the forgery or want of authority as a defense (Sec. 23).

REAL defense but available only to the incapacitated party (i.e. the minor or the corporation).

PERSONS PRECLUDED FROM SETTING UP DEFENSE OF FORGERY

FORGERY Counterfeit making or fraudulent alteration of any writing, which may consist of: (1) Signing of another’s name with intent to defraud; or (2) Alteration of an instrument in the name, amount, name of payee, etc. with intent to defraud.

(1) Those who warrant or admit the genuineness of the signature in question. This includes indorsers, persons negotiating by delivery and acceptors. (2) Those who, by their acts, silence, or negligence, are estopped from setting up the defense of forgery.

RULES ON FORGERY

Promissory note Order Instrument

Bearer Instrument

Maker’s signature forged

(1) Maker is not liable because he never (1) Maker is not liable. became a party to the instrument. (2) Indorsers may be made liable to those (2) Indorsers subsequent to forgery are persons who obtain title through their liable because of their warranties. indorsements. (3) Party who made the forgery is liable. (3) Party who made the forgery is liable.

Payee’s signature forged

(1) Maker and payee are not liable. (1) Maker is liable. (REASON: Indorsement is (2) Indorsers subsequent to forgery are not necessary to title and the maker liable. engages to pay holder) (3) Party who made the forgery is liable. (2) Party who made the forgery is liable

Indorser’s signature forged

(1) Maker, payee, indorser whose (1) Maker is liable. signature/s was/were forged, and all (2) Indorser whose signature was forged is not indorsers preceding the forgery are not liable to one who is not a HDC provided the liable. instrument is mechanically complete before (2) Indorsers subsequent to forgery are the forgery. liable. (3) Party who made the forgery is liable. (3) Party who made the forgery is liable.

Bill of exchange Order Instrument Drawer’s signature forged

Bearer Instrument

(1) Drawer is not liable because he was (1) Drawer is not liable. never a party to the instrument. (2) Drawee is liable if it paid. Drawee cannot (2) Drawee is liable if it paid (no recourse to recover from the collecting bank. drawer) because he admitted the (3) Party who made the forgery is liable. genuineness of the drawer’s signature. Drawee cannot recover from the collecting bank because there is no privity between the collecting bank and the drawer. The collecting bank does not give any warranty re: the drawer’s signature. (Associated Bank vs. CA) (3) Indorsers subsequent to forgery liable PAGE 14

UP COLLEGE OF LAW



(such as collecting bank or last endorser) (4) Party who made the forgery is liable Payee’s signature forged

(1) Drawer and payee are not liable (2) Drawee is liable if it paid, but it may pass liability back through the collection chain (3) Indorsers subsequent to forgery are liable (such as collecting bank) (4) Party who made the forgery is liable

(1) Drawer and drawee are liable. (2) Payee is not liable. (3) Collecting bank is liable because of warranty. (4) Party who made the forgery is liable.

Indorser’s signature forged

(1) Drawer, payee, indorser whose signature/s was/were forged and all indorsers preceding the forgery are not liable. (2) Drawee is liable if it paid. (3) Indorsers subsequent to forgery are liable. (such as collecting bank) (4) Party who made the forgery is liable.

(1) Drawer is liable. (2) Drawee is liable. (3) Indorser whose signature was forged is liable because indorsement is not necessary to title. (4) Party who made the forgery is liable.

later complain should bank refuse to recredit his account.

ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT UNDER MISTAKE

(1) When the drawee accepts or pays a forged instrument A bank is bound to know the signatures of its depositors. If a bank pays a forged check it must be considered as making the payment out of its own funds and cannot charge the account of the depositor whose signature was forged. (PNB vs. Quimpo, 1988)

WHEN DRAWEE MAY RECOVER FROM DRAWER

(1) Where the instrument is originally a bearer instrument, because the indorsement can be disregarded as being unnecessary to the holder’s title (2) Indorsement forged by an employee or agent of the drawer (3) If due to the drawer’s negligence/delay, the forgery is not discovered until it is too late for the bank to recover from the holder or the forger

A bank is liable, irrespective of its good faith, in paying a forged check. (Samsung vs. Far East Bank, 2004) (2) Extensions of Price vs. Neal doctrine Doctrine: As between equally innocent persons, the drawee who pays money on a check or draft the signature on which was forged CANNOT recover the money from the one who received it. The drawee is bound to know the signature of its depositor.

WHEN DRAWEE MAY NOT RECOVER FROM HOLDER

(1) Where the instrument is originally a bearer instrument, because the indorsement can be disregarded as being unnecessary to the holder’s title (2) If drawee fails to act promptly , if he delays in informing the holder whom he paid

Notes: The bar to recovery is extended to overdrafts and stop payment orders. (a) Overdraft occurs when a check is issued for an amount more than what the drawer has in deposit with the drawee bank. Rule: The drawee who pays the holder of the bill cannot recover from the holder what he paid under mistake (b) Stop Payment Order is one issued by the drawer of a check countermanding his first order to the drawee bank to pay the check. Rule: The drawee bank is bound to follow the order, provided it is received prior to its certification or payment of the check.

BETWEEN DRAWEE BANK AND COLLECTING BANK

Collecting bank is only liable for forged indorsements and not forgeries of the drawer or maker’s signature (PNB v CA, 1968). The collecting bank or last indorser generally suffers the loss because it has the duty to ascertain the genuineness of all prior indorsements considering that the act of presenting the check for payment to the drawee is an assertion that the party making the presentment had done its duty to ascertain the genuineness of the indorsements (BPI v CA, 1992).

(3) Effects of Negligence of Depositor If such negligence was the proximate cause of the loss, the drawee-bank is NOT liable

In presenting the checks for clearing, the collecting agent made an express guarantee on the validity of “all the prior endorsements.”

It is the duty of the depositor/drawer to carefully examine bank’s statements, cancelled checks, his check stubs, and other pertinent records within a reasonable time and to report any errors without unreasonable delay.

The drawee bank is not similarly situated as the collecting bank because the former makes no warranty as to the genuineness of any indorsement. The drawee bank’s duty is but to verify the genuineness of the drawer’s signature and not of the indorsement because only the drawer is its client.

If a drawer/depositor’s negligence and delay should cause a bank to honor a forged check, drawer cannot PAGE 15

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Notes: However, where the negligence of the drawee bank is the proximate cause of the collecting bank’s payment of a check with a forged indorsement, the drawee bank may be held liable to the collecting bank.


Liable on the instrument to a holder for value notwithstanding such holder at the time of the taking of the instrument knew him to be only an accommodation party. th Hence, as regards an AP, the 4 condition, i.e., lack of notice of infirmity in the instrument or defect in the title of the persons negotiating it, has no application. (Stelco Marketing Corp. vs. CA,1992)

When both are guilty of negligence, the degree of negligence of each will be weighed in considering the amount of loss which each should bear (BPI v CA, 1992)

ACCOMMODATION PARTY AS SURETY Accommodation Party (AP) is generally regarded as a surety for the party accommodated

Consideration

When the AP makes payment to holder of the note, he has the right to sue the accommodated party for reimbursement. (Agro Conglomerates, Inc. v. CA)

Consideration: Some right, interest, benefit, or advantage conferred upon a promisor, to which he is otherwise not lawfully entitled, or any detriment, prejudice, loss or disadvantage suffered or undertaken by the promise other than to such as he is at the time of consent bound to suffer. (Gabriel v. Monte de Piedad)

Note: A corporation cannot act as an accommodation party. The issue or endorsement of negotiable instruments by a corporation without consideration and for the accommodation of another is ultra vires (Crisologo v. CA)

Value: Any consideration sufficient to support a simple contract.

Negotiation

An antecedent or pre-existing debt constitutes value; and is deemed such whether the instrument is payable on demand or at a future time. (Sec. 25)

NEGOTIATION DISTINGUISHED FROM ASSIGNMENT Negotiation Assignment

Who is a Holder for Value (HFV)? (1) A holder of an instrument for which value has been given at any given time but only with respect to all parties who have become parties to the instrument prior to the time at which value has been given. (Sec. 26) (2) A holder who as a lien on the instrument but only to the extent of his lien. (Sec. 27)

The transfer of the instrument from one person to another so as to constitute the transferee as holder thereof (Sec.30).

Burden of proof - presumption of consideration: Every negotiable instrument is deemed prima facie to have been issued for a valuable consideration; and every person whose signature appears thereon to have become a party thereto for value (Sec. 24).

The transferee does not become a holder and he merely steps into the shoes of the transferor. Any defense available against the transferor is available against the transferee.

MODES OF NEGOTIATION BY DELIVERY – IF PAYABLE TO BEARER (SEC. 30)

Delivery means transfer of possession of instrument by the maker or drawer, with intent to transfer title to the payee and recognize him as holder thereof.

Effect of want of consideration: Absence or failure of consideration is a matter of defense as against any person not a holder in due course, hence, a personal defense.

Issuance is the first delivery of the instrument complete in form to a person who takes it as a holder (Sec. 191). Requisites (1) Mechanical act of writing the instrument completely and in accordance with the requirements of Section 1; and (2) The delivery of the complete instrument by the maker or drawer to the payee or holder with the intention of giving effect to it.

Accommodation Party An accommodation party is one who has signed the instrument as maker, drawer, acceptor, or indorser, without receiving value therefor, and for the purpose of lending his name to some other person (Sec. 29).

Presumption of delivery (1) Where the instrument is no longer in the possession of a party whose signature appears thereon, a valid and intentional delivery by him is presumed until the contrary is proved (Sec. 16) (2) If it is in the hands of a HDC, the presumption is conclusive (Sec. 16)

LIABILITY The person to whom the instrument thus executed is subsequently negotiated has a right of recourse against the accommodation party in spite of the former’s knowledge that no consideration passed between the accommodation and accommodated parties (Sec. 29).

PAGE 16

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Presumption as to date (1) Date is not an essential element of negotiability (2) An undated instrument is considered to be dated as of the time it was issued BY INDORSEMENT COMPLETED BY DELIVERY ORDER (SEC. 30)

–


Rights of Restrictive Indorsee: (a) Receive payment (b) Bring any action thereon that the indorser could bring. (c) Transfer his rights as such indorsee, but all subsequent indorsees acquire only the title of first indorsee under restrictive indorsement. (Sec 37)

IF PAYABLE TO

(2) Non-restrictive

Indorsement (1) Where placed – The indorsement must be written (Sec. 31): (a) On the instrument itself, or (b) On a separate piece of paper attached to the instrument called “allonge”

As to kind of liability assumed by indorser (1) Qualified (a) Constitutes indorser as mere assignor of title (b) Made by adding the words “without recourse” (Sec. 38). (c) But this does not mean that the transferee only has the rights of an assignee; transfer remains a negotiation and transferee can still be a holder capable of acquiring a title free from defenses of prior parties. (d) Effects: (i) Relieves the qualified indorser of his liability to pay the instrument should the maker be unable to pay (ii) The qualified indorser does not guarantee the solvency of the maker, but merely his legal title to the instrument (iii) The instrument may still be further negotiated; no effect on its negotiability

(2) Signature of the indorser, without additional words, is a sufficient indorsement (Sec. 31) (3) Must be of the ENTIRE instrument (a) CANNOT indorse a part only of the amount payable; BUT if the instrument has been paid in part, then the instrument may be indorsed as to the residue (Sec. 32) (b) CANNOT transfer the instrument to two or more indorsees severally (Sec. 32) (c) If not an indorsement of the entire instrument, the transfer remains valid, but as a mere assignment which subjects the holder to all defenses on the instrument (Campos)

(2) Non-qualified As to presence/absence of express limitations (1) Conditional (a) Additional condition annexed to indorser’s liability; such condition must be expressed (b) Where an indorsement is conditional, a party required to pay the instrument may disregard the condition, and make payment to the indorsee or his transferee, whether condition has been fulfilled or not. (c) But any person to whom an instrument so indorsed is negotiated, will hold the same, or the proceeds thereof, subject to the rights of the person indorsing conditionally. (Sec. 39)

Kinds of indorsement As to manner of future method of negotiation (1) Special (a) Specifies the person to whom/to whose order the instrument is to be payable; indorsement of such indorsee is necessary to further negotiation. (b) A special indorser is liable to all subsequent holders, unless the instrument is an originally bearer instrument, in which case he is liable only to those who take title through his indorsement (Sec 40). (c) An instrument, payable to bearer, and indorsed specially, may nevertheless be further negotiated by delivery. (Sec 40)

(2) Unconditional Other kinds of indorsement (1) Absolute – One by which the indorser binds himself to pay, upon no other condition than the failure of prior parties to do so, and of due notice to him of such failure (2) Joint – Where instrument payable to the order of two or more payees or indorsees not partners, all must indorse, unless the one indorsing has authority to endorse for the others (Sec. 41) (3) Irregular – Where a person, not otherwise a party to the instrument, places thereon his signature in blank before delivery, he is liable as indorser

Originally bearer instrument always remains a bearer instrument (Sundiang and Aquino) (2) Blank (a) Specifies no indorsee, instrument so indorsed is payable to bearer, and may be negotiated by delivery (b) The holder may convert a blank indorsement into a special indorsement by writing over the signature of the indorser in blank any contract consistent with the character of the indorsement. (Sec 35) (c) An order instrument may be converted into a bearer instrument by means of a blank indorsement, and may be later reconverted into an order instrument by a subsequent special indorsement

Rights of the Holder

As to title transferred (1) Restrictive – Such indorsement either: (a) Prohibits further negotiation of instrument (b) Constitutes indorsee as agent of indorser (c) Vests title in indorsee in trust for another (Sec 36)

A holder is a payee or indorsee of a bill or note who is in possession of it, or the bearer thereof (Sec. 191). He has the following rights (Sec. 51): (1) To sue on the instrument in his own name PAGE 17

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Unindorsed intruments: Sec. 49. Transfer without indorsement; effect of. Where the holder of an instrument payable to his order transfers it for value without indorsing it, the transfer vests in the transferee such title as the transferor had therein, and the transferee acquires in addition, the right to have the indorsement of the transferor. But for the purpose of determining whether the transferee is a holder in due course, the negotiation takes effect as of the time when the indorsement is actually made.


(d) That at the time it was negotiated to him, he had no notice of any infirmity in the instrument or defect in the title of the person negotiating it. (Sec. 52) That the instrument is complete and regular upon its face (1) It is incomplete when it is wanting in any material particular or particular proper to be inserted in a negotiable instrument without which the same will not be complete. Material particulars: A change in the following is considered a material alteration (Sec. 125): (a) Date (b) Sum payable, either for principal or interest (c) Time or place of payment (d) Number or relations of the parties (e) Medium or currency in which payment is to be made (f) Or which adds a place of payment where no place of payment is specified (g) Or any other change or addition which alters the effect of the instrument in any respect

Note: This section applies only to an instrument payable to the order of the transferor. This cannot apply to bearer instruments. Cancellation of indorsement: Sec. 48. Striking out indorsement. The holder may at any time strike out any indorsement which is not necessary to his title. The indorser whose indorsement is struck out, and all indorsers subsequent to him, are thereby relieved from liability on the instrument. Indorsement by agent: Sec. 20. Liability of person signing as agent, and so forth. Where the instrument contains or a person adds to his signature words indicating that he signs for or on behalf of a principal or in a representative capacity, he is not liable on the instrument if he was duly authorized; but the mere addition of words describing him as an agent, or as filling a representative character, without disclosing his principal, does not exempt him from personal liability.

(2) That he became the holder of it before it was overdue and without notice that it had been previously dishonored, if such was the fact “Overdue” – The following cannot be HDCs: (a) A holder who became such after the date of maturity of the instrument (instrument is overdue); (b) In case of demand instruments: a holder who negotiates it after an unreasonable length of time after its issue (Sec. 53) (c) Instruments with fixed maturity but subject to acceleration: ultimate date of maturity is the date of maturity for the purpose of determining whether a purchaser is a HDC (d) Undated instruments: Prima facie presumption that it was negotiated before it was overdue (Sec. 45)

(2) Payment in due course to the holder discharges instrument HOLDER IN DUE COURSE (HDC) WHO ARE HDCS

(1) HDC under Sec. 52 (2) HDC under Sec. 58: A holder who derives title to the instrument through a HDC has all the rights of the latter even though he himself satisfies none of the requirements of due course holding (3) HDC under Sec. 59 (presumption): Every holder is deemed prima facie to be a holder in due course

Notes: (1) An overdue instrument is still negotiable, but it is subject to the defense existing at the time of the transfer. (2) As to what constitutes a reasonable time, regard is to be had to the nature of the instrument, the usage of trade or business with respect to such instrument, and the facts of the particular case. (Sec. 193) (3) An instrument is not invalid for the reason only that it is ANTE-DATED OR POSTDATED provided not done for an illegal or fraudulent purpose. The person to whom an instrument so dated is delivered acquires the title thereto as of the date of delivery (Sec. 12).

Sec. 191 defines holder as the payee or indorsee of a bill or note, who is in possession of it, or the bearer thereof. The word “holder” in the first clause of Sec. 52 and in the second subsection thereof may be replaced by the definition in Sec. 191 so as to read a holder in due course as a payee or an indorsee in possession, etc. (De Ocampo v. Gatchalian, 1961)

That he took it in good faith AND for value “Value” (1) Any consideration sufficient to support a simple contract. (2) An antecedent or pre-existing debt constitutes value, whether the instrument is payable on demand or at a future time (Sec. 25)

REQUISITES OF A HOLDER IN DUE COURSE

What constitutes a holder in due course. A holder in due course is a holder who has taken the instrument under the following conditions: (a) That it is complete and regular upon its face; (b) That he became the holder of it before it was overdue, and without notice that it has been previously dishonored, if such was the fact; (c) That he took it in good faith and for value;

PAGE 18

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


“Holder for value” (1) Where value has at any time been given for the instrument, the holder is deemed a HFV in respect to all parties who become such prior to that time (Sec. 26); and (2) Where the holder has a lien on the instrument, he is deemed a HFV to the extent of his lien (Sec .27). (3) The holder is a holder for value only to the extent that the consideration agreed upon has been paid, delivered, or performed. (Sundiang and Aquino)


(2) instrument is negotiated in breach of faith, or fraudulent circumstances NOTICE of infirmity or defect – actual knowledge of the infirmity or defect OR knowledge of such facts that his action in taking the instrument amounted to bad faith (Sec.56) RIGHT of a transferee who receives NOTICE of any infirmity or defect BEFORE he has PAID THE FULL amount for the instrument. He will be deemed a HDC only to the extent of the amount therefore paid by him (Sec.54)

Presumption: Every negotiable instrument is deemed prima facie issued for valuable consideration; and every person whose signature appears thereon is deemed to have become a party thereto for value (Sec. 24).

RIGHTS OF A HOLDER IN DUE COURSE

(1) To sue on the instrument in his own name (Sec. 51) (2) To receive payment on the instrument (Sec. 51) (3) Holds instrument free of any defect of title of prior parties (Sec. 57) (4) Free from defenses available to prior parties among themselves (Sec. 57) (5) May enforce payment of instrument for full amount, against all parties liable (Sec. 57)

Such presumption cannot be overcome by the petitioner’s bare denial of receipt of the consideration. (Bayani vs. People, 2004) “Good faith” Holder must have taken the instrument in good faith and that at the time it was negotiated to him he had no notice of any infirmity in the instrument or defect in the title of the person negotiating it.

DEFENSES AGAINST THE HOLDER PRESUMPTION IN FAVOR OF DUE COURSE HOLDING

“Actual knowledge” What constitutes notice of defect. To constitute notice of an infirmity in the instrument or defect in the title of the person negotiating the same, the person to whom it is negotiated must have had actual knowledge of the infirmity or defect, or knowledge of such facts that his action in taking the instrument amounted to bad faith. (Sec. 56)

Every holder is deemed prima facie to be a holder in due course (Sec. 59). (1) BURDEN SHIFTS when it is shown that the title of any person who has negotiated the instrument was defective. Holder MUST then PROVE that he or some person under whom he claims acquired the title as a holder in due course. (2) But the last mentioned rule does not apply in favor of a party who became bound on the instrument prior to the acquisition of such defective title. (Sec. 59)

That at the time it was negotiated to him he had no notice of any infirmity in the instrument or defect in the title of the person negotiating it “Suspicious circumstances” BAD FAITH - does not require actual knowledge of the exact fraud that was practiced; knowledge that there was something wrong about the assignor’s acquisition of title is sufficient

HOLDER NOT IN DUE COURSE

(1) One who became a holder of an instrument without any, some or all of the requisites under Sec. 52 (2) With respect to demand instruments, if it is negotiated an unreasonable length of time after its issue, the holder is deemed not a holder in due course. (Sec. 53) (3) Rights of a holder not in due course (Sec. 51): (a) To sue on the instrument under in his own name (b) To enforce the instrument

A check with 2 parallel lines in the upper left hand corner means that it could only be deposited and may not be converted to cash. Consequently, such circumstance should put the payee on inquiry and upon him devolves the duty to ascertain the holders’ title to the check or the nature of his possession. Failing in this respect, the payee is declared guilty of gross negligence amounting to legal absence of good faith and as such the consensus of authority is to the effect that the holder of the check is not a holder in good faith. (State Investment House vs. IAC, 1989)

The only disadvantage of a holder who is not a holder in due course is that the negotiable instrument is subject to defenses as if it were non-negotiable. [Chan Wan vs. Tan Kim (1960)]

Liabilities of Parties

“Defective title” Title is NOT defective when at the time it was negotiated to him, he had NO notice of: (1) any infirmity in instrument (2) any defect in title of person negotiating

Primary liability: The unconditional promise attaches the moment the maker makes the instrument while the acceptor’s assent to the unconditional order attaches the moment he accepts the instrument. No further act is necessary in order for the liability to accrue. Presentment for payment is all that is necessary.

Title is DEFECTIVE when (Sec. 55): (1) instrument/signature obtained by fraud, duress, force or fear or other unlawful means OR for an illegal consideration; or PAGE 19

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


PARTIES PRIMARILY LIABLE (Sec. 60 and 62) Persons who by the terms of the instrument are absolutely required to pay the same


General or unqualified indorser (Sec. 66) Engages that he will pay the amount of the instrument to the holder or to any subsequent indorser who may be compelled to pay the same if the instrument be dishonored upon due presentment and proceedings on dishonor be taken.

MAKER (SEC. 60)

Promises to pay according to the tenor of the instrument (promissory note)

Who is a General or Unqualified Indorser? Every person who indorses WITHOUT qualification (Sec. 66)

ACCEPTOR (SEC. 62)

Upon acceptance of the bill of exchange, engages to pay the bill according to the tenor of the acceptance.

A person placing his signature upon an instrument other than as a maker, drawer, or acceptor unless he indicates by appropriate words his intention to be bound in some other capacity (Sec. 63).

Unconditionally liable; he is duty-bound to pay the holder at date of maturity, WON holder demands payment from him, and he is not relieved from liability even if the instrument should become overdue due to failure of holder to make such demand.

A person, who places his signature on an instrument negotiable by delivery, incurs all the liabilities of an indorser (Sec. 67).

Note: Until he accepts the bill of exchange, the drawee assumes no liability to pay the instrument.

Note: A qualified indorser does not assume the liability to pay the instrument since he is merely an assignor of the title to the instrument. However, he becomes liable once he breaches a warranty.

PARTIES SECONDARILY LIABLE Secondary liability: A party secondarily liable is not bound to pay unless the following have been fulfilled: (1) Due presentment or demand to the primary party (2) Dishonor by such party (3) Notice of dishonor to secondary party, and, in cases of foreign bills of exchange, protest of the bill

Who is a qualified indorser? One who is constituted as a mere assignor of the title to the instrument by adding to his signature the words "without recourse" or any words of similar import.

DRAWER (SEC. 61)

Irregular Indorser When a person not otherwise a party to an instrument, places thereon his signature in blank before delivery, he is liable as an indorser, in accordance with these rules: (1) Instrument payable to order of 3rd person: liable to payee and to all subsequent parties (2) Instrument payable to the order of maker/drawer, or payable to bearer: liable to all parties subsequent to maker/drawer (3) Signs for accommodation of payee: liable to all parties subsequent to payee (Sec. 64)

(1) Engages that the instrument will be accepted or paid, or both, according to its tenor on due presentment; (2) Engages that he will pay the amount of the instrument to the holder or to any subsequent indorser who may be compelled to pay the same if the instrument be dishonored upon due presentment and proceedings on dishonor be taken, Limiting liability: Drawer may insert in the instrument an express stipulation negativing/limiting his own liability to the holder.

Order of Liability among Indorsers (Sec. 68) (1) Among themselves: liable prima facie in the order they indorse, but proof of another agreement admissible (2) As to the Holder: Holder may sue any of the indorsers, regardless of order of indorsement (3) Joint payees/indorsees deemed to indorse solidarily

INDORSERS

The following indorsers assume the liability to pay the instrument: (1) General or Unqualified Indorser; and (2) Irregular Indorser WARRANTIES Maker (1) Existence of the payee; (2) His then capacity to indorse

Acceptor

General/ Unqualified Indorser

Drawer

(1) Existence of the (1) Existence of the payee; payee; (2) His then (2) His then capacity to capacity to indorse; indorse (3) Existence of the drawer; (4) Genuineness of the drawer’s signature;

(1) Genuineness of the instrument in all respects that it purports to be; (2) His good title to the instrument; (3) All prior parties’ capacity to contract;

PAGE 20

Qualified Indorser

Person Negotiating by Delivery

(1) Genuineness of (1) Genuineness of the instrument the instrument in all respects in all respects that it purports that it purports to be; to be; (2) His good title to (2) His good title to the instrument; the instrument; (3) All prior parties’ (3) Prior parties’ capacity to capacity to contract; contract;

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


(5) Drawer’s capacity and authority to draw the instrument;

(4) The instrument is valid and subsisting at the time of his indorsement.

Presentment for Payment


(4) No knowledge of any fact which would impair the validity of the instrument or render it valueless.

(4) No knowledge of any fact which would impair the validity of the instrument or render it valueless.

Note: No. 3 does not apply to person negotiating public or corporation securities other than bills and notes

Note: Warranty extends only to immediate transferee

PARTIES TO WHOM PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT SHOULD BE MADE General rule: Presentment for payment must be made to the person primarily liable on the instrument or if he is absent or inaccessible, to any person found at the place where the presentment is made.

Presentment means: (1) The production of a Bill of Exchange to the drawer or acceptor for payment; or (2) The production of a Promissory Note to the party liable for payment.

Exceptions: Where the person primarily liable is/are: (1) Dead – presentment for payment must be made to his personal representative (2) Partners – presentment for payment may be made to any one of them, even though there has been a dissolution of the firm (3) Several persons, not partners (joint debtors) – presentment for payment must be made to them all

Date and time of presentment: (1) Bearing fixed maturity/not payable on demand – on the day it falls due if day of maturity falls on Sunday or a holiday, the instruments falling due or becoming payable on Saturday are to be presented for payment on the next succeeding business day (Sec. 85) (2) Payable on demand – within a reasonable time after its issue, iv at the option of the holder, may be presented for payment before twelve o'clock noon on Saturday when that entire day is not a holiday (Sec. 85) (3) Demand bill of exchange – within a reasonable time after the last negotiation. (Sec. 71)

DISPENSATION WITH PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT When Excused: (1) Where, after the exercise of reasonable diligence, presentment cannot be made; (2) Where the drawee is a fictitious person; (3) By waiver of presentment, express or implied. (Sec. 82)

Note: Although presentment was made within a reasonable time from last negotiation, it may have been made within an unreasonable time from issuance. Thus holder may still not be a holder in due course under Sec. 71.

DISHONOR BY NON-PAYMENT The instrument is dishonored by non-payment when: (1) It is duly presented for payment and payment is refused or cannot be obtained; or (2) Presentment is excused and the instrument is overdue and unpaid (Sec. 83).

NECESSITY OF PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT When necessary: In order to charge the drawer and indorsers (Sec. 70)

In case of waiver of protest, whether in the case of a foreign bill of exchange or other NI – deemed to be a waiver not only of a formal protest but also of presentment and notice of dishonor (Sec. 111)

When NOT necessary: (1) To charge the person primarily liable on the instrument (Sec. 70) (2) To charge the drawer where he has no right to expect or require that the drawee or acceptor will pay the instrument. (Sec. 79) (3) To charge an indorser where the instrument was made or accepted for his accommodation and he has no reason to expect that the instrument will be paid if presented. (Sec. 80) (4) When the bill of exchange has previously been dishonored by non-acceptance and has not been subsequently accepted

Notice of Dishonor Notice given by holder or his agent to party or parties secondarily liable that the instrument was dishonored by: (1) Non-acceptance by the drawee of a bill; or (2) Non-payment by the acceptor of a bill; or

PAGE 21

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


(3) Non-payment by the maker of a note (Sec. 89)


Who should give (Sec. 90): (1) Holder (2) Agent or representative of holder. (3) Any party who may be compelled to pay like indorsers. (4) Agent of any party who may be compelled.

Requisites: (1) Given by holder or his agent, or by any party who may be compelled by the holder to pay (Sec. 90) (2) Given to secondary party or his agent (Sec. 97) (3) Given within the periods provided by law (Sec. 102) (4) Given at the proper place (Secs. 103 and 104)

EFFECT OF NOTICE Notice of dishonor is required to charge parties secondarily liable.

PARTIES TO BE NOTIFIED (1) Non-acceptance (bill) – to persons secondarily liable, namely, the drawer and indorsers as the case may be (2) Non-payment (both bill and note) – to indorsers

Upon valid notice of dishonor, immediate right of recourse against the indorser arises. It is as if the indorser becomes primarily liable in the sense that the holder need not claim payment from the person primarily liable (Sundiang and Aquino).

Note: Notice must be given to persons secondarily liable. Otherwise, such parties are discharged. Notice may be given to the party himself or to his agent.

FORM OF NOTICE (Sec. 96) The notice may be: (1) In writing; or (2) Merely oral

When given Notice may be given as soon as the instrument is dishonored (Sec. 102)

The notice may be given in any terms which: (1) Sufficiently identify the instrument; and (2) Indicate that it has been dishonored by non-acceptance or non-payment

When not necessary to give to drawer Notice of dishonor is not required to be given to the drawer in any of the following cases: (1) Drawer and drawee are the same; (2) Drawee is a fictitious person or not having the capacity to contract; (3) Drawer is the person to whom the instrument is presented for payment; (4) The drawer has no right to expect or require that the drawee or acceptor swill honor the instrument; (5) Where the drawer has countermanded payment (Sec. 114)

It may in all cases be given by delivering it personally or through the mails WAIVER Notice of dishonor may be waived either before the time of giving notice has arrived or after the omission to give due notice, and the waiver may be expressed or implied. (Sec. 109) Where the waiver is embodied in the instrument itself, it is binding upon all parties; but, where it is written above the signature of an indorser, it binds him only. (Sec. 110)

When not necessary to give to Indorser Notice of dishonor is not required to be given to an indorser in the following cases: (1) Drawee is a fictitious person or does not have the capacity to contract, and indorser was aware of that fact at the time he indorsed the instrument; (2) Indorser is the person to whom the instrument is presented for payment; (3) Instrument was made or accepted for his accommodation. (Sec. 115)

DISPENSATION WITH NOTICE (1) When party to be notified knows about the dishonor, actually or constructively (Secs. 114-117) (2) If waived (Sec. 109) (3) When after due diligence, it cannot be given (Sec. 112). EFFECT OF FAILURE TO GIVE NOTICE Failure to give notice to parties secondarily liable discharges such parties

Who will benefit If given by or on behalf of the holder (Sec. 92): (1) All subsequent holders (2) All prior parties (as to holder) who have a right of recourse against the party to whom it is given.

An omission to give notice of dishonor by non-acceptance does not prejudice the rights of a holder in due course subsequent to the omission (Sec. 117)

If given by the indorser (Sec. 93): (1) Holder (2) All parties subsequent to the party to whom notice is given.

Discharge of Negotiable Instrument

PARTIES WHO MAY GIVE NOTICE OF DISHONOR The notice may be given by or on behalf of the holder, or by or on behalf of any party to the instrument who might be compelled to pay it to the holder, and who, upon taking it up, would have a right to reimbursement from the party to whom the notice is given. (Sec. 90)

Discharge: The release of all parties, whether primary or secondary, from the obligation on the instrument. It renders the instrument without force and effect and, consequently, non-negotiable (De Leon) PAGE 22

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


DISCHARGE OF NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT A negotiable instrument is discharged: (1) By payment in due course by or on behalf of the principal debtor; (2) By payment in due course by the party accommodated, where the instrument is made or accepted for his accommodation; (3) By the intentional cancellation thereof by the holder; (4) By any other act which will discharge a simple contract for the payment of money; (5) When the principal debtor becomes the holder of the instrument at or after maturity in his own right. (Sec. 119)


DISCHARGE OF PARTIES SECONDARILY LIABLE GROUNDS UNDER SEC. 120

A person secondarily liable on the instrument is discharged: (1) By any act which discharges the instrument; (2) By the intentional cancellation of his signature by the holder; (3) By the discharge of a prior party; (4) By a valid tender or payment made by a prior party; (5) By a release of the principal debtor unless the holder's right of recourse against the party secondarily liable is expressly reserved; (6) By any agreement binding upon the holder to extend the time of payment or to postpone the holder's right to enforce the instrument unless made with the assent of the party secondarily liable or unless the right of recourse against such party is expressly reserved. (Sec. 120)

BY PAYMENT IN DUE COURSE (ASKED IN 2000)

Payment is made in due course when it is made at or after the maturity of the payment to the holder thereof in good faith and without notice that his title is defective. (Sec. 88) Requisites: (1) Payment must be made at or after maturity. (2) Payment must be made to the holder. (3) Payment must be made in good faith and without notice that holder’s title is defective.

OTHER GROUNDS

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

If payment is made before maturity and the note is negotiated to a HDC, the latter may recover on the instrument. Payment to one of several payees or indorsees in the alternative discharges the instrument, but payment to one of several joint payees or joint indorsers is not a discharge. The party receiving payment must have been authorized by others to receive payment.

(6) (a) (b)

By whom made: (1) payment in due course by or on behalf of principal debtor (2) payment in due course by party accommodated where party is made/ accepted for accommodation

(7)

Failure to make due presentment (Secs. 70, 144) Failure to give notice of dishonor Certification of check at instance of holder Reacquisition by prior party Where instrument negotiated back to a prior party, such party may reissue and further negotiate, but not entitled to enforce payment against any intervening party to whom he was personally liable Where instrument is paid by party secondarily liable, it is not discharged, but the party so paying it is remitted to his former rights as regard to all prior parties and he may strike out his own and all subsequent indorsements, and again negotiate instrument, except: rd where it is payable to order of 3 party and has been paid by drawer or where it’s made/accepted for accommodation and has been paid by party accommodated by taking a qualified acceptance

RIGHT OF PARTY WHO DISCHARGED INSTRUMENT Where the instrument is paid by a party secondarily liable thereon, it is not discharged; but the party so paying it is remitted to his former rights as regards to all prior parties, and he may strike out his own and all subsequent indorsements, and again negotiate the instrument, except: (1) Where it is payable to the order of a third person, and has been paid by the drawer; (2) Where it was made or accepted for accommodation, and has been paid by the party accommodated. (Sec. 121)

BY INTENTIONAL CANCELLATION

A cancellation made unintentionally or under a mistake or without the authority of the holder, is inoperative. But where an instrument or any signature thereon appears to have been cancelled, the burden of proof lies on the party who alleges that the cancellation was made unintentionally or under a mistake or without authority. (Sec. 123) BY OTHER ACTS THAT DISCHARGE A SIMPLE CONTRACT FOR PAYMENT OF MONEY

Any other act which discharges a simple contract for payment of money (Art. 1231 of the Civil Code), ex. issuance of a renewal note (novation).

RENUNCIATION BY HOLDER (Sec. 122) The holder may expressly renounce his rights against any party to the instrument before, at, or after its maturity. An absolute and unconditional renunciation of his rights against the principal debtor made at or after the maturity of the instrument discharges the instrument.

BY REACQUISITION OF PRINCIPAL DEBTOR IN HIS OWN RIGHT

Principal debtor becomes holder of instrument at or after maturity in his own right BY MATERIAL ALTERATION

Renunciation must be in writing unless the instrument is delivered up to the person primarily liable thereon

Material alteration without assent of all parties liable avoids instrument except as against party to alteration and subsequent indorsers (Sec. 124)

Renunciation does not affect the rights of an HDC without notice PAGE 23

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Material Alteration


(a) Conditional – makes payment by the acceptor dependent on the fulfillment of a condition therein stated (b) Partial – an acceptance to pay part only of the amount for which the bill is drawn. (c) Local – an acceptance to pay only at a particular place. (d) Qualified as to time (e) The acceptance of some one or more of the drawees but not of all. (Sec. 141)

CONCEPT Any change in the instrument which affects or changes the liability of the parties in any way. Any alteration which changes the date, sum payable, time or place of payment, number of relation of the parties, or medium of currency of payment where none is specified or which alters the effect of the instrument in any respect (PNB v. CA, GR No. L-26001, Oct. 21, 1968)

Proof of acceptance (Sundiang and Aquino): The written acceptance may be in the instrument itself or in a separate instrument. However, under Sec. 133, “the holder of a bill presenting the same for acceptance may require the acceptance be written on the bill, and, if such request is refused, may treat the bill as dishonored”

An alteration is said to be material if it alters the effect of the instrument. In other words, a material alteration is one which changes the items which are required to be stated under Sec. 1 of the NIL (ibid.)

Effects: When an acceptance is written on a paper than the bill itself, it does not bind the acceptor except in favor of a person to whom it is shown and who, on the faith thereof, receives the bill for value.

Changes in the following constitute material alterations (Sec. 125): (1) Date (2) Sum payable, either for principal or interest (3) Time or place of payment (4) Number or relations of the parties (5) Medium or currency in which payment is to be made (6) That which adds a place of payment where no place of payment is specified (7) Any other change or addition which alters the effect of the instrument in any respect.

MANNER EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE

Must be in writing and signed by the drawee and must not express that the drawee will perform his promise by any other means than the payment of money. (Sec. 132) If request for a written acceptance is refused, the holder may treat the bill as dishonored (Sec. 133)

EFFECT OF MATERIAL ALTERATION (1) Alteration by a party – Avoids the instrument except as against the party who made, authorized, or assented to the alteration and subsequent indorsers. However, if an altered instrument is negotiated to a HDC, he may enforce payment thereof according to its original tenor regardless of whether the alteration was innocent or fraudulent. (2) Alteration by a stranger (spoliation)  the effect is the same as where the alteration was made by a party wherein a HDC can recover on the original tenor of the instrument (Sec. 124).

IMPLIED ACCEPTANCE

(1) If the drawee refuses to return the instrument within 24 hours after it was delivered for acceptance. (2) If the drawee destroys the same. (3) If the drawee makes an unconditional promise in writing before the instrument is drawn, with respect to every person who, upon the faith thereof, receives the bill for value. TIME FOR ACCEPTANCE (Sec. 136) The drawee is allowed twenty-four hours after presentment in which to decide whether or not he will accept the bill. The acceptance, if given, dates as of the day of presentation.

Acceptance

RULES GOVERNING ACCEPTANCE Q: What is the implication of payment without acceptance by a drawee? A: Act No. 2031, or the Negotiable Instruments Law (NIL), explicitly provides that the acceptor, by accepting the instrument, engages that he will pay it according to the tenor of his acceptance. This provision applies with equal force in case the drawee pays a bill without having previously accepted it. His actual payment of the amount in the check implies not only his assent to the order of the drawer and a recognition of his corresponding obligation to pay the aforementioned sum, but also, his clear compliance with that obligation. Actual payment by the drawee is greater than his acceptance, which is merely a promise in writing to pay. The payment of a check includes its acceptance. (FEBTC vs. Gold Palace Jewellery Co,, Nachura, 2008)

DEFINITION The signification by the drawee of his assent to the order of the drawer (Sec. 132) Requisites (Sec. 132): (1) Must be in writing (2) Signed by the drawee (3) Must not express that the drawee will perform his promise by any other means than the payment of money Kinds of Acceptance: (1) General – assents without qualification to the order of the drawer (2) Qualified – which in express terms varies the effect of the bill as drawn: PAGE 24

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Right to unqualified acceptance: The holder may refuse to take a qualified acceptance and if he does not obtain an unqualified acceptance, he may treat the bill as dishonored by non-acceptance.


TIME/PLACE/MANNER OF PRESENTMENT WHEN MADE

A bill may be presented for acceptance on any day on which negotiable instruments may be presented for payment under the provisions of Sections 72 and 85 of this Act. When Saturday is not otherwise a holiday, presentment for acceptance may be made before twelve o'clock noon on that day. (Sec. 146)

Where a qualified acceptance is taken, the drawers and indorsers are discharged from liability on the bill unless they have expressly or impliedly authorized the holder to take a qualified acceptance, or subsequently assent thereto. When the drawer or indorser receives notice of a qualified acceptance, he must, within a reasonable time, express his dissent to the holder or he will be deemed to have assented thereto.

What constitutes sufficient presentment? Presentment for payment, to be sufficient, must be made: (1) By the holder, or by some person authorized to receive payment on his behalf; (2) At a reasonable hour on a business day; (3) At the proper place as herein defined (see Sec. 73); (4) To the person primarily liable on the instrument or if he is absent or inaccessible, to any person found at the place where the presentment is made. (Sec. 72)

However, acceptance is presumed to be unqualified or absolute. (Sundiang and Aquino)

Presentment for Acceptance

Time of maturity: Every negotiable instrument is payable at the time fixed therein without grace. When they day of maturity falls upon Sunday, or a holiday, the instrument is payable on the next succeeding business day. Instruments falling due or becoming payable on Saturday are to be presented for payment on the next succeeding business day, except that instrument payable on demand may, at the option of the holder be presented for payment before twelve o’clock noon on Saturday when that entire day is not a holiday. (Sec. 85)

Requisites: (1) By the holder, or by some person authorized to receive payment on his behalf; (2) At a reasonable hour on a business day; (3) At a proper place as herein defined; (4) To the person primarily liable on the instrument, or if he is absent or inaccessible, to any person found at the place where the presentment is made.

HOW MADE (SEC. 145)

General rule: Presentment for acceptance is not necessary in order to render any party to the bill liable. (Sec. 143, last par.)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

When presentment for acceptance necessary: Presentment for acceptance must be made: (1) Where the bill is payable after sight, or in any other case, where presentment for acceptance is necessary in order to fix the maturity of the instrument; or (2) Where the bill expressly stipulates that it shall be presented for acceptance; or (3) Where the bill is drawn payable elsewhere than at the residence or place of business of the drawee.(Sec. 143)

By or on behalf of the holder At a reasonable hour On a business day Before the bill is overdue To the drawee or his agent

Where a bill is addressed to 2 or more drawees who are not partners – presentment must be made to them all XPT. One has authority to accept/refuse for all Where the drawee is dead – presentment may be made to his personal representative Where the drawee has been adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent or has made an assignment for the benefit of creditors – presentment may be made to him or to his trustee or assignee.

Note: It is not necessary to present a check for acceptance because it is not one of those required under Sec. 143. When presentment for acceptance excused: Presentment for acceptance is excused and a bill may be treated as dishonored by non-acceptance in either of the following cases: (1) Where the drawee is dead, or has absconded, or is a fictitious person or a person not having capacity to contract by bill. (2) Where, after the exercise of reasonable diligence, presentment cannot be made. (3) Where, although presentment has been irregular, acceptance has been refused on some other ground. (Sec. 148)

EFFECT OF FAILURE TO MAKE PRESENTMENT (Sec. 144) Failure to make presentment discharges the drawer and all indorsers (Sec. 144). DISHONOR BY NON-ACCEPTANCE When dishonored by non-acceptance: A bill is dishonored by non-acceptance: (1) When it is duly presented for acceptance and such an acceptance as is prescribed by this Act is refused or cannot be obtained; or

PAGE 25

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


(2) When presentment for acceptance is excused and the bill is not accepted. (Sec. 149) Duty of holder: Where a bill is duly presented for acceptance and is not accepted within the prescribed time, the person presenting it must treat the bill as dishonored by nonacceptance or he loses the right of recourse against the drawer and indorsers. (Sec. 150)


loan falls due and which understanding is evidenced by writing the word “memorandum”, “memo” or “mem” on the check. (4) Certified Check – An agreement whereby the bank against whom a check is drawn undertakes to pay it at any future time when presented for payment (Sec. 187) (a) Certification is equivalent to acceptance. (Sec. 187) (b) Where the holder of a check procures it to be accepted or certified, the drawer and all indorsers are discharged from liability. (Sec. 188) (c) A check of itself does not operate as an assignment of any part of the funds to the credit of the drawer with the bank, and the bank is not liable to the holder unless and until it accepts or certifies the check. (Sec. 189)

Effect: When a bill is dishonored by non-acceptance, an immediate right of recourse against the drawer and indorsers accrues to the holder and no presentment for payment is necessary. (Sec. 151)

Promissory Notes

(5) Crossed Check – The NIL is silent with respect to crossed checks, although the Code of Commerce makes reference to such instruments.

A promissory note is: (1) An unconditional promise in writing (2) Made by one person to another (3) Signed by the maker (4) Engaging to pay on demand, or at a fixed or determinable future time (5) A sum certain in money to order or to bearer (6) Where a note is drawn to the maker's own order, it is not complete until indorsed by him. (Sec. 184)

Article 541 of the Code of Commerce states: “The maker or any legal holder of a check shall be entitled to indicate therein that it be paid to a certain banker or institution, which he shall do by writing across the face the name of said banker or institution, or only the words ‛and company.” Under usual practice, crossing a check is done by placing two parallel lines diagonally on the left top portion of the check (State Investment House vs. IAC, 1989).

There are originally 2 parties in a promissory note: (1) Maker – party who executes the written promise to pay. (2) Payee – party in whose favor the promissory note is made payable.

Types: Special and General The crossing may be special wherein between the two parallel lines is written the name of a bank or a business institution, in which case the drawee should pay only with the intervention of that bank or company, or crossing may be general wherein between two parallel diagonal lines are written the words "and Co." or none at all as in the case at bar, in which case the drawee should not encash the same but merely accept the same for deposit (supra).

Checks DEFINITION A check is a bill of exchange drawn on a bank payable on demand. Except as herein otherwise provided, the provisions of this Act applicable to a bill of exchange payable on demand apply to a check. (Sec. 185)

Effects: (1) The check may not be encashed; it may only be deposited with the bank; (2) The check may be negotiated only once to a person who has an account with the bank; and (3) It serves as a warning to a holder that the check has been issued for a definite purpose. (Bataan Cigar vs. CA, 1994)

KINDS (1) Cashier’s Check – One drawn by the cashier of a bank, in the name of the bank against the bank itself payable to a third person. It is a primary obligation of the issuing bank and accepted in advance upon issuance (Tan vs. CA 1994).

PRESENTMENT FOR PAYMENT A check of itself does not operate as an assignment of any part of the funds to the credit of the drawer with the bank. The bank is not liable to the holder, unless and until it accepts or certifies the check. (Sec. 189)

(2) Manager’s Check – A check drawn by the manager of a bank in the name of the bank itself payable to a third person. It is similar to the cashier’s check as to the effect and use.

TIME

In issuing a manager’s check, the bank assumed the liabilities of the acceptor under Sec. 62, NIL (Equitable PCI Bank v. Ong (2006)

When to present? A check must be presented for payment within reasonable time after its issue. EFFECT OF DELAY

(3) Memorandum Check – A check given by a borrower to a lender for the amount of a short loan, with the understanding that it is not to be presented at the bank, but will be redeemed by the maker himself when the

The drawer will be discharged from liability thereon to the extent of the loss caused by the delay. (Sec. 186)

PAGE 26

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Certification of checks: An agreement whereby the bank against whom a check is drawn, undertakes to pay it at any future time when presented for payment Effects: (1) Equivalent to acceptance (Sec. 187) and is the operative act that makes banks liable (2) Assignment of the funds of the drawer in the hands of the drawee (Sec. 189) (3) If obtained by the holder, discharges the persons secondarily liable thereon (Sec. 188) Refusal of drawee bank to certify: The holder has no action against the bank but he has a right of action against the drawer. The drawer in turn has right of action against the bank based on the original contact of deposit between them.

PAGE 27


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

PAGE 28


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

Concept of Insurance

Exception: Although the business is not formally designated as one of insurance and no profit is derived or no separate or direct consideration is received, it is deemed to be doing an insurance business if it undertakes any of the following circumstances: (1) Making or proposing to make, as insurer, any insurance contract (2) Making or proposing to make, as surety, any contract of suretyship as a vocation not as a mere incident to any other legitimate business of a surety (3) Doing any insurance business, including a reinsurance business (4) Doing or proposing to do any business in substance equivalent to any of the above (Sec. 2, par. 2).

CONTRACT OF INSURANCE INSURANCE

A contract of insurance is an agreement whereby one undertakes for a consideration to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising from an unknown or contingent event (Sec. 2, par.1) DEFINITION

(1) (2) (3) (4)


A contract of indemnity Wherein one undertakes for a consideration To indemnify another against loss, damage, or liability Arising from an unknown or contingent event.

Notes: (1) The fact that no profit is derived from the making of insurance contracts or that no separate or direct consideration is received shall not be deemed conclusive to show that the making thereof does not constitute the doing or transacting of an insurance business (Sec. 2). (2) According to the case of Philippine Health Care Providers, Inc. v. CIR (2009), as cited in Sundiang and Aquino: (a) Contracts of law firm with clients whereby in consideration of periodical payments, the law firm promises to represent such clients in all suits for or against them are NOT insurance contracts. (b) A contract by which a corporation, in consideration of a stipulated amount, agrees at its own expense to defend a physician against all suits for damages for malpractice is one of insurance, and the corporation will be deemed as engaged in the business of insurance.

A contingent event is one that is not certain to take place. An unknown event is one which is certain to happen, but the time of its happening is not known. A past event may be a designated event only in cases where it has happened already but the parties do not know about it, e.g., prior loss of a ship at sea. Regulation by the state through a license or certification of authority is necessary since a contract of insurance involves public interest. (White Gold Marine Services vs. Pioneer, 2005) PRE-NEED PLANS

Pre-need plans are contracts for the benefit of the planholders which provide for the performance of future service/s, payment of monetary considerations or delivery of other benefits at the time of actual need or agreed maturity date in exchange for cash or installment amounts, with or without, interest or insurance coverage (Sec. 4b, Pre-Need Code).

Elements of the Contract

(1) It includes life, pension, education, interment and other plans, instruments, contracts or deeds as may in the future be determined by the Commission (2) Pre-need plans are not considered as insurance contracts because even pre-need plans can be insured, thereby implying that the two are not the same. (3) Pre-need plans are considered as securities and used to be governed by the SRC. They are not considered as insurance contracts because it not an insurance for an unknown or contingent event but an event certain happening at a certain time. (4) Not governed by the Insurance Code (IC) (5) It is now governed by the Pre-Need Code of the Philippines. (6) Nevertheless, the Insurance Commissioner has primary and exclusive jurisdiction over claims for benefits involving pre-need plans where the amount of benefits does not exceed P100,000.00 (Sec. 55, Pre-need Code)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Payment of Premium Assumption of Risk: Designated Peril as Cause Risk of Loss or Damage Insurable Interest Risk-Distributing Scheme

Notes: (1) Payment of Premium (a) The consideration of the insurance contract (b) The premium is a ratable consideration (c) Paid by the insured to a general insurance fund (d) For the insurer’s assumption of risk (2) (a) (b) (c)

DOING OR TRANSACTING AN INSURANCE BUSINESS General rule: An insurance business consists in undertaking, for a consideration, to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising from an unknown or contingent event.

Assumption of Risk: Designated Peril as Cause The insurer promises to pay or indemnify such loss In a fixed or ascertainable amount In order to recover from the insurance contract, the cause of the damage or loss must be caused by the perils expressly indicated in the contract

(3) Risk of Loss or Damage (a) The happening of designated events, (b) Either unknown or contingent,

PAGE 29

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

(c) Past or future, (d) Will subject such interest to some kind of loss, (e) Whether in the form of injury, damage, or liability


(a) The obligation of the insurer to pay depends on the happening of an event which is uncertain, or though certain, is to occur at an indeterminate time (Art. 2010, Civil Code) (b) However, it cannot be considered as gambling, wagering, or a contract of chance because the risk is created by the contract itself. (c) When the designated peril does not happen, the insured nevertheless gets the protection against such risk for the period covered by the insurance contract.

(4) Insurable Interest (a) The interest of the insured in a thing or a life (b) Such interest is susceptible of pecuniary estimation (for non-life insurance only, does not apply to life insurance because life does not have monetary value) (c) Thing insured in non-life insurance must be capable of pecuniary estimation because non-life insurance is essentially for indemnification. (d) Cannot be waived (Sec. 25)

Characteristics/Nature of Insurance Contracts

(6) Contract of Indemnity (only for non-life insurance) (a) The insured who has insurable interest over the property is only entitled to recover the amount of actual loss sustained (b) The burden is upon him to establish the amount of such loss. (c) Insurance contracts are not wagering contracts (Sec. 4). (d) General rule: Applies only to property insurance. An insurance contingent on the life of a person is not an indemnity contract because the value of a life is immeasurable. (e) Exception: However, where the basis of the insurable interest of the policy owner on the life of the insured is a commercial relationship (e.g., creditor-debtor, mortgagor/guarantor-mortgagee, support-er and support-ee), then such contract is an indemnity contract.

(1) Consensual (a) It is perfected by the meeting of the minds of the parties. (b) There must be concurrence of offer and acceptance. (c) Unless otherwise stipulated, the policy is not essential to the existence of the contract. It merely evidences the terms and conditions thereof. (Campos)

(7) Risk Distributing Device (a) By paying a pre-determined amount into a general fund out of which payment will be made for an economic loss of a defined type, (b) Each member contributes to a small degree toward compensation for losses suffered by any member of the group.

(2) Voluntary (a) General rule: It is not compulsory. Also, the parties are free to stipulate terms provided they are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order, or public policy. (b) Exceptions: (i) Motor vehicles (Sec. 373-389); (ii) Employees (Art. 168-184, Labor Code); or (iii) As a condition to granting a license (De Leon).

(8) Uberrimae Fides Contract (a) Each party is required to disclose conditions affecting the risk, of which he is aware, or any material fact which the applicant knows and those which he ought to know. (b) Violation of this duty gives the aggrieved party the right to rescind the contract. Where the aggrieved party is the insured, the bad faith of the insurer will preclude it from denying liability on the policy based on breach of warranty. (Campos)

(3) Contract of Adhesion (Fine Print Rule) (a) The contract is presented to the insured already in its printed form by which he either “takes it or leaves it.” (b) Contracts of adhesion are valid. (c) Ambiguity in the insurance contract shall be interpreted liberally in favor of the insured and strictly against the insurer.

(9) Personal Contract (a) Each party takes into consideration the character, conduct and/or credit of the other and in making of the contract, each is enjoined by law to deal with the other in utmost good faith. (Campos) (b) So, the insured cannot assign, before the happening of the loss, his rights under a property policy to others without the consent of the insurer (Sec. 20, 58, 83)

5) Risk-Distributing Scheme (a) This assumption of risk is part of a general scheme to distribute the loss (b) Among a large number of persons (c) Exposed to similar risks. (d) Losses are borne not by the insurer but proportionally by all those who paid premiums.

(4) Executory (a) Once the insured pays the premium, the contract already takes effect. (b) Synallagmatic and reciprocal such that even if the contingent event does not occur, the insurer has still provided protection against the risk.

Classes (1) Marine (2) Fire

(5) Aleatory PAGE 30

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

(3) (4) (5) (6)

INSURANCE CODE

Suretyship Life Compulsory Motor Vehicle Liability Insurance Casualty

MARINE (Secs 99-166) (1) Insurance against the peril of property in, or incidental to, transit (2) Covers not only property exposed to risks of navigation but also those which are exposed to risks not connected with navigation (Campos).

(2) (a) (b) (c)

TWO MAJOR DIVISIONS

(1) Ocean Marine Insurance insures against risk connected with navigation, to which a ship, cargo, freightage, profits or other insurable interest in movable property, may be exposed during a certain voyage or a fixed period of time


extraordinary nature or arise from some overwhelming power which cannot be guarded against by the ordinary exertion of human skill or prudence, as distinguished from the ordinary wear and tear of the voyage and from injuries suffered by the vessel in consequence of her not being unseaworthy (Sundiang and Aquino) Perils of the ship is a loss which in the ordinary course of events, results: From the ordinary, natural and inevitable action of the sea; From ordinary wear and tear of the ship; and From the negligent failure of the ship’s owner to provide the vessel with the proper equipment to convey the cargo under ordinary conditions.

Notes: (1) In the absence of stipulation, the risks insured against are only perils of the sea (Go Tiaco Y Hermanos v. Union Insurance Society of Canton, 40 Phil. 40). (2) However, in an all risk policy, all risks are covered unless expressly excepted. The burden rests on the insurer to prove that the loss is caused by a risk that is excluded (Filipino Merchants Insurance Co. v. CA, 179 SCRA 638, 1989)

(2) Inland Marine Insurance (a) Covers the land or over the land transportation perils of property shipped by railroads, motor trucks, airplanes, and other means of transportation (b) Also covers risks of lake, river or other inland waterway transportation and other waterborne perils outside those covered by ocean marine insurance

LIABILITY OF MARINE INSURER BOTTOMRY V. RESPONDENTIA

Loss may be total or partial. Total loss may be actual or constructive. (1) Actual total loss - irretrievable loss of the thing or any damage which renders the thing valueless to the owner for the purpose for which he held it (2) Constructive total loss - gives the insured the right to abandon the thing insured by relinquishing to the insurer his interest in such thing, entitling the former to recover for a total loss thereof. In turn, the insurer acquires all the rights over the thing insured. (Campos)

Respondentia loan: a loan that is obtained as security for the value of the cargo to be transported and the lender is repaid only if the cargo arrives safely at its destination. Also known as transportation insurance.

ABANDONMENT

Bottomry loan: a loan that is obtained for the value of the vessel on a voyage and the lender is repaid only if the vessel subject of the loan arrives safely at its destination. (1) What is the insurable interest of a shipowner on its bottomed boat? ANS: The difference between the amount of the loan and the value of the boat. (2) Can a bottomed boat be insured by its owner? ANS: Yes if the amount of the loan does not cover the total value of the boat.

Definition Abandonment is the act of the insured by which, after a constructive total loss, he declares the relinquishment to the insurer of his interest in the thing insured (Sec. 138)

RISKS THAT MAY BE INSURED AGAINST

(1) Perils of the sea includes casualties arising from the violent action of the elements and does not cover ordinary wear and tear or other damage usually incident to the voyage. (2) Barratry refers to the willful and intentional act on the part of the master of the crew, in pursuance of some unlawful or fraudulent purpose, without the consent of the owner, and to the prejudice of his interest (e.g., burning the ship, unlawfully selling the cargo) (Campos).

Condition Abandonment must be total and absolute and made within a reasonable time so as to give the insurer the chance to promptly save, if possible, some part of the property abandoned by the insured. Effects (1) Insurer becomes the owner of the thing abandoned. (2) If abandonment is not accepted, then the insured can claim the proceeds or bring the matter before the court.

Note: Barratry may be expressly covered by the policy. When so covered proof of willful and intentional act is necessary. No honest error of judgment or mere negligence, unless criminally gross, can be barratry (Roque v. IAC, 1985).

Characteristics of a valid abandonment (1) There must be an actual relinquishment by the person insured of his interest in the thing insured (Sec. 138) (2) There must be a constructive total loss (Sec. 139) (3) The abandonment be neither partial nor conditional (Sec. 140) (4) It must be made within a reasonable time after receipt of reliable information of the loss (Sec. 141) (5) It must be factual (Sec. 142)

PERILS OF THE SEA V. PERILS OF THE SHIP

(1) Perils of the sea or perils of navigation include only those casualties due to the unusual violence or extraordinary causes connected with navigation. It has been said to include only such losses as are of PAGE 31

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


(6) It must be made by giving notice thereof to the insurer which may be done orally or in writing (Sec 143), and (7) The notice of abandonment must be explicit and must specify the particular cause of the abandonment (Sec. 144) (Sundiang and Aquino)

WHEN CONSIDERED AS INSURANCE

FIRE (Secs 167-173) (1) Insurance against loss by fire, lightning, windstorm, tornado or earthquake and other allied risks, when such risks are covered by extension to fire insurance policies or under separate policies (Sec. 167). (2) Fire must be the proximate cause of the damage or loss (Campos) (3) Fire must be visible heat or light. Combustion which produces heat but not visible glow is not fire (Campos) (4) Fire must be hostile. (Campos)

Notes: (1) A contract of surety becomes an insurance contract only when authorized to function as an insurance business. (2) Thus, corporations organized for the purpose of guaranteeing performance of contractual obligations or the payment of debts of others are deemed insurance corporations (Sec. 185) and are thus subject to all the requirements of the Insurance Code (Campos) (3) What is unique to a contract of suretyship is that when the obligee accepts the bond, the bond becomes valid and enforceable whether or not the premium has been paid by the obligor (Sec. 177), unlike in an insurance contract where payment of premium is necessary for the contract to be valid (Sec. 77) (4) If the obligee has not yet accepted, then payment of premium is still necessary for the contract of suretyship to be valid (Sec. 177)

It shall be deemed as insurance if the surety’s main business is that of suretyship, and not where the contract is merely incidental to any other legitimate business or activity of the surety. (Secs. 175 par. 2 and 3)

RISKS IN FIRE INSURANCE

Hostile v. Friendly Fire Hostile Fire

Friendly Fire

One that escapes from the One that burns in a place place where it was intended where it is intended to burn to burn and ought to be and ought to be OR One which remains completely within its proper place but because of the unsuitable materials used to light it, it becomes inherently dangerous and uncontrollable Insurer is liable

BOND NECESSARY TO SECURE PERFORMANCE OF OBLIGATION

Ex: fire burning in a stove or lamp

If the obligor does not perform the obligation, the bond is forfeited in favor of the obligee and there will be no more need to go to court. (Obligee can go directly and secure performance of the obligation). (NPC v. CA, 1986) LIFE TYPES OF LIFE INSURANCE

Individual Life (Secs. 179-183, 227) (1) Insurance on human lives and insurance appertaining thereto or connected therewith (Sec. 179) (2) May be made payable on the death of the person, or on his surviving a specified period, or otherwise contingently on the continuation or cessation of life

Insurer is not liable

MEASURE OF INDEMNITY

(1) Open policy - only the expense necessary to replace the thing lost or injured in the condition it was at the time of the injury. (2) Valued policy - the parties are bound by the valuation, in the absence of fraud or mistake, similar to marine insurance.

Group Life (Secs. 50, 228) (1) A blanket policy covering a number of individuals who are usually a cohesive group (ex: employees of a company) (2) No medical examination is required of each person insured (in contrast to individual life insurance) but a specified number of persons is usually required before the policy is issued (3) Based on the theory that by the law of averages, only a determinable percentage of the members of the group would die within the contemplated period (4) The policy need not be in printed form and may be typewritten, but the law prescribes the contents of such policy.

Notes: (1) However, where the face value of the policy is less than the agreed valuation, then even in case of total loss, the insured can only recover up to the policy’s face value, which is always the maximum limit of the insurer’s liability. (2) In an open policy, the actual loss, as determined, will represent the total indemnity due the insured except only that the total indemnity shall not exceed the total value of the policy (Devt. Ins. Corp. v. IAC) SURETYSHIP (Secs 175-178)

Industrial Life (Secs. 229-231) (1) It is tailored to suit the needs of the urban industrial class of blue-collar workers (Dobbyns). (2) Purpose: to cover the expenses for the last sickness of the insured and those for his burial (3) Face amount is relatively small.

DEFINITION

An agreement whereby a surety guarantees the performance by the obligor of an obligation or undertaking in favor of the obligee

PAGE 32

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


(4) Shall not lapse for non-payment if due to the failure of the company to send its representative/agent to the insured to collect such premium. (5) A form of life insurance under which (a) The premiums are payable either monthly or oftener; (b) The face amount of insurance provided in any policy is not more than 500 times that of the current statutory minimum daily wage in the City of Manila; and (c) The words "industrial policy" are printed upon the policy (Sec. 229)

(4) Killing by the beneficiary

VARIOUS LIFE INSURANCE PLANS

If there is no surviving relative of the insured, the proceeds should be delivered to the estate of the insured subject to the payment of his debts (Campos)

General rule: The interest of a beneficiary in a life insurance policy shall be forfeited when the beneficiary is the principal accomplice or accessory in willfully bringing about the death of the insured. In such event, the nearest relative of the insured shall receive the proceeds of said insurance if not otherwise disqualified. (Sec. 12)

(1) Ordinary or whole life policy: insurer agrees to pay the face value of the policy upon the death of the insured (2) Limited payment plan: insured agrees to pay premiums only for a specified number of years. If he survives such period, he stops paying any further premium, and when he dies, the insurer pays the proceeds to his beneficiary. (3) Term plan: insurer’s liability arises only upon the death of the insured within the agreed term or period. If the insured survives, the contract terminates and the insurer is not liable. (4) Pure endowment policy: insurer pays the insured if the insured survives a specified period. If the insured dies within the period, the insurer is released from liability and unless the contract otherwise provides, need not reimburse any part of the premiums paid. (5) Endowment policy: If the insured outlives the designated period, he is paid the face value of the policy. If the he dies within said period, the insurer pays the proceeds to the beneficiary. (combination of term policy and pure endowment policy)

Exceptions: (1) Accidental killing (2) Self defense (3) Insanity of the beneficiary at the time he killed the insured (4) Negligence (the Code only refers to a “willful” act) Note: Conviction of the beneficiary is necessary before his interest in the insurance policy is forfeited in favor of the nearest relative of the insured. COMPULSORY MOTOR VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE (1) A species of compulsory insurance that provides for protection coverage that will answer for legal liability for losses and damages for bodily injuries or property damage that may be sustained by another arising from the use and operation of motor vehicle by its owner. (2) The Land Transportation Office shall NOT allow the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle unless such insurance is obtained (Sec. 376, as amended by PD 1455).

RISKS IN LIFE INSURANCE

(1) Death or Survival (a) It may be made payable on the death of the person, or on his surviving a specified period, or otherwise contingently on the continuation or cessation of life. (Campos) (b) Death of the insured must be proven by the beneficiary before the insurer can be made to pay.

NATURE AND PURPOSE

(1) To the extent that motor vehicle insurance is compulsory, it must be a LIABILITY policy (Sec. 373(f)), and the provision making it merely an indemnity insurance contract CANNOT have any effect (Campos) (2) Insurer’s liability is DIRECT and PRIMARY so the insurer need not wait for final judgment in the criminal case to be liable. (Shafer v. Judge, RTC, 1988) (3) Purpose: To give immediate financial assistance to victims of motor vehicle accidents and/or their dependents, especially if they are poor, regardless of the financial capability of motor vehicle owners or operators responsible for the accident sustained (Shafer v. Judge, RTC, 1988)

(2) Suicide (Asked in ‘95) Insurer is liable in the following cases: (a) If committed after two years from the date of the policy’s issue or its last reinstatement; (b) If committed in a state of insanity regardless of the date of the commission unless suicide is an excepted peril. (Sec. 180-A) (c) If committed after a shorter period provided in the policy. (d) Since suicide is contrary to the laws of nature and the ordinary rules of conduct, it is never presumed. The burden of proving lies with the insurer who seeks to avoid liability under a life policy excepting it from coverage (Campos)

CLAIMS

rd

(1) Claimants/victims may be a “passenger” or a “3 party”. The insured may be the party at fault as against claims of third parties (third party liability) or the victim of the contingent event. (2) It applies to all vehicles whether public or private vehicles.

Note: Any stipulation extending the 2-year period is void. (3) At the hands of the law (e.g. by legal execution) (a) It is one of the risks assumed by the insurer under a life insurance policy in the absence of a valid policy exception (Vance)

Note: It is the only compulsory insurance coverage under the Insurance Code.

PAGE 33

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


Indemnity insurance (1) NO action will lie against the insurer unless brought by the insured for loss ACTUALLY sustained and paid by him. (2) Liability of the insurer attaches only AFTER the insured has paid his liability to the third party (Campos)

RELEVANT CLAUSES IN MOTOR VEHICLE INSURANCE

(1) Authorized Driver Clause – A stipulation in a motor vehicle insurance which provides that the driver, other than the insured owner, must be duly licensed to drive the motor vehicle, otherwise the insurer is excused from liability (Villacorta v. IAC, 1980) (2) Theft Clause – the risks insured against in the policy may include theft. If there is such a provision and the vehicle was unlawfully taken, the insurer is liable under the theft clause and the authorized driver clause does not apply. The insured can recover even if the thief has no driver’s license (Perla Compania de Seguros, Inc. v. CA, 1992).

NO ACTION CLAUSE

A requirement in a policy of liability insurance which provides that suit and final judgment be first obtained against the insured; that only thereafter can the person injured recover on the policy. (Guingon vs. Del Monte, 1967) But, the no-action clause CANNOT prevail over the Rules of Court provisions which are aimed at avoiding multiplicity of suits. Parties (the insured and the insurer) may be joined as defendants in a case commenced by the third party claiming under a liability insurance, as the right to relief in respect to the same transactions is alleged to exist (see Sec. 5, Rule 2, ROC; Sec. 6, Rule 3, ROC).

CASUALTY (Sec. 174) (1) Insurance covering loss or liability arising from accident or mishap (2) Not falling exclusively within the scope of other types of insurance such as fire or marine (3) Includes, but not limited to, employer’s liability insurance, workmen’s compensation insurance, public liability insurance, motor vehicle liability insurance, plate glass insurance, burglary and theft insurance, personal accident and health insurance as written by non-life insurance companies, and other substantially similar kinds of insurance (ex: robbery and theft insurance) (4) Governed by the general provisions applicable to all types of insurance plus stipulations in the insurance contract

Insurable Interest DEFINITION An insurable interest is that interest which the law requires the owner of an insurance policy to have in the person or thing insured, the absence of which renders the contract void.

RISKS IN CASUALTY INSURANCE

Intentional vs. Accidental Intentional – Implies the exercise of the reasoning faculties, consciousness and volition. (1) Where a provision of the policy excludes intentional injury, it is the intention of the person inflicting the injury that is controlling. (2) If the injuries suffered by the insured clearly resulted from the intentional act of the third person, the insurer is relieved from liability as stipulated (Biagtan v. the Insular Life Assurance Co. Ltd., 1972).

In general, an insurable interest is that interest which a person is deemed to have in the subject matter insured, where he has a relation or connection with or concern in it, such that the person will derive pecuniary benefit or advantage from the preservation of the subject matter insured and will suffer pecuniary loss or damage from its destruction, termination, or injury by the happening of the event insured against. The existence of an insurable interest gives a person the legal right to insure the subject matter of the policy of insurance. (Lalican v. Insular Life Insurance, 2009)

Accidental – That which happens by chance or fortuitously, without intention or design, which is unexpected, unusual and unforeseen. The terms do not, without qualification, exclude events resulting in damage due to fault, recklessness or negligence of third parties. The concept is not necessarily synonymous with “no fault.” It may be utilized simply to distinguish intentional or malicious acts from negligent or careless acts of man (Pan Malayan Insurance Corp. v. CA).

An insurable interest is one of the most basic and essential requirements in an insurance contract. As such, it may not be waived by stipulation. The insurable interest need not always be pecuniary in nature. RATIONALE (1) As a deterrence to the insured – A policy issued to a person without interest is a mere wager policy or contract and is void for illegality. A wager policy is obviously contrary to public interest. There is a moral hazard in removing insurable interest as a requirement for the validity of an insurance policy in that: (a) It allows the insured to have an interest in the destruction of the subject matter rather than in its preservation. (Myer vs. Grand Lodge)

LIABILITY VS. INDEMNITY

Liability insurance (1) Insurer assumes the obligation to pay the third party in whose favor the liability of the insured arises. (2) Liability of the insurer attaches as soon as the liability of the insured to the third party is established. (3) Insurer is liable regardless of whether or not the insured has paid the third party (Campos)

PAGE 34

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

(b) It affords a temptation or an inducement to the insured, having nothing to lose and everything to gain, to bring to pass the event upon happening of which the insurance becomes payable. (White vs. Equitable Nuptial Benefit Union) (2) As a measure of limit of recovery – The insurable interest is the measure of the upper limit of his provable loss under the contract. Sound public policy requires that insurance should not provide the insured means of making a net profit from the happening of the event insured against.

(b) It will avoid the policy only as to the selling partners or co-owners but not as to others. (c) The rule applies even though it has been agreed that the insurance cease upon alienation of the thing. (6) Automatic transfers of interest in cases in which the policy is so framed that it will inure to the benefit of whomsoever, during the circumstance of the risk, may become the owner of the interest insured (Sec. 57). An exception to the general rule that upon maturity, the proceeds of a policy shall be given exclusively to the proper interest if the person in whose name or for whose benefit it is made. (7) An express prohibition against alienation in the policy. (Art. 1306, CC). Alienation will not merely suspends the contract but avoid it entirely.

WHEN INSURABLE INTEREST SHOULD EXIST Existence of Insurable Interest Required Insurable Interest

Insurance Takes Effect

Life or Health



Property



Intervening Period


Loss Occurs

INSURABLE INTEREST IN LIFE/HEALTH Every person has an insurable interest in the life and health: (1) Of himself, of his spouse and of his children; (2) Of any person on whom he depends wholly or in part for education or support, or in whom he has a pecuniary interest; (3) Of any person under a legal obligation to him for the payment of money, or respecting property or services, of which death or illness might delay or prevent the performance; and (4) Of any person upon whose life any estate or interest vested in him depends (Sec. 10).



Insurable interest over life/health may be lost after the insurance takes effect as long as it exists at the time the insurance takes effect. On the other hand insurable interest property need not exist during the intervening period or from the time between it the policy takes effect and the loss occurs. The alienation of insured property will not defeat a recovery if the insured has subsequently reacquired the property and possesses an insurable interest at the time of loss. (Womble vs. Dubuque Fire &Marine Insurance Co.)

Notes: (1) The person whose life is insured - the cestui que vie. (2) Unless the interest of a person insured is susceptible of exact pecuniary measurement, the measure of indemnity under a policy of insurance upon life or health is the sum fixed in the policy (Sec. 183).

CHANGE OF INTEREST Change of interest means the absolute transfer of the property insured. General rule: A change of interest in the thing insured does not transfer the policy, but suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent until the interest in the thing and the interest in the insurance policy are vested in the same person. (The contract is not rendered void but is merely suspended) (Sec. 58)

Life insurance policies may be divided into two (2) general classes (1) Insurance upon one’s life (2) Insurance upon life of another INTEREST IN ONE’S OWN LIFE

(1) Cestui que vie is the insured himself (2) Insured can designate anyone to be the beneficiary of the policy. (3) Each has unlimited interest in his own life, whether the insurance is for the benefit of himself or another. (4) The beneficiary designated need NOT have any interest in the life of the insured (when person takes out policy on his own life) (5) But if a person obtains a policy on the life of another and names himself as the beneficiary, he must have insurable interest therein (when a person takes out policy on the life of another)

Exceptions: (1) In life, health, and accident insurance (Sec. 20). (2) A change of interest in the thing insured after the occurrence of an injury which results in a loss (Sec. 21) does not affect the policy (3) A change in the interest in one or more of several things, separately insured by one policy (Sec. 22.) A conveyance of one or more things does not affect the policy with respect to the others not so conveyed. (4) A change of interest by will or succession on the death of the insured (Sec. 23) (a) The death of the insured does not avoid insurance policy. (b) It does not affect the policy except his interest passes to his heir or legal representative who may continue the insurance policy on the property by continuing paying premiums. (5) A transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners, or owners in common, who are jointly insured, to the others (Sec. 24). (a) It does not avoid the insurance.

INTEREST IN LIFE OF ANOTHER

General rule: (1) The insured must have pecuniary interest in the life of another. (2) In life insurance, unless based on commercial relationship, the policy owner does not necessarily have “pecuniary interest” on the life of the cestui que vie.

PAGE 35

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

Exception: In Sec. 10 par. (a) (spouse and children), mere relationship is sufficient. Sec. 10(a) does not qualify so children may be legitimate or illegitimate, minors or of legal age, married or not, dependent or not


INTEREST IN HEALTH

Nature of health care agreement The health care agreement was in the nature of non-life insurance, which is primarily a contract of indemnity. Once the member incurs hospital, medical or any other expense arising from sickness, injury or other stipulated contingent, the health care provider must pay for the same to the extent agreed upon under the contract. (Philamcare Health Systems v. CA, 2002)

Notes: (1) Insurable interest MUST be based on moral and legal grounds (2) Such interest exists whenever the insured has a responsible expectation of deriving benefit from the continuation of the life of the other person or of suffering detriment through its termination. (3) No insurable interest in the life of an illegitimate spouse (4) CREDITOR may take out insurance on the life of his debtor. BUT his insurable interest is only up to the amount of the debt. (5) ASSIGNEE is not required to have insurable interest in the life of the insured, for to require such interest in him is to diminish the investment value of the contract to the owner. Note, however, that assignment is different from a change in the designated beneficiary. (6) When the beneficiary is the PRINCIPAL, ACCOMPLICE, or ACCESSORY in willfully bringing about the death of the insured = Interest of beneficiary in life insurance policy is FORFEITED (Sec. 12).

Time of existence of insurable interest General rule: Interest in the life or health of a person must exist when the insurance takes effect (at inception), but need not exist thereafter or when the loss occurs. (Sec. 19) Exceptions: (1) Creditor’s insurance taken on the life of the debtor Insurable interest disappears once the debt has been paid. At this point, the creditor/insured can no longer recover on the policy. (2) Company’s insurance taken on the life of an employee insurable interest disappears once the employee leaves the company, in which case, the company can no longer recover on the policy.

BENEFICIARY

TRANSFER OF POLICY

Interest can be transferred even without the notice to the insurer of such transfer or bequest, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary (Sec. 182).

Definition The person who is named or designated in a contract of life, health, or accident insurance as the one who is to receive the benefits which become payable, according to the terms of the contract, intended to be the recipient of the proceeds or benefits of insurance if the insured risk occurs.

Note: There is no right of subrogation in life insurance, because it is not a contract of indemnity. INSURABLE INTEREST IN PROPERTY

General rule: A person may designate a beneficiary, irrespective of the beneficiary’s lack of insurable interest, provided he acts in good faith and without intent to make the transaction merely a cover for a forbidden wagering contract (De Leon).

NATURE OF INTEREST

An insurable interest in property may consist in: (1) An existing interest; (2) An inchoate interest founded on an existing interest; or (3) An expectancy, coupled with an existing interest in that out of which the expectancy arises (Sec. 14).

Exceptions: Any person who is forbidden from receiving any donation under Article 739 cannot be named beneficiary of a life insurance policy by the person who cannot make any donation to him, according to said article (Art. 2012, Civil Code). (1) Those made between persons who were guilty of adultery or concubinage at the time of the donation; (2) Those made between persons found guilty of the same criminal offense, in consideration thereof; (3) Those made to a public officer or his wife, descendants and ascendants, by reason of his office.

The insurable interest may be in the property itself (e.g., ownership), or any relation thereto (e.g., interest of a trustee or a commission agent), or liability in respect thereof (e.g., interest of a carrier or depository of goods). The relation of the insured to the property is such that he will be benefited by its continued existence or will suffer a direct pecuniary loss by its destruction. An existing interest may be a legal title or equitable title. Examples of those having existing interest are owners as regards their properties, trustees in the case of the seller of property not yet delivered, mortgagors over the property mortgaged, and lessor, lessee and sublessee over the property leased.

Change in beneficiary The insured shall have the right to change the beneficiary he designated in the policy, unless he has expressly waived this right in said policy (Sec. 11). In general, the policy owner can change the beneficiary without the consent of such beneficiary. However, when this right to change is expressly waived, the consent of the beneficiary is necessary. This means that despite the waiver, he can still change the beneficiary provided he obtained the beneficiary’s consent.

An inchoate interest MUST be founded on existing interests. It exists but is incomplete or unripe until the happening of an event. Examples of inchoate interests are the interest of stockholders with respect to dividends in case of profits and

PAGE 36

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

shares in the assets, and the interest of a partner in the properties belonging to the partnership.


The acquiring co-owner has the same interest; his interest merely increases upon acquiring other coowners interest (Sec. 24).

An expectancy must be coupled with an existing interest in that out of which the expectancy arises. For example, a farmer who planted crops has insurable interest over his harvest which can be expected.

TRANSFER OF POLICY

Interest cannot be transferred without the insurer’s consent, because the insurer has approved the policy based on the personal qualifications and insurable interest of the insured.

A mere contingent or expectant interest in anything, not founded on an actual right to the thing, nor upon any valid contract for it, is not insurable (Sec. 16).

Note: When there is an express prohibition against alienation in the policy, in case of alienation, the contract of insurance is not merely suspended but avoided.

A mere hope or expectation of benefit which may be frustrated by the happening of some event uncoupled with any present legal right will not support a contract of insurance.

DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN INSURABLE INTERESTS IN PROPERTY AND IN LIFE

Life

Property Extent

Notes: (1) A son has no insurable interest over the property of his father because such is just a mere expectancy and has no legal basis before he inherits such property. (2) Insurable interest in property may be based on a perfected contract of sale, vesting an equitable title even before delivery of the goods. (Filipino Merchants Ins. Co. v. CA, 1989) (3) When the seller retains ownership only to insure that the buyer will pay its debt, the risk of loss is borne by the buyer. Insurable interest in property does not imply a property interest in, or a lien upon, or possession of the subject matter of the insurance, and neither ownership nor a beneficial interest is requisite to the existence of such an interest. Anyone has an insurable interest in property who derives a benefit from its existence or would suffer loss from its destruction. (Gaisano Cagayan Ins. v. Insurance Co. of North America, 2006)

Limited to actual value of the Unlimited (save in life interest thereon insurance effected by a creditor on the life of the debtor – amount of debt only) Existence Must exist when insurance takes effect when the loss occurs, need not exist in meantime

the Must exist at the time the and insurance takes effect, BUT BUT need not exist thereafter the

Expectation of benefit to be derived Must have legal basis

Need NOT have legal basis

Interest of beneficiary Must have insurable interest Need not have insurable over the thing insured interest over the life of the insured if the insured himself secured the policy. But if the insurance was obtained by the beneficiary, the latter must have insurable interest over the life of the insured. (Sundiang and Aquino)

MEASURE OF INSURABLE INTEREST IN PROPERTY

Being a contract of indemnity, the measure of insurable interest in property is the extent to which the insured might be damnified by the loss of injury thereof (Sec. 17). The insured cannot recover a greater value than that of his actual loss because it would be a wagering policy contrary to public policy and void. Thus, a mortgagor has an insurable interest equal to the value of the mortgaged property and a mortgagee, only to the extent of the credit secured by the mortgage.

DOUBLE INSURANCE AND OVER INSURANCE DOUBLE INSURANCE

TIME OF EXISTENCE

General rule: Interest in property insured must exist BOTH at inception and at time of loss, but not in the meantime (Sec. 19).

Definition Double insurance exists where the same person is insured by several insurers separately in respect to the same subject and interest (Sec. 93).

Exceptions (i.e., automatic transfer of interest): (1) A change in interest over the thing insured AFTER the loss contemplated. The insured may sell the remains without prejudice to his right to recover (Sec. 21). (2) A change of interest in one or more several distinct things, separately insured by one policy. This does not avoid the insurance as to the others (Sec. 22). (3) A change in interest by will or succession upon the death of the insured (Sec. 23). (4) A transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners, or owners in common who are jointly insured.

Requisites (1) The same person is insured; (2) Two or more insurers insuring separately; (3) The same subject matter; (4) The same interest insured; and (5) The same risk or peril insured against Notes:

PAGE 37

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

(1) It is not prohibited under the law, unless the policy contains a stipulation to the contrary. Usually, insurance policy contains “other insurance clause” which requires disclosure of other existing insurance policy. In such case, non-disclosure will avoid the policy. Such clause is intended to prevent over insurance and thus avert the perpetration of fraud. (2) Double insurance is not prohibited unless specifically excepted by an insurer. Even if not prohibited it should not amount to over-insurance. If over-insured, then the insurers will pay pro-rata (or whatever is stated in contract) in case of loss.

are contracts of insurance (Philamlife vs. Auditor General, 1958). DOUBLE INSURANCE VS. REINSURANCE Double Insurance Reinsurance Same interest Insurer insurer

Different interest

remains

as

the Insurer becomes the insured in relation to the reinsurer

Insured is a party in interest The original insured is not a in the insurance contracts party in the reinsurance contract Property matter

Rules for payment of claims Section 94 enunciates the principle of contribution which requires each insurer to contribute RATABLY to the loss or damage considering that the several insurances cover the same subject matter and interest against the same peril. If the loss is greater than the sum total of all the policies issued, each insurer is liable for the amount of his policy. Double Insurance


is

the

subject The original insurer's risk is the subject matter

Insured has to give his Insured’s consent consent necessary

is

not

MULTIPLE OR SEVERAL INTERESTS ON SAME PROPERTY The Insurance Code recognizes that both the mortgagor and mortgagee have each separate and distinct insurable interest in the mortgaged property and that they may take out separate policies with the same or different insurance companies. Consequently, insurance taken by one on his own name only does not inure to the benefit of the other.

Over Insurance

Amount of insurance MAY Amount of insurance OR MAY NOT EXCEED the EXCEEDS the value of the value of the insured’s insured’s insurable interest insurable interest

The mortgagor may insure the mortgaged property in its full value but the mortgagee can insure it only in the extent of the debt secured.

There are always several There may be one or more insurers insurer(s) RE-INSURANCE

When a mortgagee insures his own interest in the mortgaged property without reference to the right of the mortgagor, mortgagee is entitled to the proceeds of the policy in case of loss to the extent of his credit. (1) If the proceeds are more than the total amount of credit, then mortgagor has no right to the balance. If the proceeds are equal to the credit, then insurer is subrogated to the mortgagee’s rights and mortgagee can no longer recover the mortgagor’s indebtedness. (2) If the proceeds are less than the credit, then the mortgagee may recover from the mortgagor the deficiency. Upon payment, the insurer is subrogated to the rights of the mortgagee against the mortgagor to the extent of the amount paid.

Definition A contract of reinsurance is one by which an insurer procures a third person to insure him against loss or liability by reason of such original insurance (Sec. 95). Nature Reinsurance is a contract of indemnity (Sec. 97). It has been referred to as “an insurance of an insurance.” There is no relationship between the reinsurer of the reinsurance contract and the insured under the original insurance contract (See Sec. 98). Original Insurance Contract vs. Reinsurance Contract The original insurance contract is separate and distinct from the reinsurance contract. Insurance contract is independent from the reinsurance contract. (1) Insurance - indemnity against damages (2) Reinsurance- indemnity against liability

When a mortgagor takes out an insurance for his own benefit, he can only recover from the insurer but the mortgagee has a lien on the proceeds by virtue of the mortgage. A mortgagor can make the proceeds payable to or assigned to the mortgagee.

Reinsurance Treaty vs. Reinsurance Policy A reinsurance treaty is an agreement between two insurance companies whereby one agrees to cede and the other to accept reinsurance business pursuant to provisions specified in the treaty (De Leon).

OPEN MORTGAGE OR LOSS PAYABLE MORTGAGE CLAUSE

A mortgage that can be paid-off prior to maturity without penalty; mortgagee is the beneficiary for insurance taken by mortgagor (insurance taken by mortgagor but payable or assigned to the mortgagee).

A reinsurance policy is a contract of indemnity one insurer makes with another to protect the first insurer from a risk it has already assumed.

The insurance is on the interest of the mortgagor; so, he does not cease to be a party to the contract. His acts, prior to the loss, which would otherwise avoid the insurance, affects the mortgagee, even if the property is in the hands of the latter. (Secs. 8 and 9)

Reinsurance treaties and reinsurance policies are not synonymous. Treaties are contracts for insurance; policies PAGE 38

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

In case of loss, the mortgagee is entitled to recover up to the extent of his credit, and should the amount he recovers be equal to the amount of his credit, then the debt is extinguished.


not become binding until the policy is delivered and the first premium is paid. (De Leon) DELAY IN ACCEPTANCE

Delay in acting on the application does not constitute acceptance even though the insured has forwarded his first premium with his application. (Perez v. Court of Appeals, 2000)

UNION MORTGAGE OR STANDARD MORTGAGE CLAUSE

The mortgagee may perform the acts of mortgagor. Subsequent acts of the mortgagor or owner do NOT prejudice the mortgagee's interest.

When there is delay in acceptance due to the negligence of the insurance company which takes unreasonably long time before the application is processed and the applicant dies, the contract is not perfected. In this case, the insurer can be liable for DAMAGES in accordance with the “TORT THEORY”. The insurance business is imbued with public interest, thus it is the duty of the insurer to act with reasonable promptness in acting on applications submitted to it.

When a mortgagee insured his own interest and a loss occurs, he is entitled to recover on the insurance. However, he may no longer claim against the mortgagor, for his claim is discharged up to the amount the insurer has paid him (Palileo vs. Cosio, 1955).

Perfection of the Contract of Insurance

The measure of damage is the face value of the policy. In life insurance, the proceeds will inure to the insured’s estate and not to the beneficiary. Insurer is liable under the policy because its delay in formally accepting/denying the application and payment of premium is taken as an implied acceptance.

A policy of insurance is different from the contract of insurance. The policy is the formal written instrument evidencing the contract of insurance entered into between the insured and the insurer.

Offer – when the insured submits an application to the insurer Acceptance – when the insurer approves the application Effectivity – upon payment of first premium, provided there has been an approval of the application.

FORM OF INSURANCE POLICY No policy, certificate or contract of insurance shall be issued or delivered within the Philippines unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner.

DELIVERY OF POLICY

No application form shall be used with, and no rider, clause, warranty or endorsement shall be attached to, printed or stamped upon such policy, certificate or contract unless the form of such application, rider, clause, warranty or endorsement has been approved by the Commissioner.

Delivery is the act of putting the insurance policy (the physical document) into the possession of the insured. (1) The delivery can be a proof of the acceptance of the insurer of the offer of the insured. It is not, however, a pre-requisite of a valid contract of insurance. (2) Actual manual delivery is not necessary for the validity of the contract. Constructive delivery may be sufficient. (3) The contract may be completed without delivery depending on the intention of the parties.

OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE/CONSENSUAL An insurance contract is consensual. It is therefore perfected by mere consent. Consent is manifested by the meeting of the offer and the acceptance upon the object or the cause which are to constitute the contract.

Note: There are conflicting views as to whether delivery to the agent of the insurance company can be considered delivery to the insured. In Bradley vs. New York Life Insurance (1921), it was held that the agent of the insurance company is not the agent of the insured thus delivery to the agent cannot be considered delivery to the insured. In New York Life Insurance Co. vs. Babcock (1898), however, it was held that actual delivery to the insured is not essential to give the policy binding effect as long as the insured has complied with every condition required of him.

A contract of insurance must be assented to by both parties, either in person or through their agents and so long as an application for insurance has not been either accepted or rejected, it is merely a proposal or an offer to make a contract. (Perez vs. CA, 2000) (1) Submission of application, even with premium payment is a mere offer on the part of the applicant, and does not bind the insurer. (2) An insurance contract is also not perfected where the applicant dies before the approval of his application or it does not appear that the acceptance of the application ever came to the knowledge of the applicant. (3) An acceptance made by letter shall not bind the person making the offer except from the time it came to his knowledge. (Enriquez vs. Sun Life Assurance Co., 1920)

PREMIUM PAYMENT DEFINITION

An insurance premium is the agreed price for assuming and carrying the risk, that is, the consideration paid an insurer for undertaking to indemnify the insured against the specified peril.

The parties may impose additional conditions precedent to the validity of the policy as a contract as they see fit. Usually, it is stipulated in the application that contract shall

Where only one premium is paid for several things not separately insured, making for only one cause or PAGE 39

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

consideration, the insurance contract is entire or indivisible, not severable or divisible, as to the items insured. (Oriental Assurance Corp. vs. CA, 1991)


EXCUSES FOR NON-PAYMENT OF PREMIUM

(1) Fortuitous events - Fortuitous events which render payment by the insured wholly impossible will NOT prevent forfeiture of the policy when the premium remains unpaid. In other words, it is NOT an excuse. (2) War - Non-payment of premiums occasioned by war causes an insurance to be not merely suspended, but is completely abrogated. It would be unjust to allow the insurer to retain the reserve value of the policy, which is the excess of the premiums paid over the actual risk carried during the years when the policy had been in force in time of war (Constantino vs. Asia Life Insurance Co., 1950).

General rule: No insurance policy issued or renewal is valid and binding until actual payment of the premium. Any agreement to the contrary is void. (Sec. 77) Exceptions: (1) In case of life and industrial life whenever the grace period provision applies (Sec. 77) (2) Where there is an acknowledgment in the contract or policy of insurance that the premium has already been paid (Sec. 78) (3) Where there is an agreement to grant the insured credit extension for the payment of the premium despite full awareness of Sec. 77 (UCPB v. Masagana Telemart, 2001) (4) Where there is an agreement allowing the insured to pay premium in installment and partial payment has been made at the time of the loss (Makati Tuscany vs. CA, 1992) (5) Where the parties are barred by estoppel (UCPB v. Masagana, 2001)

NON-DEFAULT OPTIONS IN LIFE INSURANCE The law requires that in case of life or endowment insurance, the policy shall contain a provision specifying the options to which the policy holder is entitled in the event of default in a premium payment after 3 full annual premiums shall have been paid (Sec 227(f)). CASH SURRENDER VALUE (CSV)

The cash value or cash surrender value is an amount which the insurance company holds in trust for the insured to be delivered to him upon demand. When the company’s credit for advances is paid out of the cash value or cash surrender value, that value and the company’s liability is diminished (Manufacturer’s Life Insurance v. Meer, 1951)

AUTHORITY OF AGENT TO RECEIVE PREMIUM

Where an insurer authorizes an insurance agent or broker to deliver a policy to the insured, it is deemed to have authorized said agent to receive the premium in its behalf. The insurer is also bound by its agent’s acknowledgment of receipt of payment of premium (American Home Assurance Co. vs. Chua, 1999).

It is the amount that the insured is entitled to receive if he surrenders the policy and releases his claims upon it. The right to CSV accrues only after 3 premium payments. The Insured is given the right to claim the amount less than the reserve, reduced by surrender charge.

EFFECT OF PAYMENT BY POSTDATED CHECK

The payment of premium by a postdated check at a stated maturity subsequent to the loss is insufficient to put the insurance into effect.

Rationale: Premium is uniform throughout your lifetime, but the risk is varied (higher risk when you’re older, low when you’re young) thus the cost of protection is more expensive during the early years of the policy

But payment by a check bearing a date prior to the loss, assuming availability of funds, would be sufficient even if it remains unencashed at the time of the loss.

ALTERNATIVES TO OBTAINING CASH SURRENDER VALUE

(1) Extended insurance/term insurance – The insured, after having paid 3 full annual premiums, is given the right to have the policy continued in force from date of default for a time either stated or equal to the amount of the CSV, taken as a single premium. (a) Face value of the policy remains the same but only within the term. (b) It is also called “term insurance” where CSV is taken as a single premium (no further payments) to extend the policy for a fixed period of time. (c) Reinstatement allowed if made within the term purchased; no reinstatement after the lapse of the term purchased

The subsequent effects of encashment would retroact to the date of the instrument and its acceptance by the creditor (Vitug) EFFECT OF NON-PAYMENT OF PREMIUM

(1) Non-payment of first premium – Nonpayment of the first premium unless waived (Sec. 78) prevents the contract from becoming binding notwithstanding the acceptance of the application nor the issuance of the policy. (2) Non-payment of subsequent premiums – Nonpayment of subsequent premiums does not affect the validity of the contracts unless, by express stipulation, it is provided that the policy shall in that event be suspended or shall lapse. (a) In case of individual life insurance, the policy holder is entitled a grace period of either 30 days or 1 month within which payment of any premium after the first may be made (Secs. 277(a), 228(a)). (b) In cases of industrial life insurance, the grace period is 4 weeks, and where premiums are paid monthly, either 30 days or 1 month (Sec 230(a)).

(2) Paid-up insurance – Where insurance is “paid-up,” the insured who has paid 3 full annual premiums is given the right, upon default, to have the policy continued from the date of default for the whole period of insurance without further payment of premiums. It is also called “reduced paidup” because in effect the policy, terms and conditions are the same but the face value is reduced to the “paid-up” value.

PAGE 40

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


Rescission of Insurance Contracts

(3) Automatic Premium Loan (APL) –Upon default, insurer lends/advances to the insured without any need of application on his part, amount necessary to pay overdue premium, but not to exceed the CSV of the policy. (a) It only applies if requested in writing by the insured either in the application or at any time before expiration of the grace period. In effect, the insurance policy continues in force for a period covered by the payment. (b) After the period, if insured still does not resume paying his premiums, policy lapses, unless CSV still remains. If there is still CSV, APL continues until CSV is exhausted. (c) This is beneficial for the insured because it continues the contract and all its features with full force and effect.

CONCEALMENT DEFINITION

A neglect to communicate that which a party knows and ought to communicate (Sec. 26) Requisites: (1) A party knows a fact which he neglects to communicate or disclose to the other. (2) Such party concealing is duty bound to disclose such fact to the other. (3) Such party concealing makes no warranty of the fact concealed. (4) The other party has not the means of ascertaining the fact concealed. (5) The fact concealed is material.

REINSTATEMENT OF A LAPSED POLICY OF LIFE INSURANCE Reinstatement of a lapsed life insurance policy is not a nondefault option. It does not create a new contract, but merely revives the original policy so insurer cannot require a higher premium than the amount stipulated in the contract. It does not apply to group/industrial life insurance. Requisites: (1) Must be exercised within 3 years from date of default (2) Insured must present evidence of insurability satisfactory to the insurer (3) Pay all back premiums and all indebtedness to the insurer (4) CSV must not have been duly paid to insured nor the extension period expired (5) Application must be filed during the insured’s lifetime (Andres vs. Crown Life Insurance, 1958)

Note: May be committed by either the insurer or the insured (Qua Chee Gan v. Law Uion & Rock Ins. Co.; Fieldmen's Insurance Co., Omc. vs. Vda. de Songco)

REFUND OF PREMIUMS

Exception: When the concealment is made by the INSURED in relation to the falsity of a WARRANTY, the non-disclosure must be intentional and fraudulent in order that the contract may be rescinded (Sec. 29)

PROOF OF FRAUD IN CONCEALMENT

General rule: Fraud need not be proven in order to prove concealment. Good faith is not a defense in concealment. Sec. 27 clearly provides that “A concealment whether intentional or unintentional entitles the injured party to rescind a contract of insurance.”

WHEN RETURN OF PREMIUMS CAN BE MADE

(1) If the thing insured was never exposed to the risks insured against (Sec. 79(a)) – whole premium should be refunded (2) When the contract is voidable due to the fraud or misrepresentation of insurer or his agent (Sec. 81) – whole premium should be refunded (3) When by any default of the insured other than actual fraud, the insurer never incurred any liability under the policy (Sec. 81) – whole premium should be refunded (4) Contract is voidable because of the existence of facts of which the insured was ignorant without his fault (Sec. 81) – whole premium should be refunded (5) Where the insurance is for a definite period and the insured surrenders his policy (Sec. 79(b)) – the portion of the premium that corresponds to the unexpired time at a pro rata rate, unless a short period rate has been agreed upon and appears on the face of the policy should be return (6) Ratable return of the premium when there is overinsurance by several insurers (Sec. 82) – the return premiums should be proportioned to the amount by which the aggregate sum insured in all the policies exceeds the insurable value of the thing at risk (7) When rescission is granted due to the insurer’s breach of contract

TEST OF MATERIALITY

Determined not by the event, but solely by the probable and reasonable influence of THE FACTS upon the party to whom the communication is due, in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed contract, or in making his inquiries (Sec. 31) The test is in the effect which the knowledge of the fact in question would have on the contract. It need not increase the risk or contribute to any loss or damage suffered. It is sufficient if the knowledge of it would influence the party in making the contract (De Leon). EFFECTS OF CONCEALMENT

General rule: Concealment vitiates the contract and entitles the insurer to rescind (Sec. 27), EVEN IF the death or loss is due to a cause not related to the concealed matter. Exceptions: (1) Incontestability Clause – The clause stipulates that the policy shall be incontestable after a stated period. (a) Requisites (Sec. 48): (i) The policy is a life insurance policy

PAGE 41

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

(ii) It is payable on the death of the insured; and it has been in force during the lifetime of the insured for at least two years from its date of issue or of its last reinstatement. The incontestability clause is a mandatory provision in life policies (Sec. 227(b)). (b) Exceptions: (i) That the person taking the insurance lacked insurable interest; (ii) That the cause of the death of the insured is an excepted risk; (iii) That the premiums have not been paid; (iv) That the conditions of the policy relating to military or naval service have been violated; (v) That the fraud is vicious; (vi) That the beneficiary failed to furnish proof of death or to comply with any condition imposed by the policy after the loss has happened; (vii) That the action was not brought within the time specified within the policy of insurance; (2) Concealment AFTER contract has become effective – Concealment must take place at the time the contract is entered into in order that the policy may be avoided. Information obtained after the perfection of the contract is no longer necessary to be disclosed by the insured, even if the policy has not been issued. (3) Waiver or estoppel (4) Marine insurance (Sec. 110) – Concealment of certain matters as provided in Sec. 110 will merely exonerate the insurer from losses resulting from the risk concealed.

information required of the applicant concerning the previous conditions of health and diseases suffered. (Sunlife v. Sps. Bacani, 1995). Where matters of opinion or judgment are called for, answers made in good faith and without intent to deceive will not avoid the policy even though they are untrue. Reason: The insurer cannot simply rely on those statements. He must make further inquiry. (Philamcare Health Systems v. CA (2002)) The fact that the matter concealed had no bearing on the cause of death is NOT important because it is well settled that the insured need not die of the disease he had failed to disclose to the insurer. It is sufficient that his nondisclosure misled the insurer in forming his estimates of the risks of the proposed policy or in making inquiries. (Sunlife Assurance v. CA (1995)) MATTERS WHICH NEED TO BE DISCLOSED EVEN IN THE ABSENCE OF INQUIRY

(1) Which are material to the contract and (2) As to which the party with the duty to communicate makes no warranty, and (3) Which the other party does not have the means of ascertaining (Sec. 28). Note: If the applicant is aware of the existence of some circumstance which he knows would influence the insurer in acting upon his application, good faith requires him to disclose that circumstance, though unasked (Vance)

CONCEALMENT IN MARINE INSURANCE VS. ORDINARY INSURANCE

Marine Insurance


Ordinary Private Insurance

The fact of being a “mongoloid” is a material fact that needs to be disclosed. (Great Pacific Life v. CA (1979))

Required disclosure Stricter: state the “exact and Substantial truth whole truth”

MATTERS WHICH DO NOT NEED TO BE DISCLOSED

(1) Matters already known to the insurer (Sec. 30(a)). (2) Matters each party are bound to know (Sec. 30(b); Sec. 32). (3) Matters of which the insurer waives communication (Sec. 30(c); Sec. 33). (4) Matters which prove or tend to prove the existence of a risk excluded by a warranty and which are not otherwise material (Sec. 30(d)) (5) Matters which relate to a risk excepted the policy, and which are not otherwise material. (Sec. 30(e)) (6) Information of the nature or amount of the interest of one insured EXCEPT if inquired upon by the insurer, except if required by Section 51 (Sec. 34) (7) Matters of opinion. (Sec. 35)

Effect of concealment Concealment of certain Any kind of concealment will matters as provided in Sec. not make the insurer liable. 110 will not entirely avoid the contract but will merely exonerate the insurer from losses resulting from the risk concealed - national character of the insured - liability of the thing insured to capture and detention - liability to seizure from breach of foreign laws of trade - want of necessary documents - use of false and simulated papers

Mere possibility of previous hypertension is not enough to establish concealment (Great Pacific Life v. CA, 1999). Each party to a contract of insurance is bound to know all the general causes which are open to his inquiry, equally with that of the other, and which may affect the political or material perils contemplated; and all general usages of trade (Sec. 32). MISREPRESENTATION/OMISSIONS

NON-MEDICAL INSURANCE

The waiver of medical examination in a non-medical insurance contract renders even more material the

DEFINITION

Representations are factual statements made by the PAGE 42

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

INSURED at the time of, or prior to, the issuance of the policy (Sec. 37), that give information to the insurer and induce him to enter into the insurance contract.


(c) he explains to the insurer that he does so on the information of others. Notes: (1) A representation CANNOT qualify an express provision or an express warranty of insurance (Sec. 40) because a representation is not part of the contract but only a collateral inducement to it. However, it may qualify as an IMPLIED WARRANTY. (2) There is fraud and misrepresentation when another person took the place of the insured in the medical examination (Eguaras v. Great Eastern, 1916). (3) The insurer is not entitled to rescission for misrepresentation of age if the birth date on the policy leads to the conclusion that the insured is beyond the age covered and yet insurer continued to accept payment and had issued the policy. Insurer deemed estopped (Edillon v. Manila Bankers Life, 1982).

Note: May be committed only by the insured. KINDS OF REPRESENTATIONS

(1) Affirmative – Any allegation as to the existence or nonexistence of a fact when the contract BEGINS. (2) Promissory – Any promise to be fulfilled AFTER the contract has come into existence; or any statement concerning what is to happen during the existence of the insurance (Sec. 39). A promissory representation is substantially a condition or warranty (De Leon). (3) Oral or written (Sec. 36) REQUISITES OF MISREPRESENTATION

(1) The insured stated a fact which is untrue. (2) Such fact was stated with knowledge that it is untrue and with intent to deceive or which he states positively as true without knowing it to be true and which has a tendency to mislead. (3) Such fact in either case is material to the risk.

CONCEALMENT VS. MISREPRESENTATION

Life

Property Who may commit

May be committed by either Committed only by insured. insured or insurer

PROOF OF FRAUD IN MISREPRESENTATION

Like in concealment, fraud or intent is not essential to entitle the insurer to rescind on the ground of misrepresentation (Sec. 45).

Act involved

TEST OF MATERIALITY

Same as in concealment (Sec. 46). WHEN MISREPRESENTATION IS MADE

(1) There is false representation if the matter is true at the time it was made/represented but false at the time the contract takes effect. (Sec. 44) (2) Corollarily, there is no false representation if the matter is true at the time the contract takes effect although false at the time it was made/represented. (3) A representation is false when the facts fail to correspond with its assertions or stipulations (Sec. 44). (4) A representation must be presumed to refer to the date on which the contract goes into effect (Sec.42). Thus, a representation may be altered or withdrawn before the insurance is effected but not afterwards (Sec. 41)

Passive form

Active form

Insured withholds information of material facts from the insurer; he maintains silence when he ought to speak

Insured makes erroneous statements of facts with the intent of inducing the insurer to enter into the insurance contract

Materiality Determined by the same rules Effect Same effects on the part of the insured; insurer has right to rescind Injured party is entitled to rescind a contract of insurance on ground of concealment or false representation, whether intentional or not.

EFFECT OF MISREPRESENTATION

BREACH OF WARRANTIES

General rule: The injured party is entitled to rescind from the time when the representation BECOMES false. (Sec. 45)

PURPOSE OF WARRANTIES

To eliminate potentially increasing hazards which may either be due to the acts of the insured or to the change of the condition of the property.

Exceptions: (1) Incontestability clause; (2) Misrepresentation AFTER contract takes effect; (3) Waiver, made by acceptance of insurer of premium payments despite knowledge of the ground for rescission (Sec. 45); (4) A representation of the expectation, belief, opinion, or judgment of the insured, although false, and even if material to the risk (Philamcare Health Systems, Inc. v. CA, 2002). (5) Representation by insured based on information obtained from third persons (not his agent), PROVIDED: (a) the insured has no personal knowledge of the facts; (b) he believes them to be true; and

KINDS OF WARRANTIES

(1) Express – contained in the policy or clearly incorporated therein as part thereof; warranty as a fact (Sec. 71). (2) Implied – deemed included in the contract although not expressly mentioned; applicable in marine insurance only (ex: implied warranty of seaworthiness of the vessel) (3) Affirmative warranty – one which asserts the existence of a fact or condition at the time it is made (Sec. 68). (4) Promissory warranty or executory warranty – one where the insured stipulates that certain facts or conditions PAGE 43

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

pertaining to the risk shall exist or that certain things with reference thereto shall be done or omitted. It is in the nature of a condition subsequent (Secs.72, 73).


(out of the 11 hydrants required), it still issued the insurance policies and received the premiums (Qua Chee Gan v. Law Union, 1955). WARRANTY VS. REPRESENTATION

CHARACTERISTICS

A warranty may relate to the past, the present, the future, or to all of these (Sec. 68).

Warranty

Representation Nature

No particular form of words is necessary to create a warranty (Sec. 69).

Part of the contract

Mere collateral inducement Form

EFFECT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY

Written on the policy, May be written in the policy actually or by reference or may be oral

Material warranty General rule: Violation of a material warranty, or other material provision of the policy, on the part of EITHER the insured or insurer, entitles the other to RESCIND (Sec. 74).

Materiality Presumed material

Breach of a material warranty may either be: (1) Without fraud: (a) If breach without fraud is made by the insured after the inception of the contract, the insurer will be exonerated from the time it occurs. (b) If breach without fraud is made during the inception, it will prevent the policy from taking effect (Sec. 76). (2) With fraud: The policy is avoided ab initio.

Must be material

proved

to

be

Compliance Must be strictly complied Requires only substantial with truth and compliance Applicability of incontestability clause Does not apply

Exceptions: (1) Loss occurs BEFORE the time of performance of the warranty (Sec. 73) (2) The performance becomes UNLAWFUL (Sec. 73) (3) Performance becomes IMPOSSIBLE (Sec. 73) (4) Waiver or estoppel (Pioneer Insurance & Surety Corp. v. Yap, 1974; Prudential Guarantee and Assurance, Inc. v. Trans-Asia Shipping Lines, 2006)

Applies

Claims Settlement and Subrogation CONCEPT OF LOSS

Immaterial warranty General rule: Breach of an immaterial provision does not avoid the policy (Sec. 75).

DEFINITION

Exception: When the parties STIPULATE that violation of a particular provision (though immaterial) shall avoid the policy. In effect, the parties converted the immaterial provision into a material one (Sundiang and Aquino).

CAUSES OF LOSS

Loss in insurance law embraces injury or damage (Bonifacio Bros v. Mora, 1967).

WARRANTIES IN FIRE INSURANCE

Entitles the insurer to rescission if: (1) Use or condition of a thing insured is limited by the policy (2) Insured alters the use of condition without the consent of the insurer (3) Alteration is by means within the control of the insured (4) Alteration increased the risk (increase of hazard or chance of loss). (5) Alteration is actual and substantial (Sec. 168) Notes: (1) A condition in the policy which requires insured to disclose to the insurer of any insurance that, if violated by the insured, would ipso facto avoid the contract (Pioneer v. Yap, 1974). (2) Insurer is barred by waiver (or estoppel) to claim violation of the so-called hydrants warranty when, despite knowing fully that only 2 fire hydrants existed

Remote Cause

Proximate Cause

Immediate Cause

An event preceding another in a causal chain, but separated from it by other events

“that cause, which, in natural and continuous sequence, unbroken by any efficient intervening cause, produces the injury, and without which the result would not have occurred” (Vda. De Bataclan v. Medina (1957))

The cause, NOT the proximate cause, immediately preceding the loss.

LIABILITY FOR LOSS

Loss for which the insurer is liable

Loss for which the insurer is not liable

Loss the proximate cause of Loss by insured’s willful act which is the peril insured PAGE 44

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


full details of the loss, computations of the amounts claimed, and supporting evidence, together with a demand or request for payment (De Leon).

against (Sec. 84) Loss the immediate cause of Loss due to connivance of which is the peril insured the insured (Sec. 87) against EXCEPT where the proximate cause is an excepted peril;

In fire insurance Required

Loss through negligence of Loss where the excepted insured EXCEPT where there peril is the proximate cause. was gross negligence amounting to willful acts; and

In other types of insurance Not required

Failure to give notice will Failure to give notice will not defeat the right of the exonerate the insurer, insured to recover. UNLESS there is a stipulation in the policy requiring the insured to do so.

Loss caused by efforts to rescue the thing from peril insured against if, during the course of the rescue, the thing is exposed to a peril not insured against, which permanently deprives the insured of its possession in whole or in part (Sec. 85)

PROOF OF LOSS

(1) The formal evidence given the insurance company by the insured or claimant, under a policy, of: the occurrence of the loss, the particulars thereof, and the data necessary to enable the company to determine its liability and the amount. (2) Purpose: To give the insurer information by which he may determine the extent of his liability but also; to afford him a means of detecting any fraud that may have been practiced upon him, and to operate as a check upon extravagant claims.

REQUISITES FOR RECOVERY FROM INSURANCE

(1) The insured must have insurable interest in the subject matter; (2) That interest is covered by the policy; (3) There must be a loss; and (4) The loss must be one for which the insurer is liable. (5) Notice and proof of loss must be given if policy is fire insurance or when the same is stipulated in the policy.

FORM OF PROOF

(1) Like a notice of loss, in the absence of any stipulation in the policy, proof may be given orally or in writing. (2) The insured is not bound to give such proof as would be necessary in a court of justice; but it is sufficient for him to give the best evidence which he has in his power at the time (Sec. 89).

NOTICE AND PROOF OF LOSS NOTICE OF LOSS

General rule: Timely compliance with the notice and proof of loss is a condition precedent to the right to recover if the policy is fire insurance, or when the same is stipulated in the policy.

(1) The formal notice given the insurer by the insured or claimant under a policy of the occurrence of the loss insured against. (2) Purpose: To apprise the insurance company so that it may make proper investigation and take such action as may be necessary to protect its interest. (3) In fire insurance, an insurer is exonerated, if notice thereof be not given to him by an insured, or some person entitled to the benefit of the insurance, WITHOUT UNNECESSARY DELAY (Sec. 88). (4) However, it has been held that formal notice of loss is not necessary if insurer has actual notice of loss already.

Exceptions: (1) For both notice and proof of loss, waiver of: (a) Defects – Defects in a notice or proof of loss may be waived when such defects, which the insured might remedy, are not specified, without unnecessary delay, to him as ground of objection by the insurer (Sec. 90). (b) Delay in presentation – Delay in the presentation to an insurer of notice or proof of loss is waived if caused by any act of his, or if he omits to take objection promptly and specifically upon that ground. (2) For notice of loss, a formal notice of loss is not necessary if insurer has actual notice of loss already.

FORM OF NOTICE

(1) In the absence of any stipulation in the policy, notice may be given orally or in writing. (2) The notice of loss may be in the form of an informal or provisional claim containing a minimum of information as distinguished from a formal claim which contains the GUIDELINES ON CLAIMS SETTLEMENT HOW CLAIMS ARE PAID/SETTLED

Claims Maturity

Life Insurance Either (Sec. 180): (1) Upon death of the person insured; PAGE 45

Non-Life Insurance (1) Upon happening of event insured against

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

(2) Upon his surviving a specific period; (3) Otherwise contingently on the continuance or cessation of life Delivery of Proceeds


(2) Event must occur within the period specified in policy, otherwise insurer has no liability

General rule: Immediately upon maturity of policy.

(1) Within 30 days after: (a) Proof of loss is received by insurer; and (b) Ascertainment of loss or damage is Exception: If payable in INSTALLMENTS made either by agreement between or as an ANNUITY, when such the insured and insurer or by installments or annuities become due arbitration (2) If ascertainment is not made within 60 IF MATURITY IS UPON DEATH: days after such receipt by insurer of Within 60 days after presentation of claim proof of loss, then loss or damage and filing of proof of death of insured. shall be paid within 90 days after such receipt.

Effect of Refusal or Failure to pay claim (1) Entitles beneficiary to COLLECT Same as in life insurance within time prescribed: INTEREST on the proceeds of policy (1) In case of litigation, it is the duty of the for the duration of the delay at rate of Commissioner or the Court to TWICE ceiling prescribed by the determine whether the claim has been monetary board (unless refusal to pay unreasonably denied or withheld. is based on ground that claim is (2) Failure to pay any such claim within fraudulent) the time prescribed shall be considered (2) In case damages are awarded, this prima facie evidence of unreasonable includes attorney’s fees and other delay in payment. expenses incurred due to delay (plus the interest) UNFAIR CLAIMS SETTLEMENT; SANCTIONS

(3) The cause of action accrues from the rejection of the claim of the insured and not from the time of loss. Notes: (1) The period for filing claim is not merely a procedural requirement. (a) It is essential for the prompt settlement of claims as it demands for suits to be brought while the evidence as to the origin and cause of the loss or destruction has not yet disappeared. (b) It is a condition precedent to the insurer’s liability or a resolutory cause in case the action is not filed by the insured within the stipulated period. (2) The Insurance Commissioner has the power to adjudicate disputes relating to an insurance company’s liability to an insured under a policy. A complaint or claim filed with such official is considered an “action” or “suit” the filing of which would have the effect of tolling the suspending the running of the prescriptive period. (3) A stipulation stating that the prescriptive period for filing an action is 1 year from the happening of loss is void (it should be from the time of rejection). As the stipulation is void and is upon a written contract, the time limit is 10 years from the time the cause of action accrues.

No insurance company doing business shall refuse, without just cause, to pay or settle claims arising under coverages provided by its policies, nor shall any such company engage in unfair claim settlement practices (Sec. 241). Instances of unfair claims settlement done by an insurance company (Sec. 241 (1)): (1) KNOWINGLY misrepresenting to claimants pertinent facts or policy provisions regarding coverage; (2) FAILING to acknowledge with reasonable promptness pertinent communications regarding claims arising under its policies; (3) FAILING to adopt and implement reasonable standards for the prompt investigation of claims arising under its policies; (4) NOT attempting in good faith to effectuate prompt, fair and equitable settlement of claims submitted in which liability has become reasonably clear; (5) COMPELLING policyholders to institute suits to recover amounts due under its policies by offering without justifiable reason substantially less than the amounts eventually recovered in suits brought by them. PRESCRIPTION OF ACTION

Rules: (1) In the ABSENCE of an express stipulation in the policy, it being based on a written contract, the action prescribes in 10 years (Article 1144, Civil Code). (2) However, the parties may validly agree on a shorter period provided it is not less than one year from the time the cause of action accrues (Sec. 63).

SUBROGATION

Definition Subrogation is a process of legal substitution; the insurer, after paying the amount covered by the insurance policy, steps into the shoes of the insured and avails himself of the latter's rights that exist against the wrongdoer at the time of loss.

Note: In motor vehicle insurance, action prescribes in one year.

The insurer becomes entitled to recover from the wrongdoer the amount of the loss it may have paid to the insured. PAGE 46

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE


(b) Contract of Suretyship (c) Reinsurance Contract (d) Membership Certificate issued by members of mutual benefit association (Sec. 416) (2) Primary and Exclusive Jurisdiction – claim for benefits involving pre-need plans where the amount of benefits does not exceed P100,000 (Sec. 55, Pre-Need Code) (3) For the purpose of proceeding under Sec. 416, the Commissioner or any officer thereof designated by him, is empower to administer oaths and affirmation, subpoena witnesses, compel their attendance, take evidence and require the production of any books, papers, documents or contracts or other records which are relevant or material to the inquiry (Sec. 416, par. 9)

Note: Subrogation applies only to property insurance and non-life insurance. Rights transferred (1) The rights to which the subrogee succeeds are the same as, but not greater than, those of the person for whom he is substituted (Sulpicio Lines, Inc. v. First LepantoTaisho Insurance Corporation, 2005; Lorenzo Shipping Corporation v. Chubb and Sons, Inc., 2004). (2) He cannot acquire any claim, security, or remedy the subrogor did not have. In other words, a subrogee cannot succeed to a right not possessed by the subrogor. A subrogree in effect steps into the shoes of insured and can recovery only if the insured likewise could have recovered (Sulpicio Lines, Inc. v. First Lepanto-Taisho Insurance Corporation, 2005; Lorenzo Shipping Corporation v. Chubb and Sons, Inc., 2004)

Note: However, the Insurance Commission has no jurisdiction to decide the legality of a contract of agency entered into between an insurance company and its agent. The same is not covered by the term “doing or transacting insurance business” under Section 2, neither is it covered by Sec. 416 which grants the Commissioner adjudicatory powers (Sundiang and Aquino).

Rules: (1) Subrogation does NOT require a formal assignment or an express stipulation in the policy, because it is a legal effect of payment by the insurer. (2) The insurer can only recover from the third person what the insured COULD HAVE recovered. Thus, there can be no recovery if the insurer voluntarily paid even if the loss is not covered by the policy. (3) The insured can no longer recover from the offended party what was paid to him by the insurer but he can recover any deficiency IF the damages suffered are more than what was paid. The deficiency is not covered by the right of subrogation. (4) The insurer must present the policy as evidence to determine the extent of its coverage (Wallen Phil. Shipping v. Prudential Guarantee, 2003).

Revocation of certificate of authority The Certificate of Authority issued to the domestic or foreign company by the Commission may be revoked or suspended by the Insurance Commissioner for any of the following grounds (Sec. 247): (1) The company is in an unsound condition; (2) That it has failed to comply with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it; (3) That its condition or method of business is such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or its policyholders; (4) That its paid-up capital stock, in the case of a domestic stock corporation, or its available cash assets, in the case of a domestic mutual company, or its security deposits, in the case of a foreign company, is impaired or deficient; (5) That the margin of solvency required of such company is deficient.

Instances where there is no right of subrogation (1) Where the insured by his own act releases the wrongdoer or third party liable for the loss or damage; (2) Where the insurer pays the insured the value of the loss without notifying the carrier who has in good faith settled the insured’s claim for loss; (3) Where the insurer pays the insured for a loss or risk not covered by the policy (Pan Malayan Insurance Company v. CA, 1997). (4) In life insurance (5) For recovery of loss in excess of insurance coverage (De Leon).

Note: The Commissioner is authorized to suspend or revoke all certificates of authority granted to such insurance company, its officers and agents, and no new business shall thereafter be done by such company or for such company by its agents in the Philippines while such suspension, revocation, or disability continues or until its authority to do business is restored by the Commissioner.

By the act of Manila Mahogany issuing a release claim to SMC, the right of Zenith against SMC is nullified since the insurer can be subrogated to only such rights as the insured may have, should the insured, after receiving payment from the insurer, release the wrongdoer who causes the loss, the insurer loses his rights against him. But in such a case the insurer will be entitled to recover from the insured whatever it has paid, unless it was made with the consent of the insurer. (Manila Mahogany v. CA).

Before restoring such authority, the Commissioner shall require the company concerned to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts and disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three years. Liquidation of insurance company If the company is determined by the Commissioner to be insolvent or cannot resume business, he shall, if public interest requires, order its liquidation (Sec. 249).

THE INSURANCE COMMISSIONER

Jurisdiction and adjudicatory or quasi-judicial powers (1) Concurrent jurisdiction (with regular civil courts) – cases where any single claim does not exceed P100,000 involving liability arising from the following: (a) Insurance Contract

Note: This should be distinguished from a situation where a conservator is appointed when the Commissioner finds that a company is in a state of continuing inability or PAGE 47

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

INSURANCE CODE

unwillingness to maintain a condition of solvency or liquidity adequate to protect the policyholders and creditors. The conservator will take charge of the management of the insurance company (Sec. 248).

PAGE 48


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

PAGE 49


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

Common Carriers


by the carrier that he has held out to the general public as his business or occupation. If the undertaking is a single transaction, not a part of the general business or occupation engaged in, as advertised and held out to the general public, the individual or the entity rendering such service is a private, not a common, carrier. The question must be determined by the character of the business actually carried on by the carrier, not by any secret intention or mental reservation it may entertain or assert when charged with the duties and obligations that the law imposes.

Art. 1732, Civil Code. Common carriers are persons, corporations, firms or associations engaged in the business of carrying or transporting passengers or goods or both, by land, water, or air, for compensation, offering their services to the public. Elements of a common carrier (Art 1732): (1) Persons, corporations, firms, associations (2) Engaged in the business of carrying or transporting (3) Passengers, goods, OR both (4) By land, water, air (5) For compensation (6) Offering their services to the public The provision (Art. 1732) makes no distinction between one whose principal business activity is the carrying of persons or goods or both, and one who does such carrying only as an ancillary activity (in local idiom, as “a sideline”) (Fabre v. CA, 1996).

Applying these considerations to the case before us, there is no question that the Pereñas as the operators of a school bus service were: (a) engaged in transporting passengers generally as a business, not just as a casual occupation; (b) undertaking to carry passengers over established roads by the method by which the business was conducted; and (c) transporting students for a fee. Despite catering to a limited clientèle, the Pereñas operated as a common carrier because they held themselves out as a ready transportation indiscriminately to the students of a particular school living within or near where they operated the service and for a fee. (Sps. Teodoro v. Sps. Nicolas, 2012)

Private respondent is properly characterized as a common carrier even though he merely "back-hauled" goods for other merchants from Manila to Pangasinan, although such back-hauling was done on a periodic or occasional rather than regular or scheduled manner, and even though private respondent's principal occupation was not the carriage of goods for others. There is no dispute that private respondent charged his customers a fee for hauling their goods; that fee frequently fell below commercial freight rates is not relevant here (De Guzman v. CA, 1988).

What are the elements of a common carrier? (1) It is engaged in the business of carrying or transporting goods for others as a public employment, or passengers, or both (2) It is for compensation or for hire (3) It is operated generally as a business and not as a casual occupation (4) It holds out to the public as ready to engage in the transportation of goods of the kind to which his business is confined (cf. First Phil. Industrial v. CA)

Art. 1732 makes no distinction: (1) Between one whose principal business activity is the carrying of persons or goods or both, and one who does such carrying only as an ancillary activity (Fabre vs. CA) (2) Between a person or enterprise offering transportation service on a regular or scheduled basis and one offering such service on an occasional, episodic, or unscheduled basis (3) Between a carrier offering its services to the general public and who offers services or solicits business only from a narrow segment of the general population (De Guzman vs. CA)

A public carrier shall remain as such, notwithstanding the charter of the whole or portion of a vessel by one or more persons, provided the charter is limited to the ship only, as in the case of a time-charter or voyage-charter. It is only when the charter includes both the vessel and its crew, as in a bareboat or demise, that a common carrier becomes private, at least insofar as the particular voyage covering the charter-party is concerned. Indubitably, a shipowner in a time or voyage charter retains possession and control of the ship, although her holds may, for the moment, be the property of the charterer. (Planters Products v CA, 1993) Carriers: Persons or corporations who undertake to transport or convey goods, property or persons, from one place to another, gratuitously or for hire, and are classified as private or special carriers, and common or public carriers (Agbayani, Commercial Laws of the Philippines)

There is no doubt that petitioner, engaged in the business of transporting petroleum products from the Batangas refineries via pipeline, is a common carrier. It is engaged in the business of transporting or carrying goods, i.e. petroleum products, for hire as a public employment. It undertakes to carry for all persons indifferently, that is, to all persons who choose to employ its services, and transports the goods by land and for compensation. The fact that petitioner has a limited clientele does not exclude it from the definition of a common carrier. (First Phil. Industrial v. CA, 1998)

Private Carriers: Those who transport or undertake to transport in a particular instance for hire or reward (Agbayani) Differences between a Common Carrier and a Private Carrier (Agbayani): Life Property

The true test for a common carrier is not the quantity or extent of the business actually transacted, or the number and character of the conveyances used in the activity, but whether the undertaking is a part of the activity engaged in

Availability

PAGE 50

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

cautious persons, with a due regard for all the circumstances (Art 1755) (3) Does not require common carriers to exercise all the care, skill, and diligence of which the human mind can conceive. Nor such as will free the transportation of passengers from all possible perils.

Holds himself out in Agrees in some special case common, that is, to all with some private individual persons who choose to to carry for hire employ him, as ready to carry for hire Binding effect Bound to carry all who offer and tender reasonable compensation for carrying them

Note: A common carrier is not an insurer of the safety of the passengers and is not absolutely and at all events to carry them safely and without injury

Not bound to carry for any reason, such goods as it is accustomed to carry, unless it enters into a special agreement to do so

REASONS

Nature of business of common carriers and the exigencies of public policy

Diligence required Extraordinary diligence


LIABILITIES OF COMMON CARRIERS

Ordinary diligence

GOODS

General rule: (1) Common carriers are responsible for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods. (Art. 1734) In fact, they are liable even in those cases where the cause of the loss or damage is unknown. (Agbayani) (2) Cause of action: breach of contract (culpa contractual) (3) Moreover, if the goods are lost, destroyed, or deteriorated, common carriers are presumed to have been at fault or to have acted negligently. (Art 1735)

Governing law (1) Civil Code Obligations and contracts (2) Code of Commerce and special laws: If not regulated by the Civil Code, rights and obligations of common carriers shall be governed by the Code of Commerce and by special laws (Art.1766 Civil Code). (3) Law of the country to which the goods are to be transported, IF regarding liability for loss, destruction, or deterioration of goods

Exceptions (common carrier not liable): (1) If loss, destruction, or deterioration of goods is due to any of the following causes: (a) Flood, storm, earthquake, lightning, or other natural disaster or calamity; (b) Act of the public enemy in war, whether international or civil; (c) Act of omission of the shipper or owner of the goods; (d) The character of the goods or defects in the packing or in the containers; (e) Order or act of competent public authority (Art. 1734).

Regulation A public service, therefore Not subject to regulation as subject to regulation a common carrier

Note: The presumption of negligence DOES NOT apply in these cases.

DILIGENCE REQUIRED OF COMMON CARRIERS

(2) If it exercised extraordinary diligence.

Art. 1733, Civil Code. Common carriers, from the nature of their business and for reasons of public policy, are bound to observe extraordinary diligence in the vigilance over the goods and for the safety of the passengers transported by them, according to all the circumstances of each case.

PASSENGERS

General rule: Art. 1755, Civil Code. A common carrier is bound to carry the passengers safely as far as human care and foresight can provide, using the utmost diligence of very cautious persons, with a due regard for all the circumstances.

Such extraordinary diligence in the vigilance over the goods is further expressed in Articles 1734, 1735, and 1745, Nos. 5, 6, and 7, while the extraordinary diligence for the safety of the passengers is further set forth in Articles 1755 and 1756.

Art. 1756, Civil Code. In case of death of or injuries to passengers, common carriers are presumed to have been at fault or to have acted negligently, unless they prove that they observed extraordinary diligence as prescribed in Arts 1733 and 1755.

DILIGENCE REQUIRED

Extraordinary diligence DEFINITION

Common carriers are also responsible for the safety of the following persons (even though they are not passengers): (1) For the safety of members of the crew or the complement operating the carrier since any omission, lapse, or neglect on the part of the common carrier will certainly result to the damage, prejudice, injuries, and

(1) Rendering service with the greatest skill and utmost foresight (Agbayani) (2) Carrying passengers safely as far as human care and foresight can provide, using the utmost diligence of very

PAGE 51

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS


even death to all aboard, passengers and crew members alike. (PAL v. CA) (2) For the safety of stevedores if their presence onboard was called for by the contract of carriage. It is liable if it knew and consented to the stevedores’ presence. (Sulpicio v. CA (1995))

occurrence of the flood, storm or natural disaster (Art 1739) (c) The common carrier must not have negligently incurred delay (Art 1740) (d) The shipment was at shipper’s risk (Art 361, Code of Commerce)

Exception (common carrier not liable): If accident was caused by force majeure AND the common carrier exercised extraordinary diligence in safeguarding the passengers (or goods) (Bachelor Express v. CA)

The master is responsible for the safe & proper stowage of the cargo, & there is no doubt that by the general maritime law he is bound to secure the cargo safely under deck. If the master carries goods on deck without the consent of the shipper, he does it at his own risk. If they are damaged or lost in consequence of their being thus exposed, he cannot protect himself from responsibility by showing that they were damaged or lost by the dangers of the seas. But, when the shipper consents to his goods being carried on deck, he takes the risks of any damage or loss sustained as a consequence of their being so carried. (Martini v. Macondray, 1919).

PRINCIPLES AS TO THE LIABILITY OF COMMON CARRIERS

(1) The liability of a carrier is contractual and arises upon breach of its obligation. There is breach if it fails to exert extraordinary diligence according to all circumstances of each case; (2) A carrier is obliged to carry its passenger with the utmost diligence of a very cautious person, having due regard for all the circumstances; (3) A carrier is presumed to be at fault or to have acted negligently in case of death of, or injury to, passengers, it being its duty to prove that it exercised extraordinary diligence; and (4) The carrier is not an insurer against all risks of travel. (Isaac v. A.L. Ammen)

Fire may not be considered a natural disaster/calamity. This must be so as it arises almost invariably from some act of man or by human means. It does not fall within the category of an act of God unless caused by lightning or by other natural disaster/calamity. It may even be caused by the actual fault or privity of the carrier. (Eastern Shipping Lines v. IAC, 1987)

PRESUMPTION OF NEGLIGENCE

The mere proof of delivery of goods in good order to a carrier, and of their arrival at the place of destination in bad order, makes out a prima facie case against the carrier, so that if no explanation is given as to how the injury occurred, the carrier must be held responsible. It is incumbent upon the carrier to prove that the loss was due to accident or some other circumstance inconsistent with its liability. (Ynchausti Steamship v Dexter and Unson, 1920)

If between the delay or refusal of the common carrier to transport the goods and the loss of the goods due to an act of God there intervened the shipper’s negligence, thus causing a break in the chain of causation between the act of God which caused the loss and the common carrier’s fault, the act of God is the proximate cause of the loss and the carrier’s delay or refusal is merely the remote cause. (Agbayani) (In this case, the natural disaster is not the only cause, therefore, not an exempting cause)

KABIT SYSTEM

(2) Act of public enemy

A person who has been granted a certificate of public convenience allows another person who owns motor vehicles to operate under such franchise for a fee.

Requisites: (a) The act of the public enemy was committed either in an international or civil war. (Art. 1734) (b) The act of the public enemy must have been the proximate and only cause (Art. 1739) (c) The common carrier must exercise due diligence to prevent or minimize the loss before, during and after the act of the public enemy causing the loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods. (Art. 1739)

Thus, for the safety of passengers and the public who may have been wronged and deceived through the baneful kabit system, the registered owner of the vehicle is not allowed to prove that another person has become the owner so that he may be thereby relieved of responsibility.

(Lim v. CA, 2002)

(3) Act or omission of shipper Requisites: The act or omission of the shipper must have been the proximate and only cause of the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods (Art 1741)

Vigilance over Goods EXEMPTING CAUSES (1) Natural disaster

If the shipper owner merely contributed to the loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods, the proximate cause being the negligence of the common carrier, then the common carrier shall be liable for the damages, which shall, however, be equitably reduced. (Art 1741)

Requisites: (a) The natural disaster must have been the proximate and only cause of the loss (Art 1739) (b) The common carrier must exercise DUE diligence to prevent or minimize the loss before, during and after the

(4) Character of goods PAGE 52

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

Requisites: (1) The loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods is due to the character of the goods or defects in the packing or in the containers (Art 1739) (2) The common carrier must exercise due diligence to forestall or lessen the loss (Art 1739)


The carrier is exempt from liability if he is able to prove that the loss or destruction of the merchandise was due to accident and force majeure and not to fraud, fault, or negligence on the part of the captain or owner of the ship. (Tan Chiong Sian v Inchausti, 1912) ABSENCE OF DELAY

Damage

Art. 1740, Civil Code. If the common carrier negligently incurs in delay in transporting the goods, a natural disaster shall not free such carrier from responsibility.

When to Claim

Ascertainable from package Upon receipt of goods Not ascertainable package

from Within 24 hours upon receipt

DUE DILIGENCE TO PREVENT OR LESSEN THE LOSS

Art. 1739, Civil Code. In order that the common carrier may be exempted from responsibility, the natural disaster must have been the proximate and only cause of the loss. However, the common carrier must exercise due diligence to prevent or minimize loss before, during and after the occurrence of flood, storm or other natural disaster in order that the common carrier may be exempted from liability for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods. The same duty is incumbent upon the common carrier in case of an act of the public enemy referred to in Article 1734, No. 2.

What happens if no claim has been brought after the lapse of the periods mentioned or after payment of transportation charges? NO claim shall be admitted against the carrier with regard to the condition in which the goods transported were delivered. (Art 366, Code of Commerce) If the fact of improper packing is known to the carrier or its servants or apparent upon ordinary observation, but (the carrier) accepts the goods notwithstanding such condition, it is not relieved of liability for loss or injury resulting therefrom. (Southern Lines v. CA, 1962)

Art. 1742, Civil Code. Even if the loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods should be caused by the character of the goods or the faulty nature of the packing or of the containers the common carrier must exercise due diligence to forestall or lessen the loss.

(5) Order of competent authority Requisites: (1) There must be an order or act of competent public authority (Art. 1734) (2) The said public authority must have had the power to issue the order. (Art. 1743)

(1) For natural disasters and acts of public enemy, the common carrier must have exercised due diligence to prevent or minimize loss, before, during and after the occurrence of flood, storm, or other natural disaster to be exempted from liability. (Art. 1739) (2) For faulty nature of packing or loss due to the character of the goods, the common carrier must have exercised due diligence to forestall or lessen the loss. (Art. 1742)

The intervention of the municipal officials was not of a character that would render impossible the fulfillment by the carrier of the obligation. The petitioner was not duty bound to obey the illegal order (of the mayor) to dump into the sea the scrap iron. There is absence of sufficient proof that the issuance of the order was attended with such force or intimidation as to completely overpower the will of petitioner’s employees. The mere difficulty in the fulfillment of the obligation is not force majeure. (Ganzon v. CA, 1988)

CONTRIBUTORY NEGLIGENCE Art. 1741, Civil Code. If the shipper or owner merely contributed to the loss destruction or deterioration of the goods the proximate cause thereof being the negligence of the common carrier the latter shall be liable in damages which however shall be equitably reduced.

J. Melencio-Herrera, Dissent: Through the “order or act” of “competent public authority,” the performance of the contractual obligation was rendered impossible. Apparently, the seizure and destruction of the goods was done under legal process or authority so that petitioner should be freed from responsibility.

DURATION OF LIABILITY When is the contract of transportation perfected? A contract of transportation is consensual in nature; therefore it is perfected upon the meeting of the minds of the parties. (Art. 1305)

REQUIREMENT OF ABSENCE OF NEGLIGENCE

Art. 1739, Civil Code. In order that the common carrier may be exempted from responsibility, the natural disaster must have been the proximate and only cause of the loss.

But, when does the carrier’s extraordinary responsibility begin? It only begins from the time the goods are unconditionally placed in the possession of and received by the carrier for transportation. (Art 1736)

Loss of a ship and of its cargo, in a wreck due to accident or force majeure must, as a general rule, fall upon their respective owners, except in cases where the wrecking or stranding of the vessel occurred through the malice, carelessness, or lack of skill on the part of the captain or because the vessel put to sea is insufficiently repaired and prepared.

When does carrier’s extraordinary responsibility terminate? (1) Until the same are delivered actually or constructively by the carrier to the consignee or to the person who has a right to receive them (without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1738) (Art. 1736) PAGE 53

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

(2) When the goods are temporarily unloaded or stored in transit by reason of the exercise of the shipper or owner of his right of stoppage in transitu. (3) Until the consignee has been advised of the arrival of the goods at the place of destination and has had reasonable opportunity to remove them or dispose of them from the warehouse of the carrier at the place of destination (Art. 1738)


because of a custom regulation and it is unfair that it be made responsible for what may happen during the interregnum. (Lu Do v. Binamira, 1957) TEMPORARY UNLOADING OR STORAGE

Art. 1737, Civil Code. The common carrier's duty to observe extraordinary diligence over the goods remains in full force and effect even when they are temporarily unloaded or stored in transit unless the shipper or owner has made use of the right of stoppage in transitu.

DELIVERY OF GOODS TO COMMON CARRIER

The liability of the carrier as common carrier begins with the actual delivery of the goods for transportation and not merely with the formal execution of a receipt or bill of lading; the issuance of a bill of lading is not necessary to complete delivery and acceptance. Even where it is provided by statute that liability commences with the issuance of the bill of lading actual delivery and acceptance are sufficient to bind the carrier. (Compania Maritima v. Insurance Company of North America, 1964).

General rule: Extraordinary diligence over the goods remains even when the goods are temporarily unloaded or stored in transit. Exception: Shipper or owner made use of the right of stoppage in transit. What is stoppage in transitu? Act by which the unpaid vendor of goods stops their progress and resumes possession of them constructively while they are in the course of transit from him to the purchaser, and not yet actually delivered to the latter (Agbayani)

The liability and responsibility of the carrier commence on their actual delivery to, or receipt by the carrier or an authorized agent, of the goods. (Cia. Maritima v. Insurance Co. of NA)

Basis: Art. 1530, Civil Code. When the buyer of the goods becomes insolvent, the unpaid seller who has parted with the possession of the goods at any time while they are in transit, may resume the possession of the goods as he would have had if he had never parted with the possession.

ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE DELIVERY

Art. 1736, Civil Code. The extraordinary responsibility of the common carrier lasts from the time the goods are unconditionally placed in the possession of and received by the carrier for transportation until the same are delivered actually or constructively by the carrier to the consignee or to the person who has a right to receive them without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1738.

When the right of stoppage in transitu is exercised, the common carrier holds the goods in the capacity of an ordinary bailee or warehouseman upon the theory that the exercise of the right of stoppage in transitu terminates the contract of carriage. Hence, only ordinary diligence is required. (Agbayani)

Delivery: Unconditionally placing the goods in the possession of the carrier AND the carrier receiving them for transportation

STIPULATION FOR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

What if the goods are only for safekeeping? If the common carrier received the goods not for transportation but only for safekeeping, where the goods have already been purchased by the shipper and ready for transportation, then the duty of extraordinary diligence has not yet started.

Art. 1747, Civil Code. If the common carrier, without just cause, delays the transportation of the goods or changes the stipulated or usual route, the contract limiting the common carrier's liability cannot be availed of in case of the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods.

What does “unconditionally placed” in Art. 1736 mean? It means that the shipper cannot get the goods back from the common carrier at will.

Can limitation on liability be availed of by a common carrier which delayed the transportation of the goods or changed the stipulated or usual route? (1) If with just cause, YES. (2) If without just cause, NO.

To whom should the goods be delivered? (1) Consignee (2) Person who has a right to receive them - includes agents, brokers, and the like.

Art. 1748, Civil Code. An agreement limiting the common carrier's liability for delay on account of strikes or riots is valid.

Delivery of the cargo to the customs authorities is not delivery to the consignee or “to the person who has a right to receive them” as contemplated in Article 1736 because in such case the goods are still in the hands of the Government and the owner cannot exercise dominion over them. However, the parties may agree to limit the liability of the carrier considering that the goods still have to go through the inspection of the customs authorities before they are actually turned over to the consignee. This is a situation where we may say that the carrier losses control of the goods

Art. 1752, Civil Code. Even when there is an agreement limiting the liability of the common carrier in the vigilance over the goods, the common carrier is disputably presumed to have been negligent in case of their loss, destruction or deterioration.

PAGE 54

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

VOID STIPULATIONS


Less than Extraordinary diligence

Art. 1744, Civil Code. A stipulation between the common carrier and the shipper or owner limiting the liability of the former for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods to a degree less than extraordinary diligence shall be valid, provided it be: (1) In writing, signed by the shipper or owner; (2) Supported by a valuable consideration other than the service rendered by the common carrier; and (3) Reasonable, just and not contrary to public policy.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO FIXED AMOUNT

Art. 1749, Civil Code. A stipulation that the common carrier's liability is limited to the value of the goods appearing in the bill of lading, unless the shipper or owner declares a greater value, is binding.

Art. 1745, Civil Code. Any of the following or similar stipulations shall be considered unreasonable, unjust and contrary to public policy: (1) That the goods are transported at the risk of the owner or shipper; (2) That the common carrier will not be liable for any loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods; (3) That the common carrier need not observe any diligence in the custody of the goods; (4) That the common carrier shall exercise a degree of diligence less than that of a good father of a family, or of a man of ordinary prudence in the vigilance over the movables transported; (5) That the common carrier shall not be responsible for the acts or omission of his or its employees; (6) That the common carrier's liability for acts committed by thieves, or of robbers who do not act with grave or irresistible threat, violence or force, is dispensed with or diminished; (7) That the common carrier is not responsible for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of goods on account of the defective condition of the car, vehicle, ship, airplane or other equipment used in the contract of carriage.

Art. 1734, Civil Code. A contract fixing the sum that may be recovered by the owner or shipper for the loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods is VALID if it is reasonable and just under the circumstances and has been fairly and freely agreed upon. There are two requisites that must be fulfilled in order that the liability of PAL be limited according to the stipulations behind the ticket stub: (1) That the contract is just and reasonable under the circumstances (2) That the contract was fairly and freely agreed upon (Art. 1750) The fact that the conditions are printed at the back of the ticket stub in letters so small that they are hard to read would not warrant the presumption that plaintiff was aware of those conditions such that he had “fairly and freely agreed” to those conditions. (Shewaram v. PAL, 1966) While the passenger had not signed the plane ticket, he is nevertheless bound by the provision thereof; such provisions have been held to be part of the contract of carriage and valid and binding upon the passenger regardless of the latter’s lack of knowledge or assent to the regulation. It is what is known as a contract of adhesion wherein one party imposes a ready-made form of contract on the other. The one who adheres to the contract is in reality free to reject it entirely. A contract limiting liability upon an agreed valuation does not offend against the policy of the law forbidding one from contracting against his own negligence. (Ong Yiu v. CA, 1979)

Art. 1751, Civil Code. The fact that the common carrier has no competitor along the line or route, or a part thereof, to which the contract refers shall be taken into consideration on the question of whether or not a stipulation limiting the common carrier's liability is reasonable, just and in consonance with public policy. Kinds of Stripulations Limiting Liability (Heacock v. Macondray, 42 Phil 205) Exempting the common carrier from any and all liability for loss or damage occasioned by its own negligence

Void

Providing for an unqualified limitation of such liability to an agreed stipulation

Void

Limiting the liability of the common carrier to an agreed valuation unless the shipper declares a higher value and pays a higher rate of freight

Valid

Valid, if 3 requisites in Art. 1744 are satisfied

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN ABSENCE OF DECLARATION OF GREATER VALUE

Art. 1749, Civil Code. A stipulation that the common carrier's liability is limited to the value of the goods appearing in the bill of lading unless the shipper or owner declares a greater value is binding. LIABILITY FOR BAGGAGE OF PASSENGERS (Asked in 1997 and 1998) What is a passenger baggage? Things that a passenger will bring with him consistent with a temporary absence from where he lives. Passenger baggage must have a direct relationship with the passenger who is traveling.

Stipulations on Degree of Diligence No diligence to be observed

Void

Less than Diligence of a good father of a family

Void PAGE 55

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS


E.g., A balikbayan box or suitcase is passenger baggage. However, “10,000 cans of corned beef”, for example, is not considered as passenger baggage. They are considered as goods. If you carry goods with you, you cannot bring them with you as part of your (passenger) contract of carriage. You will need to get a separate contract of carriage (“bill of lading”) in order to transport them. These goods will then be transported whether or not you are physically traveling with them. (Agbayani)

Art. 2001, Civil Code. The act of a thief or robber, who has entered the hotel, is not deemed force majeure, unless it is done with the use of arms or through an irresistible force.

What are the kinds of passenger baggage and the laws applicable to them? (1) Passenger baggage in the custody of the passenger (e.g. carry-on luggage): These are considered as necessary deposits. Arts. 1998, 2000-2003 apply. (2) Passenger baggage not in the custody of the passenger (e.g. checked-in luggage): Arts. 1733-1753 on extraordinary diligence apply.

Art. 2003, Civil Code. The hotel-keeper cannot free himself from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between the hotel-keeper and the guest whereby the responsibility of the former as set forth in articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void.

Art. 2002, Civil Code. The hotel-keeper is not liable for compensation if the loss is due to the acts of the guest, his family, servants or visitors, or if the loss arises from the character of the things brought into the hotel.

In case of loss or injury to the baggage of passengers in their personal custody or in that of their employees while being transported: (1) The carrier is LIABLE if the loss or injury is caused by: (a) his servants OR (b) employees OR (c) strangers (Art. 2000) (d) thief or robber done without the use of arms or irresistible force (Art 2001)

The liability is greater for baggage that is in the custody of the carrier in contrast if such is in the possession of the passenger. CHECKED-IN BAGGAGE

Art. 1754, Civil Code. The provisions of Articles 1733 to 1753 shall apply to the passenger's baggage which is not in his personal custody or in that of his employee. As to other baggage, the rules in Articles 1998 and 2000 to 2003 concerning the responsibility of hotel-keepers shall be applicable.

(2) The carrier is NOT LIABLE, if loss or injury is caused by: (a) force majeure (Art. 2000), (b) theft or robbery by a stranger with the use of arms or irresistible force (Art 2001), (c) the acts of the guests, his family, servants, or visitors (Art 2002) (d) the character of the things brought into the hotel (Art 2002)

BAGGAGE IN POSSESSION OF PASSENGERS

Art. 1998, Civil Code. The deposit of effects made by the travellers in hotels or inns shall also be regarded as necessary. The keepers of hotels or inns shall be responsible for them as depositaries, provided that notice was given to them, or to their employees, of the effects brought by the guests and that, on the part of the latter, they take the precautions which said hotel-keepers or their substitutes advised relative to the care and vigilance of their effects.

Safety of Passengers (Asked in 1997 and 2001)

Under Art. 1998, the baggage of passengers in their personal custody or in that of their employees while being transported shall be regarded as necessary deposits. The common carrier shall be responsible for such baggage as depositaries (i.e. like hotel-keepers), provided that: 1) Notice was given to them or to their employees, AND that 2) The passengers take the precautions which said carriers advised relative to the care and vigilance of their baggage. (Agbayani)

VOID STIPULATIONS Art. 1757, Civil Code. The responsibility of a common carrier for the safety of passengers as required in Articles 1733 and 1755 cannot be dispensed with or lessened by stipulation by the posting of notices, by statements on tickets, or otherwise. Art. 1758, Civil Code. When a passenger is carried gratuitously, a stipulation limiting the common carrier's liability for negligence is valid, but not for willful acts or gross negligence.

Art. 2000, Civil Code. The responsibility referred to in the two preceding articles shall include the loss of, or injury to the personal property of the guests caused by the servants or employees of the keepers of hotels or inns as well as strangers; but not that which may proceed from any force majeure. The fact that travellers are constrained to rely on the vigilance of the keeper of the hotels or inns shall be considered in determining the degree of care required of him.

The reduction of fare does not justify any limitation of the common carrier's liability. General rule: Stipulations limiting liability are void. Exception: Gratuitous carriage except for willful acts or gross negligence.

PAGE 56

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

Under Art. 1758, the common carrier and the passenger may validly stipulate to limit the carrier’s liability for negligence in cases of gratuitous carriage, but the parties cannot stipulate to entirely eliminate liability of common carrier. (Agbayani)


ARRIVAL AT DESTINATION

When does relationship of common carrier and passenger terminate? It does not cease at the moment that the passenger alights from the common carrier’s vehicle at a place selected by the carrier at the point of destination, but continues until the passenger has had reasonable time or a reasonable opportunity to leave the carrier’s premises. What is a reasonable time or a reasonable delay within this rule is to be determined from all the circumstances. (La Mallorca v. CA, 1966)

DURATION OF LIABILITY Art. 17, Warsaw Convention. The carrier is liable for damage sustained in the event of the death or wounding of a passenger or any other bodily injury suffered by a passenger, if the accident which caused the damage so sustained took place on board the aircraft or in the course of any of the operations of embarking or disembarking.

The reasonableness of time should be made to depend on the attending circumstances of the case, such as the kind of common carrier, the nature of its business, the customs of the place, and so forth, and therefore precludes a consideration of the time element per se without taking into account such other factors. The primary factor to be considered is the existence of a reasonable cause as will justify the presence of the victim on or near the petitioner’s vessel.

Art. 698, Code of Commerce. In case a voyage already begun should be interrupted, the passengers shall be obliged to pay the fare in proportion to the distance covered, without right to recover for losses and damages if the interruption is due to fortuitous event or to force majeure, but with a right to indemnity if the interruption should have been caused by the captain exclusively. If the interruption should be caused by the disability of the vessel, and a passenger should agree to await the repairs, he may not be required to pay any increased price of passage, but his living expenses during the stay shall be for his own account. In case of delay in the departure of the vessel, the passengers have the right to remain on board and to be furnished with food for the account of the vessel unless the delay is due to fortuitous events or to force majeure. If the delay should exceed ten days, passengers requesting the same shall be entitled to the return of the fare; and if it is due exclusively to the fault of the captain or ship agent, they may also demand indemnity for losses and damages. A vessel exclusively devoted to the transportation of passengers must take them directly to the port or ports of destination, no matter what the number of passengers may be, making all the stops indicated in its itinerary.

It is of common knowledge that by the very nature of petitioner's business as a shipper, the passengers of vessels are allotted a longer period of time to disembark from the ship than other common carriers such as a passenger bus. Such vessels are capable of accommodating a bigger volume of both passenger and baggage as compared to the capacity of a regular commuter bus (as in the La Mallorca case). Consequently, a ship passenger will need at least an hour as is the usual practice, to disembark from the vessel and claim his baggage whereas a bus passenger can easily get off the bus and retrieve his luggage in a very short period of time. (Aboitiz v. CA) Does the duty of extraordinary diligence get interrupted? What we said in one case once again must be stressed, i.e., the relation of carrier and passenger continues until the latter has been landed at the port of destination and has left the carrier's premises. Hence, PAL necessarily would still have to exercise extraordinary diligence in safeguarding the comfort, convenience and safety of its stranded passengers until they have reached their final destination. (PAL v CA, 1993)

Does the duty of extraordinary diligence occur right at the perfection of the contract of transportation? The perfection of the contract of carriage does not necessarily coincide with the commencement of the duty of extraordinary diligence. It may occur at the same time or later.

LIABILITY FOR ACTS OF OTHERS

WAITING FOR CARRIER OR BOARDING OF CARRIER

EMPLOYEES

It is the duty of common carriers of passengers to stop their conveyances at a reasonable length of time in order to afford passengers an opportunity to board and enter, and they are liable for injuries suffered by boarding passengers resulting from the sudden starting up or jerking of their conveyances while they are doing so. (Dangwa Transportation v. CA (1991)

Art. 1759, Civil Code. Common carriers are liable for the death of or injuries to passengers through the negligence or willful acts of the former's employees, although such employees may have acted beyond the scope of their authority or in violation of the orders of the common carriers. This liability of the common carriers does not cease upon proof that they exercised all the diligence of a good father of a family in the selection and supervision of their employees.

A person boarding a moving car must be taken to assume the risk of injury from boarding the car under the conditions open to his view, but he cannot fairly be held to assume the risk that the motorman, having the situation in view, will increase the peril by accelerating the speed of the car before he is planted safely on the platform.

Art. 1760, Civil Code. The common carrier's responsibility prescribed in the preceding article cannot be eliminated or limited by stipulation, by the posting of notices, by statements on the tickets or otherwise.

The duty that the carrier of passengers owes to its patrons extends to persons boarding the cars as well as those alighting therefrom. (Del Prado v. Manila Railroad, 1929)

It is enough that the assault happens within the course of the employee's duty. It is no defense for the carrier that the PAGE 57

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

act was done in excess of authority or in disobedience of the carrier's orders. The carrier's liability here is absolute in the sense that it practically secures the passengers from assaults committed by its own employees. (Note: The employee must be on duty at the time of the act.)


What is the common carrier’s responsibility for acts of strangers? In Pilapil v. CA (1989), referring to the act of a stranger causing the death of a passenger, the standard of diligence is only ordinary diligence. In Bachelor Express v. CA (1990), the Court held that the common carrier has a duty of extraordinary diligence for the injury caused by the act of a co-passenger.

Accordingly, it is the carrier’s strict obligation to select its drivers and similar employees with due regard not only to their technical competence and physical ability, but also, no less important, to their total personality, including their patterns of behavior, moral fibers, and social attitude. (Maranan v. Perez, 1967)

Culpa Contractual Art. 1759 Carrier is directly primarily liable

Reason for making the common carrier liable for acts of employees: The servant is clothed with delegated authority and charged with the duty to execute the carrier’s undertaking to carry the passenger safely. (Agbayani)

Culpa Aquiliana (Quasi-Delict) Art. 2180 and Carrier and employee are solidarily liable as joint tortfeasors

No defense of due diligence Defense of due diligence in in the selection and the selection and supervision supervision of employees of employees is available

Diligence in the selection and supervision of employees: NOT a defense. Liability is based on culpa contractual.

EXTENT OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES

What is the common carrier’s responsibility for acts of employees? The common carrier is responsible even beyond the scope of authority and in violation of orders, different from the rule in quasi-delicts under Art. 2180, which exempts the employer if it was done outside of employment. However, there must be a reasonable connection between the act and the contract of carriage.

Art. 1761, Civil Code. The passenger must observe the diligence of a good father of a family to avoid injury to himself. Art. 1762, Civil Code. The contributory negligence of the passenger does not bar recovery of damages for his death or injuries, if the proximate cause thereof is the negligence of the common carrier, but the amount of damages shall be equitably reduced.

OTHER PASSENGERS AND STRANGERS

Art. 1763, Civil Code. A common carrier is responsible for injuries suffered by a passenger on account of the willful acts or negligence of other passengers or of strangers, if the common carrier's employees through the exercise of the diligence of a good father of a family could have prevented or stopped the act or omission.

When a passenger dies or is injured, the presumption is that the common carrier is at fault or that it acted negligently (Article 1756). This presumption is only rebutted by proof on the carrier's part that it observed the "extraordinary diligence" required in Article 1733 and the "utmost diligence of very cautious persons" required in Article 1755 (Article 1756). (Spouses Landingin v. PANTRANCO, 1970)

Notice that the law speaks of injuries suffered by the passenger but not his death. However, there appears to be no reason why the common carrier should not be held liable under such circumstances. The word “injuries” should be interpreted to include death. (Agbayani)

It is negligence per se for a passenger on a railroad voluntarily or inadvertently to protrude his arm, hand, elbow, or any other part of his body through the window of a moving car beyond the outer edge of the window or outer surface of the car, so as to come in contact with objects or obstacles near the track; no recovery can be had for an injury which but for such negligence would not have been sustained. (Isaac v. A. L. Ammen Transportation, 1975)

In consideration of the right granted to it by the public to engage in the business of transporting passengers and goods, a common carrier does not give its consent to become an insurer of any and all risks to passenger and goods. It merely undertakes to perform certain duties to the public as the law imposes, and holds itself liable for any breach thereof.

While the carrier is not an insurer of the safety of the passengers, it should nevertheless be held answerable for the flaws of its equipment, if such flaws were discoverable. The rationale for the common carrier’s liability for manufacturing defects is the fact that the passenger has neither choice nor control over the carrier in the selection and use of the equipment and appliances in use by the carrier. Having no privity whatever with the manufacturer or vendor of the defective equipment, the passenger has no remedy against him. (Necesito v. Paras, 1958)

Under Art. 1763, a tort committed by a stranger which causes injury to a passenger does not accord the latter a cause of action against the carrier. The negligence for which a common carrier is held responsible is the negligent omission by the carrier's employees to prevent the tort from being committed when the same could have been foreseen and prevented by them. Further, when the violation of the contract is due to the willful acts of strangers, as in the instant case, the degree of care essential to be exercised by the common carrier for the protection of its passenger is only that of a good father of a family. (Pilapil v. CA, 1989) PAGE 58

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

What this Court considers as bad faith is the willful and deliberate overbooking on the part of the airline carrier. The above-mentioned law (Sec. 3, Economic Regulations No. 7 of the Civil Aeronautics Board) clearly states that when the overbooking does not exceed ten percent (10%), it is not considered as deliberate and therefore does not amount to bad faith. (United Airlines v. CA, 2001)

Art. 1764, Civil Code. Damages in cases comprised in this Section shall be awarded in accordance with Title XVIII of this Book, concerning Damages. Article 2206 shall also apply to the death of a passenger caused by the breach of contract by a common carrier. DAMAGES RECOVERABLE

(1) Actual or compensatory damages – adequate compensation for such pecuniary loss suffered as duly proved.

(3) Exemplary damages – if the defendant acted in a wanton, fraudulent, reckless, oppressive, or malevolent manner (Art. 2232)

General rule: Recoverable

(4) Nominal, temperate, and liquidated (a) Nominal – to vindicate or recognize a right that has been violated or invaded (b) Temperate – for pecuniary loss suffered, the amount of which, from the nature of the case, cannot be provided with certainty (c) Liquidated – agreed upon by the parties to a contract

Exception: Not recoverable by law or stipulation (Art. 2199) Actual Damages include: (1) Loss of earning capacity (Art. 2206) (2) Support (Art. 2206) Art. 2201: Act Done In good faith


(5) Attorney’s Fees and Interest

Liability of Obligor Only natural and probable consequences of the breach, which have could have reasonably been foreseen

Bill of Lading

In bad faith, fraud, malice or All damages which may be wanton attitude reasonably attributed to breach

Definition: It is a written acknowledgement, signed by the master of a vessel or other authorized agent of the carrier, that he has received the described goods from the shipper, to be transported on the expressed terms to the described place of destination, and to be delivered there to the designated consignee or parties. (70 Am Jur 2d 924)

In the absence of a showing that petitioner's attention was called to the special circumstances requiring prompt delivery of private respondent Pangan's luggage, petitionercarrier cannot be held liable for the cancellation of private respondents' contracts as it could not have foreseen such an eventuality when it accepted the luggage for transit. (PanAm World Airways v. IAC, 1988)

It is not indispensable for the creation of a contract of carriage. (Compania Maritima v. Insurance Company of North America, 12 SCRA 213) When effective: Usually upon its delivery to and acceptance by the shipper (Aquino, Essentials of Transportation & Public Utilities Law)

(2) Moral damages - incapable of pecuniary estimation; should be proximate result of wrongful act or omission (Art. 2217)

It is presumed that the stipulations of the bill are, in the absence of fraud, concealment, or improper conduct, known to the shipper, and he is generally bound by his acceptance whether he reads the bill or not. (Magellan Mfg. Marketing Corp. v. CA (1991))

General rule: NOT recoverable Exceptions: (1) Defendant acted fraudulently (Art. 2220) (2) Defendant acted in bad faith (Art. 2220)

THREE-FOLD CHARACTER (1) Receipt as to the quantity and description of the goods shipped; (2) Contract to transport and deliver the goods to the consignee or other person therein designated, on the terms specified in such instrument; and (3) Document of title, which makes it a symbol of the goods

Note: Bad faith – a state of mind affirmatively operating with furtive design or with some motive of self-interest or will or for ulterior purpose; must be established by clear and convincing evidence (3) Mishap resulted in death of a passenger (Art. 2206) When it comes to contracts of common carriage, inattention and lack of care on the part of the carrier resulting in the failure of the passenger to be accommodated in the class contracted for amounts to bad faith or fraud which entitles the passenger to the award of moral damages in accordance with Article 2220 of the Civil Code. (Ortigas v. Lufthansa, 1975)

DELIVERY OF GOODS The goods should be delivered to the consignee or any other person to whom the bill of lading was validly transferred or negotiated.

PAGE 59

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS


After such periods OR transportation charges have been paid, no more claims for damages will be entertained. (Art. 366, Code of Commerce)

PERIOD OF DELIVERY

Rule: Period fixed for the delivery of the goods as stipulated in the Bill of Lading. (Art. 370, Code of Commerce) If there is no stipulation: (1) Within a reasonable time (Art. 370, Code of Commerce) (2) Carrier is bound to forward the goods in the first shipment of the same or similar goods which he may make to the point of delivery (Art. 358, Code of Commerce)

Non-filing of the claim bars recovery. (Aquino)

Effect of non-compliance: The carrier shall pay the indemnity agreed upon in the bill of lading. If no indemnity is fixed, the carrier shall be liable for the damages which may have been caused by the delay. (Art. 370, Code of Commerce)

Purpose: The rule protects the carrier by affording it an opportunity to make an investigation of a claim while the matter is still fresh and easily investigated so as to safeguard itself from false and fraudulent claims. (UCPB General Insurance Co., Inc. vs. Aboitiz Shipping, 2009)

Art. 366 is limited to cases of claims for damage to goods actually turned over by the carrier and received by the consignee. It does not apply to misdelivery of goods. (Aquino)

DELIVERY WITHOUT SURRENDER OF BILL OF LADING

If in case of loss or for any other reason whatsoever, the consignee cannot return, upon receiving the merchandise, the bill of lading subscribed by the carrier, he shall give said carrier a receipt for the goods delivered, this receipt producing the same effects as the return of the bill of lading. (Art. 353. (2) (3), Code of Commerce)

The period prescribed in Art. 366 may be subject to modification by agreement of the parties. (PHILAMGEN v. Sweetlines, Inc.)

REFUSAL OF CONSIGNEE TO TAKE DELIVERY

PERIOD FOR FILING ACTIONS

When consignee may refuse to receive goods (1) When the consignee proves that he cannot make use of the goods without the others (partial delivery) (Art. 363, Code of Commerce) (2) When goods are rendered useless for purposes of sale or consumption in the use for which they are properly destined. (Effect: consignee may demand payment of the goods at current market prices) (Art. 365, Code of Commerce) (3) In case part of the goods is in good condition, the consignee may refuse to receive only the damaged goods if separation is possible. (Art. 365, Code of Commerce) (4) Where the delay is through the fault of the carrier. (Art. 371, Code of Commerce)

OVERLAND TRANSPORTATION AND COASTWISE SHIPPING

Commencement of period: Upon delivery of cargo to the consignee at the place of destination. (Aquino)

The general rule under the Civil Code on extinctive prescription applies. Action for damages must be filed in court: (1) Within 6 years, if bill of lading was not issued (Art. 1145, Civil Code) (2) Within 10 years, if bill of lading was issued (Art. 1146, Civil Code) INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF GOODS BY SEA

In any event, the carrier and the ship shall be discharged from all liability in respect of loss or damage unless suit is brought within one year after delivery of the goods or the date when the goods should have been delivered. The absence of a notice shall not affect or prejudice the right of the shipper to bring suit within one year after the delivery of the goods or the date when the goods should have been delivered. (Sec. 3 (6), Carriage of Goods by Sea Act)

In case of dispute as to the condition of the goods, the same shall be examined by experts appointed by the parties, and the third one, in case of disagreement, appointed by the judicial authority. If the persons interested should not agree with the report, said judicial authority shall order the deposits of the merchandise in a safe warehouse, and the parties interested shall make use of their rights in the proper manner. (Art. 367, Code of Commerce)

The period for filing the claim is one year, in accordance with the Carriage of Goods by Sea Act. This was adopted and embodied by our legislature in Com. Act No. 65 which, as a special law, prevails over the general provisions of the Civil Code on prescription of actions. (Maritime Agencies & Services, Inc. v. CA)

PERIOD FOR FILING CLAIMS Damage

When to Claim

Patent damage (Ascertainable from package)

Claim for damages must be made upon receipt of delivery (oral or written)

Latent damage (Only upon opening the package)

Claim for damages may be made within 24 hours upon receipt of delivery.

Maritime Commerce CHARTER PARTIES What is a charter party? A charter party is a contract by virtue of which the owner or agent of a vessel binds himself to transport merchandise or persons for a fixed price. PAGE 60

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

It is a contract by which the owner or agent of the vessel leases for a certain price the whole or portion of a vessel for the transportation of the goods or persons from one port to another.


Note: Both time and voyage charters are said to be contracts of affreightment. A contract of affreightment is one in which the owner of the vessel leases part or all of its space to haul goods for others. It is a contract for special service to be rendered by the owner of the vessel and under such contract the general owner retains the possession, command and navigation of the ship, the charterer or freighter merely having use of the space in the vessel in return for his payment of the charter hire. (Puromines vs. CA)

Is towage considered a charter party? Towage is not a charter party. It is a contract for the hire of services by which a vessel is engaged to tow another vessel from one port to another for consideration. A contract whereby the whole or part of the ship is let by the owner to a merchant or other person for a specified time or use for the conveyance of goods, in consideration of the payment of freight. (Caltex v. Sulpicio Lines, 1999)

Note: In a contract of affreightment, the common carrier is NOT converted into a private carrier.

BAREBOAT/DEMISE CHARTER

LIABILITY OF SHIP OWNERS AND SHIPPING AGENTS The shipowner has possession, control and management of the vessel and the consequent right to direct her navigation and receive freight earned and paid, while his possession continues; he is the person who is primarily liable for damages sustained in the operation of the vessel, based on the provisions of the Code of Commerce. (Aquino)

In a bareboat or demise charter, the shipowner leases to the charterer the whole vessel, transferring to the latter the entire command, possession and consequent control over the vessel's navigation, including the master and the crew, who thereby become the charterer's "servants." (Aquino) To create a demise, the owner of a vessel must completely and exclusively relinquish possession, command and navigation thereof to the charterer, anything short of such a complete transfer is a contract of affreightment (time or voyage charter party) or not a charter party at all. (Puromines v. CA)

Ship agent is the person entrusted with the provisioning of a vessel, or who represents her in the port in which she happens to be. (Art. 595, Code of Commerce) Extent of Liability: The ship agent, even though he is not the owner, is liable in every way to the creditor for losses and damages, without prejudice to his right against the owner, the vessel and its equipment and freight. (Aquino)

Although a charter party may transform a common carrier into a private one, the same however is not true in a contract of affreightment on account of the distinctions between a contract of affreightment and a demise or bareboat charter. (Puromines, Inc. v. Court of Appeals)

LIABILITY FOR ACTS OF CAPTAIN

(1) The owner of a vessel and the agent shall be civilly liable for the acts of the captain and for the obligations contracted by the latter to repair, equip, and provision the vessel. (Art. 586, Code of Commerce) (2) The agent shall also be civilly liable for the indemnities in favor of third persons which arise from the conduct of the captain in the care of the goods which the vessel carried. (3) Damages to vessel and to cargo due to lack of skill and negligence. (4) Losses, fines, and confiscations imposed an account of violation of customs, police, health, and navigation laws and regulations. (5) Those caused by the misuse of the powers. (6) For those arising by reason of his voluntarily entering a port other than that of his destination. (7) For those arising by reason of non-observance of the provisions contained in the regulations on situation of lights and maneuvers for the purpose of preventing collisions. (Art. 618)

Note: In a bareboat or demise charter, the common carrier is converted to private carrier. Owner Pro Hac Vice – demise charter to whom the owner of the vessel has completely and exclusively relinquished possession, command and navigation of the vessel. In this kind of charter, the charterer mans and equips the vessel and assumes all responsibility for navigation, management and operation. He thus acts as the owner of the vessel in all important aspects during the duration of the charter. TIME CHARTER

A time charter is a contract for the use of a vessel for a specified period of time or for the duration of one or more specified voyages. In this case, the owner of a time-chartered vessel retains possession and control through the master and crew, who remain his employees. What the time charterer acquires is the right to utilize the carrying capacity and facilities of the vessel and to designate her destinations during the term of the charter. (Litonjua Shipping Co., Inc. vs. National Seamen Board (1989))

Exception: Abandonment of the vessel (Art. 587, Code of Commerce) Note: The owner or agent shall not be liable for the obligations contracted by the captain if the latter exceeds his powers and privileges. However, if the amounts claimed were made use of for the benefit of the vessel, the owner or agent shall be liable. (Art. 588, Code of Commerce)

VOYAGE/TRIP CHARTER

In a voyage charter, the vessel is leased for a single or particular voyage. The master and crew remain the employ of the owner of the vessel. (Litonjua Shipping Co., Inc. vs. National Seamen Board) PAGE 61

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS


vessel, or to the insurance thereon, if any. In the instant case it does not appear that the vessel was insured. (Yangco v. Laserna et al., 1941)

EXCEPTIONS TO LIMITED LIABILITY

Doctrine of limited liability (Hypothecary Rule) The real and hypothecary nature of maritime law simply means that the liability of the carrier in connection with losses related to maritime contracts is confined to the vessel, which is hypothecated for such obligations or which stands as the guaranty for their settlement.

Exceptions to the Doctrine of Limited Liability (1) Claims under the Workmen’s Compensation (Abueg vs. San Diego) (2) Expenses for repairing, provisioning and equipping the vessel (3) There is an actual finding of negligence on the part of the vessel owner or agent (Aboitiz Shipping vs. General Accident Fire and Life Assurance Corp.) (4) Vessel is insured (Vasquez vs. CA) (5) Vessel is not abandoned or there was no total loss. (6) Collision between two negligent vessels

It has its origin by reason of the conditions and risks attending maritime trade in its earliest years when such trade was replete with innumerable and unknown hazards since vessels had to go through largely uncharted waters to ply their trade. It was designed to offset such adverse conditions and to encourage people and entities to venture into maritime commerce despite the risks and the prohibitive cost of shipbuilding.

ACCIDENTS AND DAMAGES IN MARITIME COMMERCE

Thus, the liability of the vessel owner and agent arising from the operation of such vessel were confined to the vessel itself, its equipment, freight, and insurance, if any, which limitation served to induce capitalists into effectively wagering their resources against the consideration of the large profits attainable in the trade. (Aboitiz Shipping Corp. vs. General Accident Fire and Life Assurance Corp. (1993))

AVERAGES

The following shall be considered averages: 1. All extraordinary or accidental expenses incurred during the navigation for the preservation of the vessel or cargo, or both. 2. All damages or deterioration the vessel may suffer from the time she puts to sea from the port of departure until she casts anchor in the port of destination, and those suffered by the merchandise from the time it is loaded in the port of shipment until it is unloaded in the port of consignment. (Art. 806, Code of Commerce)

Applicable in the following cases: The agent shall be civilly liable for the indemnities in favor of third persons which arise from the conduct of the captain in the care of the goods which the vessel carried; but he may exempt himself therefrom by abandoning the vessel with all her equipment and the freight he may have earned during the voyage. (Art. 587, Code of Commerce)

KINDS

(1) Particular or Simple Average (2) Gross or General Average

The owners of a vessel shall be civilly liable in the proportion of their contribution to the common fund, for the results of the acts of the captain, referred to in Article 587.

SIMPLE AVERAGE

Particular or simple Averages shall include all damages and expenses caused to the vessel or cargo that did not inure to the common benefit and profit of all persons interested in the vessel and her cargo. (Art. 809, Code of Commerce)

Each part owner may exempt himself from this liability by the abandonment before a notary of the part of the vessel belonging to him. (Art. 590, Code of Commerce)

The owner of the goods which gave rise to the expense or suffered the damage shall bear this average. (Art. 810, Code of Commerce)

In case of collision, the liability of the shipowner shall be understood as limited to the value of the vessel with all her appurtenances and all the freight earned during the voyage. (Art. 837, Code of Commerce)

GENERAL AVERAGE

General or gross averages shall include all the damages and expenses which are deliberately caused in order to save the vessel, her cargo, or both at the same time, from a real and known risk. (Art. 811, Code of Commerce)

Liability for wages of the captain and the crew and for advances made by the ship agent if the vessel is lost by shipwreck or capture (Art. 643, Code of Commerce)

Requisites for general average 1. There must be a common danger. This means, that both the ship and the cargo, after it has been loaded, are subject to the same danger, whether during the voyage, or in the port of loading or unloading, that the danger arises from the accidents of the sea, dispositions of the authority, or faults of men, provided that the circumstances producing the peril should be ascertained and imminent or may rationally be said to be certain and imminent. This last requirement excludes measures undertaken against a distant peril. 2. That for the common safety, part of the vessel or of the cargo or both is sacrificed deliberately.

If the shipowner or agent may in any way be held civilly liable at all for injury to or death of passengers arising from the negligence of the captain in cases of collisions or shipwrecks, his liability is merely co-extensive with his interest in the vessel such that a total loss thereof results in its extinction. In arriving at this conclusion, the fact is not ignored that the ill-fated S.S. Negros, as a vessel engaged in interisland trade, is a common carrier, and that the relationship between the petitioner and the passengers who died in the mishap rests on a contract of carriage. But assuming that petitioner is liable for a breach of contract of carriage, the exclusively "real and hypothecary nature" of maritime law operates to limit such liability to the value of the PAGE 62

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

3. That from the expenses or damages caused follows the successful saving of the vessel and cargo. 4. That the expenses or damages should have been incurred or inflicted after taking proper legal steps and authority. (Magsaysay, Inc. v. Agan, 1955)


(14) If, as a necessary measure to extinguish a fire in a port; roadstead; creek, or bay, it should be decided to sink any vessel, this loss shall be considered gross average, to which the vessels saved shall contribute. Procedure for recovery 1. Assembly and deliberation with the sailing mate and other officers 2. Resolution of the captain adopted 2. Hearing of the persons interested. In case an interested person should not be heard, he shall not contribute to the gross average. (Art. 813, Code of Commerce) 3. Resolution to be entered in the log book, stating the motives and reasons therefore as well as the votes and reason for disagreement. (Art. 814, Code of Commerce) 4. Minutes to be signed by all the persons present or in urgent cases, the captain. 5. Captain shall deliver one copy of the minutes to the maritime judicial authority of the first port he may make within 24 hours (Art. 814, Code of Commerce) 6. Captain shall ratify the minutes under oath. (Art. 814, Code of Commerce)

The gross or general average shall be borne by those who benefited from the sacrifice. These include the shipowner and the owners of the cargoes that were saved. Contribution may also be imposed on the insurers of the vessel or cargoes that were saved, as well as lenders on bottomry or respondentia. (PD 1460, as amended) Cases of general average (1) The goods or cash invested in the redemption of the vessel or cargo captured by enemies, privateers, or pirates, and the provisions, wages, and expenses of the vessel detained during the time the arrangement or redemption is taking place. (2) The goods jettisoned to lighten the vessel, whether they belong to the vessel, to the cargo, or to the crew, and the damage suffered through said act by the goods kept. (3) The cables and masts which are cut or rendered useless, the anchors and the chains which are abandoned in order to save the cargo, the vessel, or both. (4) The expenses of removing or transferring a portion of the cargo in order to lighten the vessel and place her in condition to enter a port or roadstead, and the damage resulting therefrom to the goods removed or transferred. (5) The damage suffered by the goods of the cargo through the opening made in the vessel in order to drain her and prevent her sinking. (6) The expenses caused through floating a vessel intentionally stranded for the purpose of saving her. (7) The damage caused to the vessel which it is necessary to break open, scuttle, or smash in order to save the cargo. (8) The expenses of curing and maintaining the members of the crew who may have been wounded or crippled in defending or saving the vessel. (9) The wages of any member of the crew detained as hostage by enemies, privateers, or pirates, and the necessary expenses which he may incur in his imprisonment, until he is returned to the vessel or to his domicile, should he prefer it. (10) The wages and victuals of the crew of a vessel chartered by the month during the time it should be embargoed or detained by force majeure or by order of the Government, or in order to repair the damage caused for the common good. (11) The loss suffered in the value of the goods sold at arrivals under stress in order to repair the vessel because of gross average. (12) The expenses of the liquidation of the average. (Art. 811, Code of Commerce) (13) If in lightening a vessel on account of a storm, in order to facilitate her entry into a port or roadstead, part of her cargo should be transferred to lighters or barges and be lost, the owner of said part shall be entitled to indemnity, as if the loss has originated from a gross average (Art. 817, Code of Commerce)

COLLISION (ASKED IN 1995, 1998)

Collision is an impact or sudden contact between two moving vessels. (Aquino) Allision is the striking of a moving vessel against one that is stationary. Zones in collision (1) First Division covers all the time up to the moment when the risk of collision may be said to have begun. Here, each vessel is free to direct its course as it deems best. (2) Second Division covers the time between the moment when the risk of collision begins and the moment when it has become a practical certainty. Burden is on the vessel required to keep away and avoid the danger. (3) Third Division covers the time of actual contact. The vessel which has forced the privileged vessel into danger is responsible even if the privileged vessel has committed an error within that zone. (A. Urrutia & Co. vs. Baco River Plantation Co.) NOTE: Liability in collision cases is negligence-based. The person who caused the injury is both civilly and criminally liable. (Aquino) Specific rules under the Code of Commerce (1) One vessel at fault. The owner of the vessel at fault shall indemnify the losses and damages suffered, after an expert appraisal. (Art. 826, Code of Commerce) (2) Both vessels at fault. Each shall suffer its own damages, and both shall be solidarily responsible for the losses and damages occasioned to their cargoes. (Art. 826, Code of Commerce) (3) Inscrutable fault. (If it cannot be decided which of the two vessels was the cause of the collision). Each shall bear his own damage and both shall be jointly responsible for the losses and damages suffered by their cargoes. (Art. 828, Code of Commerce) (Asked in the ‘97) (4) Due to fortuitous event. Each vessel and its cargo shall bear its own damages. (Art. 830, Code of Commerce) PAGE 63

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

(5) By reason of fortuitous event, vessel properly anchored and moored collides with another. The injury occasioned shall be looked upon as particular average to the vessel run into. (Article 832, Code of Commerce) (6) Third vessel at fault. The owner of the third vessel shall indemnify the losses and damages caused, the captain thereof being civilly liable to said owner. (Art. 831, Code of Commerce)


NOTICE OF LOSS OR DAMAGE

Notice of claim and the general nature of the loss or damage must be given in writing to the carrier or his agent at the port of discharge before or at the time of the removal of the goods. (Sec. 3 (6), COGSA) If damage is not patent or cannot be ascertained from the package, the shipper should file the claim with the carrier within three days from delivery (compare with Code of Commerce rules, see discussion on Period for Filing Claims above).

What is arrival under stress? Arrival under stress is the arrival of a vessel at the nearest and most convenient port instead of the port of destination, if during the voyage the vessel cannot continue the trip to the port of destination.

First, the provision of COGSA provides that the notice of claim need not be given if the state of the goods, at the time of their receipt, has been the subject of a joint inspection or survey. Prior to unloading the cargo, an Inspection Report as to the condition of the goods was prepared and signed by representatives of both parties. Second, as stated in the same provision, a failure to file a notice of claim within three days will not bar recovery if it is nonetheless filed within one year. This one-year prescriptive period also applies to the shipper, the consignee, the insurer of the goods or any legal holder of the bill of lading. "Inasmuch as the neither the Civil Code nor the Code of Commerce states a specific prescriptive period on the matter, the COGSA—which provides for a one-year period of limitation on claims for loss of, or damage to, cargoes sustained during transit-may be applied suppletorily to the case at bar." (Belgian Overseas v. Philippine First Insurance, 2002)

It is lawful when the inability to continue voyage is due to lack of provisions, well-founded fear of seizure, privateers, pirates, or accidents of the sea disabling it to navigate. (Art. 819, Code of Commerce) It is unlawful when: (1) Lack of provisions due to negligence to carry according to usage and customs; (2) Risk of enemy not well known or manifest (3) Defect of vessel due to improper repair; and (4) Malice, negligence, lack of foresight or skill of captain. (Art. 820, Code of Commerce) What is shipwreck? Shipwreck denotes loss/wreck of a vessel at sea as a consequence of running against another vessel or thing at sea or on coast where the vessel is rendered incapable of navigation.

PERIOD OF PRESCRIPTION (ASKED IN 1992, 1995, 2000, 2004)

In any event the carrier and the ship shall be discharged from all liability in respect of loss or damage unless suit is brought within one year after delivery of the goods or the date when the goods should have been delivered.

If the wreck was due to malice, negligence or lack of skill of the captain, the owner of the vessel may demand indemnity from said captain. (Art. 841) CARRIAGE OF GOODS BY SEA ACT (COGSA) (COMMONWEALTH ACT No. 65)

The absence of a notice shall not affect or prejudice the right of the shipper to bring suit within one year after the delivery of the goods or the date when the goods should have been delivered. (Sec. 3 (6))

APPLICATION

COGSA is a special law that governs all contracts of carriage of goods by sea between or to and from the Philippine ports.

Clearly, the coverage of the Act includes the insurer of the goods. Otherwise, what the Act intends to prohibit after the lapse of the one-year prescriptive period can be done indirectly by the shipper or owner of the goods by simply filing a claim against the insurer even after the lapse of one year. (Filipino Merchants Insurance, Inc. v. Alejandro, 1986):

Application of laws (1) If the common carrier is coming to the Philippines: First: Civil Code Second: COGSA (in foreign trade) Third: Code of Commerce (2) If the private carrier is coming to the Philippines: First: COGSA Second: Code of Commerce Third: Civil Code (excluding rules on common carriers) (3) If the private or common carrier is from the Philippines to a foreign country: Apply the law of the foreign country (Art. 1753, CC) UNLESS the parties make COGSA applicable.

The period for filing the claim is one year, in accordance with the Carriage of Goods by Sea Act. This was adopted and embodied by our legislature in Com. Act No. 65 which, as a special law, prevails over the general provisions of the Civil Code on prescription of actions. (Maritime Agencies & Services, Inc. v. CA, 1990) LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

Under Sec. 4(5), the limit is set at a maximum of $500 per package or customary freight unit.

Hierarchy of laws (1) Art. 1766, CC (COGSA as only in matters not regulated by this Code) this notwithstanding the fact that COGSA is a special law. Goods in a foreign country shipped to the Philippines are governed by the Civil Code. (2) Art. 1753, CC

The declaration made by the shipper stating an amount bigger than $500 per package will make the carrier liable for such bigger amount, but only if the amount so declared is the real value of goods. (Aquino) PAGE 64

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

Under the Sec. 4(5), the liability limit is set at $500 per package or customary freight unit unless the nature and value of such goods is declared by the shipper. This is deemed incorporated in the bill of lading even if not mentioned in it. (Eastern Shipping vs. IAC, 150 SCRA 463).


(b) in the course of the operations of embarking, (c) in the course of disembarking, or (d) when there was delay (Sec. 17 and 19, WC); (2) Destruction, loss, or damage to any baggage or goods that are checked in, if damage occurred (a) during the transportation by air, or (b) when there was delay (Sec. 18 and 19, WC)

The Civil Code does not limit the liability of the common carrier to a fixed amount per package. In all matters not regulated by the Civil Code, the right and the obligations of common carriers shall be governed by the Code of Commerce and special laws. Thus, the COGSA, which is suppletory to the provisions of the Civil Code, supplements the latter by establishing a statutory provision limiting the carrier's liability in the absence of a shipper's declaration of a higher value in the bill of lading. In the case before us, there was no stipulation in the Bill of Lading limiting the carrier's liability. Neither did the shipper declare a higher valuation of the goods to be shipped. Petitioners' liability should be computed based on US$500 per package and not on the per metric ton price declared in the Letter of Credit. (Belgian Overseas v. Philippine First Insurance, 2002)

Transportation by air is the period during which the baggage or goods are in the charge of the carrier whether in an airport or on board an aircraft, or in case of a landing outside an airport, in any place whatsoever. (Sec. 18, WC) (3) Delay in the transport by air of passengers, baggage or goods. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LIABILITY TO PASSENGERS

General rule: 250,000 francs per passenger Exception: Agreement to a higher limit (Art. 22(1), WC)

The Warsaw Convention

LIABILITY FOR CHECKED BAGGAGE

APPLICABILITY (1) All international carriage of persons, baggage, or cargo performed by aircraft for reward. (2) Gratuitous carriage by aircraft performed by an air transport undertaking (Art. 1, No. 1, WC)

Exception: In case of special declaration of value and payment of a supplementary sum by consignor, carrier is liable to not more than the declared sum unless it proves the sum is greater than actual value. (Art. 22(2), WC)

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORTATION

General rule: 5,000 francs per passenger (Art. 22(3), WC)

Transportation by air between points of contact of two high contracting parties, or those countries that have acceded to the Convention, wherein the place of departure and the place of destination are situated: (1) Within the territories of two High Contracting Parties regardless of whether or not there be a break in the transportation or a transshipment; OR (2) Within the territory of a single High Contracting Party if there is an agreed stopping place within a territory subject to the sovereignty, mandate or authority of another power, even though the power is not a party to the Convention. (Sec. 1, No. 2, WC)

(1) An agreement relieving the carrier from liability or fixing a lower limit is null and void. (Art. 23, WC) (2) Carrier is not entitled to the foregoing limit if the damage is caused by willful misconduct or default on its part. (Art. 25) (3) The right to damages under the WC is extinguished after 2 years from the date of arrival at the destination or from the date on which the aircraft ought to have arrived, or from the date on which the carriage stopped. (Art. 29(1), WC)

General rule: 250 francs per kg

LIABILITY FOR HAND-CARRIED BAGGAGE

Note: The Guatemala Protocol of 1971 increased the limit for passengers to $100,000 and $1,000 for baggage. However, the Supreme Court noted in Santos III v. Northwest Orient Airlines, G.R. No. 101538, June 23, 1992, that the Guatemala Protocol is still ineffective. (Sundiang and Aquino)

A carriage to be performed by several successive air carriers is deemed, for the purposes of this Convention, to be one undivided carriage, if it has been regarded by the parties as a single operation, whether it had been agreed upon under the form of a single contract or of a series of contracts. (Sec. 1, No. 3, WC)

The WC should be deemed a limit of liability only in those cases where the cause of death or injury to person, or destruction, loss or damage to property or delay in its transport is not attributable to or attended by any willful misconduct, bad faith, recklessness, or otherwise improper conduct on the part of any official or employee for which the carrier is responsible; and there is otherwise no special or extraordinary form of resulting injury. (Alitalia v. CA)

PERIOD COVERED

The period during which the baggage or goods are in charge of the carrier, whether in an airport or on board an aircraft, or, in the case of a landing outside an airport, in any place whatsoever. (Sec. 18, WC) LIABILITY OF CARRIER FOR DAMAGES

(1) Death or injury of a passenger if the accident causing it took place (a) on board the aircraft,

WILLFUL MISCONDUCT When can a common carrier not avail itself of this limitation? (1) Willful misconduct (Art. 25, WC) PAGE 65

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

TRANSPORTATION LAWS

(2) Default amounting to willful misconduct (Art. 25, WC) (3) Accepting passengers without ticket (Art. 3, No. 2, WC) (4) Accepting goods without airway bill or baggage without baggage check. Carrier guilty of willful misconduct cannot avail of the provisions limiting liability but may still invoke other provisions of the WC. (see Art. 25) Receipt by the person entitled to the delivery of baggage or cargo without complaint is prima facie evidence that the same have been delivered in good condition and in accordance with the document of carriage. (Art. 26, WC).

PAGE 66


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

PAGE 67


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


Corporation

HAS THE POWERS, ATTRIBUTES AND PROPERTIES EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED BY LAW OR INCIDENT TO ITS EXISTENCE

DEFINITION A corporation is an artificial being created by operation of law, having the right of succession and the powers, attributes, and properties expressly authorized by law or incident to its existence. (Sec. 2, unless otherwise indicated, all sections cited herein are from B.P. 68, or the Corporation Code)

A corporation has no power except those expressly conferred on it by the Corporation Code and by its articles of incorporation, those which may be incidental to such conferred powers, those that are implied from its existence, and those reasonably necessary to accomplish its purposes. In turn, a corporation exercises said powers through its Board of Directors and/or its duly authorized officers and agents. (Monfort Hermanos Agricultural Dev. Corp. v. Monfort III, 2004).

ATTRIBUTES OF THE CORPORATION AN ARTIFICIAL BEING

A corporation exists by fiction of law. Hence, it can act only through its directors, officers and employees.

Classes of Corporations

Being only a juridical entity, the physical acts of the corporation, like the signing of documents, can be performed only by natural persons duly authorized for the purpose by corporate by-laws or by a special act of the Board of Directors (Shipside, Inc. v. Court of Appeals, 2001).

STOCK CORPORATION (Asked in 2001 and 2004) Corporations which have capital stock divided into shares and are authorized to distribute to the holders of such shares dividends or allotments of the surplus profits on the basis of shares held (Sec. 3)

Notes: (1) Moral Damages – cannot be awarded in favor of corporations because they do not have feelings and mental state. They may not even claim moral damages for besmirched reputation (NAPOCOR v. Philipp Brothers Oceanic, 2001).However, a corporation can recover moral damages under Art 2219 (7) if it was the victim of defamation (Pilipinas Broadcasting Network v. Ago Medical and Educational Center, 2005). (2) Criminal Liability – Since a corporation as a person is a mere legal fiction, it cannot be proceeded against criminally because it cannot commit a crime in which personal violence or malicious intent is required. Criminal action is limited to the corporate agents guilty of an act amounting to a crime and never against the corporation itself (West Coast Life Ins. Co. v. Hurd [1914], Time Inc. v. Reyes, 1971) (2) Doctrine of Separate Personality: A corporation, upon coming into existence, is invested by law with a personality separate and distinct from those persons composing it as well as from any other legal entity to which it may be related. (Yutivo Sons Hardware v. CTA, 1961)

It is organized for profit. The governing body of a stock corporation is usually the Board of Directors (except in certain instances, e.g. close corporations). NON-STOCK CORPORATION (Asked in 2004) All other corporations are non-stock corporations (Sec. 3) One where no part of the income is distributable as dividends to its members, trustees, or officers, subject to the provisions of the Code on dissolution(Sec. 87). Not organized for profit. Its governing body is usually the Board of Trustees. There are two elements for a stock corporation to exist: (1) Capital stock divided into shares, and (2) An authority to distribute to the holders of such shares, dividends or allotments of the surplus profits on the basis of shares held. (Test of WON a stock corporation) Even if there is a statement of capital stock, the corporation is still NOT a stock corporation if dividends are NOT supposed to be declared, that is, there is no distribution of retained earnings. (CIR v. Club Filipino de Cebu, 1962)

CREATED BY OPERATION OF LAW

Mere consent of the parties to form a corporation is not sufficient. The State must give its consent either through a special law (in case of government corporations) or a general law (i.e., Corporation Code in case of private corporations).

Note: Under Sec. 43 of the Corporation Code, a corporation is deemed to have the power to declare dividends. Thus, so long as the corporation has capital stock and there is no prohibition in its Articles of Incorporation or in its by-laws for it to declare dividends, such corporation is a stock corporation.

A corporation comes into existence upon the issuance of the certificate of incorporation. Then and only then will it acquire juridical personality to sue and be sued, enter into contracts, hold or convey property or perform any legal act in its own name (Ladia)

OTHER CORPORATIONS

HAS THE RIGHT OF SUCCESSION

PUBLIC CORPORATION (ASKED IN 2004)

Its continued existence during its stated term cannot be affected by any change in the members or stockholders or rd by any transfer of shares by a stockholder to a 3 person.

One formed or organized for the government of a portion of the state. Its purpose is for the general good and welfare (Sec. 3, Act 1456). PAGE 68

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Beyond cavil, a government-owned and controlled corporation has a personality of its own, distinct and separate from that of the government, and the intervention in a transaction of the Office of the President through the Executive Secretary does not change the independent existence of a government entity as it deals with another government entity (Polytechnic University of the Phils. V. Court of Appeals, 2001).


FOREIGN CORPORATION

One formed, organized or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines and whose law allows Filipino citizens and corporations to do business in its own country and state (Sec. 123). CORPORATION CREATED BY SPECIAL LAWS OR CHARTER

Corporations which are governed primarily by the provisions of the special law or charter creating them. Corporation Code has suppletory application. (Sec. 4)

PRIVATE CORPORATION (ASKED IN 2004)

One formed for some private purpose, benefit, aim or end(Sec. 3, Act 1456); it may be either stock or non-stock, government-owned or controlled or quasi-public.

SUBSIDIARY CORPORATION

The test to determine whether a corporation is governmentowned or –controlled, or private in nature, is if a corporation is created by its own charter for the exercise of a public function, or by incorporation under the general corporation law (Baluyot v. Holganza, 2000).

PARENT CORPORATION

One in which control, usually in the form of ownership of majority of its shares, is in another corporation (the parent corporation). Its control lies in its power, directly or indirectly, to elect the subsidiary’s directors thus controlling its management policies.

CLOSE CORPORATION

One whose articles of incorporation provide that: (1) All the corporation's issued stock of all classes, exclusive of treasury shares, shall be held of record by not more than a specified number of persons, not exceeding twenty (20); (2) all the issued stock of all classes shall be subject to one or more specified restrictions on transfer permitted by this Title; and (3) The corporation shall not list in any stock exchange or make any public offering of any of its stock of any class (see Sec. 96).

CORPORATION DE JURE

A corporation organized requirements of the law.

accordance

with

the

DE FACTO CORPORATION

A corporation where there exists a flaw in its incorporation Rule on De Facto Corporations The due incorporation of any corporation claiming in good faith to be a corporation under this Code, and its right to exercise corporate powers, shall not be inquired into collaterally in any private suit to which such corporation may be a party. Such inquiry may be made by the Solicitor General in a quo warranto proceeding (Sec. 20).

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a corporation shall not be deemed a close corporation when at least two-thirds (2/3) of its voting stock or voting rights is owned or controlled by another corporation which is not a close corporation within the meaning of this Code.

Grant of juridical personality is an exercise of State power and not a matter of private affair. Consequently, under the de facto corporation doctrine, the defect in the juridical personality of a corporation cannot be inquired into by private individuals, much less used as a defense to avoid claims, except in quo warranto proceedings brought on behalf of the State where the main action is to question the validity or existence of such juridical personality (Villanueva)

EDUCATIONAL CORPORATION

One organized for educational purposes (Sec. 106). RELIGIOUS CORPORATIONS

Corporation sole is one formed for the purpose of administering and managing, as trustee, the affairs, property and temporalities of any religious denomination, sect, or church, by the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, rabbi, or other presiding elder of such religious denomination, sect or church (Sec.110)

Requisites of De Facto Corporation (1) Organized under a valid law (2) Bona fide compliance with formalities of law (3) User of corporate powers (4) SEC issuance of certificate of incorporation (Hall v. Piccio, 86 Phil 603 [1950])

A corporation sole has no nationality (Roman Catholic Apostolic, etc v. Register of Deeds of Davao City, 1957). Corporation aggregate is a religious incorporated by more than one person.

in

corporation

CORPORATION BY ESTOPPEL

Where a group of persons misrepresent themselves as a corporation, they are subsequently estopped from claiming lack of corporate life in order to avoid liability

ELEEMOSYNARY CORPORATION

One organized for a charitable purpose

All persons who assume to act as a corporation knowing it to be without authority to do so shall be liable as general partners for all debts, liabilities and damages incurred or arising as a result thereof.

DOMESTIC CORPORATION

One formed, organized, or existing under the laws of the Philippines.

PAGE 69

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Provided, however, That when any such ostensible corporation is sued on any transaction entered by it as a corporation or on any tort committed by it as such, it shall not be allowed to use as a defense its lack of corporate personality.


determined on the basis of outstanding capital stock whether fully paid or not, but only such stocks which are generally entitled to vote are considered. For stocks to be deemed owned and held by Philippine citizens or Philippine nationals, mere legal title is not enough to meet the required Filipino equity. Full beneficial ownership of the stocks, coupled with appropriate voting rights is essential. Thus, stocks, the voting rights of which have been assigned or transferred to aliens cannot be considered held by Philippine citizens or Philippine nationals.

One who assumes an obligation to an ostensible corporation as such, cannot resist performance thereof on the ground that there was in fact no corporation (Sec. 21).

Nationality of Corporations

Individuals or juridical entities not meeting the aforementioned qualifications are considered as nonPhilippine nationals.”

PLACE OF INCORPORATION TEST The corporation is a national of the country under whose laws it is organized or incorporated (Sec. 123).

In the later 2012 case of Gamboa v. Teves, (G.R. No. 176579, October 9, 2012) The SC reversed the previous ruling and held that:

Domestic corporations – organized and governed under and by Philippine laws

“Since the constitutional requirement of at least 60 percent Filipino ownership applies not only to voting control of the corporation but also to the beneficial ownership of the corporation, it is therefore imperative that such requirement apply uniformly and across the board to all classes of shares, regardless of nomenclature and category, comprising the capital of a corporation. Under the Corporation Code, capital stock consists of all classes of shares issued to stockholders, that is, common shares as well as preferred shares, which may have different rights, privileges or restrictions as stated in the articles of incorporation.

Foreign Corporations – organized under laws other than those of the Philippines and can operate only in the territory of the state under whose laws it was formed. However, they may be licensed to do business here (Campos). CONTROL TEST A corporation shall be considered a Filipino corporation if the Filipino ownership of its capital stock is at least 60%, and where the 60-40 Filipino-alien equity ownership is NOT in doubt (SEC Opinion dated 6 November 1989; DOJ Opinion No. 18, s. 1989).

Since a specific class of shares may have rights and privileges or restrictions different from the rest of the shares in a corporation, the 60-40 ownership requirement in favor of Filipino citizens in Section 11, Article XII of the Constitution must apply not only to shares with voting rights but also to shares without voting rights. Preferred shares, denied the right to vote in the election of directors, are anyway still entitled to vote on the eight specific corporate matters mentioned above under Section 6 of the Corporation Code. Thus, if a corporation, engaged in a partially nationalized industry, issues a mixture of common and preferred non-voting shares, at least 60 percent of the common shares and at least 60 percent of the preferred nonvoting shares must be owned by Filipinos. Of course, if a corporation issues onlya single class of shares, at least 60 percent of such shares must necessarilybe owned by Filipinos.

Therefore, its shareholdings in another corporation shall be considered to be of Filipino nationality when computing the percentage of Filipino equity of that second corporation (SEC Opinion dated 23 November 1993). Control test is applied in the following: (1) Exploitation of natural resources - “Only Filipino citizens or corporations whose capital stock are at least 60% owned by Filipinos can qualify to exploit natural resources.” (Sec. 2, Art. XII, Consti.) (2) Public Utilities - “xxx no franchise, certificate or any other form of authorization for the operation of a public utility shall be granted except to citizens of the Philippines or to corporations or associations organized under the laws of the Philippines at least 60% of whose capital is owned by such citizens. “ (Sec. 11, Art. XII, Consti.)

In short, the 60-40 ownership requirement in favor of Filipino citizens must apply separately to each class of shares, whether common, preferred non-voting, preferred voting or any other class of shares. This uniform application of the 6040 ownership requirement in favor of Filipino citizens clearly breathes life to the constitutional command that the ownership and operation of public utilities shall be reserved exclusively to corporations at least 60 percent of whosecapital is Filipino-owned. Applying uniformly the 6040 ownership requirement in favor of Filipino citizens to each class of shares, regardless ofdifferences in voting rights, privileges and restrictions, guarantees effective

Note: In the recently decided case of Gamboa vs. Teves (G.R. No. 176579, June 28, 2011), the SC ruled as follows: “The term "capital" in Section 11, Article XII of the 1987 Constitution refers only to shares of stock entitled to vote in the election of directors, and thus in the present case only to common shares, and not to the total outstanding capital stock (common and non-voting preferred shares). The 60 percent of the "capital" assumes, or should result in, "controlling interest" in the corporation. Compliance with the required Filipino ownership of a corporation shall be PAGE 70

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Filipino control of public utilities, as mandated by the Constitution.”


upon dissolution of the corporation after all corporate creditors have been paid. Such right is limited only to their equity interest (doctrine of limited liability). Although a stockholder’s interest in the corporation may be attached by his personal creditor, corporate property cannot be used to satisfy his claim (Wise & Co. v. Man Sun Lung, 1940).

GRANDFATHER RULE Method used to determine the nationality of a corporation, in cases where corporate shareholders are present in the situation, by which the percentage of Filipino equity in a corporation engaged in nationalized and/or partly nationalized areas of activities, is computed by attributing the nationality of second or even subsequent tier ownership to determine the nationality of the corporate shareholder (Villanueva).

LIABILITY FOR TORTS AND CRIMES

As a separate juridical personality, a corporation can be held liable for torts committed by its officers for corporate purpose (PNB v. CA, 1978). RECOVERY OF MORAL DAMAGES

It involves the computation of Filipino ownership of a corporation in which another corporation of partly Filipino and partly foreign equity owns capital stock. The percentage of shares held by the second corporation in the first is multiplied by the latter’s own Filipino equity, and the product of these percentages is determined to be the ultimate Filipino ownership of the subsidiary corporation (SEC Opinion re; Silahis Intl Hotel May 4, 1987).

General rule: A corporation has the power to sue in its corporate name. (Sec. 36)

The Grandfather Rule must be applied to accurately determine the actual participation, both direct and indirect, of foreigners in a corporation engaged in a nationalized activity or business.

However, a corporation can recover moral damages under Art 2219 (7) if it was the victim of defamation (Pilipinas Broadcasting Network v. Ago Medical and Educational Center, 2005).

Compliance with the constitutional limitation(s) on engaging in nationalized activities must be determined by ascertaining if 60% of the investing corporation’s outstanding capital stock is owned by “Filipino citizens”, or as interpreted, by natural or individual Filipino citizens. If such investing corporation is in turn owned to some extent by another investing corporation, the same process must be observed. One must not stop until the citizenships of the individual or natural stockholders of layer after layer of investing corporations have been established, the very essence of the Grandfather Rule (Redmont Consolidated Mines, Corp v. McArthur Mining, Inc., et al., 2010).

Constitutional rights: Corporate entities are entitled to due process, equal protection, and protection against unreasonable searches and seizures. However, a corporation is not entitled to the privilege against selfincrimination (Bataan Shipyard &Eng’g Co. v. PCGG, 1987)

Exception: Moral Damages cannot be awarded in favor of corporations because they do not have feelings and mental state. They may not even claim moral damages for besmirched reputation (NAPOCOR v. Philipp Brothers Oceanic, 2001).

DOCTRINE OF PIERCING THE CORPORATE VEIL Piercing the veil of corporate entity is merely an equitable remedy, and may be granted only in cases when the corporate fiction is used to defeat public convenience, justify wrong, protect fraud or defend crime (Yutivo Sons v. CTA, 1961) or where the corporation is a mere alter ego or business conduit of a person. (Koppel Phil v. Yatco) GROUNDS FOR APPLICATION OF DOCTRINE

Corporate Juridical Personality

(1) If done to defraud the government of taxes due it. (2) If done to evade payment of civil liability. (3) If done by a corporation which is merely a conduit or alter ego of another corporation. (4) If done to evade compliance with contractual obligations. (5) If done to evade financial obligation to its employees.

A private corporation formed or organized under this code commences to have corporate existence and juridical personality and is deemed incorporated from the date the SEC issues a certificate of incorporation under its official seal(Sec. 19)

Only in these and similar instances may the veil be pierced and disregarded: to ward off a judgment credit, to avoid inclusion of corporate assets as part of the estate of the decedent, to escape liability arising from a debt, or to perpetuate fraud and/or confuse legitimate issues either to promote or to shield unfair objectives to cover up an otherwise blatant violation of the prohibition against forum shopping (PNB v. Andrada Electric & Engineering Co., 2002).

DOCTRINE OF SEPARATE JURIDICAL PERSONALITY (Asked in 1995, 1996, 1999, 2000) Concept: A corporation has a personality separate and distinct from that of its stockholders and members and is not affected by the personal rights, obligations, and transactions of the latter. Merely a legal fiction for purposes of convenience and to sub-serve the ends of justice

Q: Is a corporation liable for the individual acts of its stockholders or members? Is there an exception to the general rule? A: It is settled that a corporation has a personality separate and distinct from its individual stockholders or members,

Property: SHs have no claim on corporate property as owners, but mere expectancy or inchoate right to the same PAGE 71

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

and is not affected by the personal rights, obligations and transactions of the latter. The corporation may not be held liable for the obligations of the persons composing it, and neither can its stockholders be held liable for its obligation. Of course, this Court has recognized instances when the corporation’s separate personality may be disregarded. However, we have also held that the same may only be done in cases where the corporate vehicle is being used to defeat public convenience, justify wrong, protect fraud, or defend crime. Moreover, the wrongdoing must be clearly and convincingly established. It cannot be presumed. (Seaoil vs Autocorp Group, 2008, Nachura)


LIABILITY OF PROMOTER

General rule: The promoter binds himself PERSONALLY & assumes the responsibility of looking to the proposed corporation for reimbursement. Exceptions: (1) Express or implied agreement to the contrary (2) Novation, not merely adoption or ratification of the contract LIABILITY OF CORPORATION FOR PROMOTER’S CONTRACTS

General rule: A corporation is NOT bound by the contract. A corporation, until organized, has no life and no legal existence. It could not have had an agent (the promoter) who could legally bind it. (Cagayan Fishing Development Co., Inc. v. Sandiko)

TEST IN DETERMINING APPLICABILITY

General rule: The mere fact that a corporation owns all or substantially all of the stocks of another corporation is NOT sufficient to justify their being treated as one entity.

Exceptions: A corporation may be bound by the contract if it makes the contract its own by: (1) Adoption or ratification of the ENTIRE contract after incorporation.

Exception: The subsidiary is a mere instrumentality of the parent corporation. Circumstances rendering subsidiary an instrumentality (PNB v. Ritratto Group, 2001): (1) The parent corporation owns all or most of the subsidiary’s capital stock. (2) The parent and subsidiary corporations have common directors or officers. (3) The parent corporation finances the subsidiary. (4) The parent corporation subscribes to all the capital stock of the subsidiary or otherwise causes its incorporation. (5) The subsidiary has grossly inadequate capital. (6) The parent corporation pays the salaries and other expenses or losses of the subsidiary. (7) The subsidiary has substantially no business except with the parent corporation or no assets except those conveyed to or by the parent corporation. (8) In the papers of the parent corporation or in the statements of its officers, the subsidiary is described as a department or division of the parent corporation or its business or financial responsibility is referred to as the parent corporation’s own. (9) The parent corporation uses the property of the subsidiary as its own. (10) The directors or executives of the subsidiary do not act independently in the interest of the subsidiary but take their orders from the parent corporation in the latter’s interest. (11) The formal ledger requirements of the subsidiary are not observed.

Notes: (a) Power of the corporation to adopt a contract must be understood to be limited to such contracts as the corporation itself, after its organization, would be authorized to make. (Builders’ Duntile Co. v. Dunn Mfg. Co.) (b) Novation or the intent to novate the original contract is required to adopt or ratify the pre-incorporation contract. (Campos, 1990) (2) Acceptance of benefits under the contract with knowledge of the terms thereof. (3) Performance of its obligation under the contract NUMBER AND QUALIFICATIONS OF INCORPORATORS (1) Natural Persons (2) Any number from 5-15 (3) Majority are residents of the Philippines (4) Each incorporator must own or be a subscriber to at least 1 share of the capital stock of the corporation (Sec. 10) CORPORATE NAME – LIMITATIONS ON USE CORPORATE NAME (SEC. 18)

(1) Must not be identical or deceptively or confusingly similar to that of any existing corporation or to any other name already protected by law (2) Not patently deceptive, confusing or contrary to existing laws Required by law to include the word “Corporation” or “Inc.” (Campos, 1990)

Incorporation and Organization

Change of corporate name requires the amendment of the AOI: majority vote of the board and the vote or written assent of stockholders holding 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock (Sec. 16).

PROMOTER Promoters are persons who, acting alone or with others, take initiative in founding and organizing the business or enterprise of the issuer and receives consideration therefor (RA 8799, The Securities Regulation Code).

Amendment of a corporation’s AOI changing its corporate name does not extinguish the personality of the original corporation. It is the same corporation with a different PAGE 72

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


name, and its character is not changed. Consequently, the “new” corporation is still liable for the debts and obligations of the “old” corporation. Republic Planters Bank v. CA (1992)

(2) Defines the contractual relationships between the State and the corporation, the stockholders and the State, and the corporation and the stockholders

(3) After the submission of the AOI to the SEC.

The Articles must be filed with the SEC for the issuance of the Certificate of Incorporation.

CORPORATE TERM (Sec. 11) General rule: A corporation shall exist for a period not exceeding 50 years from the date of incorporation

CONTENTS

(1) Corporate Name (a) Must not be identical or deceptively or confusingly similar to that of any existing corporation or to any other name already protected by law (b) Not patently deceptive, confusing or contrary to existing laws

Exceptions: (1) Sooner dissolved (2) Period extended (a) For periods not exceeding 50 years in any single instance by an amendment of the AOI (b) Extensions may not be made earlier than 5 years prior to the original or subsequent expiry date(s) EXCEPT if the SEC determines that there are justifiable reasons for an earlier extension

Required by law to include the word “Corporation” or “Inc.” (Campos, 1990) Change of corporate name requires the amendment of the AOI: majority vote of the board and the vote or written assent of stockholders holding 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock (Sec. 16).

Rationale: Corporations are creatures of the law through the State legislature, the State is therefore concerned that this privilege be enjoyed by corporations only “under the conditions and not beyond the period that it sees fit to grant; and particularly, that it not be abused in fraud and to the detriment of other parties; and for this reason, it has been ruled that the limitation to a definite period is an exercise of control in the interest of the public.” (Benguet Consolidated Mining Co. v. Pineda98 Phil. 711 Smith v. Eastwood Wine Manufacturing Co., 43 Atl. 568 cited in Lopez, 1994)

Amendment of a corporation’s AOI changing its corporate name does not extinguish the personality of the original corporation. It is the same corporation with a different name, and its character is not changed. Consequently, the “new” corporation is still liable for the debts and obligations of the “old” corporation. (Republic Planters Bank v. CA, 1992) (2) Purpose Clause (a) Must indicate the PRIMARY and SECONDARY purposes if there is more than one purpose, which should not contradict or change the nature of the corporation (Sec. 14(2)) (b) Must not be patently unconstitutional, illegal, immoral, and contrary to government rules and regulations (Sec. 17 (2)). (c) Must not be for the purpose of practicing a profession (People v. United Medical Service, 200 N.E. 157, cited in Campos)

MINIMUM CAPITAL STOCK AND SUBSCRIPTION REQUIREMENT (Sec. 12) MINIMUM CAPITAL STOCK

Stock corporations incorporated under the Corporation Code shall not be required to have a minimum authorized capital stock Exception: As provided for by special law and subject to the provisions of Sec. 13

(3) Principal Office (a) Must be within the Philippines (Sec. 14 (3)) (b) AOI must specify both province or city or town where it is located (c) A specific address is now required; Metro Manila is no longer allowed (Sundiangand Aquino citing SEC Circular No. 3-2006).

SUBSCRIPTION REQUIREMENT

The amount of capital stock to be subscribed and paid for the purposes of incorporation (Sec. 13): (1) At the time of incorporation, at least 25% of the authorized capital stock stated in the AOI should be subscribed; (2) At least 25% of the said 25% above, must be paid upon subscription; (3) The balance to be payable on (a) Dates fixed in the subscription contract or (b) Upon call by the BOD in the absence of fixed dates (4) The paid-up capital can in no case be lower than P5,000.00

Important for: (a) determining venue in an action by or against the corporation, and (b) determining the province where a chattel mortgage of shares should be registered (Chua Gan vs. Samahang Magsasaka, 1935).

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

(4) Corporate Term (a) Maximum life of 50 years. (b) Extendible for a period not exceeding 50 years at any one instance. No extension, however, can be made earlier than 5 years before the end of the term. (Sec. 11)

NATURE AND FUNCTION OF ARTICLES

(1) Constitutes the charter of the corporation and sets forth the rules and conditions upon which the association or corporation is founded PAGE 73

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Extension requires an amendment of the AOI subject to the exercise of appraisal right by the dissenting stockholder (Sec. 37).

(a) 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock, without prejudice to the appraisal right of dissenting stockholders in accordance with the provisions of this Code, (b) 2/3 of the members if it be a non-stock corporation. (Sec. 16)

(5) Names, citizenship and residences of incorporators (6) Number, names, citizenship and residences of directors/ trustees (Asked in 2005 and 2008) Stock corporations: Directors Non-stock corporations: Trustees

Limitations (1) Cannot effect amendment when it will contravene any provision of requirement imposed by the Code or by special laws (2) The amendment must be for a legitimate purpose (3) Must be approved by the directors/trustees and the stockholders/members through the vote requirement (4) Appraisal Right (5) Both the original and the amended articles together must contain all the provisions required by law to be set out in the articles. (6) If the corporation is governed by a special law the amended articles must be accompanied by a favorable recommendation of the appropriate government agency to the effect that such amendment is in accordance with law (Lopez, 2004) (7) Will take effect only (a) Upon their approval by the SEC by the issuance of a certificate of amended articles (b) Or from the date of filing with the SEC if not acted upon within 6 months from the date of filing for a cause not attributable to the corporation

General rule: Not less than 5 but not more than 15 directors/ trustees Exception: Non-stock corporations whose articles or bylaws may provide for more than 15 trustees (Sec. 92) Educational non-stock corporations: (a) trustees may NOT be less than 5 NOR exceed 15 (b) number of trustees shall be in multiples of 5 (Sec. 108) Nationalized or partially-nationalized industries: Aliens may be directors but only in such number as may be proportional to their allowable ownership of shares (7) If stock corporation (a) authorized capital stock in lawful money of the Philippines (b) the number of shares into which the ACS is divided (c) if with par value shares, the par value of each share (Sec. 14(8), Sec. 15(7)). (d) names, citizenship and residences of original subscribers (e) amount subscribed and paid on each subscription (f) fact that some or all shares are without par value (8) (a) (b) (c)


Procedure (1) The original and amended articles together shall contain all provisions required by law to be set out in the articles of incorporation (2) The articles, as amended shall be indicated by underscoring the change or changes made (3) A copy shall be submitted to the SEC (a) Duly certified under oath by the corporate secretary and a majority of the directors or trustees (b) Stating the fact that the amendment or amendments have been duly approved by the required vote of the stockholders or members

If non-stock corporation amount of capital names, nationalities & residences of contributors amount contributed by each

(9) Amount paid by each subscriber on their subscription, which shall not be less than 25% of subscribed capital and shall not be less than P5,000 (Sec. 15 (8 & 9)

The following items are amendable under Sec. 16: (1) Change of name of the Corporation (2) Adding to or changing the purpose/s (3) Change of principal office (4) Change in the number of directors or trustees (5) Increase or decrease in authorized capital stock (subject to Sec. 38)

(10) Name of treasurer elected by the subscribers (Sec. 15 (10) (11) Other matters (a) Classes of shares, as well as preferences or restrictions on any such class (Sec. 6). (b) Denial or restriction of pre-emptive right (Sec.39). (c) Prohibition against transfer of stock which would reduce stock ownership to less than the required minimum in the case of a nationalized business or activity (Sec. 15(11)).

NON-AMENABLE ITEMS

The following items state accomplished facts, therefore, cannot be amended: (1) The names, nationalities and residences of the incorporators (Otherwise, an amendment would go against the definition of “incorporators” in Sec. 5) (2) First set of directors or trustees (3) Original stock subscriptions and paid-in capital (4) Treasurer-in-trust (5) Place and date of execution (6) Witnesses (De Leon)

AMENDMENT

Amendment of the Articles of Incorporation Any provision or matter stated in the articles of incorporation may be amended (1) By a majority vote of the board of directors or trustees (2) And the vote or written assent of:

Notes: AOI must be accompanied by Treasurer’s sworn statement of compliance with Sec. 13 on amount of capital PAGE 74

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

to be subscribed and paid for the purposes of incorporation; otherwise, SEC shall not accept the AOI. (Sec. 14)


EFFECT OF FAILURE TO FILE THE BY-LAWS WITHIN THE PERIOD

Does not imply the "demise" of the corporation. By-laws may be required by law for an orderly governance and management of corporations but they are not essential to corporate birth. Therefore, failure to file them within the period required by law by no means tolls the automatic dissolution of a corporation (Loyola Grand Villas Homeowners Assn. v. CA (1997)

REGISTRATION AND ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION REGISTRATION OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

Documents to be filed with SEC (Asked in 2002): [BAT-LaNG] (1) Articles of Incorporation (2) Treasurer’s Affidavit certifying that 25% of the total authorized capital stock has been subscribed and at least 25% of such has been fully paid in cash or property. (3) Bank certificate covering the paid-up capital.(Note: Current SEC rules no longer require this if payment for shares is made in cash) (4) Letter authority authorizing the SEC to examine the bank deposit and other corporate books and records to determine the existence of paid-up capital. (5) Undertaking to change the corporate Name in case there is another person or entity with same or similar name that was previously registered. (6) Certificate of authority from proper Government agency whenever appropriate like BSP for banks and Insurance Commission for insurance corporations. (Sundiang and Aquino)

Note: Section 22 on the effect of failure to formally organize within 2 years from incorporation, the corporation’s corporate powers cease and the corporation is deemed dissolved. Organization includes: the filing & approval of bylaws with the SEC and the election of directors and officers (Campos). NATURE AND FUNCTION OF BY LAWS

(1) Product of agreement of the stockholders/members and establish the rules for internal government of the corporation (Campos (2) “A rule or law of a corporation for its government” (13 Am. Jur., 283) (3) Mere internal rules among stockholders and cannot affect or prejudice 3rd persons who deal with the corporation unless they have knowledge of the same (China Banking Corp v CA, 1997) (4) “According to its function, by-laws may be defined as the rules and regulations or private laws enacted by the corporation to regulate, govern and control its own actions, affairs and concerns and its stockholders or members and directors and officers with relation thereto and among themselves in their relation to it.” (9 Fletcher Cyc. Corp., 1963 rev. ed., Sec. 4166 at 622 cited in Lopez, 1994)

ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION BY SEC

Effect: Commencement of corporate existence and juridical personality (Sec. 19) Revocation of certificate of incorporation: If incorporators are found guilty of fraud in procuring the same after due notice and hearing (Sec. 6(i), PD 902-A)

REQUISITES OF VALID BY-LAWS

GROUNDS FOR DISAPPROVING AOI (SEC. 17) (F2P2)

(1) Must be approved by the affirmative vote of the stockholders representing MAJORITY of the outstanding capital stock or majority of members (If filed preincorporation: must be approved and signed by all incorporators) (2) Must be kept in the principal office of the corporation, subject to inspection of stockholders or members during office hours (Sec. 74)

(1) AOI does not SUBSTANTIALLY comply with the form prescribed (2) Purpose is patently unconstitutional, illegal, immoral, contrary to government rules and regulations (3) Treasurer’s Affidavit concerning the amount of capital subscribed and or paid is false (4) Required percentage of ownership of Filipino citizens has not been complied with.

BINDING EFFECTS

Remedy in case of rejection of AOI: Petition for review in accordance with the Rules of Court (Sec. 6, last par., PD 902-A)

ONLY from date of issuance of SEC of certification that bylaws are not inconsistent with the Code Pending approval, they CANNOT bind stockholders or corporation

SEC shall give the incorporators reasonable time to correct or modify objectionable portions of the articles or amendment (Sec. 17).

AMENDMENT OR REVISION

Effected by: Majority vote of the members of the Board and majority vote of the owners of the OCS or members, in a meeting duly called for the purpose. Delegation to the BOD of the power to amend or repeal bylaws: by vote of stockholders representing 2/3 of the OCS or 2/3 of the members

ADOPTION OF BY-LAWS WHEN ADOPTION IS MADE (SEC. 46)

(1) Prior to incorporation – approved and signed by all the incorporators & submitted to SEC together with AOI (2) After incorporation – within 1 month after receipt of official notice of the issuance of its certificate of incorporation by the SEC.

How delegation is revoked: Any power delegated to the board of directors or trustees to amend or repeal any bylaws or adopt new by-laws shall be considered as revoked

PAGE 75

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


whenever stockholders owning or representing a majority of the outstanding capital stock or a majority of the members in non-stock corporations, shall so vote at a regular or special meeting.

(3) Written notice of meeting (includes proposed action, time and place of meeting) shall be addressed to each SH/member at his place of residence and deposited to the addressee in the post office, or served personally (4) In case of extension of corporate term, appraisal right may be exercised by the dissenting stockholder

Corporate Powers

INCREASE OR DECREASE CAPITAL STOCK (SEC. 38)

GENERAL POWERS, THEORY OF GENERAL CAPACITY (Sec. 36) (1) Sue and be sued in its corporate name; (2) Succession; (3) Adopt and use a corporate seal; (4) Amend its Articles of Incorporation; (5) Adopt by-laws; (6) For stock corporations - issue or sell stocks to subscribers and sell treasury stocks; for non-stock corporation - admit members to the corporation; (7) Purchase, receive, take or grant, hold, convey, sell, lease, pledge, mortgage and otherwise deal with such real and personal property, pursuant to its lawful business; (8) Enter into merger or consolidation with other corporations as provided in the Code; (9) Make reasonable donations, including those for the public welfare or for hospital, charitable, cultural, scientific, civic, or similar purposes: Provided, no corporation, domestic or foreign, shall give donations in aid of any political party or candidate or for purposes of partisan political activity; (10) Establish pension, retirement, and other plans for the benefit of its directors, trustees, officers and employees; and (11) Exercise such other powers as may be essential or necessary to carry out its purposes

(1) Same requirements above from 1-3

INCUR, CREATE OR INCREASE BONDED INDEBTEDNESS (SEC. 38)

(2) A certificate in duplicate must be signed by a majority of the directors of the corporation (countersigned by the chairman and the secretary of the SH meeting), setting forth: (a) That requirements of this section have been complied with (b) The amount of the increase or diminution of the capital stock (c) In case of increase, (i) the amount of capital stock or number of shares of nopar stock actually subscribed (ii) names, nationalities and residences of the persons subscribing (iii) the amount of no-par stock subscribed by each (iv) the amount paid by each on his subscription, or the amount of capital stock or number of shares of no-par stock allotted to each stockholder if such increase is for the purpose of making effective stock dividend (d) any bonded indebtedness to be incurred, created or increased (e) the actual indebtedness of the corporation on the day of the meeting (f) the amount of stock represented at the meeting (g) the vote authorizing the increase or diminution of the capital stock, or the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness

Note: The Corporation has implied powers which are deemed to exist because of the following provisions: (1) “Except such as are necessary or incidental to the exercise of the powers so conferred” (Sec. 45) (2) “Such powers as are essential or necessary to carry out its purpose or purposes as stated in the AOI” – catch-all phrase (Sec. 36(11)).

(3) prior approval of SEC is required (4) duplicate certificates shall be kept on file in the office of the corporation and the other shall be filed with the SEC, attached in the original articles of incorporation. (a) From and after approval of the SEC of its certificate of filing, the capital stock shall stand increased or decreased and the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness authorized (b) SEC shall not accept for filing any certificate of increase unless accompanied by the sworn statement of the treasurer of the corporation showing: (i) That at least 25% of such increased capital stock have been subscribed and (ii) that at least 25% of the amount subscribed has been paid or that there has been transferred to the corporation property the value is equivalent to 25% of the subscription (c) SEC shall not approve any decrease in the capital stock if its effect shall prejudice the rights of corporate creditors

SPECIFIC POWERS, THEORY OF SPECIFIC CAPACITY (Sec. 37-44) (BADD PIT MC) (1) Power to Extend or Shorten Corporate Term (2) Power to Increase or Decrease Capital Stock or Incur, Create, Increase Bonded Indebtedness (3) Power to Deny Pre-Emptive Rights (4) Power to Sell or Dispose of Corporate Assets (5) Power to Acquire Own Shares (6) Power to Invest Corporate Funds in Another Corporation or Business (7) Power to Declare Dividends (8) Power to Enter Into Management Contract EXTEND OR SHORTEN THE CORPORATE TERM (SEC. 37)

(1) Must be approved by majority vote of the Board of Directors/ Board of Trustees (BOD/BOT) (2) Ratified at a meeting by 2/3 of SH representing the outstanding capital stock/ 2/3 of members of non-stock corporations

(5) Bonds issued by a corporation shall be registered with the SEC PAGE 76

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

DENY PREEMPTIVE RIGHT (SEC. 39)


(c) If the investment is OUTSIDE the purpose/s for which the corporation was organized, AOI must be amended first, otherwise it will be an Ultra Vires act.

(1) All SH of a Stock Corporation have preemptive right to subscribe to all issues or disposition of shares of any class, in proportion to their respective shareholdings (2) Except if such right is denied by the AOI or an amendment thereto (3) Pre-emptive right shall not extend to: (a) shares to be issued in compliance with laws requiring stock offerings or minimum stock ownership by the public (b) shares to be issued in good faith with the approval of 2/3 of the stockholders representing outstanding capital stock, in exchange for property needed for corporate purposes or in payment of a previously contracted debt

DECLARE DIVIDENDS (SEC. 43)

(1) Out of URE (2) Payable in cash, in property, or in stock to all SH on the basis of outstanding stock held by them (3) Any cash dividend due on delinquent stock shall first be applied to the unpaid balance on the subscription plus costs and expenses (4) Stock dividends shall be withheld from the delinquent stockholder until his unpaid subscription is fully paid (5) Should be approved by 2/3 of SH representing the outstanding capital stock at a regular/special meeting called for that purpose (6) Stock corporations- prohibited from retaining surplus profits in excess of 100% of their paid-in capital stock, except: (a) When justified by definite corporate expansion projects or programs approved by the BOD (b) When the corporation is prohibited under any loanagreement with any financial institution or creditor from declaring dividends without its consent, and such consent has not yet been secured (c) When it can be clearly shown that such retention is necessary under special circumstances obtaining in the corporation

SELL OR DISPOSE OF SUBSTANTIALLY ALL ITS ASSETS (SEC. 40)

(1) Same requirements from 1-3 as Sec. 37 above (2) Any dissenting SH may exercise his appraisal right (3) Deemed to cover substantially all the corporate property and assets (4) After authorization by the SH/members, the BOD/BOT may abandon such sale, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge or other disposition, subject to the rights of third parties under any contract relating thereto, without further action or approval by the SH/ members (5) Corporation is not restricted in its power to dispose assets: (a) if the same is necessary in the usual and regular course of business of the corporation or (b) if the proceeds of the sale will be appropriated for the conduct of its remaining business

ENTER INTO MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS (SEC. 44)

(1) Should be approved by the BOD and by SH owning at least the majority of the outstanding capital stock or at least a majority of the members of both the managing and the managed corporation at a meeting duly called for that purpose (2) Should be approved by the 2/3 of stockholders owning outstanding capital stock/members of the managed corporation when: (a) A stockholder or stockholders representing the same interest of both the managing and managed corporations own more than 1/3 of the total outstanding capital stock entitled to vote of the managing corporation; or (b) A majority of the members of the BOD of the managing corporation also constitute a majority of the BOD of the managed corporation (3) No management contract shall be entered into for a period longer than 5 years for any one term (4) 1-3 above applies to any contract whereby a corporation undertakes to manage or operate all or substantially all of the business of another corporation, whether such are called service contracts, operating agreements or otherwise (5) Service contracts or operating agreements which relate to exploration, development, exploitation or utilization of natural resources may be entered into for such periods as may be provided in the pertinent laws and regulations

ACQUIRE ITS OWN SHARES (SEC. 41)

(1) For a legitimate corporate purpose/s, including but not limited to the following: (a) To eliminate fractional shares arising out of stock dividends (b) To collect or compromise an indebtedness to the corporation, arising out of unpaid subscription, in a delinquency sale, and to purchase delinquent shares sold during said sale; and (c) To pay dissenting or withdrawing stockholders (2) Provided there are unrestricted retained earnings (URE) in the corporate books to cover the shares purchased or acquired INVEST IN ANOTHER CORPORATION OR BUSINESS (SEC. 42)

(1) Same requirements from 1-3 as Sec. 37 above (2) Any dissenting SH shall have appraisal right (3) Where the investment is reasonably necessary to accomplish the corporation’s primary purpose, the approval of the SH/ members is not necessary Notes: (a) If it is for the same purpose, or incidental, or related to its PRIMARY purpose, the board can invest the corporate fund WITHOUT the consent of the stockholders. No appraisal right. (b) If the investment is in another corporation of different business or purpose BUT in pursuance of the SECONDARY purpose, the affirmative vote of majority of the board consented by stockholders/ members is required.

Notes: Two general restrictions on the power of the corporation to acquire and hold properties: (1) property must be reasonably and necessarily required by the business PAGE 77

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

(2) that the power shall be subject to the limitations prescribed by other special laws and the Constitution (corporation may not acquire more than 30% of voting stocks of a bank; corporations are restricted from acquiring public lands except by lease of not more than 1000 hectares)

ratification, or estoppel, while the latter is void and cannot be validated. (Seaoilvs. Autocorp Group, 2008, Nachura) Remedies in Case of Ultra Vires Acts (1) State: (a) Forfeiture by judgment of Court (b) Suspension or revocation of the certificate of registration by the SEC (2) Stockholders: (a) Injunction (b) Derivative suit (3) Creditors: Nullification of contract in fraud of creditors

ULTRA VIRES ACTS

Definition: Ultra vires acts are those acts which a corporation is not empowered to do or perform because they are not conferred by its AOI or by the Corporation Code, or not necessary or incidental to the exercise of the powers so conferred (Sec. 45).

DOCTRINE OF INDIVISIBILITY OF SUBSCRIPTION

Section 64 of the Corporation Code implicitly sets forth the doctrine that subscription is one entire and indivisible contract. Thus, if the stockholder has not paid the full amount of his subscription, he cannot transfer part of it in view of the indivisible nature of subscription contract. It is only upon full payment of the whole subscription that a stockholder can transfer a portion of his subscription. However, the entire subscription although not yet fully paid, may be transferred to a single transferee. It is necessary, however, to secure the consent of the corporation since the transfer of subscription right contemplates a novation of contract which, under Article 1293 of the Civil Code of the Philippines, cannot be made without the consent of the creditor. Likewise, it has to be emphasized that under Section 63 of the Corporation Code, no transfer shall be valid, except as between the parties, until the transfer is recorded in the books of the corporation. (SEC Opinion, August 7, 1991)

Types of ultra vires Acts: (1) Acts done beyond the powers of the corporation as provided in the law or its articles of incorporation; (2) Acts or contracts entered into in behalf of a corporation by persons who have no corporate authority (Note: This is technically ultra vires acts of officers and not of the corporation); (3) Acts or contracts, which are per se illegal as being contrary to law. (Villanueva) Applicability of ultra vires doctrine It is a question, therefore, in each case of the logical relation of the act to the corporate purpose expressed in the charter. If that act is one which is lawful in itself, and not otherwise prohibited, is done for the purpose of serving corporate ends, and is reasonably tributary to the promotion of those ends, in a substantial, and not in a remote and fanciful sense, it may fairly be considered within the charter powers. The test to be applied is whether the act in question is in direct and immediate furtherance of the corporation’s business, fairly incident to the express powers and reasonably necessary to their exercise. If so, the corporation has the power to do it; otherwise, not. (Montelibano v. Bacolod-Murcia Milling Co., Inc., G.R. No. 15092, May 18, 1962)

The transferee must also undertake to pay the balance of the subscription amount when due or upon call by the BOD. DOCTRINE OF EQUALITY OF SHARES

Each share shall be EQUAL in ALL respects to every other share, except as otherwise provided in the AOI and stated in the certificate of stock (Sec. 6)

Consequences of ultra vires Acts (1) Executed contract – courts will not set aside or interfere with such contracts; (2) Executory contracts – no enforcement even at the suit of either party (void and unenforceable); (3) Partly executed and partly executory – principle of “no unjust enrichment at expense of another” shall apply; (4) Executory contracts apparently authorized but ultra vires – the principle of estoppel shall apply. Ultra Vires Acts

HOW (CORPORATE POWERS) EXERCISED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS

Corporate acts requiring approval of stockholders or members (voting and non-voting shares) General rule: Vote necessary to approve a particular corporate act as provided in this Code shall be deemed to refer only to stocks with voting rights (Sec. 6) Exceptions (Sec. 6): Voting and non-voting shares shall be entitled to vote in the following cases: (1) Amendment of AOI (2) Adoption, Amendment and Repeal of By-Laws (Sec. 48) (3) Sale, Lease, Mortgage or Other Disposition of Substantially all corporate assets (Sec. 40) (4) Incurring, Creating or Increasing Bonded Indebtedness (Sec. 38) (5) Increase or Decrease of Capital Stock (Sec. 38) (6) Merger and Consolidation(Sec. 76-80) (7) Investment of funds in another corporation or business or for any purpose other than the primary purpose for which it was organized (Sec. 42)

Illegal Acts

Not necessarily unlawful, but Unlawful; against law, outside the powers of the morals, public policy, and corporation public order Can be ratified


Cannot be ratified

Can bind the parties if wholly Cannot bind the parties or partly executed An ultra vires act is distinguished from illegal act, the former being voidable which may be enforced by performance, PAGE 78

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Requisites (Sec. 42) (Asked in 95): (a) Approval of majority of the board of directors or trustees (b) Ratification by the stockholders representing at least 2/3 of the OCS or the members at a meeting duly called for the purpose (c) Written notice addressed to each stockholder or member at his place of residence as shown on the books of the corporation (d) Appraisal right available to dissenting stockholders or members


BY THE OFFICERS

Corporate Officer

Corporate Employee

Position is provided for in the Employed through the action by-laws or under the of the managing officer of Corporation Code the corporation RTC has jurisdiction in case NLRC has jurisdiction in case of labor dispute of labor disputes Who are corporate officers (POST) (Sec. 25) (1) President – must be a director; (2) Treasurer – may or may not be a director; as a matter of sound corporate practice, must be a resident and citizen of the Phil (SEC opinion) (3) Secretary – need not be a director unless required by the by-laws; must be a resident and citizen of the Philippines; and (4) Other officers as may be provided in the by-laws.

(8) Dissolution of the Corporation (Sec. 118-121) Corporate acts requiring approval of stockholders or members (voting shares only) (1) Declaration of Stock Dividends (Sec. 43) (2) Management Contracts (Sec. 44) (3) Fixing the Consideration of No-Par shares (Sec. 62) (4) Fixing the Compensation of Directors (Sec. 30)

Note: Any two (2) or more positions may be held concurrently by the same person, EXCEPT that no one shall act as president and secretary or as president and treasurer at the same time.

BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Board as repository of corporate powers General rule (doctrine of centralized management): The corporate powers of the corporation shall be exercised, all business conducted and all property of such corporation controlled and held by the board of directors or trustees. (Sec. 23)

Additional qualifications of officers may be provided for in the by-laws (Sec. 47(5)). Disqualifications (Sec. 27) (1) Convicted by final judgment of an offense punishable by imprisonment for a period exceeding 6 years (2) Convicted by final judgment of a violation of the Corporation Code committed within 5 years prior to the date of his election or appointment. This includes violations of rules and regulations issued by the SEC to implementthe provisions of the Corporation Code.

Exceptions: (1) Executive Committee duly authorized in the by-laws (Sec. 35); (2) A contracted manager which may be an individual, a partnership, or another corporation. Note: In case the contracted manager is another corporation, the special rule in Sec. 44 applies.

Authority of Corporate Officers A person dealing with a corporate officer is put on inquiry as to the scope of the latter’s authority but an innocent person cannot be prejudiced if he had the right to presume under the circumstances the authority of the acting officers.

(3) In case of close corporations, the stockholders may manage the business of the corporation rather than by a board of directors, if the AOI so provide (Sec. 97) The power to purchase real property is vested in the board of directors or trustees. While a corporation may appoint agents to negotiate for the purchase of real property needed by the corporation, the final say will have to be with the board, whose approval will finalize the transaction. (Spouses Constantine Firme v. Bukal Enterprises and Development Corporation, 2003)

Q: What is the doctrine of apparent authority? A: If a corporation knowingly permits one of its officers, or any other agent, to act within the scope of an apparent authority, it holds him out to the public as possessing the power to do those acts; the corporation will, as against anyone who has in good faith dealt with it through such agent, be estopped from denying the agent’s authority. (Associated Bank v. Pronstroller, 2008, Nachura)

Requisites of a valid corporate act by the Board of Directors (Sec. 25) (1) The Board must act as a BODY in a meeting. (Note: Current SEC regulations allow BOD meetings by teleconferencing or videoconferencing (2) There must be a VALIDLY constituted meeting. (3) Their act must be supported by a MAJORITY OF THE QUORUM duly assembled (Exception: Election of officers requires a vote of majority of ALL the members of the board) (4) The act must be within the powers conferred to the Board.

TRUST FUND DOCTRINE Under Sec. 43 of Code, the corporation can declare dividends only out of "unrestricted retained earnings;" and that under Sec. 122, no corporation shall distribute any of its assets or property except upon lawful dissolution and after payment of all its debts and liabilities. These provisions in essence provide for the "trust fund doctrine" where the "subscription to the capital of a corporation constitute a fund to which creditors have a right to look for satisfaction of their claims." Philippine Trust Co. v. Rivera, 44 Phil. 469 (1923) (cited in Villanueva) PAGE 79

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


The Trust Fund Doctrine, first enunciated by this Court in the 1923 case of Philippine Trust Co. v. Rivera, provides that subscriptions to the capital stock of a corporation constitute a fund to which the creditors have a right to look for the satisfaction of their claims.

(2) In case of a contracted manager which may be an individual, a partnership, or another corporation

This doctrine is the underlying principle in the procedure for the distribution of capital assets, embodied in Corporation Code, which allows the distribution of corporate capital only in three instances: (1) amendment of the Articles of Incorporation to reduce the authorized capital stock, (2) purchase of redeemable shares by the corporation, regardless of the existence of unrestricted retained earnings, and (3) dissolution and eventual liquidation of the corporation.

(3) In case of close corporations, the stockholders may manage the business of the corporation rather thanby a board of directors, if the AOI so provide. (Sec. 97)

Note: In case the contracted manager is another corporation, the special rule in Sec. 44 applies.

The power to purchase real property is vested in the board of directors or trustees. While a corporation may appoint agents to negotiate for the purchase of real property needed by the corporation, the final say will have to be with the board, whose approval will finalize the transaction. (Spouses Constantine Firme v. Bukal Enterprises and Development Corporation, 2003)

Furthermore, the doctrine is articulated in Sec. 41 on the power of a corporation to acquire its own shares and in Sec. 122 on the prohibition against the distribution of corporate assets and property unless the stringent requirements therefore are complied with. (Ong Yong v. Tiu, 2003)

The Corporation Code of the Philippines vests in the board of directors the exercise of the corporate powers of the corporation, save in those instances where the Code requires stockholders’ approval for certain specific acts. (Great Asian Sales Center Corp v. CA, 2002)

Trust Fund Doctrine means that the capital stock, properties and other assets of a corporation are regarded as equity in trust for the payment of corporate creditors. Stated simply, the trust fund doctrine states that all funds received by the corporation in payment of the shares of stock shall be held in trust for the corporate creditors and other stockholders of the corporation. Under such doctrine no fund shall be used to buy back the issued shares of stock except only in instances specifically allowed by the Corporation Code. (Boman Environmental Development Corporation v. CA, 1988):

Indisputably, one of the rights of a stockholder is the right to participate in the control or management of the corporation. This is exercised through his vote in the election of directors because it is the board of directors that controls or manages the corporation. (Gamboa v. Teves, 2011) Section 23 of the Corporation Codeexpressly provides that the corporate powers of all corporations shall be exercised by the board of directors. The power and the responsibility to decide whether the corporation should enter into a contract that will bind the corporation are lodged in the board, subject to the articles of incorporation, by-laws, or relevant provisions of law. In the absence of authority from the board of directors, no person, not even its officers, can validly bind a corporation.

The creditors of a corporation have the right to assume that so long as there are debts and liabilities, the Board of Directors will not use corporate assets to purchase its own shares of stock or to declare dividends to its stockholders when the corporation is insolvent. (Steinberg v. Velasco, 1929)

However, just as a natural person may authorize another to do certain acts for and on his behalf, the board of directors may validly delegate some of its functions and powers to its officers, committees or agents. The authority of these individuals to bind the corporation is generally derived from law, corporate by-laws or authorization from the board, either expressly or impliedly by habit, custom or acquiescence in the general course of business. (Banate v. Philippine Countryside Rural Bank, 2010)

Board of Directors and Trustees DOCTRINE OF CENTRALIZED MANAGEMENT General rule: Unless otherwise provided in this Code, the corporate powers of all corporations formed under this Code shall be exercised, all business conducted and all property of such corporations controlled and held by the board of directors or trustees to be elected from among the holders of stocks, or where there is no stock, from among the members of the corporation, who shall hold office for one (1) year until their successors are elected and qualified. (Sec. 23)

Requisites of a valid corporate act by the Board of Directors (1) The Board must act as a BODY in a meeting (2) There must be a VALIDLY constituted meeting (3) There act must be supported by a MAJORITY OF THE QUORUM duly assembled (Exception: Election of officers requires a vote of majority of ALL the members of the board (4) The act must be within the powers conferred to the Board.

Exceptions: (1) In case of an Executive Committee duly authorized in the by-laws; (Sec. 35)

Limitations on powers of Board of Directors/Trustees (1) Limitations imposed by the Constitution, statutes, articles of incorporation or by-laws

BOARD IS SEAT OF CORPORATE POWERS

PAGE 80

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

(2) Certain acts of the corporation that require joint action of the stockholders and board of directors: (a) Removal of director (Sec. 28) (b) Amendments of AOI (Sec. 16) (c) Fundamental changes (Sec. 6) (d) Declaration of stock dividends (Sec. 43) (e) Entering into management contracts (Sec. 44) (f) Fixing of consideration of non-par shares (Sec. 62) (g) Fixing of compensation of directors (Sec. 30)


(2) Injunction if the act has not yet been done (3) Dissolution if abuse amounts to a ground for quo warranto but Solicitor General Refuses to act (4) Derivative suit or complaint filed with the SEC (now the RTC) (PD 902-A) Note: Dean Villanueva opined that a derivative suit may be an exception to such Rule: this occurs when it is apparent that the Board is not in a position to validly exercise its business judgment for the protection of the corporation, e.g., when the Board itself has committed an act causing damage to the corporation or when the Board is placed in a conflict of interests scenario whereby it is unlikely that it would use such business discretion to file such suit for the best interest of the corporation.

(3) Cannot exercise powers not possessed by the corporation. PRINCIPLE ON DELEGATION OF BOARD POWER

Under Sec 23, the power and the responsibility to decide whether the corporation should enter into a contract that will bind the corporation is lodged in the board, subject to the articles of incorporation, by-laws, or relevant provisions of law.However, just as a natural person may authorize another to do certain acts for and on his behalf, the board of directors may validly delegate some of its functions and powers to officers, committees or agents. The authority of such individuals to bind the corporation is generally derived from law, corporate by-laws or authorization from the board, either expressly or impliedly by habit, custom or acquiescence in the general course of business. (People’s Aircargo v. CA, 1998)

TENURE, QUALIFICATIONS AND DISQUALIFICATIONS OF DIRECTORS OR TRUSTEES TENURE

Directors shall hold office for one (1) year until their successors are elected and qualified (Sec. 23). Term: One (1) year Tenure: The period within which the director actually holds office, including the holdover period after the end of his term.

BUSINESS JUDGMENT RULE General rule: Directors cannot be held liable for mistakes or errors in the exercise of their business judgment if they acted in good faith, with due care & prudence. Contracts intra vires entered into by the board of directors are binding upon the corporation & courts will not interfere.

In several cases, we have defined "term" as the time during which the officer may claim to hold the office as of right, and fixes the interval after which the several incumbents shall succeed one another. The term of office is not affected by the holdover. The term is fixed by statute and it does not change simply because the office may have become vacant, nor because the incumbent holds over in office beyond the end of the term due to the fact that a successor has not been elected and has failed to qualify.

Exception: If the contracts are so unconscionable & oppressive as to amount to a wanton destruction of the rights of the minority or if they violate their duties under Sections 31 & 34.

Term is distinguished from tenure in that an officer’s "tenure" represents the term during which the incumbent actually holds office. The tenure may be shorter (or, in case of holdover, longer) than the term for reasons within or beyond the power of the incumbent.

CONSEQUENCES OF THE BUSINESS JUDGMENT RULE

Sec. 23 embodies the essence of the “Business Judgment Rule,” that unless otherwise provided in the Code, all corporate powers and prerogatives are vested directly in the Board of Directors. Consequently: (1) The resolution, contracts and transactions of the board cannot be overturned or set aside by the stockholders or members and not even by the courts under the principle that the business of the corporation has been left to the hands of the board (2) Directors and duly authorized officers cannot be held personally liable for acts or contracts done with the exercise of their business judgment.

Based on the above discussion, when Section 23 of the Corporation Code declares that "the board of directors…shall hold office for one (1) year until their successors are elected and qualified," we construe the provision to mean that the term of the members of the board of directors shall be only for one year; their term expires one year after election to the office. The holdover period – that time from the lapse of one year from a member’s election to the Board and until his successor’s election and qualification – is not part of the director’s original term of office, nor is it a new term; the holdover period, however, constitutes part of his tenure. (Valle Verde Country Club v. Africa, 2009)

Exceptions: (1) When the Corporation Code expressly provides otherwise (2) When the Directors or officers acted with fraud, gross negligence or in bad faith. (3) When Directors or officers act against the corporation in conflict of interest situation.(Villanueva)

QUALIFICATIONS

(1) If STOCK, director must own at least 1 share of the capital stock, which stock shall stand in his own name (Sec. 23).Exception: Trustee in a voting trust may be elected director/trustee. (2) If NON-STOCK, trustee must be a member.

REMEDIES IN CASE OF MISMANAGEMENT

(1) Receivership PAGE 81

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


(3) Majority of the directors/trustees must be residents of the Philippines. (4) Natural person (5) Of Legal Age (6) Other qualifications as may be prescribed in the by-laws of the corporation.

Exception: Directors who have been elected by minority stockholders exercising cumulative voting can only be removed for cause. Removal without cause may not be used to deprive minority stockholders or members of the right of representation to which they may be entitled under Section 24.

DISQUALIFICATIONS (SEC. 27)

(1) Convicted by final judgment of an offense punishable by imprisonment for a period exceeding 6 years; or (2) A violation of the Corporation Code, committed within five years from the date of his election. This includes violations of rules and regulations issued by the SEC to implement the provisions of the Corporation Code.

Other requisites: (1) by a vote of the stockholders holding or representing 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock, or if the corporation be a non-stock corporation, by a vote of 2/3 of the members entitled to vote (2) at a regular or special meeting after proper notice is given

ELECTIONS

FILLING OF VACANCIES

CUMULATIVE VOTING

VACANCY (1) BY REMOVAL, (2) BY EXPIRATION OF TERM, OR (3) WHEN THE REMAINING DIRECTORS DO NOT CONSTITUTE A QUORUM

Cumulative voting for one candidate A stockholder is allowed to concentrate his votes and give one candidate as many votes as the number of directors to be elected multiplied by the number of his shares shall equal.

Vacancy/ies must be filled by the stockholders in a regular or special meeting called for that purpose. A director or trustee elected to fill a vacancy in shall be elected only for the unexpired term of his predecessor in office.

Illustration: If there are 5 directors to be elected and Pedro, as shareholder, has 100 shares, Pedro can give 500 (5 x 100 shares) votes to just one candidate.

VACANCY BY REASON OF INCREASE IN THE NUMBER OF THE DIRECTORS/TRUSTEES

Cumulative voting by distribution A stockholder may cumulate his shares by multiplying the number of his shares by the number of directors to be elected and distribute the same among as many candidates as he shall see fit.

Vacancy/ies must be filled by the stockholders: (1) in a regular or special meeting called for that purpose; or (2) in the same meeting authorizing the increase of directors or trustees if so stated in the notice of the meeting.

Illustration: In the illustration above, Pedro instead may choose to give 100 votes to candidate 1, 100 votes to candidate 2, 100 votes to candidate 3, 150 votes to candidate 4, and 50 votes to candidate 5.

VACANCY BY OTHER CAUSES

Vacancy/ies may be filled by the vote of at least a majority of the remaining directors or trustees, if still constituting a quorum.

STRAIGHT VOTING

Every stockholder may vote such number of shares for as many persons as there are directors to be elected.

A director or trustee elected to fill a vacancy in shall be elected only for the unexpired term of his predecessor in office.

QUORUM

There must be present, in person or by representative authorized to act by written proxy, the owners of majority of the OCS or majority of the members entitled to vote in the meeting.

COMPENSATION (Sec. 30) General rule: Directors are only entitled to reasonable per diems. They are not entitled to compensation as directors. Exception: (1) When AOI, by-laws, or an advance contract provides for compensation. (2) Compensation other than per diems may also be granted to directors by the vote of the stockholders representing at least a majority of the OCS at a regular or special stockholders’ meeting.

Election must be by ballot if requested. A stockholder cannot be deprived in the articles of incorporation or in the by-laws of his statutory right to use any of the methods of voting in the election of directors. No delinquent stock shall be voted.

The total yearly compensation of directors shall not exceed 10% of the net income before income tax of the corporation during the preceding year.

The candidates receiving the highest number of votes shall be declared elected. REMOVAL General rule: Any Director or Trustee of a corporation may be removed from office, with or without cause. (Sec. 28)

COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS AS CORPORATE OFFICERS

The position of being chairman and Vice-Chairman, like that of treasurer and secretary, are not considered directorship PAGE 82

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

positions but officership positions that would entitle the occupants to compensation. Likewise, the limitation placed under Sec. 30 of the Corporation Code that directors cannot receive compensation exceeding 10% of the net income of the corporation would not apply to the compensation given to such positions since it is being given in their capacity as officers of the corporation and not as board members. (Western Institute of Technology v. Salas, 1997)


(2) from its nature, is in line with corporation’s business and is of practical advantage to it; and (3) one in which the corporation has an interest or a reasonable expectancy. The rule shall be applied notwithstanding the fact that the director risked his own funds in the venture. (Sec. 34) By embracing the opportunity, the self-interest of the officer or director will be brought into conflict with that of his corporation. Hence, the law does not permit him to seize the opportunity even if he will use his own funds in the venture. (Sundiangand Aquino)

FIDUCIARY DUTIES AND LIABILITY RULES DUTIES

In this jurisdiction, the members of the board of directors have a three-fold duty: duty of obedience, duty of diligence, and duty of loyalty. Accordingly, the members of the board of directors (1) Duty of Obedience - shall direct the affairs of the corporation only in accordance with the purposes for which it was organized; (2)Duty of Diligence - shall not willfully and knowingly vote for or assent to patently unlawful acts of the corporation or act in bad faith or with gross negligence in directing the affairs of the corporation; and (3) Duty of Loyalty - shall not acquire any personal or pecuniary interest in conflict with their duty as such directors or trustees. (Strategic Alliance Development Corpv.Radstock Securities Ltd., 2009)

Note: Differences between Section 31 and Section 34: (1) While both involve the same subject matter (business opportunity) they concern different personalities; Sec. 34 is applicable only to directors and not to officers, whereas Sec. 31 applies to directors, trustees and officers. (2) Sec. 34 allows a ratification of a transaction by a selfdealing director by vote of stockholders representing at least 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock. (Villanueva) SOLIDARY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES

(1) Willfully and knowingly voting for and assenting to patently unlawful acts of the corporation; (Sec. 31) (2) Gross negligence or bad faith in directing the affairs of the corporation; (Sec. 31) (3) Acquiring any personal or pecuniary interest in conflict of duty; (Sec. 31) (4) Consenting to the issuance of watered stocks, or, having knowledge thereof, failing to file objections with secretary; (Sec. 65) (5) Agreeing or stipulating in a contract to hold himself liable with the corporation; or (6) By virtue of a specific provision of law

Duty of obedience The Directors or Trustees and Officers to be elected shall perform the duties enjoined on them by law and by the bylaws of the corporation (Sec. 25). Duty of diligence Directors or trustees who (1) willfully and knowingly vote for or assent to patently unlawful acts of the corporation or (2) who are guilty of gross negligence or (3) bad faith in directing the affairs of the corporation or acquire any personal or pecuniary interest in conflict with their duty as such directors or trustees shall be liable jointly and severally for all damages resulting therefrom suffered by the corporation, its stockholders or members and other persons. (Sec 31)

LIABILITY FOR WATERED STOCKS

Watered Stocks – stocks issued for a consideration less than its par or issued value or for a consideration in any form other than cash, valued in excess of its fair value.

Duty of loyalty Directors and trustees should not acquire any personal or pecuniary interest in conflict with their duty as such directors or trustees, otherwise they shall be held liable jointly and severally for all damages resulting therefrom suffered by the corporation, its stockholders or members and other persons. (Sec. 31)

Any director or officer of a corporation consenting to the issuance of watered stocks or who, having knowledge thereof, does not forthwith express his objection in writing and file the same with the corporate secretary shall be solidarily liable with the stockholder concerned to the corporation and its creditors for the difference in value (Sec. 65).

Where a director, by virtue of his office, acquires for himself a business opportunity which should belong to the corporation, thereby obtaining profits to the prejudice of such corporation, he must account to the latter for all such profits by refunding the same, unless his act has been ratified by a vote of the stockholders owning or representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock (Sec. 34)

PERSONAL LIABILITIES

General rule: Members of the Board, who purport to act in good faith for and in behalf of the corporation within the lawful scope of their authority, are not liable for the consequences of their acts. When the acts are of such nature and done under those circumstances, they are attributed to the corporation alone and no personal liability is incurred. (Price v. Innodata Phils., Inc., 2008)

Doctrine of corporate opportunity Unless his act is ratified, a director shall refund to the corporation all the profits he realizes on a business opportunity which: (1) corporation is financially able to undertake

The provisions on seizing corporate opportunity and disloyalty (Secs. 31 and 34) shall also apply to corporate officers. PAGE 83

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Note: Members of the BOD who are also officers are held to a more stringent liability because they are in-charge of dayto-day activities (Campos) Doctrine of Limited Liability

Doctrine of Immunity

Shields the corporators from corporate liability beyond their agreed contribution to the capital or shareholding in the corporation.

Protects a person acting for and in behalf of the corporation from being himself personally liable for his authorized actions


Since the BOD is the repository of corporate powers and acts as the agent of the corporation, the directors may be held criminally liable. The Trust Receipts Law recognizes the impossibility of imposing the penalty of imprisonment on a corporation. Hence, if the entrustee is a corporation, the law makes the officers or employees or other persons responsible for the offense liable to suffer the penalty of imprisonment. The reason is obvious: corporations, partnerships, associations and other juridical entities cannot be put to jail. Hence, the criminal liability falls on the human agent responsible for the violation of the Trust Receipts Law. (Ong v. CA, 2003)

Liability of Director, Trustee or Officer (Asked in 96 and 97) Personal liability of a corporate director, trustee or officer along (although not necessarily) with the corporation may so validly attach, as a rule, only when: (1) He assents (a) to a patently unlawful act of the corporation, or (b) for bad faith or gross negligence in directing its affairs, or (c) for conflict of interest, resulting in damages to the corporation, its stockholders or other persons; (2) He consents to the issuance of watered stocks or who, having knowledge thereof, does not forthwith file with the corporate secretary his written objection thereto; (3) He agrees to hold himself personally and solidarily liable with the corporation; or (4) He is made, by a specific provision of law, to personally answer for his corporate action (Tramat Mercantile, Inc. vs. CA, 1994, reiterated in Atrium Management Corp. v. CA, 2001)

INSIDE INFORMATION The fiduciary position of insiders, directors, and officers prohibits them from using confidential information relating to the business of the corporation to benefit themselves or any competitor corporation in which they may have a mere substantial interest. Note: “Insider” means: (a) the issuer; (b) a director or officer (or person performing similar functions) of, or a person controlling the issuer; (c) a person whose relationship or former relationship to the issuer gives or gave him access to material information about the issuer or the security that is not generally available to the public; (d) a government employee, or director, or officer of an exchange, clearing agency and/or self-regulatory organization who has access to material information about an issuer or a security that is not generally available to the public; or (e) a person who learns such information by a communication from any of the foregoing insiders (§3.8, Sec Regulations Code)

SPECIAL FACTS DOCTRINE

Even though a director may not be under the obligation of a fiduciary nature to disclose to a shareholder his knowledge affecting the value of the shares, that duty may exist in special cases. (Strong v. Rapide, 1909)

Since loss and prejudice to the corporation is not a requirement for liability, the corporation has a cause of action as long as there is unfair use of inside information

General rule: (Majority view) Directors only owe its duty to the corporation. They owe no fiduciary duty to stockholders but they may deal with each other at fair and reasonable terms, as if they were unrelated. No duty to disclose facts known to the director or officer.

It is inside information if it is not generally available to others and is acquired because of the close relationship of the director or officer of the corporation CONTRACTS

Exception: Special Facts Doctrine: Conceding the absence of a fiduciary relationship in the ordinary case, courts nevertheless hold that where special circumstances or facts are present which make it inequitable for the director to withhold information from the stockholder, the duty to disclose arises and concealment is fraud. (Strong v. Rapide, 1909)

BY SELF-DEALING DIRECTORS WITH THE CORPORATION

General rule: A contract of the corporation with one or more of its directors or trustees is VOIDABLE, at the option of such corporation. (Sec. 32) Exception: Such contract is VALID if all of the following conditions are present: (1) That the presence of such director or trustee in the board meeting in which the contract was approved was not necessary to constitute a quorum for such meeting; (2) That the vote of such director or trustee was not necessary for the approval of the contract (3) That the contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances; and (4) That in case of an officer, the contract has been previously authorized by the board of directors.

RESPONSIBILITY FOR CRIMES Since a corporation as a person is a mere legal fiction, it cannot be proceeded against criminally because it cannot commit a crime in which personal violence or malicious intent is required. Criminal action is limited to the corporate agents guilty of an act amounting to a crime and never against the corporation itself (West Coast Life Ins. Co. v. Hurd,1914; Time Inc. v. Reyes,1971).

PAGE 84

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


Ratification: In case of absence of the first two conditions above, contract may be ratified if: (1) Stockholders representing at least 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock or at least 2/3 of the members in a meeting called for the purpose voted to ratify the contract. (2) Full disclosure of the adverse interest of the directors or trustees involved is made at such meeting. (3) Contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances

(3) Amendment, repeal or adoption of by-laws (Sec. 35); (4) Amendment or repeal of any resolution of the Board which by its express terms is not amendable or repealable (Sec. 35); (5) Cash dividend distribution (Sec. 35); and (6) Acts which would render the BOD powerless and free from all responsibilities imposed on it by law (Campos)

BETWEEN CORPORATIONS WITH INTERLOCKING DIRECTORS

REGULAR OR SPECIAL

If the interests of the interlocking director in the corporations are both substantial (stockholdings exceed 20% of outstanding capital stock). General rule: A contract between two or more corporations having interlocking directors shall not be invalidated on that ground alone. (Sec. 32)

Who may attend? The members of the Board themselves; directors in Board meetings cannot be represented or voted by proxies.

MEETINGS

In the Philippines, teleconferencing and videoconferencing of members of board of directors of private corporations is a reality, in light of Republic Act No. 8792. The Securities and Exchange Commission issued SEC Memorandum Circular No. 15, on November 30, 2001, providing the guidelines to be complied with related to such conferences. (Expertravel& Tours, Inc. v.CA, May 26, 2005)

Exception: If contract is fraudulent or not fair and reasonable under the circumstances If the interest of the interlocking director in one of the corporations is nominal (stockholdings 20% or less) while substantial in the other, the contract shall be VALID, if the following conditions are met:

When and Where When? (Sec.53) (1) Regular meetings of directors or trustees shall be held monthly, unless the by-laws provide otherwise. (2) Special meetings of the board of directors or trustees may be held at any time upon the call of the president or as provided in the by-laws.

(1) The presence of such director or trustee in the board meeting in which the contract was approved was NOT necessary to constitute a quorum for such meeting (2) That the vote of such director or trustee was not necessary for the approval of the contract (3) That the contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances.

Where? (Sec. 53) Meetings of directors or trustees of corporations may be held anywhere in or outside of the Philippines, unless the by-laws provide otherwise.

Where (1) and (2) are absent, the contract can be ratified by the vote of the stockholders representing at least 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock or at least 2/3 of the members in a meeting called for the purpose voted to ratify the contract, provided that: (a) Full disclosure of the adverse interest of the directors/trustees involved is made on such meeting; (b) The contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances.

Notice Notice of regular or special meetings stating the date, time and place of the meeting must be sent to every director or trustee at least one (1) day prior to the scheduled meeting, unless otherwise provided by the by-laws. A director or trustee may waive this requirement, either expressly or impliedly

MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS (SEC. 44)

See: Corporate Powers (2)(h) above

WHO PRESIDES

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

The president presides, unless the by-laws provide otherwise. (Sec. 54)

CREATION

The by-laws of a corporation may create an executive committee, composed of not less than three members of the board, to be appointed by the board.

QUORUM

Said committee may act, by majority vote of all its members, on such specific matters within the competence of the board, as may be delegated to it in the by-laws or on a majority vote of the board (Sec. 35).

Exceptions: (1) Unless the articles of incorporation or the by-laws provide for a greater majority, or (2) In case of election of officers where a vote of a majority of all the members of the board is needed.

General rule: Majority of the number of directors or trustees as fixed in the articles of incorporation.(Sec. 25)

LIMITATION ON ITS POWERS

Cannot act on the following: (1) Matters needing stockholder approval (Sec. 35); (2) Filling up of board vacancies;

RULE ON ABSTENTION

A vote of abstention is considered to be a vote in itself. Abstentions will not be counted towards the affirmative and PAGE 85

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


such refusal to vote does not indicate acquiescence in the action of those who vote.

restriction on shares may be valid and effective only if the same has formally been registered with the SEC and thereby becomes public records binding on the public. (Villanueva)

Stockholders and Members

Nature of the Rights of Members: The eleemosynary nature of every non-stock corporation defines the characteristic of membership therein as being essentially personal in character and therefore essentially non-transferable in nature.

RIGHTS OF STOCKHOLDER AND MEMBERS (1) Direct or indirect participation in management (Sec. 6) (2) Voting rights (Sec. 6) (3) Right to remove directors (Sec. 28) (4) Proprietary rights (a) Right to dividends (Secs. 43 and 71) (b) Appraisal right (Sec. 81) (c) Right to issuance of stock certificate for fully paid shares (Sec. 64) (d) Proportionate participation in the distribution of assets in liquidation (Sec. 122) (e) Right to transfer of stocks in corporate books (Sec. 63) (f) Pre-emptive right (Sec. 39)

Section 89 of the Corporation Code specifically provides that in a non-stock corporation, the right of members of any class or classes to vote “may be limited, broadened or denied to the extent specified in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws.” The SEC has opined that the rule in Section 6 allowing nonvoting shares to vote on specified fundamental matters does not apply to non-voting members of a non-stock corporation; that insofar as members of a non-stock corporation, the applicable provision is Section 89, which specifically provides that members may be denied entirely their voting rights in the articles of incorporation or by-laws of the corporation (Villanueva, citing SEC Opinion, 4 September 1995)

(5) Right to inspect books and records (Sec. 74) (6) Right to be furnished with the most recent financial statements/reports (Sec. 75) (7) Right to recover stocks unlawfully sold for delinquent payment of subscription (Sec. 69) (8) Right to file individual suit, representative suit and derivative suits

PARTICIPATION IN MANAGEMENT PROXY

Stockholders and members may vote in person or by proxy in all meetings of stockholders or members (Sec. 58).

DOCTRINE OF EQUALITY OF SHARES

All stocks issued by the corporation are presumed equal with the same privileges and liabilities, provided that the Articles of Incorporation is silent on such differences. (CIR v. CA, CTA, and A. Soriano Corporation, 1999)

The right to issue a proxy is vested with public interest when it comes to stock corporations; although it may be regulated under the by-laws, it cannot be denied, since it is an aspect of ownership interest of stockholders.

Doctrine of Equality of Shares provides that where the Articles of Incorporation do not provide for any distinction of the shares of stock, all shares issued by the corporation are presumed to be equal and enjoy the same rights and privileges and are also subject to the same liabilities. (Sundiang and Aquino)

However, the right of members to vote by proxy may be denied under the articles of incorporation or by-laws of a non-stock corporation (Sec. 89) Requisites for a valid and enforceable proxy (1) It must be in writing (2) Signed by the stockholder or member of record; and (3) Filed with the corporation before the scheduled meeting with the Corporate Secretary

The default rule is that all stockholders have equal right and obligations, expressed in the last paragraph of Section 6 of the Corporation Code which provides, “each share shall be equal in all respects to every other share.” (Villanueva) Note: However, when preferences or restrictions are made to apply to a class of shares, then such preferences on restrictions shall exist and be valid only when “provided in the articles of incorporation and stated in the certificate of stock.” (Villanueva)

Procedural matters relating to proxies (1) “Proxy solicitation” involves the securing and submission of proxies, while “proxy validation” concerns the validation of such secured and submitted proxies; (2) The SEC’s power to pass upon the validity of proxies in relation to election controversies has effectively been withdrawn, tied as it is to its abrogated quasi-judicial powers, and has been transferred to the RTC Special Commercial Courts pursuant to the terms of Section 5.2 of the Securities Regulation Code; (3) Nevertheless, although an intra-corporate controversy may animate a disgruntled shareholder to complain to the SEC a corporation’s violations of SEC rules and regulations, but that motive alone should not be sufficient to deprive the SEC of its investigatory and

Section 6 of the Corporation Code also contains a “Boardenabling” clause that although the default rule is that all shareholders have equal rights and obligations, nevertheless, when authorized by the articles of incorporation, the Board of Directors, may fix the terms and conditions of preferred shares of stock or any series thereof, or to classify its shares for the purpose of insuring compliance with constitutional or legal requirements; but such terms and conditions shall be effective upon filing of a certificate thereof with the SEC. Thus, a preference or PAGE 86

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

regulatory powers, especially so since such powers are exercisable on a motu proprio basis.

CASES WHEN STOCKHOLDERS’ ACTION IS REQUIRED

By a majority vote (a) Power to enter into management contracts (Sec. 44)

The fact that the jurisdiction of the RTC Special Commercial Courts is confined to the voting on election of officers, and not all matter which may be voted upon by stockholders, elucidates that the power of the SEC to regulate proxies remains extant and could very well be exercised when stockholders vote on matters other than the election of directors. (GSIS v. CA, 2009)

General rule: Requires approval by majority of the BOD/BOT and approval by stockholders owning at least the majority of the outstanding capital stock/majority of members of both the managing and the managed corporation Exceptions: (1) Where a stockholder/s representing the same interest of both the managing and the managed corporations own or control more than one-third (1/3) of the total outstanding capital stock entitled to vote of the managing corporation; or (2) Where a majority of the members of the managing corporation’s BOD also constitute a majority of the managed corporation’s BOD

VOTING TRUST

An arrangement created by one or more stockholders for the purpose of conferring upon a trustee or trustees the right to vote and other rights pertaining to the shares for a period not exceeding five (5) years at any time (Sec. 59). Under a voting trust arrangement, a stockholder of a stock corporation parts with the naked or legal title, including the power to vote, of the shares and only retains the beneficial ownership of the stock. A voting trustee is a share owner vested with colorable and naked title of the shares covered for the primary purpose of voting upon stocks that he does not own.

Requires at least 2/3 votes of the outstanding capital stock/membership of the managed corporation. BUT only majority vote is required for the managing corporation.

A voting trust agreement shall be ineffective and unreasonable unless: (1) It is in writing and notarized; (2) Specify the terms and conditions thereof; and (3) A certified copy of such agreement shall be filed with the corporation and with the SEC. Corporate Officer Principal–agent

(b) Amendments to by-laws (Sec. 48) Requires approval by majority of the BOD/BOT and approval by stockholders owning at least the majority of the outstanding capital stock/majority of members Includes all stockholders/members with or without voting rights

Corporate Employee Trustee-beneficiary

(c) Revocation of delegation to the BOD of the power to amend or repeal or adopt by-laws (Sec. 48)

Proxy cannot exceed The only limit to authority is delegated authority. that the act must be for the benefit of trustee. (fiduciary obligation) Must be in writing

Requires approval by majority of the BOD/BOT and approval by stockholders owning at least the majority of the outstanding capital stock/majority of members

Must be in writing and notarized

(d) Calling a meeting to remove directors (Sec. 28)

Copy must be filed with the Copy must be filed with SEC corporation. and the corporation. No transfer.

Meeting for the removal of directors or trustees, or any of them, must be called by the secretary on order of the president or on the written demand of the stockholders representing or holding at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock/majority of members

Transfer of legal title to trustee.

Proxy exercises voting rights Trustee exercises absolute only for a specific meeting voting rights continuously, (unless otherwise provided) subject only to fiduciary duty. Proxy cannot be director

(e) Granting compensation other than per diems to directors (Sec. 30)

Trustee can be director because he holds legal title over the shares

Compensation other than per diems may be granted to directors by the vote of the stockholders representing at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock

Revocable at will in any Irrevocable, as long as no manner, EXCEPT if coupled misconduct or fraud. with an interest. Max of 5 yrs at a time


(f) Consideration for no-par shares (Sec. 62)

Max of 5 yrs at a time (unless the voting trust is specifically required as a condition in a loan agreement)

SEC can pass on validity PAGE 87

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

When the AOI or the BOD does not provide for the value of no-par shares, the value of such shares shall be determined by the stockholders representing at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock


Includes all stockholders/members with or without voting rights (g) Issuance of shares not subject to pre-emptive right (Sec. 39)

By a two-thirds vote (a) Amendment of Articles of Incorporation (Sec. 16)

Shares issued in good faith in exchange for property or previously incurred indebtedness with the approval of the stockholders representing two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock are not subject to pre-emptive rights.

Amendment of the AOI may be made by a majority vote of the BOD/BOT and the vote or written assent of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock, without prejudice to the appraisal right of dissenting stockholders.

(h) Sale/disposition of all or substantially all of corporate assets(Sec. 40)

Includes all stockholders/members with or without voting rights

Requires approval by a majority vote of the BOD/BOT and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership.

(b) Amendment of AOI of close corporations (Sec 103) Amendment to the AOI which seeks to delete or remove any provision required to be contained in the AOI of Close Corporations or to reduce a quorum or voting requirement stated in said AOI requires the affirmative vote of at least 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock, whether with or without voting rights, or of such greater proportion of shares as may be specifically provided in the AOI at a meeting duly called.

Includes all stockholders/members with or without voting rights Note: In non-stock corporations where there are NO members with voting rights, the vote of at least the majority of the BOT will be sufficient authorization for any sale or disposition of all or substantially all of corporate assets. (Sec. 40)

(c) Delegating the power to amend or repeal by-laws or adopt new by-laws (Sec. 48)

(i) Investment of funds in another business (Sec. 42)

Delegation to the BOD/BOT of the power to amend or repeal by-laws or adopt new by-laws requires approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership.

Requires approval by a majority vote of the BOD/BOT and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership. Includes all stockholders/members with or without voting rights

Revocation of the delegation requires only majority vote of the outstanding capital stock/membership.

(j) Dividend declaration (Sec. 43)

(d) Extending/shortening corporate term (Sec. 37)

No stock dividend shall be issued without the approval of stockholders representing not less than two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock.

Requires approval by a majority vote of the BOD/BOT and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership.

(k) Power to enter into management contracts (Sec. 44)


Please see discussion under By a Majority Vote

(e) Increasing/decreasing capital stock (Sec. 38)

(l) Removal of directors or trustees (Sec. 28)

Requires approval by a majority vote of the BOD and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock.

Any director or trustee may be removed from office by a vote of the stockholders holding or representing at least twothirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership.


(m) Ratifying contracts with respect to dealings with directors/ trustees (Sec. 32)

(f) Incurring, creating, increasing bonded indebtedness(Sec. 38)

A contract of the corporation with one or more of its directors is voidable, at the option of such corporation, unless all the following conditions are present: (1) The director’s presence in the BOD meeting in which the contract was approved was not necessary to constitute a quorum

Requires approval by a majority vote of the BOD and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock.

PAGE 88

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

(2) The vote of such director was not necessary for the approval of the contract (3) The contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances (4) In case of an officer, the contract has been previously authorized by the BOD.


Requires a resolution adopted by a majority vote of the BOD/BOT, and by a resolution duly adopted by the affirmative vote of the stockholders owning at least twothirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership of a meeting to be held upon call for such purpose. By cumulative voting Election of Directors or Trustees (Sec. 24) - A stockholder may vote such number of shares for as many persons as there are directors to be elected or he may cumulate said shares and give one candidate as many votes as the number of directors to be elected multiplied by the number of his shares shall equal, or he may distribute them on the same principle among as many candidates as he shall see fit:

Where any of the first two conditions is absent, but necessary that the contract be fair and reasonable, in the case of a contract with a director, such contract may be ratified by the vote of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock. (n) Ratifying acts of disloyalty of a director (Sec. 34) General rule: Where a director, by virtue of his office, acquires for himself a business opportunity which should belong to the corporation, thereby obtaining profits, he must account to the corporation for all such profits by refunding it.

Provided, That the total number of votes cast by him shall not exceed the number of shares owned by him as shown in the books of the corporation multiplied by the whole number of directors to be elected. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

Exception: His act may be ratified by a vote of the stockholders owning or representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock.

RIGHT TO DIVIDENDS

General rule: The right to dividends vests upon lawful declaration by the BOD. From that time, dividends become a debt owing to the SH. No revocation can be made.

(o) Stockholders’ approval of the plan of merger or consolidation (Sec. 77)

Exceptions: (1) Dividends are revocable if NOT yet announced or communicated to the stockholders. (2) Stock dividends, even if already declared, may be revoked prior to actual issuance since these are not distributions but merely representations of changes in the capital structure.

Requires approval by majority of each of the BOD/BOT of the constituent corporations of the plan of merger or consolidation and approval by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock/membership of each corporation at separate corporate meetings duly called. Amendments to the plan of merger or consolidation also requires approval by majority vote of each of the BOD and two-thirds (2/3) vote of the outstanding capital stock/membership of each corporation voting separately.

Note: Right to dividends vests upon declaration so whoever owns the stock at such time also owns the dividends. Subsequent transfer of stock would not carry with it right to dividends UNLESS agreed upon by the parties.


RIGHT OF APPRAISAL

Right to withdraw from the corporation and demand payment of the fair value of the shares after dissenting from certain corporate acts involving fundamental changes in corporate structure (Sec. 81).

(p) Distribution of assets in non-stock corporations (Sec. 96) The BOT shall, by majority vote, adopt a resolution recommending a plan of distribution which shall be approved by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members with voting rights.

Instances of appraisal right (1) Extension or reduction or corporate term (Sec. 81) (2) Amendment to AOI - Change in the rights of stockholders, authorize preferences superior to those stockholders, or restrict the right of any stockholder (Sec. 81) (3) Investment of corporate funds in another business or purpose (Sec. 42) (4) Sale or disposal of all or substantially all assets of the corporation (Sec. 81) (5) Merger or consolidation (Sec. 81)

(q) Incorporation of a religious society (Sec. 116) Any religious society or religious order, or any diocese, synod, or district organization of any religious denomination, sect or church, unless forbidden by the constitution, rules, regulations, or discipline of the religious denomination, sect or church of which it is a part, or by competent authority, may, upon written consent and/or by an affirmative vote at a meeting called for the purpose of at least two-thirds (2/3) of its membership, incorporate for the administration of its temporalities or for the management of its affairs, properties and estate.

Requirements for exercise of appraisal right (Secs. 82, 86) (1) Stockholder must have voted against the corporate act. (2) Stockholder must make a written demand on the corporation within 30 days after the vote was taken for payment of the fair value of his shares on the said date.

(r) Voluntary dissolution of a corporation (Sec. 118-119) PAGE 89

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

(3) Stockholder must submit the certificates to the corporation for notation within ten (10) days after demand for payment. Otherwise, right to appraisal may be terminated at the option of corporation.


year, which shall include financial statements duly signed and certified by an independent CPA. Exception: If the paid-up capital is less than P50,000 – the financial statements may be certified under oath by the treasurer or any responsible officer of the corporation (instead of an independent CPA).

Effect of demand (Sec. 83) ALL rights accruing to such shares, including voting and dividend rights, shall be suspended

Requirements for the exercise of the right of inspection (Sec. 74) (1) It must be exercised at reasonable hours on business days and in the place where the corporation keeps all its records (i.e., principal office). (2) The stockholder has not improperly used any information he secured through any previous examination. (3) Demand is made in good faith or for a legitimate purpose. If the corporation or its officers contest such purpose or contend that there is evil motive behind the inspection, the burden of proof is with the corporation or such officer to show the same.

EXCEPT the right of such stockholder to receive payment of the fair value thereof Immediate RESTORATION of voting and dividend rights if the dissenting stockholder is not paid the value of his shares within 30 days after the award. Extinguishment of appraisal right (Sec. 84) (1) Withdrawal of demand by the stockholder WITH CONSENT of the corporation (2) Abandonment of the proposed action (3) Disapproval by SEC of the proposed action

Test to determine whether the purpose is legitimate – A legitimate purpose is one which is germane to the interests of the stockholder as such and not contrary to the interests of the corporation (Gokongwei v. SEC, 1979)

RIGHT TO INSPECT

Basis of right As the beneficial owners of the business, the stockholders have the right to know the financial condition and management of corporate affairs.

Remedies when inspection is refused (1) Mandamus (2) Injunction (3) Action for damages (4) File an action under Sec. 144 to impose a penal offense by fine and/or imprisonment

A stockholder’s right of inspection is based on his ownership of the assets and property of the corporation. Therefore, it is an incident of ownership of the corporate property, whether this ownership or interest is termed an equitable ownership, a beneficial ownership, or quasi-ownership. Such right is predicated upon the necessity of self-protection. (Gokongwei Jr. v. SEC, 1979)

PRE-EMPTIVE RIGHT

Definition and distinguished from right of first refusal Pre-emptive right is an option privilege of an existing stockholder to subscribe to a proportionate part of shares subsequently issued by the corporation before the same can be disposed of in favor of others; this right includes all issues and disposition of shares of any class. It is a common law right and may be exercised by stockholders even without legal provision. On the other hand, a right of first refusal arises only by virtue of contract stipulations, by which the right is strictly construed against the right of person to dispose or deal with their property.

Records/books to be kept (Sec. 74) (1) Books that record all business transactions of the corporation which shall include contract, memoranda, journals, ledgers, etc; (2) Minute book for meetings of the stockholders/members; (3) Minute book for meetings of the board/trustees; (4) Stock and transfer book Stock transfer agent – One engaged principally in the business of registering transfers of stocks in behalf of a stock corporation (licensed by the SEC).

Stockholders of a corporation shall enjoy pre-emptive right to subscribe to ALL ISSUES OR DISPOSITIONS OF SHARES OF ANY CLASS, in proportion to their respective shareholdings. The purpose is to enable the shareholder to retain his proportionate control in the corporation and to retain his equity in the surplus.

The corporate secretary is the one duly authorized to make entries in the stock and transfer book. It is the corporate secretary's duty and obligation to register valid transfers of stocks and if said corporate officer refuses to comply, the transferor-stockholder may rightfully bring suit to compel performance. (Torres et al. v. CA , 1997)

Note: The broad phrase “all issues or disposition of shares of any class is construed to include not only new shares issued in pursuance of an increase in capital stock or from the unissued shares which form part of the ACS, but also covers “treasury shares.” Treasury shares would come under the term “disposition.” Likewise considering that it is not included among the exceptions enumerated therein, where pre-emptive right shall not extend, the intention is to include it in its application. (SEC Opinion, 14 January 1993)

Financial statements (Sec. 75) Within 10 days from written request, the corporation shall furnish its most recent financial statement (balance sheet and profit or loss statement as of last taxable year) At a regular meeting, the Board shall present a financial report of the operations of the corporation for the preceding PAGE 90

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


(6) A transferee of stock cannot vote if his transfer is not registered in the stock and transfer book of the corporation.

A pre-emptive right is a right claimed against the corporation on unissued shares of its capital stock, and likewise on treasury shares held by the corporation; while the right of first refusal is a right exercisable against another stockholder on his shares of stock. (Villanueva)

RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL

The right of first refusal provides that a stockholder who may wish to sell or assign his shares must first offer the shares to the corporation or to the other existing stockholders under terms and conditions which are reasonable; and that only when the corporation or the other stockholders do not or fail to exercise their option, is the offering stockholder at liberty to dispose of his shares to third parties.

Basis of Preemptive Right: to preserve the existing proportional rights of the stockholders (Campos) Limitations to exercise of pre-emptive right (Sec. 39) (1) Such pre-emptive right shall NOT extend to shares to be issued in compliance with laws requiring stock offerings or minimum stock ownership by the public; (2) It shall also NOT extend to shares to be issued in good faith with the approval of the stockholders representing two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, in exchange for property needed for corporate purposes or in payment of a previously contracted debt (3) It shall not take effect if denied in the AOI or an amendment thereto. (4) If one shareholder does not want to exercise his preemptive right, the other shareholders are not entitled to purchase the corresponding shares of the shareholder who declined. But if nobody purchased the same and later on the board re-issued the shares, the pre-emptive right applies. (Sundiang and Aquino)

An agreement entered into between the two majority stockholders of a corporation whereby they mutually agreed not to sell, transfer, or otherwise dispose of any part of their shareholdings till after one year from the date of the agreement. (Lambert v. Fox, 1914) The right of first refusal is primarily an attribute of ownership, and consequently can be effected only through a contractual commitment by the owner of the shares; consequently, the waiver of a right of first refusal when duly constituted can be effected only by the registered owner (PCGG v. SEC, unreported, 1988) REMEDIAL RIGHTS

Remedies in case of unwarranted denial (1) Injunction (2) Mandamus (3) The suit should be individual and not derivative because the wrong done is to the stockholders individually (4) SEC can cancel shares if the third party is not innocent

INDIVIDUAL SUIT

A suit brought by the shareholder in his own name against the corporation when a wrong is directly inflicted against him. REPRESENTATIVE SUIT

Waiver/ denial of preemptive right (1) Allowed by the Code provided that it is made in the AOI (a) Waiver made through AOI – would bind present and subsequent SH (b) 2/3 vote of the outstanding capital stock is necessary before waiver is binding (c) Result of Non-placement of waiver clause in AOI: waiver shall not bind future stockholders but only those who agreed to it

A suit brought by the stockholder in behalf of himself and all other stockholders similarly situated when a wrong is committed against a group of stockholders.

(2) The SH must be given reasonable time within which to exercise their pre-emptive rights. Upon expiration of such period, any SH who did not exercise such will be deemed to have waived it (3) May be necessary so as to not hinder future financing plans of the corporation (4) Because some new investors may be willing only to invest ONLY if all the new shares will be issued to them (Campos)

It is a suit brought by one or more stockholders/members in the name and on behalf of the corporation to redress wrongs committed against it, or protect/vindicate corporate rights whenever the officials of the corporation refuse to sue, or the ones to be sued, or has control of the corporation. (Sundiang and Aquino)

RIGHT TO VOTE

Requisites of derivative actions (1) That the person instituting the action be a stockholder or member at the time the acts or transactions subject of the action occurred and the time the action was filed; (2) That the stockholder or member exerted all reasonable efforts, and alleges the same with particularity in the complaint, to exhaust all remedies available under the Articles of Incorporation, by-laws, laws or rules

DERIVATIVE SUIT

It is a suit by a shareholder to enforce a corporate cause of action. The corporation is a necessary party to the suit, and the relief which is granted is a judgment against a third person in favor of the corporation (Chua v. CA, 2004)

Suits of stockholders based on wrongful or fraudulent acts of directors or other persons.

(1) Non-voting shares are not entitled to vote except as provided for in the last paragraph of Sec. 6. (2) Preferred or redeemable shares may be deprived of the right to vote (3) Fractional shares of stock cannot be voted (4) Treasury shares have no voting rights as long as they remain in the treasury. (5) No delinquent stock shall be voted (Sec. 71) PAGE 91

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

governing the corporation or partnership to obtain the relief he desires. (3) That there is no appraisal right available for the act(s) complained of; and (4) That the suit is not a nuisance or harassment suit. (Rule 8, Interim Rules of Procedure for Intra-Corporate Controversies)


But where corporate directors are guilty of a breach of trust, not of mere error of judgment or abuse of discretion, and intra-corporate remedy is futile or useless, a SH may institute a derivative suit in behalf of himself and other stockholders and for the benefit of the corporation, to bring about a redress of the wrong inflicted directly upon the corporation and indirectly upon the stockholders. (Bitong v. CA, 1998)

Requisites of a derivative suit according to jurisprudence (1) the party bringing the suit should be a shareholder as of the time of the act or transaction complained of, the number of his shares not being material; (2) he has tried to exhaust intra-corporate remedies, i.e., has made a demand on the board of directors for the appropriate relief but the latter has failed or refused to heed his plea; and (3) the cause of action actually devolves on the corporation, the wrongdoing or harm having been, or being caused to the corporation and not to the particular stockholder bringing the suit. (Lisam Enterprises, Inc., represented by Lolita A. Soriano and Lolita A. Soriano v. Banco de Oro Unibank, Inc., et al., 2012)

Jurisdiction over derivative suits lies with the RTC (Sec. 5.2, Securities Regulation Code) OBLIGATIONS OF A STOCKHOLDER LIABILITY TO THE CORPORATION FOR UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION (SEC. 67)

A subscription contract is unconditional (i.e., obligation to pay is not be subject to any contingency) and indivisible (as to the amount and transferability— FuaCun v. Summers, 1923). Hence, if the subscriber paid 20% of his subscription, he is not entitled to the issuance of certificates corresponding to 20% of the shares.

Note: The “wrong” contemplated in a derivative suit is on in which the injury alleged be indirect as far as the stockholders are concerned and direct only insofar as the corporation is concerned. (De Leon)

Unpaid claim refers to any unpaid subscription and not to any indebtedness which a subscriber may owe the corporation rising from any other transaction (China Banking Corp. v. CA, 1997)

BUT the personal injury suffered by the stockholder cannot disqualify him from filing a derivative suit in behalf of the corporation. It mere gives rise to an additional cause of action for damages against the erring corporate officers. (Gochan v. Young)

LIABILITY TO THE CORPORATION FOR INTEREST ON UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION IF SO REQUIRED BY THE BY -LAWS (SEC. 66)

General rule: Subscribers for stock are NOT liable to pay interest on his unpaid subscription Exception: If so required in the by-laws at the rate fixed in the by-laws. If no rate is fixed in the by-laws, such rate shall be deemed to be the legal rate (Sec. 66)

Requisites based on jurisprudence (1) The cause of action actually devolves on the corporation, the wrong or harm having been, or being caused to it and not the shareholder filing the suit. (Evangelista vs. Santos, 1950; SMC v. Kahn, 1989). (2) The reliefs sought pertain to the corporation. (Symaco Trading Corp. v. Santos, 2005).

Notes: (1) Transfer for consideration of treasury shares is a sale (or disposition) by the corporation (not subscription). A transfer of previously issued shares by a stockholder to a third person is a sale (or disposition). Transfer of unissued shares is subscription. (2) Shareholders are not creditors of the corporation with respect to their shareholdings thereto and the principle of compensation or set-off has no application. (3) Subscription contract is NOT required to be in writing.

Recent rulings on the matter (1) Status of heirs as co-owners of shares before partition of estate does not make them shareholders until there is compliance with Sec. 63 on the manner of transferring shares, thus the heirs are not automatically registered shareholders of the corporation. (Reyes v. RTC of Makati, 2008) (2) Stockholder may commence a derivative suit “for mismanagement, waste or dissipation of corporate assets because of a special injury to him for which he is otherwise without redress. In effect, the suit is an action for specific performance of an obligation owed by the corporation to the stockholders to assist its right of action when the corporation is put on default by the wrongful refusal of the directors or management to make suitable measures for its protection.” (Yu v. Yukayguan, June 18, 2009)

LIABILITY FOR WATERED STOCKS (SEC. 65)

Definition These are shares issued as fully paid when in truth no consideration is paid, or the consideration received is known to be less than the par value or issued value of the shares. (Sec. 65) These include the following: (1) Issued without consideration (bonus share) (2) Issued as fully paid when the corporation has received less sum of money than its par or issued value (discounted share)

The power to sue and be sued in any court by a corporation even as a stockholder is lodged in the BOD that exercises its corporate powers and not in the president or officer thereof. PAGE 92

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

(3) Issued for consideration other than actual cash (i.e., property or services), the fair valuation of which is less than its par or issued value (4) Issue stock dividend when there are no sufficient retained earnings or surplus to justify it.


Who May Attend and Vote? (1) Stockholders, either in person or by proxy (2) Pledgors or mortgagors (Sec. 55) (3) Pledgee or mortgagee, IF expressly given such right by the pledgor or mortgagor in writing which is recorded on the corporate books(Sec. 55) (4) Executors, administrators, receivers, and other legal representatives duly appointed by the court, without need of any written proxy(Sec. 55) (5) ALL joint owners of stocks, or any one of them with the consent of ALL the co-owners, unless there is a written proxy, signed by all the co-owners(Sec. 56) (6) Any one of the joint owners of shares owned in an "and/or" capacity or a proxy thereof(Sec. 56)

Note: Subsequent increase in the value of the property used in paying the stock does not do away with the watered stocks. Subsequent increase in the value of the property used in paying the stock does not cure the defect in issuance. The existence of watered stocks is determined at the time of issuance of the stock. Liability of directors or officers Any director or officer of a corporation consenting to the issuance of stocks or who, having knowledge thereof, does not forthwith express his objection in writing and file the same with the corporate secretary shall be SOLIDARILY liable with the stockholder concerned to the corporation and its creditors for the difference in value (Sec. 65).

REGULAR OR SPECIAL

When and Where When? (Sec. 50) Regular meetings of stockholders or members shall be held annually on a date fixed in the by-laws, or if not so fixed, on any date in April of every year as determined by the board of directors or trustees.

LIABILITY FOR DIVIDENDS UNLAWFULLY PAID

When a director, trustee or officer attempts to acquire or acquires, in violation of his duty, any interest adverse to the corporation in respect of any matter which has been reposed in him in confidence, as to which equity imposes a disability upon him to deal in his own behalf, he shall be liable as a trustee for the corporation and must account for the profits which otherwise would have accrued to the corporation (Sec. 31).

Where? (1) Stock: City or municipality where the principal office of the corporation is located, or, if practicable, in the principal office of the corporation: Provided, Metro Manila shall be considered a city or municipality. (Sec. 51) (2) Non-stock: Any place even outside the place where the principal office is located, within the Philippines (Sec. 93)

Violations of any of the provisions of the Corporation Code not otherwise specifically penalized therein shall be punished by a fine of not less than one thousand (P1,000.00) pesos but not more than ten thousand (P10,000.00) pesos or by imprisonment for not less than thirty (30) days but not more than five (5) years, or both, in the discretion of the court (Sec. 144).

Notice Nature of notice (Sec. 50) (1) Regular Meeting—written notice sent to all SH or members at least 2 weeks prior to the meeting, unless a different period is required by the by-laws (1) Special Meeting—written notice sent at least 1 week prior to the meeting, unless otherwise provided in the bylaws.

LIABILITY FOR ASSUMING TO ACT AS A CORPORATION KNOWING IT TO BE WITHOUT AUTHORITY

All persons who assume to act as a corporation knowing it to be without authority to do so shall be liable as general partners for all debts, liabilities and damages incurred or arising as a result thereof.

Subject to waiver, expressly or impliedly (i.e., attendance despite no notice)

When any such ostensible corporation is sued on any transaction entered or on any tort committed by it as a corporation, it shall not be allowed to use as a defense its lack of corporate personality.

Effect of Failure to Give Notice Failure to give notice would render a meeting VOIDABLE at the instance of an absent stockholder, who was not notified of the meeting (Board v. Tan, 1959).

On who assumes an obligation to an ostensible corporation cannot resist performance thereof on the ground that there was in fact no corporation (Sec. 21).

WHO CALLS THE MEETINGS

The president, unless the by-laws provide otherwise.(Sec. 54)

MEETINGS General rule: Stockholders’ or members’ approval is expressed in a meeting duly called and held for the purpose.

Any petitioning stockholder or member upon order of the SEC when there is no person authorized to call a meeting. Such petitioning stockholder or member shall preside thereat until at least a majority of the stockholders or members present have chosen one of them as presiding officer. (Sec. 50)

Exception: In case of amendment of AOI, approval may be expressed by referendum or written assent of the stockholders or members (Sec. 16) PAGE 93

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Capital Structure

QUORUM

General rule: Stockholders representing majority of the OCS or majority of the members

SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENTS Any contract for the acquisition of unissued stock in an existing corporation or a corporation still to be formed shall be deemed a subscription contract.(Sec. 60).

Exception: The Code or the by-laws provide otherwise Where quorum is present at the start of a lawful meeting, stockholders present cannot without justifiable cause break the quorum by walking out from said meeting so as to defeat the validity of any act proposed and approved by the majority. (However, stockholders can break the quorum for justifiable causes.) (Johnston vs. Johnston, 1965, CA decision)

CHARACTERISTICS

A subscription is a contract for the acquisition of unissued stock of a corporation whether existing or still to be formed, and is in the effect the contribution or promised contribution of a person to the capital of a corporation (Campos).

MINUTES OF THE MEETINGS

A record of all the minutes of all meetings of stockholders or members, or of the board of directors or trustees shall be kept and preserved at the principal office of every corporation. Contents (1) time and place of holding the meeting; (2) how the meeting was authorized; (3) the notice given; (4) whether the meeting was regular or special, if special its object; (5) those present and absent; and (6) every act done or ordered done at the meeting.


1. 2. 3.

There can be a subscription only with reference to unissued shares of the Authorized Capital Stock (ACS), in the following cases: The original issuance of the ACS at the time of incorporation. The opening, during the life of the corporation, of the portion of the original ACS previously unissued; or The increase in ACS achieved through a formal amendment of the Articles and registration thereof with the SEC. (Villanueva) STATUS AS SHAREHOLDER

One may become a shareholder in a corporation in either of two ways: (1) By entering into a SUBSCRIPTION CONTRACT with an existing or still to be formed corporation (he becomes a stockholder upon acceptance of the corporation of his offer to subscribe whether the consideration is fully paid or not). Once a subscription contract is perfected, the stockholder becomes a debtor to the corporation and may be liable to pay any unpaid portion thereof upon call by the board of directors. (2) By acquisition of already issued shares through: (a) purchase of TREASURY SHARES from the corporation (b) acquisition of shares from existing shareholders by SALE OR ANY OTHER CONTRACT (Sundiang and Aquino)

Upon demand by any director/trustee or SH/member, the following shall also be noted in the minutes (1) the time when any director, trustee, stockholder or member entered or left the meeting; (2) the yeas and nays on any motion or proposition; (3) the protest of any director/trustee or stockholder/member on any action or proposed action. Notes: The minutes of any meetings shall be open to inspection by any director/trustee or stockholder/member at reasonable hours on business days. The director/trustee or stockholder/member may demand, in writing, for a copy of excerpts from said records or minutes, at his expense.

Notes: (1) Transfer of unissued shares = SUBSCRIPTION (2) Transfer of already issued shares = NOT SUBSCRIPTION; can either be: (a) SALE/DISPOSITION BY CORPORATION of treasury shares (b) SALE/DISPOSITION BY STOCKHOLDER TO A THIRD PERSON

Any officer or agent of the corporation refusing to allow the examination and copying of the minutes shall be: (1) liable to the director/trustee or stockholder/ member; and (2) guilty of an offense punishable under Sec. 144 (Sec. 74) HOWEVER, the officer of agent may use as a defense that: (1) the person demanding examination or copy thereof made improper use of any information secured through any prior examination of the records or minutes of such corporation or of any other corporation thereby; (2) the person demanding examination or copy acts in bad faith or has no legitimate purpose in making his demand.

TYPES OF SUBSCRIPTION CONTRACTS

Pre-incorporation subscription (Sec. 61) It is a subscription for shares of stock of a corporation still to be formed.

PAGE 94

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

When pre-incorporation subscription is IRREVOCABLE: (1) For a period of at least 6 months from the date of subscription, UNLESS (a) all of the other subscribers consent to the revocation, or (b) the incorporation fails to materialize within six (6) months or within a longer period as may be stipulated in the contract of subscription; or (2) After the submission of the AOI to the SEC.


SHARES OF STOCK NATURE OF STOCK

Shares of stock are units into which the capital stock is divided. A share of stock represents interest of the holder thereof to participate in the management of the corporation, to share proportionally in the profits of the business and, upon liquidation, to obtain an aliquot part of corporate assets after all corporate debts have been paid. (Campos)

Post-incorporation subscription It is entered into after incorporation.

A stockholder may own the share even if he is not holding a certificate of stock. Share of Stock Certificate of Stock

INTEREST ON UNPAID SUBSCRIPTION

General rule: Stockholder is NOT liable to pay interest on his unpaid subscription.

Unit of interest corporation

Exception: If so required by the by-laws Rate: That fixed in the by-laws, otherwise, the legal rate (Sec. 66)

in

a Evidence of the holder’s ownership of the stock and of his right as a shareholder and up to the extent specified therein.

An incorporeal or intangible Concrete and tangible property

Notes: (1) Shareholders are NOT creditors of the corporation with respect to their shareholdings thereto and the principle of compensation or set-off has no application. (2) Subscription contract is NOT required to be in writing.

May be issued by the May be issued only if the corporation even if the subscription is fully paid subscription is not fully paid

CONSIDERATION FOR STOCKS

A share of stock only typifies an aliquot part of the corporation's property, or the right to share in its proceeds to that extent when distributed according to law and equity, but its holder is not the owner of any part of the capital of the corporation. Nor is the shareholder entitled to the possession of any definite portion of its property or assets. The stockholder is not a co-owner or tenant in common of the corporate property (Stockholders of F. Guanzon and Sons, Inc. v Register of Deeds of Manila).

FORMS OF CONSIDERATION (SEC. 62)

(1) Actual cash (2) Property, tangible or intangible, actually received by the corporation and necessary or convenient for its use and lawful purposes at a fair valuation equal to the par or issued value of the stock issued. (a) Property should NOT be encumbered. Otherwise, it would impair the consideration (b) Valuation is initially determined by the incorporators or the board of directors, subject to approval by the SEC.

SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENTS (SEE ABOVE) CONSIDERATION FOR SHARES OF STOCK (SEE ABOVE)

(3) Labor performed for or services actually rendered to the corporation; (4) Amounts transferred from unrestricted retained earnings to stated capital (declaration of stock dividends); and (5) Outstanding shares exchanged for stocks in the event of reclassification or conversion; (6) Previously incurred indebtedness of the corporation;

WATERED STOCK

Definition These are shares issued as fully paid when in truth no consideration is paid in any form, or the consideration received is known to be less than the par value or issued value of the shares. (Sec. 65) These include the following: (1) Issued without consideration (bonus share) (2) Issued as fully paid when the corporation has received less sum of money than its par or issued value (discounted share) (3) Issued for consideration other than actual cash (i.e., property or services), the fair valuation of which is less than its par or issued value (4) Issue stock dividend when there are no sufficient retained earnings or surplus to justify it.

LIMITATIONS ON CONSIDERATION

Stocks shall NOT be issued: (1) for a consideration less than the par or issued price thereof (2) in exchange for promissory notes or future service Note: Promissory notes and future service may be used as consideration provided that certificates of stock will be issued ONLY AFTER actual encashment of promissory note or performance of such services.

PAGE 95

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Note: Subsequent increase in the value of the property used in paying the stock does not do away with the watered stocks. Subsequent increase in the value of the property used in paying the stock does not cure the defect in issuance. The existence of watered stocks is determined at the time of issuance of the stock.


Classification of shares: (1) Common shares (2) Preferred shares (3) Par value shares (4) No-par value shares (5) Founder’s shares (6) Redeemable shares (7) Treasury shares (8) Convertible shares (9) Non-voting shares

Liability of Directors for Watered Stocks Any director or officer of a corporation consenting to the issuance of stocks or who, having knowledge thereof, does not forthwith express his objection in writing and file the same with the corporate secretary shall be solidarily liable with the stockholder concerned to the corporation and its creditors for the difference in value (Sec. 65).

General rule: No share may be deprived of voting rights (Sec. 6) Exceptions: (1) Preferred or (2) Redeemable shares, (3) Provided by the Code (e.g., Treasury shares)

Trust Fund Doctrine for Liability for Watered Stocks Where the corporation issues watered stock and thereby assumes an ostensible capitalization in excess of its real assets, the transaction necessarily involves the misleading of subsequent creditors, and whether done with that purpose actually in mind or not, is at least a constructive fraud upon creditors. Hence, it is held that recovery may be had by a creditor in such case, even though the corporation itself has no cause of action against the stockholders. Some of the earlier decisions put the right of recovery in such a case upon the so-called “trust fund doctrine.” In any view of the matter, however, the creditors’ right of action to compel the making good of the representation as to the corporation’s capital is based on fraud, and the trust fund doctrine is only another way of expressing the same underlying idea. (De Leon)

There shall always be a class/series of shares which have a COMPLETE VOTING RIGHTS (Sec. 6) Doctrine of Equality of Shares: Each share shall be EQUAL in ALL respects to every other share, except as otherwise provided in the AOI and stated in the certificate of stock (Sec. 6) Common shares The most common type of shares, which enjoy no preference but the owners thereof are entitled to management of the corporation and to equal pro-rata division of profits after preference. It represents a residual ownership interest in the corporation.

Despite the view of foreign authors that the fraud theory is the prevailing view, it would seem that in the Philippine jurisdiction, the trust fund doctrine on watered stock prevails. In Philippine Trust Corp. v. Rivera, the Supreme Court held –

Preferred shares Stocks which are given preference by the issuing corporation in dividends and the distribution of assets of the corporation in case of liquidation or such other preferences as may be stated in the AOI which do not violate the Corporation Code.

It is established doctrine that subscription to the capital of a corporation constitute a fund to which creditors have a right to look for satisfaction of their claims and that the assignee in insolvency can maintain an action upon any unpaid stock subscription in order to realize assets for the payment of its debts. A corporation has no power to release an original subscriber to its capital stock from the obligation of paying for his shares, without a valuable consideration for such release; and as against creditors a reduction of the capital stock can take place only in the manner an under the conditions prescribed by the statute or the charter or the articles of incorporation. Moreover, strict compliance with the statutory regulations is necessary. (Villanueva)

Limitations: (1) Preferred shares can only be issued with par value. (2) Preferred shares must be stated in the Articles of Incorporation and in the certificate of stock. (3) The BOD may fix the terms and conditions only when so authorized by the AOI and such terms and conditions shall be effective upon filing a certificate thereof with the SEC. Par value shares These are shares with a stated value set out in the AOI. This remains the same regardless of the profitability of the corporation. This gives rise to financial stability and is the reason why banks, trust corporations, insurance companies and building and loan associations must always be organized with par value shares.

SITUS OF THE SHARES OF STOCK

It is a general rule that for purposes of execution, attachment and garnishment, it is not the domicile of the owner of a certificate but the domicile of the corporation which is decisive. (Chua Guan v. Samahang Magsasaka, Inc., G.R. No. 42091, November 2, 1935)

Par value is minimum issue price of such share in the AOI which must be stated in the certificate

CLASSES OF SHARES OF STOCK

Shares of stock of stock corporations may be divided into classes or series of shares or both. Each class or series of shares may have rights, privileges or restrictions, as stated in the AOI.

No-par value shares These are shares without a stated value. PAGE 96

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

“A no par share does not purport to represent any stated proportionate interest in the capital stock measured by value, but only an aliquot part of the whole number of such shares of the issuing corporation” (Agbayani)


the Articles of the redeeming corporation (SEC Rules Governing Redeemable and Treasury Shares, 26 April 1982). Treasury shares (Sec. 9) These are shares which have been issued and fully paid for, but subsequently re-acquired by the issuing corporation by purchase, redemption, donation or through some other lawful means. Such shares may again be disposed of for a reasonable price fixed by the BOD.

Limitations: (1) No-par value shares cannot have an issue price of less than P5.00 per share (Sec. 6). (2) They shall be deemed fully paid and non-assessable and the holders of such shares shall not be liable to the corporation or to its creditors in respect thereto (Sec. 6). (3) Entire consideration received by the corporation for its no-par value shares shall be treated as capital and shall not be available for distribution as dividends (Sec. 6). (4) AOI must state the fact that the corporation issues nopar shares and the number of shares. (5) Banks, insurance companies, trust companies, building and loan associations, and public utilities cannot issue no-par value shares (Sec. 6). (6) The issued price may be fixed in the AOI, or by the BOD pursuant to authority conferred upon it by the AOI, or, in the absence thereof, by majority vote of the outstanding shares in a meeting called for the purpose (Sec. 62).

Treasury shares are therefore issued shares, but being in the treasury, do not have the status of outstanding shares. Consequently, although a treasury share, not retired by reacquisition, may be re-issued or resold, such share, as long as it is held by the corporation as a treasury share, participates neither in the dividends, because dividends cannot be declared by the corporation to itself nor in the meetings of the corporation as voting stock, for otherwise equal distribution of voting powers among stockholders will be effectively lost and the directors will be able to perpetuate their control of the corporation, though it still represents a paid for interest in the property of the corporation. (CIR v. Manning, 1975)

Founder’s shares (Sec. 7) These are shares, classified as such in the AOI, which are given certain rights and privileges not enjoyed by the owners of other stocks.

Note: Delinquent stocks, which are stocks that have not been fully paid, may become treasury stocks upon bid of the corporation in absence of other bidders (Sec.68). Convertible shares A type of preferred stock that the holder can exchange for a predetermined number of common shares at a specified time

Where exclusive right to vote and be voted for in the election of directors is granted, such right must be for a limited period not to exceed 5 years subject to approval by SEC. The 5 year period shall commence from date of approval by SEC.

Non-voting shares (Sec. 6) General rule: Non-Voting Shares are not entitled to vote.

Redeemable shares (Sec. 8) These are shares which permit the issuing corporation to redeem or purchase its shares.

Exceptions: (1) Amendment of the AOI (2) Adoption and amendment of by-laws (3) Sale, lease, exchange, other disposition of all or substantially all of the corporate property (4) Incurring, creating or increasing bonded indebtedness (5) Increase or decrease of capital stock (6) Merger and consolidation (7) Investment of corporate funds in another corporation or business (8) Dissolution of the corporation

Limitations: (1) Redeemable shares may be issued only when expressly provided for in the AOI (Sec. 8). (2) The terms and conditions affecting said shares must be stated both in the AOI and in the certificate of stock(Sec. 8). (3) Redeemable shares may be deprived of voting rights in the AOI. (4) The corporation is required to maintain a sinking fund to answer for redemption price if the corporation is required to redeem. (5) The redeemable shares are deemed retired upon redemption unless otherwise provided in the AOI (i.e., if the AOI allows for reissuance of such shares). (6) URE is NOT necessary before shares can be redeemed but there must be sufficient assets to pay the creditors and to answer for operations (Republic Planters Banks v. Agana, 1997). Redemption cannot be made if such redemption will result in insolvency or inability of the corporation to meet its obligations (SEC Opinion, 24 Aug 1987).

PAYMENT OF BALANCE OF SUBSCRIPTION (Sec. 66 & 67) CALL BY BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The board of directors of any stock corporation may at any time declare due and payable to the corporation unpaid subscriptions to the capital stock and may collect the same or such percentage thereof, in either case with accrued interest, if any, as it may deem necessary. Payment shall be made on the date specified in the contract of subscription or on the date stated in the call. Failure to pay on such date shall render the entire balance due and payable and shall make the stockholder liable for interest at the legal rate on such balance, unless a different rate of

Note: Redeemable shares reacquired shall be considered retired and no longer issuable, unless otherwise provided in PAGE 97

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


interest is provided for in the by-laws. If within 30 days from said date no payment is made, all stocks covered by said subscription shall become delinquent and subject to sale under Sec. 68 unless the BOD orders otherwise.

(2) Notice of sale shall furthermore be published once a week for two (2) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the province or city where the principal office of the corporation is located.

There are two (2) instances when call is not necessary to make the subscriber liable for payment of the unpaid subscription: (1) When, under the terms of the subscription contract, subscription is payable, not upon call, but immediately, or on a specified day, or when it is payable in installments at specified times; and (2) If the corporation becomes insolvent, which makes the liability on the unpaid subscription due and demandable, regardless of any stipulation to the contrary in the subscription agreement (Villanueva)

Auction Sale and the Highest Bidder Procedure for delinquency sale (Sec. 68) (1) Call for payment made by the BOD. (2) Notice of call served on each stockholder. (3) Notice of delinquency issued by the BOD upon failure of the stockholder to pay within 30 days from date specified. (4) Service of notice of delinquency on the non-paying subscriber, PLUS publication in a newspaper of general circulation in the province or city where the principal office of the corporation is located, once a week for two (2) consecutive weeks.

NOTICE REQUIREMENT

Where call is necessary, notice must be given to the stockholder concerned. A call without notice to the subscriber is practically no call at all.

Notes: (1) Requirements on notice and publication are mandatory. Lacking such requirements, the stockholder may question the sale as provided under Sec. 69. (2) Public auction – the highest bidder is one who is willing to pay the balance of the subscription for the least number of shares. If there are no bidders, the corporation must bid for the whole number of shares regardless of how much the SH has paid. Such stocks will pertain to the corporation as fully paid treasury stocks. (3) The delinquent stockholder may stop the auction by paying to the corporation or before the date specified for the sale the balance due on his subscription, plus accrued interest, costs of advertisement and expenses of the sale. (4) Otherwise, the public auction shall proceed and be sold to the bidder that will pay the full amount of the balance of subscription with accrued interest, costs and expenses of the sale, for the smallest number of shares or fraction of a share. The stock so purchased shall be transferred to such purchases in the books of the corporation and a certificate of such stock shall be issued in his favor. The remaining shares, if any,shall be credited in favor of the delinquent stockholder who shall likewise be entitled to the issuance of a certificate of stock covering such shares.

The notice is regarded as a condition precedent to the right of recovery. It must, therefore, be alleged and proved to maintain an action for the call (Baltazar v. Lingayen Gulf Electric Power Co., Inc.). The right to notice of call, however, may be waived by the subscriber. (De Leon) SALE OF DELINQUENT SHARES (SEC. 68)

Delinquent Shares - These are shares for which the corresponding subscription or balance remains unpaid after a grace period of 30 days from the date specified in the contract of subscription or from the date stated in the call made by the BOD. (Sec. 67) Effect of delinquency (Sec. 71) No delinquent stock shall be voted for or be entitled to vote or to representation at any stockholders’ meeting The holder thereof shall NOT be entitled to any of the rights of a stockholder except the right to dividends. But the dividends it will receive will be subject to Sec. 43, that is, cash dividends shall first be applied to the unpaid balance on the subscription plus costs and expenses, and stock dividends shall be withheld until the unpaid subscription is fully paid. Such shares shall be subject to delinquency sale.

Irregularities in the delinquency sale (Sec. 69) (1) Action to recover delinquent stock must be on the ground of irregularity or defect in the notice of sale. (2) Party seeking to recover must first pay or tender to the party holding the stock the sum for which the same was sold, with interest from the date of sale at the legal rate. (3) The action shall be commenced within six months from the date of sale.

Call by resolution of the Board of Directors (Sec. 68) The board of directors may, by resolution, order the sale of delinquent stock and shall specifically state the amount due on each subscription plus all accrued interest, and the date, time and place of the sale which shall not be less than 30 days nor more than 60 days from the date the stocks became delinquent, which is 30 days after the date specified in the contract of subscription or on the date stated in the call.

CERTIFICATE OF STOCK NATURE OF THE CERTIFICATE

Notice of sale If the BOD resolves to proceed with the sale: (1) Notice of sale and a copy of the resolution shall be sent to every delinquent stockholder either personally or by registered mail.

A certificate of stock is an instrument formally issued by the corporation with the intention that the same constitute the best evidence of the rights and status of a SH (not a condition precedent to the acquisition of such rights). PAGE 98

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


Requirements for valid transfer of stocks For a valid transfer of stocks, the requirements are as follows: (1) There must be delivery of the stock certificate; (2) The certificate must be endorsed by the owner or his attorney-in-fact or other persons legally authorized to make the transfer; and (3) To be valid against third parties, the transfer must be recorded in the books of the corporation. (Bitong v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 123553, July 13, 1998)

UNCERTIFICATED SHARES

Uncertificated Shares/Securities: Security evidenced by electronic or similar records (Sec. 3.14, Securities Regulation Code) Notwithstanding Sec. 63 of the Corporation Code (certificate of stock and transfer of shares), a corporation whose securities are registered pursuant to the SRC or listed on securities exchange may: (1) If so resolved by the Board of Directors and agreed by a shareholder, investor or securities intermediary, issue shares to, or record the transfer of some or all its shares into the name of such shareholders, investors or, securities intermediary in the form of uncertified securities. The use of uncertified securities in these circumstances shall be without prejudice to the rights of the securities intermediary subsequently to require the corporation to issue a certificate in respect of any shares recorded in its name; and (2) If so provided in its articles of incorporation and by-laws, issue all of the shares of a particular class in the form of uncertificated securities and subject to a condition that investors may not require the corporation to issue a certificate in respect of any shares recorded in their name.

No shares of stock against which the corporation holds an unpaid claim shall be transferable in the books of the corporation(Sec. 63). ISSUANCE

Full payment General rule: No certificate of stock shall be issued to a subscriber until the full amount of his subscription together with interest and expenses (in case of delinquent shares), if any is due, has been paid (Sec. 64) Exception: In Baltazar v Lingayen Gulf Electric Power Company, 1965, where it was the practice of the corporation since its inception to issue certificates of stock to its individual SHs for unpaid shares of stock and to give full voting power to shares fully paid.

Transfers of uncertificated securities, how made (1) Valid as between parties – validly made and consummated by appropriate book-entries in the securities intermediaries, or in the stock and transfer book held by the corporation or the stock transfer agent. A transfer made pursuant to the foregoing has the effect of delivery of a security in bearer form or duly indorsed in blank representing the amount of security or right transferred, including the unrestricted negotiability of that security by reason of such delivery. (2) Valid as to corporation – when the transfer is recorded in the books of the corporation so as to show the names of the parties to the transfer and the number of shares transferred (Sec. 43, Securities Regulation Code).

Payment Pro-Rata The entire subscription must be paid first before the certificates of stock can be issued. Partial payments are to be applied pro rata to each share of stock subscribed. (Nava Peers Mktg. Corp. and Fua Cun v. Summers, 1923) LOST OR DESTROYED CERTIFICATES

Procedure for re-issuance in case of loss, stolen or destroyed certificates: (1) Registered owner to file an affidavit of loss with the corporation. (2) Publication of notice of loss in a newspaper of general circulation published in the place where the corporation has its principal office, once a week for 3 consecutive weeks at the expense of the owner of the certificate of stock (3) Cancellation of the certificate in the books of the corporation and issuance of new certificates, after the expiration of 1 year from the date of the last publication and there is no contest. The right to make such contest shall be barred after the expiration of the one-year period. (4) Issuance of new certificates before 1 year period if the registered owner files a bond and there is no pending contest regarding the ownership of said certificates.

NEGOTIABILITY

Theory of quasi-negotiability A stock certificate is regarded as quasi-negotiable only in the sense that it may be transferred by endorsement, coupled with delivery. This notwithstanding, it is well-known that the instrument is non-negotiable, because the holder thereof takes it without prejudice to such rights or defenses as the registered owner or creditor may have under the law, except insofar as such rights or defenses are subject to the limitations imposed by the principles governing estoppel. Certificates of stock are not negotiable instruments. Consequently, a transferee under a forged assignment acquires no title which can be asserted against the true owner, unless the latter’s negligence has been such as to create an estoppel against him. If the owner of the certificate has endorsed it in blank, and it is stolen from him, no title is acquired by on innocent purchaser for value (De los Santos v. Republic, 1955).

Note: Except in cases of fraud, bad faith, or negligence on the part of the corporation and its officers, no action may be brought against the corporation which shall have issued certificates of stock in lieu of those lost, stolen or destroyed pursuant to the above procedure.

PAGE 99

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

STOCK AND TRANSFER BOOK


SALE OF ALL OF SHARES NOT FULLY PAID

On the other hand, the SEC has opined that the entire subscription, although not yet fully paid, may be transferred to a single transferee, who as a result of the transfer must assume the unpaid balance. It is necessary, however, to secure the consent of the corporation since the transfer of subscription rights and obligations contemplates a novation of contract which under Article 1293 of the Civil Code cannot be made without the consent if the creditor. (Villanueva)

CONTENTS

(1) a record of all stocks in the names of the stockholders alphabetically arranged; (2) the installments paid and unpaid on all stock for which subscription has been made, and the date of payment of any installment; (3) a statement of every alienation, sale or transfer of stock made, the date thereof, and by and to whom made; and (4) such other entries as the by-laws may prescribe.

SALE OF FULLY PAID SHARES

Shares of stock so issued are personal property and may be transferred by delivery of the certificate or certificates indorsed by the owner or his attorney-in-fact or other person legally authorized to make the transfer. No transfer however shall be valid except as between the parties until the transfer is recorded in the books of the corporation showing the names of the parties to the transaction, the date of the transfer, the number of the certificate or certificates and the number of shares transferred (Sec. 63)

WHO MAY MAKE VALID ENTRIES

(1) a SEC-licensed stock transfer agent; or (2) the Corporate Secretary of the stock corporation provided all rules and regulations imposed on stock transfer agents shall be applicable, except payment of license fee. DISPOSITION AND ENCUMBRANCE OF SHARES ALLOWABLE RESTRICTIONS ON THE SALE OF SHARES

General rule: Shares of stock so issued are personal property and may be transferred (Sec. 63). (FREE TRANSFERABILITY OF SHARES)

REQUISITES OF A VALID TRANSFER

Same as requirements for valid transfer of stocks INVOLUNTARY DEALINGS WITH SHARES

Exception: In CLOSE corporations, restrictions on the right to transfer shares may be provided in the AOI, by-laws and certificates (Sec. 98).

The right of a stockholder to pledge, mortgage or otherwise encumber his shares is recognized under Section 55 of the Corporation Code, which regulates the manner of voting on pledged or mortgaged shares.

SALE OF PARTIALLY PAID SHARES

Under Section 63 of the Corporation Code, no shares of stock against which the corporation holds any unpaid claim shall be transferable in the books of the corporation. Therefore, a corporation may refuse to acknowledge and register a sale or assignment of shares which are not fully paid, and may continue to hold the original subscriber liable on the payment of the subscription.

If the restriction on the right to pledge or mortgage shares of stock absolutely prohibits the stockholders from pledging or mortgaging their shares without the consent of the board of directors, it would be violative of the statutory right of the stockholders to encumber shares of stock as allowed in Section 55. However, when the restriction merely allows the corporation or existing stockholders to accept the offer within the option period, and thereafter, if no one accepts the offer, the stockholder is free to pledge or mortgage his shares in favor of any third party, such provision is reasonable, valid and binding.

However, in China Banking Corp. v. CA, the court said that the above principle in section 63 cannot be utilized by the corporation to refuse to recognize ownership over pledged shares purchased at public auction. The term “unpaid claims” refers to “any unpaid claims arising from unpaid subscription, and not to any indebtedness which a subscriber or stockholder may owe the corporation arising from any other transactions. Obligations arising from unpaid monthly dues do not fall within the coverage of Section 63.”(Villanueva)

By the strict application of Section 63 of the Corporation Code to cover only the sale, assignment or absolute disposition of shares of stock, the Supreme Court has placed a bias against voluntary sales, assignments or dispositions of shares of stock vis-à-vis pledges, mortgages, attachment or levy thereof. To be valid and binding on third parties, the voluntary sale, assignment or disposition of shares requires the essential element of registration in the stock and transfer book; otherwise the sale, assignment or disposition is considered void as to third parties, even when they have actual notice. Whereas, when it comes to pledge, mortgage, encumbrance, attachment or levy of shares, registration thereof in the stock and transfer book is not essential either for validity or as a species of notifying third parties. (Villanueva)

SALE OF A PORTION OF SHARES NOT FULLY PAID

The SEC has opined on several occasions that a stockholder who has not paid the full amount of his subscription cannot transfer part of his subscription in view of the indivisible nature of a subscription contract. The reason behind the principle of disallowing transfer of not fully paid subscription to several transferee is that it would be difficult to determine whether or not the partial payments made should be applied as full payment for the corresponding number of shares which can only be covered by such payment or as proportional payment to each and all of the entire number of subscribed shares, and it would be difficult to determine the unpaid balance to be assumed by each transferee. (Villanueva) PAGE 100

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


Dissolution and Liquidation

If the petition is sufficient in form and substance, the SEC shall issue an order fixing a hearing date for objections.

Dissolution of a corporation is the extinguishment of its franchise and the termination of its corporate existence or business purpose.

A copy of the order shall be published at least once a week for 3 consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation, or if there is no newspaper in the city or municipality of the principal office, posting for 3 consecutive weeks in 3 public places is sufficient.

MODES OF DISSOLUTION According to some decisions, the method of effecting dissolution as prescribed by law are exclusive, and a corporation cannot be dissolved except in the manner prescribed by law (De Leon)

Objections must be filed no less than 30 days nor more than 60 days after the entry of the Order. After the expiration of the time to file objections, a hearing shall be conducted upon prior 5 day notice to hear the objections.

VOLUNTARY

Note: If no dissolution papers are filed with the SEC by a corporation claiming dissolution voluntarily, such corporation is still deemed legally existing, notwithstanding the fact that it has ceased to operate (De Leon)

Judgment shall be rendered dissolving the corporation and directing the disposition of assets. The judgment may include appointment of a receiver.

Where no creditors are affected (Sec. 118) Notice of the meeting should be given to the stockholders or members by personal delivery or registered mail at least 30 days prior to the meeting.

As long as 2/3 vote is obtained, no member/ stockholder can prevent such dissolution unless the majority stockholders acted in bad faith. The latter may be held liable for damages. (Campos)

The notice of meeting should also be published for 3 consecutive weeks in a newspaper published in the place where the principal office of said corporation is located. If no newspaper is published in such place, then in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines.

By shortening of corporate term A voluntary dissolution may be effected by amending the AOI. Upon approval of the amended AOI or the expiration of the shortened term, as the case may be, the corporation shall be deemed dissolved without any further proceedings.

The resolution to dissolve must be approved by the majority of the directors/trustees and approved by the stockholders representing at least 2/3s of the OCS or 2/3 of members.

A publication of notice of dissolution is required and cannot be dispensed with by alleging that it was not required in Section 120 and that no creditors will be prejudiced by its dissolution (SEC Opinion, August 30, 1988)

Non-voting shares are entitled to vote in this matter (Sec. 6. Par 6(8))

SEC Opinion No. 06-20, March 13, 2006: (1) If the shortened term expires before the SEC approvalthe corporation will be dissolved upon the SEC approval (2) If the shortened term expires after the SEC approval the corporation will be dissolved upon the expiration of the shortened term

A copy of the resolution shall be certified by the majority of the directors or trustees and countersigned by the secretary. The signed and countersigned copy will be filed with the SEC and the latter will issue the certificate of dissolution. Note: Thus, except for the expiration of its term, no dissolution can be effective without some act of the State (Daguhoy Enterprises v. Ponce, 1954)

According to Campos: (1) If SEC fails to act within 6 months from filing of the amended AOI and shortened term expires after the 6month period - the corporation will be dissolved upon the expiration of the shortened term. (2) If SEC fails to act within 6 months from filing of the amended AOI and shortened term expires before the 6month period- the corporation will be dissolved at the end of the 6-month period.

Where creditors are affected A petition shall be signed by a majority of its board of directors or trustees or other officers having management of its affairs. The petition must be verified by its president, or secretary or one of its director or trustees.

INVOLUNTARY

Approval of the stockholders representing at least 2/3 of the OCS or 2/3 of members in a meeting called for that purpose.

By expiration of corporate term Once the period expires, the corporation is automatically dissolved without any other proceeding and it cannot thereafter be considered a de facto corporation.

Filing of a petition with the SEC signed by majority of directors or trustees or other officers having the management of its affairs verified by the President or Secretary or Director. Claims and demands must be stated in the petition.

Failure to organize and commence business within 2 years from incorporation Failure to formally organize and commence the transaction of its business or construction of its works within two years PAGE 101

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

its corporate powers shall cease and the corporation shall be deemed dissolved (Sec. 22).


(1) Fraud in procuring its certificate of registration (2) Serious misrepresentation as to what the corporation can or is doing to the great prejudice of or damage to the general public (3) Refusal to comply or defiance of any lawful order of the Commission restraining commission of acts which would amount to a grave violation of its franchise (4) Continuous inoperation for a period of at least five years (5) Failure to file by-laws within the required period (6) Failure to file required reports in appropriate forms as determined by the Commission within the prescribed period (7) Other grounds (a) Violation by the corporation of any provision of the Corporation Code (Sec. 144 BP 68) (b) In case of a deadlock in a close corporation, and the SEC deems it proper to order the dissolution of the corporation as the only practical solution to the dispute (Sec. 104 BP 68)

According to Campos, dissolution in this case is automatic. However, a contrary view states: Since there is a defense available to the corporation, that is, if its failure to organize and commence its business is due to causes beyond the control of the corporation as may be determined by the SEC, therefore, the dissolution is not automatic. Transacting business implies a continuity of acts or dealings in the accomplishment of the purpose for which the corporation was formed (Mentholatum v. Mangaliman, 1946) Formal organization includes not only the adoption of the by-laws but also the establishment of the body which will administer the affairs of the corporation and exercise its powers. By-laws should be adopted within one month of receipt of official notice of the issuance of the certificate of incorporation, otherwise the certificate may be suspended or revoked (PD 902-A, Sec. 6 (i)(5))

METHODS OF LIQUIDATION Liquidation is the process by which all the assets of the corporation are converted into liquid assets (cash) in order to facilitate the payment of obligations to creditors, and the remaining balance if any is to be distributed to the stockholders. It is a proceeding in rem.

Failure to operate for at least 5 consecutive years after commencement of business - ground for suspension or revocation of its corporate franchise or certificate of incorporation.

BY THE CORPORATION ITSELF

Under Section 122 of the Corporation Code, a corporation whose corporate existence is terminated in any manner continues to be a body corporate for three (3) years after its dissolution for purposes of prosecuting and defending suits by and against it and to enable it to settle and close its affairs, culminating in the disposition and distribution of its remaining assets. It may, during the three-year term, appoint a trustee or a receiver who may act beyond that period.

Note: Dissolution in this case is not automatic. (Campos) The corporation may show that the failure to commence its business or to continuously operate is due to causes beyond its control (Sec. 22). Legislative dissolution The inherent power of Congress to make laws carries with it the power to amend or repeal them. Involuntary corporate dissolution may be effected through the amendment or repeal of the Code. (implied from Section 145, De Leon)

The termination of the life of a corporate entity does not by itself cause the extinction or diminution of the rights and liabilities of such entity. If the three-year extended life has expired without a trustee or receiver having been expressly designated by the corporation, within that period, the board of directors (or trustees) itself, may be permitted to so continue as "trustees" by legal implication to complete the corporate liquidation. (Pepsi-Cola Products Philippines, Inc. v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 145855, November 24, 2004)

The limitations on the power to dissolve corporations by legislative enactment are as follows: (1) Under the Constitution, the amendment, alteration, or repeal of the corporate franchise of a public utility shall be made only “when the common good so requires”; (2) Under Section 145 of the Code, it is provided that: “No right or remedy in favor of or against any corporation, its stockholders, members, directors, trustees, or officers, nor any liability incurred by any such corporation, stockholders, members, directors, trustees, or officers, shall be removed or impaired either by the subsequent dissolution of said corporation or by any subsequent amendment or repeal of this Code or of any part thereof”; (3) While Congress may provide for the dissolution of a corporation, it cannot impair the obligation of existing contracts between the corporation and third persons, or take away the vested rights of its creditors. (De Leon)

CONVEYANCE TO A TRUSTEE WITHIN A 3-YEAR PERIOD

From and after any such conveyance by the corporation of its property in trust for the benefit of its SH/members/creditors and others in interest, all interest which the corporation had in the property terminates, the legal interest vests in the trustees, and the beneficial interest in the stockholders, members, creditors or other persons in interest. The trustee (of a dissolved corporation) may commence a suit which can proceed to final judgment even beyond the three-year period (of liquidation) . . . , no reason can be conceived why a suit already commenced by the corporation itself during its existence, not by a mere trustee who, by fiction, merely continues the legal personality of the dissolved corporation, should not be accorded similar

Dissolution by the SEC on grounds under existing laws A corporation may be dissolved by the SEC, upon a verified complaint and after proper notice and hearing, on the following grounds (Sec. 6, par. i, PD 902-A): PAGE 102

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

treatment — to proceed to final judgment and execution thereof. (Reburiano v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 102965, January 21, 1999)


than a specified number of persons, not exceeding twenty (20); (2) All the issued stock of all classes shall be subject to one or more specified restrictions on transfer permitted by this Title; and (3) The corporation shall not list in any stock exchange or make any public offering of any of its stock of any class (Sec. 96).

Unless the trusteeship is limited in its duration by the deed of trust, there is no time limit within which the trustee must finish liquidation. (Board of Liquidators v Kalaw G.R. No. L18805, August 14, 1967)

Notes: A corporation shall not be deemed a close corporation when at least two-thirds (2/3) of its voting stock or voting rights is owned or controlled by another corporation which is not a close corporation within the meaning of this Code.

BY MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE OR REHABILITATION RECEIVER

However, the mere appointment of a receiver, without anything more does not result in the dissolution of the corporation nor bar it from the existence of its corporate rights (Leyte Asphalt & Mineral Oil Co. Ltd., v. Block Johnston &Breenbrawn, 1928)

Any corporation may be incorporated as a close corporation, except mining or oil companies, stock exchanges, banks, insurance companies, public utilities, educational institutions and corporations declared to be vested with public interest.

Upon five (5) day's notice, given after the date on which the right to file objections as fixed in the order has expired, the Commission shall proceed to hear the petition and try any issue made by the objections filed; and if no such objection is sufficient, and the material allegations of the petition are true, it shall render judgment dissolving the corporation and directing such disposition of its assets as justice requires, and may appoint a receiver to collect such assets and pay the debts of the corporation (Sec. 119)

The AOI must state that the number of stockholders shall not exceed 20. The AOI must contain restriction on the transfer of issued stocks (which must appear in the AOI, by-laws and certificate of stock)

LIQUIDATION AFTER THREE YEARS

Q: What is the difference between liquidation and Rehabilitation? A: Liquidation is the winding up of a corporation so that assets are distributed to those entitled to receive them. It is the process of reducing assets to cash, discharging liabilities and dividing surplus or loss. On the other hand, rehabilitation contemplates a continuance of corporate life and activities in an effort to restore and reinstate the corporation to its former position of successful operation and solvency. Both cannot be undertaken at the same time. (Phil. Veterans Bank v. Employees Union, 2001)

General rule: Free transferability of shares - Shares of stock so issued are personal property and may be transferred

If full liquidation can only be effected after the 3-year period and there is no trustee, the directors may be permitted to complete the liquidation by continuing as trustees by legal implication (Rebuirano v CA, 301 SCRA 342, January 21, 1999)

Restriction on the transfer must NOT be more onerous than granting the existing SH or corporation the option to purchase the shares (Right of First Refusal).

Exception: In close corporations: Considering the special circumstances attending a close corporation (e.g. formed by persons who know each other well, thus they would want to choose the persons who will be allowed in their group), it is justifiable and even imperative for its stockholders to protect themselves from future conflicts by placing restrictions on the right of each one of them to transfer his shares to an outsider.

The stocks cannot be listed in the stock exchange nor be publicly offered.

A corporation’s board of directors is not rendered functus officio by its dissolution. Since Section 122 allows a corporation to continue its existence for a limited purpose, necessarily there must be a board that will continue acting for and on behalf of the dissolved corporation for that purpose. (Aguirre vs. FQB+, Inc. G.R. No. 170770. January 9, 2013)

CHARACTERISTICS OF A CLOSE CORPORATION

The stockholders themselves can directly manage the corporation and perform the functions of directors without need of election (Sec. 97): (1) When they manage, stockholders are liable as directors; (2) There is no need to call a meeting to elect directors; (3) The stockholders are liable for tort. VALIDITY OF RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER OF SHARES

Other Corporations

Validity of Restrictions (Sec. 98) Restrictions must appear in the articles of incorporation and in the by-laws as well as in the certificate of stock; otherwise, the same shall not be binding on any purchaser thereof in good faith.

CLOSE CORPORATIONS A close corporation is one whose articles of incorporation provide that: (1) All the corporation's issued stock of all classes, exclusive of treasury shares, shall be held of record by not more PAGE 103

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


Restrictions shall not be more onerous than granting the existing stockholders or the corporation the option to purchase the shares of the transferring stockholder with such reasonable terms, conditions or period stated therein. After expiration of said period and upon failure of the existing stockholders or the corporation to purchase said shares, the transferring stockholder may sell his shares to any third person.

The provisions of subsection (4) shall not applicable if the transfer of stock, though contrary to subsections (1), (2) of (3), has been consented to by all the stockholders of the close corporation, or if the close corporation has amended its articles of incorporation in accordance with this Title.

Presumptions (Sec. 99) (1) If the stock certificate CONSPICUOUSLY shows the restriction, the purchaser or transferee is CONCLUSIVELY presumed to have notice of the restriction, provided this appears in the AOI. (2) Where a conclusive presumption of notice arises, the corporation may, at its option, refuse to register the transfer, unless (a) all the stockholders have consented to the transfer, or (b) the AOI has been properly amended to remove the restriction. (3) If it appears in the certificate, but NOT CONSPICUOUSLY, then although he may be presumed to have notice of the restriction, he can prove the contrary.

The provisions of this section shall not impair any right which the transferee may have to rescind the transfer or to recover under any applicable warranty, express or implied (Sec. 99)

The term "transfer", as used in this section, is not limited to a transfer for value.

WHEN BOARD MEETING IS UNNECESSARY OR IMPROPERLY HELD

When unnecessary Any action by the directors of a close corporation without a meeting shall nevertheless be deemed valid if: (1) Before or after such action is taken, written consent thereto is signed by all the directors; or (2) All the stockholders have actual or implied knowledge of the action and make no prompt objection thereto in writing; or (3) The directors are accustomed to take informal action with the express or implied acquiescence of all the stockholders; or (4) All the directors have express or implied knowledge of the action in question and none of them makes prompt objection thereto in writing (Sec. 101)

ISSUANCE OR TRANSFER OF STOCK IN BREACH OF QUALIFYING CONDITIONS

If stock of a close corporation is issued or transferred to any person who is not entitled under any provision of the articles of incorporation to be a holder of record of its stock, and if the certificate for such stock conspicuously shows the qualifications of the persons entitled to be holders of record thereof, such person is conclusively presumed to have notice of the fact of his ineligibility to be a stockholder.

When improperly held When a director’s meeting is held without proper call or notice, an action taken therein within the corporate powers is deemed ratified by a director who failed to attend.

If the articles of incorporation of a close corporation states the number of persons, not exceeding twenty (20), who are entitled to be holders of record of its stock, and if the certificate for such stock conspicuously states such number, and if the issuance or transfer of stock to any person would cause the stock to be held by more than such number of persons, the person to whom such stock is issued or transferred is conclusively presumed to have notice of this fact.

UNLESS he promptly files his written objection with the secretary of the corporation after having knowledge thereof (Sec. 101) PRE-EMPTIVE RIGHT

The pre-emptive right of stockholders in close corporations shall extend to all stock to be issued, including reissuance of treasury shares, whether for money, property or personal services, or in payment of corporate debts, UNLESS the articles of incorporation provide otherwise (Sec. 102).

If a stock certificate of any close corporation conspicuously shows a restriction on transfer of stock of the corporation, the transferee of the stock is conclusively presumed to have notice of the fact that he has acquired stock in violation of the restriction, if such acquisition violates the restriction.

AMENDMENT OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

Amendment to the AOI which seeks to: (1) delete or remove any provision required to be contained in the AOI of Close Corporations (under the Title on Close Corporations); or (2) reduce a quorum or voting requirement stated in said AOI

Whenever any person to whom stock of a close corporation has been issued or transferred has, or is conclusively presumed under this section to have, notice either (a) that he is a person not eligible to be a holder of stock of the corporation, or (b) that transfer of stock to him would cause the stock of the corporation to be held by more than the number of persons permitted by its articles of incorporation to hold stock of the corporation, or (c) that the transfer of stock is in violation of a restriction on transfer of stock, the corporation may, at its option, refuse to register the transfer of stock in the name of the transferee.

Requires the affirmative vote of at least 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock, whether with or without voting rights, or of such greater proportion of shares as may be specifically provided in the AOI at a meeting duly called.

PAGE 104

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


(2) Cancel, alter or enjoin any resolution of the corporation (3) Direct or prohibit any act of the corporation (4) Require the purchase at their fair value of shares of any stockholder either by any stockholder or by the corporation regardless of the availability of unrestricted retained earnings. (5) Appoint a provisional director (6) Dissolve the corporation

DEADLOCKS

Requisites (1) The directors or stockholders are so divided respecting the management of the corporation's business and affairs (2) The votes required for any corporate action cannot be obtained that the business and affairs of the corporation can no longer be conducted to the advantage of the stockholders generally

Granting such other relief as the circumstances may warrant.

Powers of the SEC in case of deadlock in close corporations (1) Cancel or alter any provision in the articles of incorporation or by-laws

Close Corporations

Regular Corporations Management/board authority

There can be classification of directors into one or more classes, each of whom may be voted for and elected solely by a There are no classification of board of directors particular class of stock; and The articles of incorporation of a close corporation may provide that the business of the corporation shall be managed by the stockholders of the corporation rather than by a board of directors. So long as this provision continues in effect: Corporate Powers devolved upon board of directors whose powers are executed by officers. Cannot provide that it be No meeting of stockholders need be called to elect directors. managed by stockholders Unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the stockholders Board of directors must be elected in a stockholders meeting of the corporation shall be deemed to be directors for the purpose of applying the provisions of this Code. Stockholders of a corporation are separate and distinct from The stockholders of the corporation shall be subject to all directors liabilities of directors. The articles of incorporation may likewise provide that all officers or employees or that specified officers or employees Officers must be elected by the Board of Directors shall be elected or appointed by the stockholders, instead of by the board of directors. Meetings Unless the by-laws provide otherwise, any action by the The directors or trustees shall not act individually nor directors of a close corporation without a meeting shall separately but as a body in a lawful meeting. They will act only nevertheless be deemed valid if: after discussion and deliberation of matters before them. Contracts entered into without a formal board resolution does 1. Before or after such action is taken, written consent not bind the corporation except when ratified or when majority thereto is signed by all the directors; or of the board has knowledge of the contract and the contract benefited the corporation. 2. All the stockholders have actual or implied knowledge of the action and make no prompt objection thereto in Absence of a prompt objection in writing does not ratify acts writing; or done by directors without a valid meeting. There must be express or implied ratification. 3. The directors are accustomed to take informal action with the express or implied acquiescence of all the Express ratification may consist of a Board Resolution to that stockholders; or effect 4.

All the directors have express or implied knowledge of the Implied ratification may consist of acceptance of benefits from action in question and none of them makes prompt said unauthorized act while having knowledge of said act objection thereto in writing. Failure to give notice would render a meeting voidable. If a director's meeting is held without proper call or notice, an PAGE 105

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE


action taken therein within the corporate powers is deemed Attendance to a meeting despite want of notice will be deemed ratified by a director who failed to attend, unless he promptly implied waiver files his written objection with the secretary of the corporation after having knowledge thereof. All proceedings had and any business transacted at any meeting of the stockholders or members, if within the powers or authority of the corporation, shall be valid even if the meeting be improperly held or called, provided all the stockholders or members of the corporation are present or duly represented at the meeting. (§51) Voting/quorum No share may be deprived of voting rights, except Preferred or Redeemable shares, unless otherwise provided by the Code The AOI may provide for a classification of directors into one or There shall always be a class/series of shares which have a more classes, each of which may be voted for and elected solely COMPLETE VOTING RIGHTS by a particular class of stock. EACH SHARE SHALL BE EQUAL IN ALL RESPECTS TO EVERY OTHER SHARE, except as otherwise provided in the AOI For Board of directors, the by-laws or AOI can provide for a The AOI may provide for a greater quorum or voting greater majority in quorum requirements in meetings of stockholders or directors than those provided in this Code. For stockholders, the AOI can provide for a different percentage in quorum Pre-emptive right

The pre-emptive right of stockholders in close corporations shall extend to all stock to be issued, including reissuance of treasury shares, whether for money, property or personal services, or in payment of corporate debts, unless the articles of incorporation provide otherwise.

Limitations on the exercise of pre-emptive right: a. Such pre-emptive right shall not extend to shares to be issued in compliance with laws requiring stock offerings or minimum stock ownership by the public; b. Not extend to shares to be issued in good faith with the approval of the stockholders representing two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, in exchange for property needed for corporate purposes or in payment of a previously contracted debt c. Shall not take effect if denied in the Articles of Incorporation or an amendment thereto.

Transferability Restrictions on the right to transfer shares must appear in the AOI and in the by-laws as well as in the certificate of stock otherwise the same shall not be binding on any purchaser Restrictions on the right to transfer not allowed thereof in good faith Withdrawal right Any stockholder of a close corporation may, for any reason, compel the said corporation to purchase his shares at their fair value, which shall not be less than their par or issued value, when the corporation has sufficient assets in its books to cover its debts and liabilities exclusive of capital stock Any stockholder of a close corporation may, by written petition to the SEC, compel the dissolution of such corporation whenever: a. Any of acts of the directors, officers or those in control of the corporation is illegal, or fraudulent, or dishonest, or oppressive or unfairly prejudicial to the corporation or any stockholder, or b. Corporate assets are being misapplied or wasted.

Stockholders may require the corporation to buy-back their shares at fair value when the Corporation has unrestricted Retained Earnings: a. In case any amendment to the articles of incorporation which has the effect of: i. changing or restricting the rights of any stockholder or class of shares, or ii. authorizing preferences in any respect superior to those of outstanding shares of any class, or iii. extending or shortening the term of corporate existence b. In case of sale, lease, exchange, transfer, mortgage, pledge or other disposition of all or substantially all of the corporate property and assets as provided in the Code; and c. In case of merger or consolidation d. Extension or shortening of the term of the corporation (§37)

PAGE 106

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

e.


Diversion of funds of corporation from primary purpose to secondary purpose (§41)

The corporation may buy-back shares of stockholders subject to the following limitations (Treasury shares): a. There must be unrestricted retained earnings b. Must be for a legitimate purpose

NON-STOCK CORPORATIONS

RELIGIOUS CORPORATIONS

DEFINITION

CORPORATION SOLE (SEC. 110)

One where no part of its income is distributable as dividends to its members, trustees, or officers, subject to the provisions of this Code on dissolution. (Sec.87)

A special form of corporation, usually associated with clergy and consists of one person only and his successors, who are incorporated by law to give some legal capacities and advantages.

PURPOSES

(1) Charitable (2) Religious (3) Educational (4) Professional (5) Cultural (6) Fraternal (7) Literary (8) Scientific (9) Social (10) Civic services (11) Similar purposes, such as chambers or combinations trade, industry or agriculture

A registered corporation sole can acquire land if its members constitute at least 60% Filipinos (SEC Opinion, 8 August 1994). NATIONALITY

A corporation sole does not have any nationality but for purposes of applying our nationalizations laws, nationality is determined by the nationality of the members (Roman Catholic Apostolic Church v. Land Registration Commission, 1957). RELIGIOUS SOCIETIES

Non-stock corporation formed by a religious society, group, diocese, synod, or district of any religious denomination, sect, or church after getting the approval of 2/3 of its members.

TREATMENT OF PROFITS

Any profit which a non-stock corporation may obtain as an incident to its operations shall, whenever necessary or proper, be used for the furtherance of the purpose or purposes for which the corporation was organized. (Sec. nd 87,2 sentence)

FOREIGN CORPORATIONS Foreign corporations are those formed, organized, or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines and whose laws allow Filipino citizens and corporations to do business in its own country or state (Sec. 123).

DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS UPON DISSOLUTION

Order of distribution (1) All its creditors shall be paid. (2) Assets held subject to return on dissolution shall be delivered back to the givers. (3) Assets held for charitable, religious purposes, etc., without a condition for their return on dissolution, shall be conveyed to one or more organizations engaged in similar activities as dissolved corporation (4) All other assets shall be distributed to members, as provided in the AOI or by-laws (Sec. 94)

BASES OF AUTHORITY OVER FOREIGN CORPORATIONS

Consent As a rule, a foreign corporation can have no legal existence or status beyond the bounds of the State or sovereignty by which it is created or incorporated and organized. It exists only in contemplation of law and by force of the law and where that law ceases to operate, the corporation can have no existence. This principle, however, does not prevent a corporation from acting in another State or country with the latter’s express or implied consent. This is the “consent doctrine” which is provided in Sections 125 and 126. But every power which a corporation exercises as such in another State depends for its validity upon the laws of the sovereignty in which it is exercised. A corporation can exercise none of the functions and privileges conferred by its charter in another State or country except by the comity and consent of such State or country. (De Leon)

Procedure for the plan for distribution (1) Board of Trustees, by majority vote in a resolution, shall adopt a plan for distribution of the assets of the corporation (2) Written notice for a meeting must be sent to all members entitled to vote, stating the time and place of such meeting and the purpose thereof (3) At such meeting, the plan must be approved by 2/3 votes of the members having the right to vote, who are present or represented by proxy (Villanueva)

PAGE 107

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

Doctrine of “Doing Business” (relate to definition under the Foreign Investments Act, R.A. No. 7042)


(4) A foreign firm which does business through middlemen acting on their own namesshall not be deemed doing business in the Philippines.(Le Chemise Lacoste v. Fernandez, 1984).

Tests of “Doing Business in the Philippines” (Asked in ‘98 and ‘02) (1) Twin Characterization Test (a) Under the Continuity Test, doing business implies a continuity of commercial dealings and arrangements, or performance of acts normally incidental to the purpose and object of the organization. (b) Under the Substance Test, a foreign corporation is doing business in the country if it is continuing the body or substance of the enterprise of business for which it was organized (Mentholatum v. Mangaliman, 1941)

NECESSITY OF A LICENSE TO DO BUSINESS

Requisites for issuance of a license (1) The foreign corporation should file a copy of its articles of incorporation and by-laws, and a verified application (See Sec. 125) accompanied by the following: (a) Name and address of its designated resident agent who will receive summons and notices for the corporation; a special power of attorney should also be submitted for such purpose (b) An agreement that if it ceases to transact business or if there is no more resident agent, summons shall then be served through the SEC (c) Oath of Reciprocity stating that the foreign corporation’s country allows Filipino citizens and corporations to do business in said country

(2) Contract test – A foreign corporation is doing business in the Philippines if the contracts entered into by the foreign corporation or by an agent acting under the control and direction of the foreign corporation are consummated in the Philippines (Pacific Vegetable Oil v. Singson, 1955). “Doing Business” Under the Foreign investment Act of 1991 (Sec. 3(d), RA 7042) (Asked in ‘98 and ‘02)

(2) Within 60 days from issuance of license, the corporation should deposit at least P100,000 (cash, property, bond) for the benefit of creditors subject to further deposit every six months (See Sec. 126).

Doing Business (1) Soliciting orders, service contracts, or opening offices; (2) Appointing representatives, distributors domiciled in the Philippines or who stay for a period or periods totaling 180 days or more; (3) Participating in the management, supervision, or control of any domestic business, firm, entity, or corporation in the Philippines; (4) Any act or acts that imply a continuity of commercial dealings or arrangements, and contemplate to some extent the performance of acts or works or the exercise of some functions, normally incident to and in progressive prosecution of the purpose and object of its organization.

Resident agent Resident agent is an individual, who must be of good moral character and of sound financial standing, residing in the Philippines, or a domestic corporation lawfully transacting business in the Philippines, designated in a written power of attorney by a foreign corporation authorized to do business in the Philippines, on whom any summons and other legal processes may be served in all actions or other legal proceedings against the foreign corporation (Sec. 127-128). PERSONALITY TO SUE

A foreign corporation transacting business in the Philippines is required to secure a license to have the personality to sue before, or intervene in, any court or administrative proceeding. (Campos; Sec. 133)

Not Doing Business (1) Mere investment as shareholder and exercise of rights as investor; (2) Having a nominee director or officer to represent its interest in the corporation; (3) Appointing a representative or distributor which transacts business in its own name and for its own account.

The principles regarding the right of a foreign corporation to bring suit in Philippine courts may thus be condensed in four statements: (1) if a foreign corporation does business in the Philippines without a license, it cannot sue before the Philippine courts (Sec. 133, Corporation Code); (2) if a foreign corporation is not doing business in the Philippines, it needs no license to sue before Philippine courts on an isolated transaction or on a cause of action entirely independent of any business transaction (Eastboard Navigation, Ltd. v. Juan Ysmael & Company, Inc., 102 Phil. 1, 1957); (3) if a foreign corporation does business in the Philippines without a license, a Philippine citizen or entity which has contracted with said corporation may be estopped from challenging the foreign corporation’s corporate personality in a suit brought before Philippine courts (Merrill Lynch Futures v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 97816, 24 July 1992, 211 SCRA 824); and (4) if a foreign corporation does business in the Philippines with the required license, it can sue before Philippine

Jurisprudential Rules on “Not Doing Business in the Philippines” (1) Products manufactured off-shore and returned back to foreign corporation (Agilent Tech. Singapore Ltd. v. Integrated Silicon Tech. Phils. Corp., 2004) (2) Single isolated transaction (Marshall-Wells Co. v. Henry Eiser& Co, 1924). Multiple transactions are still considered a single transaction where there are constantly failed attempts in complying with the contract by one of the contracting parties (Antam Consolidated v. CA, 1986). (3) Trademark protection; foreign corporations not doing business are merely protecting their property rights (General Garments v. Director of Patents, 1971). PAGE 108

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

courts on any transaction. (Agilent Technologies Singapore v. Integrated Silicon Technologies, 2004)

(5) A misrepresentation of any material matter in any application, report, affidavit or other document submitted by such corporation pursuant to this Title; (6) Failure to pay any and all taxes, imposts, assessments or penalties, if any, lawfully due to the Philippine Government or any of its agencies or political subdivisions; (7) Transacting business in the Philippines outside of the purpose or purposes for which such corporation is authorized under its license; (8) Transacting business in the Philippines as agent of or acting for and in behalf of any foreign corporation or entity not duly licensed to do business in the Philippines; or (9) Any other ground as would render it unfit to transact business in the Philippines (Sec. 134)

SUABILITY OF FOREIGN CORPORATIONS

A foreign corporation whether or not doing business in the Philippines may be sued for acts done against persons in the Philippines. Indeed if a foreign corporation, not engaged in business in the Philippines, is not barred from seeking redress from courts in the Philippines, a fortiori, that same corporation cannot claim exemption from being sued in Philippine courts for acts done against a person or persons in the Philippines. (Facilities Management Corporation v. De La Osa, 1979) INSTANCES WHEN UNLICENSED FOREIGN CORPORATIONS MAY BE ALLOWED TO SUE ISOLATED TRANSACTIONS

(1) Isolated transactions, i.e. not ‘doing business’ in the Philippines, (Sec. 133, Corporation Code); (2) Action to protect good name, goodwill, and reputation of a foreign corporation; (3) The subject contracts provide that Philippine courts will be the venue to controversies; (4) A license subsequently granted enables the foreign corporation to sue on contracts executed before the grant of the license; (5) Recovery of misdelivered property; (6) Where the unlicensed foreign corporation has a domestic corporation. (7) When the Philippine citizen or entity is estopped from challenging the foreign corporation’s personality to sue (Merrill Lynch Futures v. Court of Appeals, G.R. No. 97816, 24 July 1992, 211 SCRA 824)

Status


Under special laws Insurance Code The Insurance Commissioner is authorized to suspend or revoke all certificates of authority granted to an insurance company, whether domestic or foreign, when: (1) it is in unsound condition; or (2) it has failed to comply with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it; or (3) its condition or method of business is such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or to its policyholders; or (4) its paid-up capital stock, in the case of a foreign company, is impaired or deficient, or that the margin of solvency required of such company is deficient (Sec. 247, Insurance Code) General Banking Act The Monetary Board may revoke the license to transact business in the Philippines of any foreign bank, if it finds that: (1) the foreign bank is insolvent; or (2) in imminent danger thereof; or (3) its continuance in business will involve probable loss to those transacting business with it.

Consequence

Doing Business in the PH, May be sued an can be sued WITH a license Doing Business in the PH, Cannot sue, but may be sued WITHOUT a license in the PH NOT doing business in the May sue; PH, on isolated transactions may be sued (Facilities Management v. Dela Osa 89 SCRA 131)

Mergers and Consolidations

GROUNDS FOR REVOCATION OF LICENSE

DEFINITION AND CONCEPT Merger – a corporation absorbs the other and remains in existence while the others are dissolved. (Sec.76)

Under the Corporation Code (1) Failure to file its annual report or pay any fees as required by this Code; (2) Failure to appoint and maintain a resident agent in the Philippines as required by this Title; (3) Failure, after change of its resident agent or of his address, to submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission a statement of such change as required by this Title; (4) Failure to submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission an authenticated copy of any amendment to its articles of incorporation or by laws or of any articles of merger or consolidation within the time prescribed by this Title;

One of the constituent corporations remains as an existing juridical person, whereas the other corporation shall cease to exist. Merger is the disappearance of one of the corporations [generally by amending the articles of incorporation and shortening its term of existence (Sec.40)] with the other corporation acquiring all the assets, rights of action, and assuming all the liabilities of the disappearing corporation. Consolidation – a new corporation is created, and consolidating corporations are extinguished (Sec.76) PAGE 109

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

If there is consolidation, there will be disappearance of both the constituent corporations with the emergence of a new corporate entity which shall obtain all the assets of the disappearing corporations, and likewise shall assume all their liabilities.


(5) If necessary, the SEC shall set a hearing, notifying all corporations concerned at least two (2) weeks before. (6) Issuance of certificate of merger or consolidation. Procedure under Sec. 77: (1) Approval by majority vote of each of the board of directors or trustees of the constituent corporations of the plan of merger or consolidation. (2) Approval by the stockholders or members of each of such corporations. The affirmative vote of stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock of each corporation in the case of stock corporations or at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in the case of non-stock corporations shall be necessary for the approval of such plan (3) Notice of such meetings shall be given to all stockholders or members of the respective corporations, at least two (2) weeks prior to the date of the meeting, either personally or by registered mail. Said notice shall state the purpose of the meeting and shall include a copy or a summary of the plan of merger or consolidation. (4) Any dissenting stockholder in stock corporations may exercise his appraisal right in accordance with the Code. Provided, that if after the approval by the stockholders of such plan, the board of directors decides to abandon the plan, the appraisal right shall be extinguished. (5) Amendment to the plan of merger or consolidation may be made by approved of the majority vote of the respective boards of directors or trustees of all the constituent corporations and ratified by the affirmative vote of stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or of two-thirds (2/3) of the members of each of the constituent corporations. Such plan, together with any amendment, shall be considered as the agreement of merger or consolidation.

CONSTITUENT VS. CONSOLIDATED CORPORATION Constituent corporations – the parties to a merger or consolidation Consolidated corporation – the new single corporation created through consolidation. Surviving corporation – one of the constituent corporations which remain in existence after the merger PLAN OF MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION (Sec. 76) Each of the constituent corporations must draw up a Plan of Merger or Consolidation which shall set forth: (1) Names of the corporation involved; (2) Terms and mode of carrying it; (3) Statement of changes, if any, in the present articles of the surviving corporation to be formed in the case of merger; and with respect to the consolidated corporation in case of consolidation ARTICLES OF MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION Each of the constituent corporation shall execute Articles of Merger or Consolidation signed by the president/vicepresident, and certified by the secretary/assistant secretary setting forth: (1) Plan of merger or consolidation; (2) For stock corporation, the number of shares outstanding; for non-stock, the number of members; (3) As to each corporation, number of shares or members voting for and against such plan respectively. The Articles of Merger or Consolidation: (1) take the place of the Articles of Incorporationof the consolidated corporation; or (2) amend the Articles of Incorporation of the surviving corporation.

EFFECTIVITY Upon issuance of the certificate of merger or consolidation, such merger or consolidation shall become effective (Sec. 79).

PROCEDURE (1) The board of each corporation shall draw up a plan of merger or consolidation. (2) The plan of merger or consolidation shall be approved by majority vote of each of the board of the concerned corporations at separate meetings, and a vote of 2/3 of the members or of stockholders representing 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock. Holders of non-voting shares or non-voting members are entitled to vote on the plan (Sec. 6, par. 6(6)) Any amendment to the plan must be approved by the majority vote of the board members or trustees of the constituent corporations and affirmative vote of 2/3 of the outstanding capital stock or members. (3) Articles of Merger or Articles of Consolidation shall be executed by each of the constituent corporations. (4) Submission of Four (4) copies of the Articles of Merger or Articles of Consolidation to the SEC for approval. Mergers and consolidations of corporations governed by special laws requires a recommendation from the appropriate government agency (Sec. 79 (1))

Merger or consolidation does not become effective by mere agreement of the constituent corporations. The approval of the SEC is required. (PNB v. Andrada Electric & Engr. Co., Inc., 2002) NothwithstandingSection79, parties may stipulate a specific effective date of merger (or consolidation) where no third party will be prejudiced (SEC Opinion No. 09-13, July 1, 2009). LIMITATIONS In the case of merger or consolidation of banks or banking institutions, building and loan associations, trust companies, insurance companies, public utilities, educational institutions and other special corporations governed by special laws, the favorable recommendation of the appropriate government agency shall first be obtained (Sec. 79)

PAGE 110

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

CORPORATION CODE

EFFECTS (Sec. 80) (1) The constituent corporations shall become a single corporation. (2) The separate existence of the constituents shall cease, except that of the surviving or the consolidated corporation. The absorbed or constituent corporations are ipso facto dissolved by operation of law (SEC Opinion, July 16, 1981); there is no liquidation of the assets of the dissolved corporations (Campos). (3) The surviving or the consolidated corporation shall possess all the rights, privileges, immunities and powers and shall be subject to all the duties and liabilities of a corporation. (4) The surviving or the consolidated corporation shall possess all rights, privileges, immunities and franchises of each constituent corporation and the properties shall be deemed transferred to and vested in the surviving or consolidated corporation without further act or deed. (5) All liabilities of the constituents shall pertain to the surviving or the consolidated corporation [assumption of liability is automatic (De Leon; Campos)]. (6) Any claim, action or proceeding pending by or against any of the constituent corporations may be prosecuted by or against the surviving or consolidated corporation; and (7) The rights of the creditors or lien upon the property of any of each constituent corporation shall not be impaired by such merger or consolidation.

PAGE 111


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SECURITIES REGULATION CODE

PAGE 112


UP COLLEGE OF LAW


State Policy


(f) Any class of security with respect to which the SEC finds that registration is not necessary in the public interest and for the protection of investors (Sec. 9.2)

Purpose. The establishment of a socially conscious, free market that: (1) Regulates itself; (2) Encourage the widest participation of ownership in enterprises; (3) Enhance the democratization of wealth; (4) Promote the development of the capital market; (5) Protect investors; (6) Ensure full and fair disclosure about securities; (7) Minimize if not totally eliminate insider trading and other fraudulent or manipulative devices and practices which create distortions in the free market (Sec. 2).

Note: The exemption of securities by the SEC must be made through the issuance of a rule or regulation (Sec. 9.2) (2) Exempt transactions (a) At any judicial sale, or sale by an executor, administrator, guardian or receiver or trustee in insolvency or bankruptcy. [Rationale for exclusion: A court will presumably not order the sale if the public will be prejudiced thereby.] (b) By or for the account of a pledge holder, or mortgagee or any of a pledge lien holder selling of offering for sale or delivery in the ordinary course of business and not for the purpose of avoiding the provision of this Code, to liquidate a bona fide debt, a security pledged in good faith as security for such debt. [Rationale: This is not a voluntary sale contemplated by the SRC.] (c) An isolated transaction in which any security is sold, offered for sale, subscription or delivery by the owner thereof, or by his representative for the owner’s account, such sale or offer for sale or offer for sale, subscription or delivery not being made in the course of repeated and successive transaction of a like character by such owner, or on his account by such representative and such owner or representative not being the underwriter of such security. [Rationale: Isolated and not meant to be an ongoing public offering.] (d) The distribution by a corporation actively engaged in the business authorized by its articles of incorporation, of securities to its stockholders or other security holders as a stock dividend or other distribution out of surplus. [Rationale: The offerees are not the public but shareholders already familiar with their company.] (e) The sale of capital stock of a corporation to its own stockholders exclusively, where no commission or other remuneration is paid or given directly or indirectly in connection with the sale of such capital stock. [Rationale: Same as (d) above.] (f) The issuance of bonds or notes secured by mortgage upon real estate or tangible personal property, when the entire mortgage together with all the bonds or notes secured thereby are sold to a single purchaser at a single sale. [Rationale: This is not a public sale.] (g) The issue and delivery of any security in exchange for any other security of the same issuer pursuant to a right of conversion entitling the holder of the security surrendered in exchange to make such conversion: Provided, That the security so surrendered has been registered under this Code or was, when sold, exempt from the provision of this Code, and that the security issued and delivered in exchange, if sold at the conversion price, would at the time of such conversion fall within the class of securities entitled to registration under this Code. Upon such conversion the par value of the security surrendered in such exchange shall be deemed the price at which the securities issued and delivered in such exchange are sold. [Rationale: The SEC has already registered the convertible security and presumably also passed upon the security to be issued upon conversion.]

Securities Required to be Registered General rule: Securities shall not be sold or offered for sale or distribution to the public within the Philippines, without a registration statement duly filed with and approved by the Commission (Sec. 8.1) [N.B. The Securities Regulation Code (SRC) regulates public offering within the Philippines.] Exceptions: (1) Exempt securities (Sec. 9) (a) Any security issued or guaranteed by the Government of the Philippines/ its political subdivision or agency/its instrumentality/ or any person controlled or supervised thereby; [N.B. Rationale for the exception: The public does not need protection from the government itself. The government will always be solvent to pay its obligations because of its ability to raise revenues through taxation.] (b) Any security issued or guaranteed by the government of any country with which the Philippines maintains diplomatic relations, or by any state, province or political subdivision thereof on the basis of reciprocity: Provided, That the Commission may require compliance with the form and content for disclosures the Commission may prescribe; [Rationale for the exception: This is rooted in comity among nations.] (c) Certificates issued by a receiver or by a trustee in bankruptcy duly approved by the proper adjudicatory body; [Rationale: This is not a public offering. Besides, protection is already afforded by that “proper adjudicatory body” and additional SEC protection is not necessary.] (d) Any security or its derivatives the sale or transfer of which, by law, is under the supervision and regulation of the Office of the Insurance Commission, Housing and Land Use Rule Regulatory Board, or the Bureau of Internal Revenue. [Rationale: The issuers are governmental agencies covered by exception (a) above. SEC protection would be a duplication.] (e) Any security issued by a bank except its own shares of stock (Sec. 9.1) [Rationale: Banks are under the supervision of the Bangko Sentral. SEC protection is a duplication.] PAGE 113

UP COLLEGE OF LAW



Procedure for Registration of Securities

(h) Broker’s transaction, executed upon customer’s orders, on any registered Exchange or other trading market. [Rationale: If broker’s transactions are registered each time, the transactions on the exchange will be unduly hampered. Besides, the brokers are subject to a “code of conduct” protective of the interest of the investors.] (i) Subscriptions for shares of the capitals stocks of a corporation prior to the incorporation thereof or in pursuance of an increase in its authorized capital stocks under the Corporation Code, when no expense is incurred, or no commission, compensation or remuneration is paid or given in connection with the sale or disposition of such securities, and only when the purpose for soliciting, giving or taking of such subscription is to comply with the requirements of such law as to the percentage of the capital stock of a corporation which should be subscribed before it can be registered and duly incorporated, or its authorized, capital increase. [Rationale: This is not a public offering. Besides, the SEC is involved in the subscription process, as a regulator.] (j) The exchange of securities by the issuer with the existing security holders exclusively, where no commission or other remuneration is paid or given directly or indirectly for soliciting such exchange. [Rationale: This is not a public offering.] (k) The sale of securities by an issuer to fewer than twenty (20) persons in the Philippines during any twelve-month period. [Rationale: This is not a public offering but a private placement.] (l) The sale of securities to any number of the following qualified buyers: (i) Bank; (ii) Registered investment house; (iii) Insurance company; (iv) Pension fund or retirement plan maintained by the Government of the Philippines or any political subdivision thereof or manage by a bank or other persons authorized by the Bangko Sentral to engage in trust functions; (v) Investment company or; (vi) Such other person as the Commission may rule by determine as qualified buyers, on the basis of such factors as financial sophistication, net worth, knowledge, and experience in financial and business matters, or amount of assets under management. (Sec. 10.1) [Rationale: These are sophisticated investors that could fend for themselves.] (m) Any transaction with respect to which the SEC finds that registration is not necessary in the public interest and protection of investors such as by the reason of the small amount involved or the limited character of the public offering (Sec. 10.2)

(1) Filing of a sworn registration statement with the SEC (Sec. 12.1), which: (a) Shall include any prospectus required or permitted to be delivered under Subsections 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4 (Sec. 12.1) Chapter III, Sec. 8. Requirement of Registration of Securities xxx 8.2 The Commission may conditionally approve the registration statement under such terms as it may deem necessary. 8.3 The Commission may specify the terms and conditions under which any written communication, including any summary prospectus, shall be deemed not to constitute an offer for sale under this Section. 8.4. A record of the registration of securities shall be kept in Register Securities in which shall be recorded orders entered by the Commission with respect such securities. Such register and all documents or information with the respect to the securities registered therein shall be open to public inspection at reasonable hours on business days. (b) Shall include the effect of the securities issue on ownership, on the mix of ownership, especially foreign and local ownership (Sec. 12.3) (c) Shall be signed by the issuer’s executive officer, its principal operating officer, its principal financial officer, its comptroller, its principal accounting officer, its corporate secretary, or persons performing similar functions accompanied by a duly verified resolution of the board of directors of the issuer corporation (Sec. 12.4) (d) Shall be accompanied by: (a) written consent of the expert named as having certified any part of the registration statement or any document used in connection therewith; and (b) Where the registration statement shares to be sold by selling shareholders, a written certification by such selling shareholders as to the accuracy of any part of the registration statement contributed to by such selling shareholders (Sec. 12.4). (2) Payment to the SEC a fee of not more than one-tenth (1/10) of one per centum (1%) of the maximum aggregate price at which such securities are proposed to be offered (Sec. 12.5a) (3) Publication of the notice of the filing of registration statement. The publication must be in two (2) newspapers of general circulation in the Philippines, once a week for two (2) consecutive weeks, or in such other manner as the Commission by the rule shall prescribe (Sec. 12.5b)

Note: Application for exemption under this Section must be accompanied by: (1) notice of the exemption relied upon; (2) payment of fee equivalent to 1/10 of 1% of the maximum value aggregate price or issued value of the securities.

PAGE 114

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


(4) Declaration by the SEC whether the registration statement is effective or rejected, Declaration is made within 45 days from filing of the registration statement or on such later date to which the issuer has consented unless applicant has been allowed to amend the registration statement under Sec. 14 (Sec. 12.6).


(1) To create a false or misleading appearance of active trading in any listed security traded in an Exchange of any other trading market (hereafter referred to purposes of this Chapter as "Exchange"): (a) By effecting any transaction in such security which involves no change in the beneficial ownership thereof; (b) By entering an order or orders for the purchase or sale of such security with the knowledge that a simultaneous order or orders of substantially the same size, time and price, for the sale or purchase of any such security, has or will be entered by or for the same or different parties; or (c) By performing similar act where there is no change in beneficial ownership.

Notes: Grounds for: (1) rejection/revocation of registration statement and (2) refusal of registration/revocation of securities thereunder: (a) The issuer: (i) Has been judicially declared insolvent; (ii) Has violated any of the provision of this Code, the rules promulgate pursuant thereto, or any order of the Commission of which the issuer has notice in connection with the offering for which a registration statement has been filed (iii) Has been or is engaged or is about to engage in fraudulent transactions; (iv) Has made any false or misleading representation of material facts in any prospectus concerning the issuer or its securities; (v) Has failed to comply with any requirements that the Commission may impose as a condition for registration of the security for which the registration statement has been filed; or (b) The registration statement is on its face incomplete or inaccurate in any material respect or includes any untrue statements of a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statement therein not misleading; or (c) The issuer, any officer, director or controlling person performing similar functions, or any under writer has been convicted, by a competent judicial or administrative body, upon plea of guilty, or otherwise, of an offense involving moral turpitude and /or fraud or is enjoined or restrained by the Commission or other competent or administrative body for violations of securities, commodities, and other related laws (Sec. 13.1) (d) If any issuer shall refuse to permit an examination to be made by the Commission (Sec. 13.3)

(2) To affect, alone or with others, securities or transactions in securities that: (a) Raises their price to induce the purchase of a security, whether of the same or a different class of the same issuer or of controlling, controlled, or commonly controlled company by others; or (b) Creates active trading to induce such a purchase or sale through manipulative devices such as marking the close, painting the tape, squeezing the float, hype and dump, boiler room operations and such other similar devices. (3) To circulate or disseminate information that the price of any security listed in an Exchange will or is likely to rise or fall because of manipulative market operations of any one or more persons conducted for the purpose of raising or depressing the price of the security for the purpose of inducing the purpose of sale of such security. (4) To make false or misleading statement with respect to any material fact, which he knew or had reasonable ground to believe was so false or misleading, for the purpose of inducing the purchase or sale of any security listed or traded in an Exchange. (5) To effect, either alone or others, any series of transactions for the purchase and/or sale of any security traded in an Exchange for the purpose of pegging, fixing or stabilizing the price of such security; unless otherwise allowed by this Code or by rules of the Commission (Sec. 24.1)

Note: A registration statement may be withdrawn by the issuer only with the consent of the Commission (Sec. 13.6). (5) Statement under oath by the issuer in all prospectus that registration requirements have been met and that all information are true and correct as represented by the issuer or the one making the statement. Statement under oath must be made upon effectivity of the registration statement. (Sec. 12.7)

SHORT SALES [N.B. The SEC is regulating transactions wherein the seller does not yet own or have the securities he is selling. He is required to show that he has made arrangements to effect delivery of such securities on settlement date; otherwise, the sale will not be allowed.] (1) No person shall use or employ, in connection with the purchase or sale of any security any manipulative or deceptive device or contrivance. (2) No short sale shall be effected nor any stop-loss order be executed in connection with the purchase or sale of any security except if allowed by the SEC (Sec. 24.2)

Prohibitions on fraud, manipulation and insider trading MANIPULATION OF SECURITY PRICES It shall be unlawful for any person acting for himself or through a dealer or broker, directly or indirectly:

Note: The SEC may allow certain acts or transactions under Sec. 24 (on Manipulation of Security Prices and Short PAGE 115

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


Sales), for public interest and protection of investors (Sec. 24.3)


(ii) That he had reason to believe that the other party otherwise is also in possession of the information (Sec. 27.1)

FRAUDULENT TRANSACTIONS It shall be unlawful for any person, directly or indirectly, in connection with the purchase or sale of any securities to: (1) Employ any device, scheme, or artifice to defraud; (Sec. 26.1) (2) Obtain money or property by means of any untrue statement of a material fact of any omission to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading (Sec. 26.2) (3) Engage in any act, transaction, practice or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit upon any person (Sec. 26.3)

Note: Presumption that purchase or sale is effected while in possession of material non-public information arises: (1) If the purchase or sale is transacted after such information came into existence but prior to dissemination of such information to the public; and (2) The lapse of a reasonable time for market to absorb such information. Presumption may be rebutted by showing of purchaser’s or seller’s awareness of the material non-public information at the time of purchase or sale (Sec. 27.1) (2) To communicate material nonpublic information about the issuer or the security to any person who, by virtue of the communication, becomes an insider where the insider communicating the information knows or has reason to believe that such person will likely buy or sell a security of the issuer whole in possession of such information (Sec. 27.3)

INSIDER TRADING [N.B. What is sought to be addressed here is the asymmetry in information about a “public company” (such as a company listed on the Philippine Stock Exchange) between insiders and outsiders. Insiders could have material information not yet known to the public about the company, and they might use this information to benefit themselves at the expense of the outsiders or the public. Therefore, they must not trade in the shares of the company pending the disclosure of such information to the public.]

Protection of Investors

Notes: (1) An insider means: (a) The issuer; (b) A director or officer (or any person performing similar functions) of, or a person controlling the issuer; gives or gave him access to material information about the issuer or the security that is not generally available to the public; (c) A government employee, director, or officer of an exchange, clearing agency and/or self-regulatory organization who has access to material information about an issuer or a security that is not generally available to the public; or (d) A person who learns such information by a communication from any foregoing insiders (Sec. 3.8) (2) Material non-public information means: (a) It has not been generally disclosed to the public and would likely affect the market price of the security after being disseminated to the public and the lapse of a reasonable time for the market to absorb the information; or (b) Would be considered by a reasonable person important under the circumstances in determining his course of action whether to buy, sell or hold a security (Sec. 27.2)

TENDER OFFER RULE [N.B. This protects the minority shareholders. If a person or a group of persons (acting in concert) intends and is in discussion with certain shareholders of a public company (normally, the controlling shareholders) to acquire a substantial stake in such company (now, the threshold is 35% of the outstanding class of shares in a public company), the acquirer must make an offer to all the shareholders of the company to tender their shares at the price being offered to the controlling shareholders. Before, the minority shareholders are left out; so, the acquirer only dealt with the controlling shareholders and disregarded the minority.] When a tender offer has commenced or is about to commence, It shall be unlawful for: (a) Any person (except the tender offeror) who is in possession of material nonpublic information relating to such tender offer, to buy or sell the securities of the issuer that are sought or to be sought by such tender offer if such person knows or has reason to believe that the information is nonpublic and has been acquired directly or indirectly from the tender offeror, those acting on its behalf, the issuer of the securities sought or to be sought by such tender offer, or any insider of such issuer (b) Any tender offeror, those acting on its behalf, the issuer of the securities sought or to be sought by such tender offer, and any insider of such issuer to communicate material nonpublic information relating to the tender offer to any other person where such communication is likely to result in a violation of (a) (Sec. 27.4).

It shall be unlawful for an insider: (1) To sell or buy a security of the issuer, while in possession of material information with respect to the issuer or the security that is not generally available to the public, unless: (a) The insider proves that the information was not gained from such relationship; or (b) If the other party selling to or buying from the insider (or his agent) is identified, the insider proves: (i) That he disclosed the information to the other party, or PAGE 116

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


RULES ON PROXY SOLICITATION Proxies shall be: (1) Issued in accordance with SEC rules and regulations; Proxy solicitations shall also be made in accordance with the said rules and regulations (Sec. 20.1) (2) In writing (Sec. 20.2) (3) Signed by the stockholder or his duly authorized representatives (Sec. 20.2) (4) Filed before the scheduled meeting with the corporate secretary (Sec. 20.2) (5) Valid only for the meeting for which it is intended unless otherwise provided in the proxy (Sec. 20.3)


The obligation of such issuer to file report shall be terminate ninety (90) days after notification to the Commission by the issuer that the number of its holders holding at least one hundred (100) share reduced to less than one hundred (100) (Sec. 17.2) To the equity holders An annual report shall be furnished by every issuer which has a class of equity securities satisfying any of the requirements in Subsection 17.2 to each holder of such equity security (Sec. 17.5) DISCLOSURE BY EQUITY HOLDERS

Note: No proxy shall be valid and effective for a period longer than five (5) years at one time (Sec. 20.3)

Any person who acquires directly or indirectly the beneficial ownership of more than five of per centum (5%) of such class or in excess of such lesser per centum as the Commission by rule may prescribe, shall, within ten (10) days after such acquisition or such reasonable time as fixed by the Commission, submit to: (1) the issuer of the securities; (2) to the Exchange where the security is traded; and (3) to the Commission, the following information: (1) The personal background, identity, residence, and citizenship of, and the nature of such beneficial ownership by, such person and all other person by whom or on whose behalf the purchases are effected; in the event the beneficial owner is a juridical person, the of business of the beneficial owner shall also be reported; (2) If the purpose of the purchases or prospective purchases is to acquire control of the business of the issuer of the securities, any plans or proposals which such persons may have that will effect a major change in its business or corporate structure; (3) The number of shares of such security which are beneficially owned, and the number of shares concerning which there is a right to acquire, directly or indirectly, by; (i) such person, and (ii) each associate of such person, giving the background, identity, residence, and citizenship of each such associate; and (4) Information as to any contracts, arrangements, or understanding with any person with respect to any securities of the issuer including but not limited to transfer, joint ventures, loan or option arrangements, puts or call guarantees or division of losses or profits, or proxies naming the persons with whom such contracts, arrangements, or understanding have been entered into, and giving the details thereof.

A broker or dealer shall: (1) Not give any proxy, consent or any authorization, in respect of any security carried for the account of the customer, to a person other than the customer, without written authorization of such customer (Sec. 20.4) (2) If he holds or acquires the proxy for at least ten percent (10%) or such percentage as the commission may prescribe of the outstanding share of such issuer, submit a report identifying the beneficial owner of ten days after such acquisition, for its own account or customer, to the issuer of security, to the exchange where the security is traded and to the Commission (Sec. 20.5) DISCLOSURE RULE DISCLOSURE BY THE ISSUER

To the SEC Every issuer shall file with the Commission: (1) Annual Report within one hundred thirty-five (135) days, after the end of the issuer’s fiscal year, or such other time as the Commission may prescribe (2) Such other periodical reports for interim fiscal periods and current reports on significant developments of the issuer as the Commission may prescribe as necessary to keep current information on the operation of the business and financial condition of the issuer (Sec. 17.1) Note: Under this Section, ‘issuer’ includes: (a) An issuer which has sold a class of its securities pursuant to a registration under section 12 hereof. BUT the requirement shall be suspended for any fiscal year if such issuer, as of the first day of any such fiscal year, has less than one hundred (100) holder of such class securities or such other number as the Commission shall prescribe and it notifies the Commission of such;

Note: If it appears to the SEC that securities were acquired by person in the ordinary course of his business and were not acquired for the purpose of and do not have the effect of changing or influencing the control of the issuer nor in connection with any transaction having such purpose or effect it may permit any person to file in lieu of the statement required by subsection 17.1 hereof, a notice stating: (a) The name of such person; (b) The shares of any equity securities subject to Subsection 17.1 which are owned by him; (c) The date of their acquisition; and (d) Such other information as the commission may specify (Sec. 18.3)

(b) An issuer with a class of securities listed for trading on an Exchange; and (c) An issuer with assets of at least Fifty million pesos (50,000,000.00) or such other amount as the Commission shall prescribe, and having two hundred (200) or more holder each holding at least one hundred (100) share of a class of its equity securities. PAGE 117

UP COLLEGE OF LAW



CIVIL LIABILITIES ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH PROSPECTUS, COMMUNICATIONS AND REPORTS (SEC. 57)

DISCLOSURE BY INSIDER

An insider has the duty to disclose material information with respect to the issuer or the security that is not generally available to the public (Sec. 27.1) (See definitions of ‘insider’ and ‘material non-public information’ at pp. 132-133)

LIABILITY OF SELLERS/OFFERORS

A beneficial owner of 10% of a public company becomes a “principal shareholder” required to disclose his interest to the SEC, the company, and the Philippine Stock Exchange (if the company is listed there).

Who may be liable? (1) Offeror or seller of a security in violation of Chapter on Registration of Securities; (2) Offeror or seller of a security, whether or not exempted by the provisions of this Code, by means of a prospectus or other written or oral communication which includes an untrue statement of a material fact or omits to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading (the purchaser not knowing of such untruth or omission).

Civil Liability CIVIL LIABILITIES ON ACCOUNT OF FALSE REGISTRATION STATEMENT (SEC. 56) Civil liabilities arise when the registration statement or any part thereof contains on its effectivity: (1) An untrue statement of a material fact; or (2) Omission to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make such statements not misleading

Defense: No knowledge of untruth or omission, despite the exercise of reasonable care (Sec. 57.1). Who may sue? Purchaser of the security may sue to recover: (1) Consideration paid for such security with interest thereon, less the amount of any income received thereon, upon the tender of such security; or (2) For damages if he no longer owns the security (Sec. 57.1).

WHO MAY BE LIABLE? (NUPSAID)

(1) Issuer and every person who signed the registration statement; (2) Director of/partner in the issuer at the time of the filing of the registration statement or any part, supplement or amendment thereof; (3) One who is named in the registration statement as being or about to become (b); (4) Auditor/auditing firm named as having certified any financial statements used in connection with the registration statement or prospectus; (5) One who, with his written consent filed with the registration statement, has been named as having prepared or certified any part of the registration statement/any report or valuation which is used in connection with the registration statement; (6) Selling shareholder who contributed to and certified as to the accuracy of a portion of the registration statement; (7) Underwriter with respect to such security (Sec. 56.1)

LIABILITY OF MAKERS OF FALSE MISLEADING STATEMENTS

Who may be liable? Any person who shall make or cause to be made any statement in any report, or document filed pursuant to this Code or any rule or regulation thereunder, which statement as at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was made false or misleading with respect to any material fact, shall be liable to. Defense: Good faith and lack of knowledge of the false and misleading statement (Sec. 57.2). Who may sue? Purchaser or seller of security who purchased or sold at a price which was affected by such statement knowing that such statement was false or misleading, and relying upon such statement may sue for damages caused by such reliance (Sec. 57.2). CIVIL LIABILITY OF FRAUD IN CONNECTION WITH SECURITIES TRANSACTIONS (SEC. 58)

WHO MAY SUE?

Any person who acquires the security and who suffers damage unless it is proved that at the time of such acquisition he knew of such untrue statement or omission (Sec. 56.1)

WHO MAY BE LIABLE?

Any person who engages in any act or transaction in violation of Sections 19.2, 20 or 26, or any rule or regulation of the Commission thereunder.

Note: When the security is acquired after the issuer has made generally available to its security holders an income statement covering a period of at least twelve (12) months beginning from the effective date of the registration statement, the right of recovery under this subsection shall be conditioned on proof that such person acquired the security relying upon such untrue statement in the registration statement or relying upon the registration statement and not knowing of such income statement (Sec. 56.2)

WHO MAY SUE?

Any other person who purchases or sells any security, grants or refuses to grant any proxy, consent or authorization, or accepts or declines an invitation for tender of a security who sustained damages as a result of the transaction.

PAGE 118

UP COLLEGE OF LAW



CIVIL LIABILITY FOR MANIPULATION OF SECURITY PRICES (SEC. 59)

LIABILITY OF CONTROLLING PERSONS, AIDER AND ABETTOR AND OTHER SECONDARY LIABILITY

WHO MAY BE LIABLE?

LIABILITY OF CONTROLLING PERSONS

Any person who willfully participates in any act or transaction in Section 24 (Manipulation of Security Prices).

Who may be liable? Every person who controls any person liable under this Code or the rules or regulations of the Commission thereunder, shall also be liable jointly and severally with and to the same extent as such controlled persons to any person to whom such controlled person is liable (Sec. 51.1)

WHO MAY SUE?

Any person who shall purchase or sell any security at a price which was affected by such act or transaction. CIVIL LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO COMMODITY FUTURES CONTRACTS AND PRE-NEED PLANS (SEC. 60)

Note: ‘Control’ may be by or through stock ownership, agency, or otherwise, or in connection with an agreement or understanding with one or more other persons (Sec. 51.1)

WHO MAY BE LIABLE?

Any person who engages in any act or transactions in willful violation of any rule or regulation promulgated by the Commission under Section 11 (on Commodity Future Contracts) or 16 (on Pre-Need Plans) (Sec. 60.1)

Defense: Lack of knowledge of the existence of facts by reason of which the liability of the controlled person is alleged to exist (Sec. 51.1) LIABILITY OF DIRECTOR/OFFICER FOR DELAY IN THE FILING OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS

WHO MAY SUE?

Any person sustaining damages as a result of such act or transaction (Sec. 60.1)

It shall be unlawful for any director or officer of, or any owner of any securities issued by, any issuer required to file any document, report or other information under this Code or any rule or regulation of the Commission thereunder, without just cause, to hinder, delay or obstruct the making or filing of any such document, report, or information (Sec. 51.2)

CIVIL LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT OF INSIDER TRADING LIABILITY FOR NON-DISCLOSURE

Who may be liable? (1) Any insider who violates Subsection 27.1; and (2) Any person in the case of a tender offer who violates Subsection 27.4 (a)(I), or any rule or regulation thereunder, by purchasing or selling a security while in possession of material information not generally available to the public (Sec. 61.1)

LIABILITY OF AIDER/ABETTOR

It shall be unlawful for any person to aid, abet, counsel, command, induce or procure any violation of this Code, or any rule, regulation or order of the Commission thereunder (Sec. 51.3) Every person who substantially assists the act or omission of any person primarily liable under Sections 57, 58, 59 and 60 of this Code, with knowledge or in reckless disregard that such act or omission is wrongful, shall be jointly and severally liable as an aider and abettor for damages resulting from the conduct of the person primarily liable (Sec. 51.4)

Who may sue? Any investor who, contemporaneously with the purchase or sale of securities that is the subject of the violation, purchased or sold securities of the same class unless such insider, or such person in the case of a tender offer, proves that such investor knew the information or would have purchased or sold at the same price regardless of disclosure of the information to him (Sec. 61.1)

BUT an aider and abettor shall be liable only to the extent of his relative contribution in causing such damages in comparison to that of the person primarily liable, or the extent to which the aider and abettor was unjustly enriched thereby, whichever is greater (Sec. 51.4)

LIABILITY FOR COMMUNICATING NON-PUBLIC INFORMATION ABOUT ISSUER

Who may be liable? (1) An insider who violates Subsection 27.3; or (2) Any person in the case of a tender offer who violates Subsection 27.4 (a), or any rule or regulation thereunder communicating material nonpublic information shall be jointly and severally liable under Subsection 61.1 with, and to the same extent as, the insider, or person in the case of a tender offer, to whom the communication was directed and who is liable under Subsection 61.1 by reason of his purchase or sale of a security (Sec. 61.2).

Note: It shall be unlawful for any person, directly, or indirectly, to do any act or thing which it would be unlawful for such person to do under the provisions of this Code or any rule or regulation thereunder (Sec. 51.2)

PAGE 119

UP LAW BAR OPERATIONS COMMISSION

Civil Liability


Who May Be Liable?

MERCANTILE LAW REVIEWER

Who May Sue?

When the registration statement or any (a) Issuer and every person who signed part thereof contains on its effectivity: the registration statement; (a) An untrue statement of a material (b) Director of/partner in the issuer at the fact; or time of the filing of the registration (b) Omission to state a material fact statement or any part, supplement or required to be stated therein or necessary amendment thereof; to make such statements not misleading (c) One who is named in the registration statement as being or about to become (b); (d) Auditor/auditing firm named as having certified any financial statements used in connection with the registration statement or prospectus; (e) One who, with his written consent filed with the registration statement, has been named as having prepared or certified any part of the registration statement/any report or valuation which is used in connection with the registration statement; (f) Selling shareholder who contributed to and certified as to the accuracy of a portion of the registration statement; (g) Underwriter with respect to such security (Sec. 56.1)

Any person who acquires the security and who suffers damage unless it is proved that at the time of such acquisition he knew of such untrue statement or omission (Sec. 56.1)

In Connection With Prospectus, (a) Offeror or seller of a security in Communications and Reports (Sec. 57) violation of Chapter on Registration of Securities; A. Liability of Sellers/Offerors (b) Offeror or seller of a security, whether or not exempted by the provisions of this Code, by means of a prospectus or other written or oral communication which includes an untrue statement of a material fact or omits to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading (the purchaser not knowing of such untruth or omission).

Purchaser of the security may sue to recover: (1) consideration paid for such security with interest thereon, less the amount of any income received thereon, upon the tender of such security; or (2) for damages if he no longer owns the security (Sec. 57.1).

Note: When the security is acquired after the issuer has made generally available to its security holders an income statement covering a period of at least twelve (12) months beginning from the effective date of the registration statement, the right of recovery under this subsection shall be conditioned on proof that such person acquired the security relying upon such untrue statement in the registration statement or relying upon the registration statement and not knowing of such income statement (Sec. 56.2)

Defense: No knowledge of untruth or omission, despite the exercise of reasonable care (Sec. 57.1). In Connection With Prospectus, Any person who shall make or cause to be Communications and Reports (Sec. 57) made any statement in any report, or document filed pursuant to this Code or any rule or regulation thereunder, which B. Liability of Makers of False Misleading statement as at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was Statements made false or misleading with respect to any material fact, shall be liable to Defense: Good faith and lack of knowledge of the false and misleading statement (Sec. 57.2). PAGE 120

Purchaser or seller of security who purchased or sold at a price which was affected by such statement knowing that such statement was false or misleading, and relying upon such statement may sue for damages caused by such reliance (Sec. 57.2).



Fraud in Connection with Securities Any person who engages in any act or Transactions (Sec. 58) transaction in violation of Sections 19.2, 20 or 26, or any rule or regulation of the Commission thereunder

Manipulation of Security Prices (Sec. 59)


Any other person who purchases or sells any security, grants or refuses to grant any proxy, consent or authorization, or accepts or declines an invitation for tender of a security who sustained damages as a result of the transaction.

Any person who willfully participates in Any person who shall purchase or sell any any act or transaction in Section 24 security at a price which was affected by (Manipulation of Security Prices). such act or transaction

With Respect to Commodity Futures Any person who engages in any act or Any person sustaining damages as a Contracts and Pre-need Plans (Sec. 60) transactions in willful violation of any rule result of such act or transaction (Sec. 60.1) or regulation promulgated by the Commission under Section 11 (on Commodity Future Contracts) or 16 (on Pre-Need Plans) (Sec. 60.1) On Account of Insider Trading A. Liability for non-disclosure

(a) Any insider who violates Subsection 27.1; (b) and any person in the case of a tender offer who violates Subsection 27.4 (a)(I), or any rule or regulation thereunder, by purchasing or selling a security while in possession of material information not generally available to the public (Sec. 61.1)

On Account of Insider Trading

(a) An insider who violates Subsection 27.3; OR B. Liability for communicating non- (b) any person in the case of a tender offer who violates Subsection 27.4 (a), or any public information about issuer rule or regulation thereunder communicating material nonpublic information shall be jointly and severally liable under Subsection 61.1 with, and to the same extent as, the insider, or person in the case of a tender offer, to whom the communication was directed and who is liable under Subsection 61.1 by reason of his purchase or sale of a security (Sec. 61.2). Of Controlling Persons, Aider and Abettor Every person who controls any person and Other Secondary Liability liable under this Code or the rules or regulations of the Commission A. Liability of Controlling Persons thereunder, shall also be liable jointly and severally with and to the same extent as such controlled persons to any person to whom such controlled person is liable (Sec. 51.1) NOTE: ‘Control’ may be by or through stock ownership, agency, or otherwise, or in connection with an agreement or understanding with one or more other persons (Sec. 51.1) PAGE 121

Any investor who, contemporaneously with the purchase or sale of securities that is the subject of the violation, purchased or sold securities of the same class unless such insider, or such person in the case of a tender offer, proves that such investor knew the information or would have purchased or sold at the same price regardless of disclosure of the information to him (Sec. 61.1)



Defense: Lack of knowledge of the existence of facts by reason of which the liability of the controlled person is alleged to exist (Sec. 51.1)

Of Controlling Persons, Aider and Abettor It shall be unlawful for any director or and Other Secondary Liability officer of, or any owner of any securities issued by, any issuer required to file any B. Liability of Director/Officer for Delay document, report or other information in the Filing of Required Documents under this Code or any rule or regulation of the Commission thereunder, without just cause, to hinder, delay or obstruct the making or filing of any such document, report, or information (Sec. 51.2) Of Controlling Persons, Aider and Abettor It shall be unlawful for any person to aid, and Other Secondary Liability abet, counsel, command, induce or procure any violation of this Code, or any C. Liability of Aider/Abettor rule, regulation or order of the Commission thereunder (Sec. 51.3) Every person who substantially assists the act or omission of any person primarily liable under Sections 57, 58, 59 and 60 of this Code, with knowledge or in reckless disregard that such act or omission is wrongful, shall be jointly and severally liable as an aider and abettor for damages resulting from the conduct of the person primarily liable (Sec. 51.4) BUT an aider and abettor shall be liable only to the extent of his relative contribution in causing such damages in comparison to that of the person primarily liable, or the extent to which the aider and abettor was unjustly enriched thereby, whichever is greater (Sec. 51.4) Note: It shall be unlawful for any person, directly, or indirectly, to do any act or thing which it would be unlawful for such person to do under the provisions of this Code or any rule or regulation thereunder (Sec. 51.2)

PAGE 122


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

PAGE 123


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

The New Central Bank Act


charters shall be deemed to refer to the BSP. (Sec. 136, NCBA)

(R.A. No. 7653)

MONETARY BOARD The body through which the powers and functions of the Bangko Sentral are exercised (Sec 6, NCBA)

STATE POLICIES The State shall maintain a central monetary authority that shall function and operate as an independent and accountable body corporate in the discharge of its mandated responsibilities concerning money, banking and credit. (Sec. 1)

POWERS AND FUNCTIONS

(1) Issue rules and regulations it considers necessary for the effective discharge of the responsibilities and exercise of the powers vested in it; (2) Direct the management, operations, and administration of Bangko Sentral, organize its personnel and issue such rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or desirable for this purpose; (3) Establish a human resource management system which governs the selection, hiring, appointment, transfer, promotion, or dismissal of all personnel; (4) Adopt an annual budget for and authorize such expenditures by Bangko Sentral as are in the interest of the effective administration and operations of Bangko Sentral in accordance with applicable laws and regulations; and (5) Indemnify its members and other officials of Bangko Sentral, including personnel of the departments performing supervision and examination functions, against all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by such persons in connection with any civil or criminal action, suit or proceeding, to which any of them may be made a party by reason of the performance of his functions or duties, unless such members or other officials is found to be liable for negligence or misconduct. (Sec. 15, NCBA)

SALIENT FEATURES (1) Assurance of BSP independence by providing for the majority of the members of the Monetary Board to come from the private sector. (Sec. 6, NCBA) (2) The BSP may now concentrate on monetary policy, and will shed itself of fiscal agency functions and its responsibilities in respect of finance companies without quasi-banking functions, which in the past, had distracted it from its primary function. (Secs. 3, 129, & 130, NCBA) (3) Provides safeguards to ensure that unlike the old Central Bank which sustained huge losses, the BSP would have a positive net income position by the following provisions: (a) Capitalization of P50B ; (Sec.2, NCBA) (b) Maintenance of positive net foreign asset position; (Sec.71, NCBA) (c) Charging interests on all loans and advances to banks; (Sec. 85, NCBA) (d) Authority to collect interests on loans and advances to closed financial institutions; and (e) BSP can’t acquire shares in banking enterprise, in development banking and financing (Sec. 128, NCBA)

COMPOSITION

CREATION OF THE BANGKO SENTRAL NG PILIPINAS (BSP)

The MB shall be composed of 7 members appointed by the President with a 6-year term. (Sec. 6, NCBA)

NATURE OF THE BSP

MEMBERS

(1) A central monetary authority; (2) An independent and accountable body; and (3) A government-owned corporation but enjoys fiscal and administrative autonomy. (Secs. 1 & 2, NCBA)

(1) The BSP Governor or his designated alternate (a deputy governor); (2) A Cabinet member to be designated by the President or his designated alternate (an Undersecretary in his department); and (3) 5 members from the private sector (Sec. 6, NCBA)

The BSP shall have a capitalization of P50B to be fully subscribed by the Government. (Sec. 2)

No member of the MB may be reappointed more than once.

RESPONSIBILITY AND PRIMARY OBJECTIVE QUALIFICATIONS

(1) Natural-born citizens of the Philippines; (2) At least 35 years old (the Governor must be at least 40 years old); (3) Of good moral character; (4) Of unquestionable integrity; (5) Of known probity and patriotism; and (6) With recognized competence in social and economic disciplines. (Sec. 8, NCBA)

PRIMARY OBJECTIVES

(1) To maintain price stability conducive to a balanced and sustainable growth of the economy. (2) To promote and maintain monetary stability and the convertibility of the peso. OTHER RESPONSIBILITIES

(1) To provide policy directions in the areas of money, banking, and credit (2) To supervise operations of banks (Sec. 3, NCBA)

DISQUALIFICATIONS

In addition to the disqualifications under the Code of Conduct and Ethical Standards for Public Officials and Employees (RA 6713), a member of the Monetary Board is disqualified:

All powers, duties and functions vested by law in the Central Bank of the Philippines not inconsistent with the NCBA shall be deemed transferred to the BSP. All references to the Central Bank of the Philippines in any law or special PAGE 124

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(1) Direct connection with any multilateral banking or financial institution; or (2) Substantial interest in any private bank in the Philippines, within 1 year prior to his appointment (Sec. 9, NCBA)


(3) Fail to exercise extraordinary diligence performance of his duties. (Sec. 16, NCBA)

in

the

HOW THE BSP HANDLES BANKS IN DISTRESS Liquidity – Ability of an asset to be converted into cash. An entity is liquid when it is able to pay its liabilities when they fall due.

PROHIBITION ON MEMBERS OF THE MB

(1) To be a director, officer, employee, consultant, lawyer, agent or stockholder of any bank, quasi-bank, or any other institution which is subject to supervision or examination by the BSP; (2) To hold any other public office or public employment during their tenure; and (3) To be employed in any multilateral banking or financial institution within 2 years after the expiration of his term.

Solvency – When current assets are more than current liabilities, providing the ability to pay debts. An entity is solvent when it is able to meet its long term obligations/liabilities.

Exception: When he serves as an official representative of the government to such institution. (Sec. 9, NCBA)

Insolvency – When the actual market value of assets are insufficient to pay its liabilities, not considering capital stock and surplus which are not liabilities for such purpose. An entity is insolvent when it is unable to meet current and long-term obligations.

GROUNDS FOR REMOVAL OF ANY MEMBER OF THE MB

CONSERVATORSHIP

(1) If the member is subsequently disqualified under Sec. 8; (2) If he is physically or mentally incapacitated that he cannot properly discharge his duties and responsibilities and such incapacity has lasted for more than 6 months; (3) If he is guilty of acts or operations which are of fraudulent or illegal character or which are manifestly opposed to the aims and interests of the BSP; and (4) If he no longer possesses the qualifications under Sec. 8. (Sec. 10, NCBA)

Applicability (1) When a bank or a quasi-bank is in a state of continuing inability or unwillingness to maintain a condition of liquidity deemed adequate to protect the interest of depositors and creditors (Sec. 29) (2) Determination is to be made by the MB on the basis of a report submitted by the appropriate supervising or examining department (Sec. 29)

VACANCIES, HOW FILLED

Period and termination (1) Period: shall not exceed 1 year (Sec. 29) (2) The expenses attendant to the conservatorship shall be borne by the bank or quasi-bank concerned (Sec. 29) (3) Grounds for termination of conservatorship by MB: (a) When it is satisfied that the institution can continue to operate on its own and the conservatorship is no longer necessary (b) When, on the basis of the report of the conservator or of its own findings, the MB determines that the continuance in business of the institution would involve probable loss to its depositors or creditors (the bank or quasi-bank would then be placed under receivership) (Sec. 29)

Cause: death, resignation, or removal of any member Effect: a new member will be appointed to complete the unexpired period of the term of the member concerned. (Sec. 7, NCBA) SALARIES

Fixed by the Phil. President at a sum commensurate to the importance and responsibility attached (Sec. 13, NCBA) MEETINGS

(1) Held at least once a week; (2) Called by the Governor or by 2 MB members; (3) The complete records of the proceedings and deliberations of the MB including the tapes and transcripts of stenographic notes are to be maintained and preserved; (4) Four (4) members constitute a quorum; and (5) All decisions by the MB shall require the concurrence of four (4) of its members unless otherwise provided by the NCBA (Sec. 11, NCBA); (a) Deputy governors may attend (Sec. 12, NCBA). (b) Any member with personal or pecuniary interest in any matter in the agenda shall disclose his interest and shall retire from the meeting when the matter is taken up (Sec. 14, NCBA).

Effects of conservatorship (1) Bank/Quasi-bank retains juridical personality (2) Not a precondition to the designation of a receiver, and; (3) Perfected transactions cannot be repudiated Qualifications of a conservator The conservator should be competent and knowledgeable in bank operations and management. (Sec. 29) The appointment of a conservator shall be vested exclusively in the MB. (Sec. 30) Powers and duties of a conservator (1) To take charge of the assets, liabilities, and the management thereof (2) To reorganize the management (3) To collect all monies and debts due said institution, and (4) To exercise all powers necessary to restore its viability (5) To report and be responsible to the MB

CIVIL LIABILITY OF MEMBERS OF THE MB

Members of the MB, officials, examiners, and employees of the BSP are liable when: (1) They willfully violate the provisions of the NCBA; (2) They are guilty of negligence, abuses or acts of malfeasance or misfeasance; or PAGE 125

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(6) To overrule or revoke the actions of the previous management and board of directors of the bank or quasi-bank. (Sec. 29)


whether the institution may be rehabilitated or otherwise placed in such a condition so that it may be permitted to resume business with safety to its depositors and creditors and the general public.

While the Central Bank law gives vast and far reaching powers to the conservator of a bank, such powers must be related to the preservation of the assets of the bank, the reorganization of the management and the restoration of viability. Such powers cannot extend to the post-facto repudiation of perfected transactions, otherwise they would infringe against the non-impairment clause of the Constitution. (First Philippine International Bank v. CA, 1996)

The assets of the institution under receivership and liquidation shall be deemed in custodia legis and shall be exempt from any order of garnishment, levy, attachment, or execution. Close now, hear later scheme Sec. 29 of the Central Bank Act does NOT contemplate prior notice and hearing before a bank may be directed to stop operations and placed under receivership. It is enough that such action is made subject of a subsequent judicial review. When the law provides for the filing of a case within 10 days after the receiver takes charge of the assets of the bank, it is unmistakable that the assailed actions should precede the filing of the case. The legislature could not have intended to authorize “no prior notice and hearing” in the bank’s closure and at the same time allow a suit to annul it on the basis of absence thereof (Central Bank vs. Cam GR No. 76118, March 30, 1993)

Remunerations General rule: The conservator shall receive remuneration in an amount not to exceed 2/3 of the salary of the president of the institution in 1 year, payable in 12 equal monthly payments. Exception: A conservator connected with the BSP, in which case said conservator shall not be entitled to receive any remuneration or emolument. (Sec. 29, NCBA) RECEIVERSHIP

LIQUIDATION/CLOSURE

Grounds Whenever the MB finds that a bank or quasi-bank: (1) Is unable to pay its liabilities as they become due in the ordinary course of business: Provided, That this shall not include inability to pay caused by extraordinary demands induced by financial panic in the banking community; (2) Has insufficient realizable assets, as determined by the BSP, to meet its liabilities; or (3) Cannot continue in business without involving probable losses to its depositors or creditors; or (4) Has willfully violated a cease-and-desist order under Sec. 37 that has become final, involving acts or transactions which amount to fraud or a dissipation of the assets of the institution

Should the determination be that the institution cannot be rehabilitated or permitted to resume business, the MB shall notify in writing the board of directors of the institution of its findings and direct the receiver to proceed with the liquidation of the institution. Procedure (1) The receiver shall file ex parte with the proper RTC, and without requirement of prior notice or any other action, a petition for assistance in the liquidation of the institution pursuant to the liquidation plan adopted by the PDIC (if quasi-bank, liquidation plan adopted by the MB) (2) Upon acquiring jurisdiction, the court shall, upon motion by the receiver after due notice, (a) Adjudicate disputed claims against the institution, (b) Assist the enforcement of individual liabilities of the stockholders, directors, and officers, and (c) Decide on other issues as may be material to implement the liquidation plan (3) The receiver shall convert the assets of the institutions to money, dispose of the same to creditors and other parties, for the purpose of paying the debts of such institution in accordance with the rules on concurrence and preference of credit under the Civil Code

Receiver (1) If a banking institution: the PDIC (2) If a quasi-bank: any person of recognized competence in banking or finance The appointment of a receiver shall be vested exclusively in the MB. And the designation of a conservator is not a precondition to the designation of a receiver. Powers and duties of a receiver (1) Immediately gather and take charge of all the assets and liabilities of the institution (2) Administer the assets for the benefit of the creditors (3) Exercise the general powers of a receiver under the Revised Rules of Court (4) Not to pay or commit any act that will involve the transfer or disposition of any asset of the institution, except: (a) Administrative expenditures (b) Receiver may deposit or place funds in non-speculative investments (5) Subject to prior approval of the MB, determine, as soon as possible, but not later than 90 days from take-over,

The assets of the institution under receivership and liquidation shall be deemed in custodia legis and shall be exempt from any order of garnishment, levy, attachment, or execution. Dispositions In case of a liquidation of a bank or quasi-bank, after payment of the cost of proceedings, including reasonable expenses and fees of the receiver to be allowed by the court, the receiver shall pay the debts of such institution, under order of the court, in accordance with the rules on concurrence and preference of credit in the Civil Code. (Sec. 31, NCBA) PAGE 126

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS


Law on Secrecy of Bank Deposits

All revenues and earnings realized by the receiver in winding up the affairs and administering the assets of any bank or quasi-bank shall be used to pay the costs of proceedings, salaries of such personnel whose employment is rendered necessary in the discharge of the liquidation together with other additional expenses caused thereby. The balance of revenues and earnings, after the payment of all said expenses, shall form part of the assets available to creditors. (Sec. 32, NCBA)

(R.A. No. 1405, as amended) PURPOSE (1) To give encouragement to the people to deposit their money in banking institutions and to discourage private hoarding; and (2) So that the people’s money may be properly utilized by banks in authorized loans to assist in the economic development of the country. (Sec. 1)

Effects of Appointment of Receiver/Liquidation (1) Retention of juridical personality (2) Suspension of operations/ Stoppage of business (3) Assets are deemed in custodial legis, i.e., exempt from garnishment, levy or execution (4) Stay of execution of judgment to prevent depletion of bank assets (5) Bank is not liable to pay interest on deposits which accrued during the period of suspension of operation (6) Restriction of bank’s capacity to do new business (new loans, deposits) but with obligation to collect preexisting debts

The absolute confidentiality rule in R.A. No. 1405 actually aims at protection from unwarranted inquiry or investigation if the purpose of such inquiry or investigation is merely to determine the existence and nature, as well as the amount of the deposit in any given bank account. (China Banking Corp. v. Ortega, 1973) PROHIBITED ACTS (1) No person, government official, bureau or office may examine, inquire into or look into such deposits; and (2) No official or employee of any banking institution may disclose to any unauthorized person any information concerning said deposits. (Sec. 3)

HOW THE BSP HANDLES EXCHANGE CRISIS LEGAL TENDER POWER

All notes and coins issued by the BSP shall be fully guaranteed by the Government of the Republic of the Philippines and shall be legal tender in the Philippines for all debts, both public and private.

DEPOSITS COVERED All peso-denominated deposits of whatever nature with banks or banking institutions in the Philippines are hereby considered as of an absolutely confidential nature and may not be examined. [N.B. The confidentiality of foreigncurrency deposits is governed by the Foreign Currency Deposit Act.]

Limitation: Coins shall be legal tender in amounts not exceeding P50 for denominations of 25 centavos and above, and in amounts not exceeding P20 for denominations of 10 centavos or less unless otherwise fixed by the MB.

Includes investments in bonds issued by the Philippine Government, its political subdivisions and its instrumentalities, regardless of the currency of denomination. (Sec. 2)

The maximum amount of coins to be considered as legal tender is: [BSP Circular 537 (2006) ] 1. P1,000.00 for denominations of 1-Piso, 5-Piso and 10Piso coins; and 2. P100.00 for denominations of 1-sentimo, 5-sentimo, 10-sentimo, and 25-sentimo coins. (Sec. 52)

Under the RA 1405, bank deposits are statutorily protected or recognized zones of privacy. (People v. Estrada, G.R. No. 164368, April 2, 2009; Marquez v. Desierto, G.R. No. 135882, June 27, 2001, 359 SCRA 772; Ople v. Torres, G.R. No. 107737. October 1, 1999, 316 SCRA 43)

RATE OF EXCHANGE

The MB shall: (1) Determine the exchange rate policy of the country; (2) Determine the rates at which the Bangko Sentral shall buy and sell spot exchange; (3) Establish deviation limits from the effective exchange rate or rates as it may deem proper. (4) Determine the rates for other types of foreign exchange transactions by the BSP, including purchases and sales of foreign notes and coins.

The term deposits as used in RA 1405 is to be understood broadly and not limited only to accounts which give rise to a creditor-debtor relationship between the depositor and the bank. If the money deposited under an account may be used by banks for authorized loans to third persons, then such account, regardless of whether it creates a creditor-debtor relationship between the depositor and the bank, falls under the category of accounts which the law precisely seeks to protect for the purpose of boosting the economic development of the country.

Limitation: The margins between the effective exchange rates and the rates established by the MB may not exceed the corresponding margins for spot exchange transactions by more than the additional costs or expenses involved in each type of transactions. (Sec. 74)

PAGE 127

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

Considering the use of the phrase “of whatever nature” RA 1405 applies not only to money which is deposited but also to those which are invested. Thus, the protection afforded by RA 1405 extends to trust accounts. (Ejercito v. Sandiganbayan (Special Division), 2006)


(b) Any taxpayer who has filed an application for compromise of his tax liability, which application shall include a written waiver of his privilege under RA 1405 or under other general or special laws Note: Information obtained from banks and financial institutions may be furnished to a foreign tax authority pursuant to an existing convention or agreement. (Sec. 6(F), NIRC, as amended by RA 10021)

EXCEPTIONS (1) Upon written permission of the depositor; (2) In cases of impeachment; (3) Upon order of a competent court in cases of: (a) Bribery; (b) Dereliction of duty of public officials; or (4) Where the money deposited or invested is the subject matter of the litigation. (Sec. 2)

(3) Upon order of a competent court in cases under the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2001 (RA 9160, hereinafter “AMLA”), when there is probable cause that the deposits or investments involved are in any way related to an unlawful activity or a money laundering offense, except that no court order required if: (a) Funds or property involved consists of investments; or (b) Said investments are related to: (i) Kidnapping for ransom (ii) Unlawful activities under Comprehensive Drugs Act of 2002 (RA 9165); (iii) Hijacking and other violations under RA 6235; and (iv) Destructive arson and murder, including those perpetrated by terrorists against non-combatants and similar targets. (4) BSP inquiry or examination in the course of its periodic or special examination of the bank (Sec. 11, AMLA). (5) Disclosure of certain information about bank deposits which have been dormant for at least 10 years, to the Treasurer of the Philippine in a sworn statement, a copy of which is posted in the bank premises. (Sec. 2, Unclaimed Balances Law [Act No. 3926, as amended]) (6) The PDIC and/or the BSP can inquire into or examine deposit accounts and all information related thereto in case there is a finding of unsafe and unsound banking practice (Sec. 8, paragraph 8, R.A. 3591, as amended by R.A. 9576).

By the phrase "subject matter of the action" is meant "the physical facts, the things real or personal, the money, lands, chattels, and the like, in relation to which the suit is prosecuted, and not the delict or wrong committed by the defendant. (Mathay v. Consolidated Bank and Trust Company, 1974). We note with approval the difference between the "subject of the action" from the "cause of action." We also find petitioner's definition of the phrase "subject matter of the action" is consistent with the term "subject matter of the litigation," as the latter is used in the Bank Deposits Secrecy Act. Where the plaintiff is fishing for information so it can determine the culpability of private respondent and the amount of damages it can recover from the latter. It does not seek recovery of the very money contained in the deposit. The subject matter of the dispute may be the amount of P999,000.00 that petitioner seeks from private respondent as a result of the latter's alleged failure to inform the former of the discrepancy; but it is not the P999,000.00 deposited in the drawer's account. By the terms of R.A. No. 1405, the "money deposited" itself should be the subject matter of the litigation. (Union Bank v. Court of Appeals, 1999)

NOT CONSIDERED AS EXCEPTIONS

(1) In 1981, PD 1792 added the following grounds when the bank can be compelled to reveal the amount of a depositor: (a) “made in the course of a special or general examination of a bank and is specifically authorized by the Monetary Board after being satisfied that there is reasonable ground to believe that a bank fraud or serious irregularity has been or is being committed and that it is necessary to look into the deposit to establish such fraud or irregularity,” or (b) “made by an independent auditor hired by the bank to conduct its regular audit provided that the examination is for audit purposes only and the results thereof shall be for the exclusive use of the bank.” However, Sec. 135 of RA 7653 or the New Central Bank Act expressly repealed PD 1792 thereby reverting RA 1405 to its version prior to the promulgation of the Decree. (i) Thus, Villanueva says that these two instances are excluded from the enumeration of exceptions to the secrecy of bank deposits (VILLANUEVA, Commercial Law Review, opinion). (ii) Morales, however, notes that with the enactment of the AMLA, exception (i) has been substantially resurrected (see items 4 and 6 of “Other exceptions” above). While there is no similar development of exception (ii), the

The exception applies to cases of concealment of illegally acquired property in anti-graft cases. The inquiry into illegally acquired property – or property NOT "legitimately acquired" – extends to cases where such property is concealed by being held by or recorded in the name of other persons. (Banco Filipino v. Purisima, 1988) The exception even extends to cases of concealment of illegally acquired property not involving anti-graft cases as long as money deposited was the subject matter of litigation. (Mellon Bank, N.A. v. Magsino, 1990) OTHER EXCEPTIONS

(1) Upon order of a competent court in cases of unexplained wealth under Sec. 8 of RA 3019 or the AntiGraft and Corrupt Practices Act (PNB v. Gancayco, 1965; Banco Filipino v. Purisima, 1988; Marquez v. Desierto, 2001) (2) When inquiry is conducted under the authority of the Commissioner of Internal Revenue into the bank accounts of the following: (a) A decedent in order to determine his gross estate PAGE 128

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

exclusion of independent auditors from the coverage of the Secrecy of Bank Deposits Law finds basis in Opinion No. 243 (s. 1975) of then Secretary of Justice Pedro Tuason. (MORALES, The Philippine General Banking Law, opinion) (2) It used to be believed that the RA 1405 did not apply to the Ombudsman, on account of his authority under Sec. 15(8) of RA 6770 or the Ombudsman Act of 1989 to “examine and have access to bank accounts and records.” However, the SC in Marquez v. Desierto (G.R. No.135882, June 27, 2001) and Ombudsman v. Ibay (G.R. No. 137538, September 3, 2001) restricted the Ombudsman’s power as follows:


the absolutely confidential nature of Philippine bank accounts. (Republic v. Eugenio, 2008) It is conceded that while the fundamental law has not bothered with the triviality of specifically addressing privacy rights relative to banking accounts, there, nevertheless, exists in our jurisdiction a legitimate expectation of privacy governing such accounts. The source of this right of expectation is statutory, and it is found in R.A. No. 1405, otherwise known as the Bank Secrecy Act of 1955. (BSB Group, Inc., v. Go, 2010) Subsequent statutory enactments have expanded the list of exceptions to this policy yet the secrecy of bank deposits still lies as the general rule, falling as it does within the legally recognized zones of privacy. There is, in fact, much disfavor to construing these primary and supplemental exceptions in a manner that would authorize unbridled discretion, whether governmental or otherwise, in utilizing these exceptions as authority for unwarranted inquiry into bank accounts. It is then perceivable that the present legal order is obliged to conserve the absolutely confidential nature of bank deposits.

“[B]efore an in camera inspection may be allowed, there must be a pending case before a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the account must be clearly identified, the inspection limited to the subject matter of the pending case before the court of competent jurisdiction. The bank personnel and the account holder must be notified to be present during the inspection, and such inspection may cover only the account identified in the pending case.” (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law)

GARNISHMENT OF DEPOSITS General rule: The prohibition against examination of or inquiry into a bank deposit under Republic Act 1405 does not preclude its being garnished to insure satisfaction of a judgment (China Banking Corporation v. Ortega, 1973; Philippine Commercial and Industrial Bank v. Court of Appeals, 1991)

“Further, it is interesting to note that the Secretary of Justice in his Opinion No. 13 (s. 1987) concluded that the Presidential Commission on Good Government can compel banks to disclose or produce bank records without violating the bank secrecy laws.” (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law) “Moreover, under Sec. 1(d) of RA 6382 (1990), which created the Davide Commission that conducted a fact finding investigation of the failed coup d’ etat of December 1989, the commission had the power to ‘ask the Monetary board to disclose information on and/or grant authority to examine bank deposits, trust finds, or banking transactions in the name of and/or utilized by a person, natural or juridical, under investigation by the Commission, in any bank or banking institution in the Philippines, when the Commission has reasonable ground to believe that said deposits, trust or investment funds, or banking transactions have been used in support of furtherance of the objectives of the coup d’ etat.’” (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law)

“…the prohibition against examination of or inquiry into a bank deposit under Republic Act 1405 does not preclude its being garnished to insure satisfaction of a judgment. Indeed there is no real inquiry in such a case, and if the existence of the deposit is disclosed the disclosure is purely incidental to the execution process. It is hard to conceive that it was ever within the intention of Congress to enable debtors to evade payment of their just debts, even if ordered by the Court, through the expedient of converting their assets into cash and depositing the same in a bank.” (China Banking Corporation v. Ortega, 1973) Exception: Foreign Currency Deposits – The foreign currency deposits shall be exempt from attachment, garnishment, or any other order or process of any court, legislative body, government agency or any administrative body whatsoever. (Sec. 8, Foreign Currency Deposit Act)

Notwithstanding the exceptions enumerated by law, the prevailing policy on the matter is to preserve the absolute confidentiality enjoyed by bank deposits.

CONFIDENTIALITY OF FOREIGN CURRENCY DEPOSITS General rule: Foreign currency deposits are confidential.

Indeed, by force of statute, all bank deposits are absolutely confidential, and that nature is unaltered even by the legislated exceptions referred to above. There is disfavor towards construing these exceptions in such a manner that would authorize unlimited discretion on the part of the government or of any party seeking to enforce those exceptions and inquire into bank deposits. If there are doubts in upholding the absolutely confidential nature of bank deposits against affirming the authority to inquire into such accounts, then such doubts must be resolved in favor of the former. Such a stance would persist unless Congress passes a law reversing the general state policy of preserving

Exceptions: (1) Upon written permission of the depositor (Sec. 8, Foreign Currency Deposit Act ; Intengan vs CA ; 2002) (2) Upon order of a competent court in cases of violation of the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2001 [as in the case of peso deposits, supra] (3) During Bangko Sentral’s periodic or special examinations [as in the case of peso deposits, supra], and PAGE 129

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(4) Disclosure of the Treasurer of the Philippines when the unclaimed balances law applies (Act 3936, as amended by PD 679) (5) BSP/PDIC inquiry if there is a finding of unsafe and unsound banking practice (as in the case of peso deposits, supra) (6) In Salvacion vs. CB (1997), where a Filipino child was raped by a foreigner, the SC allowed, pro hac vice, garnishment of foreign currency deposits stating: “If we rule that the questioned Section 113 of CB Circular No. 960 which exempts from attachment, garnishment, or any other order or process of any court, legislative body, government agency or any administrative body whatsoever, is applicable to a foreign transient, injustice would result especially to a citizen aggrieved by a foreign guest.”


thereon, chattel mortgage, bonds and other forms of security or in loans for personal or household finance, whether secured or unsecured, or in financing for homebuilding and home development; in readily marketable and debt securities; in commercial papers and accounts receivables, drafts, bills of exchange, acceptances or notes arising out of commercial transactions; and in such other investments and loans which the Monetary Board may determine as necessary in the furtherance of national economic objectives; (ii) Providing short-term working capital, medium- and long-term financing, to businesses engaged in agriculture, services, industry and housing; and (iii) Providing diversified financial and allied services for its chosen market and constituencies especially for small and medium enterprises and individuals. (Sec.3(a), R.A. 7906)

PENALTIES FOR VIOLATION OF R.A. No. 1405 Imprisonment of not more than 5 years or a fine of not more than P20,000 or both, in the discretion of the court. (Sec. 5)

(4) Cooperative Banks – These are banks organized primarily to make financial and credit services available to cooperatives and their members. It may perform any or all of the services offered by a rural bank, including the operation of an FCDU subject to certain conditions. (Morales, The Philippine GBL Annotation)

General Banking Law of 2000 (R.A. No. 8791)

Note: A cooperative bank is one organized for the primary purpose of providing a wide range of financial services to cooperatives and their members. (Art. 23(i), R.A. 9520)

POLICY To promote and maintain a stable and efficient banking and financial system that is globally competitive, dynamic and responsive to the demands of a developing economy. (Sec. 2)

(5) Islamic Banks – These are banks the business dealings and activities of which are subject to the basic principles and rulings of Islamic Shari’a. The Al Amanah Islamic Investment Bank of the Philippines, which was created by RA 6848, is the only Islamic bank in the country at this time.

DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF BANKS Banks shall refer to entities engaged in the lending of funds obtained in the form of deposits. (Sec. 3.1, GBL)

Note: Islamic Bank refers to the Al-Amanah Islamic Investment Bank of the Philippines, created under R.A. 6848. (See Sec. 44(1) and Sec. 2, R.A. 6848)

CORE BANKING FUNCTIONS

(1) Taking of deposits from the public (2) Lending out these funds (Morales, The Philippine GBL Annotation).

(6) Rural Banks – Mandated to make needed credit available and readily accessible in the rural areas on reasonable terms and which are primarily governed by the Rural Banks Act of 1992 (RA 7353) (7) Other Classifications of Banks – As determined by the Monetary Board, i.e., Philippine Veterans Bank (RA 3518), Landbank of the Philippines (RA 3844), Development Bank of the Philippines (RA 85)

CLASSIFICATION OF BANKS

(1) Universal Banks (UB) – These used to be called expanded commercial banks and their operations are primarily governed by the GBL. They can exercise the powers of an investment house and invest in non-allied enterprises. They have the highest capitalization requirement. (2) Commercial Banks (KB) – These are ordinary or regular commercial banks, as distinguished from a universal bank. They have a lower capitalization requirement than a UB and cannot exercise the powers of an investment house and invest in non-allied enterprises. (3) Thrift Banks – These are: (a) Savings and mortgage banks; (b) Stock savings and loan associations; and (c) Private development banks (Sec. 3.2)

DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN BANKS, QUASI-BANKS AND TRUST ENTITIES AS OPPOSED TO QUASI-BANKS

Quasi-banks (QB) refer to entities engaged in the borrowing of funds through the issuance, endorsement or assignment with recourse or acceptance of deposit-substitute instruments, for purposes of relending the funds so borrowed or using them to purchase receivables and other obligations. (last paragraph of Sec. 4)

Note: The term ‘thrift banks’ also refers to any banking corporation organized for the following purposes: (i) Accumulating the savings of depositors and investing them, together with capital loans secured by bonds, mortgages in real estate and insured improvements

The term “deposit substitutes” is defined as funds obtained from the public, other than deposits, through the issuance, endorsement, or acceptance of deposit-substitute instruments for the borrower's own account, for the purpose PAGE 130

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

of relending or purchasing of receivables and other obligations. It includes bankers acceptances, promissory notes, participations, certificates of assignment and similar instruments with recourse, and repurchase agreements. (Sec. 95, New Central Bank Act, hereinafter “NCBA”)

scientific, civic, or similar purposes: provided that no corporation, domestic or foreign, shall give donations in aid of any political party or candidate or for purposes of partisan political activity (10) To establish pension, retirement, and other plans for the benefit of its directors, trustees, officers and employees (11) To exercise such other powers as may be essential or necessary to carry out its purposes as stated in the AOI. (Sec. 36, Corporation Code)

AS OPPOSED TO TRUST ENTITIES

A Trust Entity is a stock corporation or a person duly authorized by the Monetary Board to engage in trust business. (Sec. 79, GBL) A Trust Business is any activity resulting from trusteeship involving the appointment of a trustee by a trustor for the administration, holding, management of funds and/or properties of the trustor by the trustee for the use, benefit or advantage of the trustor or of beneficiaries.

BANKING AND INCIDENTAL POWERS

All such powers as may be necessary to carry on the business of commercial banking (Sec. 29) (1) Accepting drafts – By accepting a draft, a bank creates a “banker’s acceptance”, which is a negotiable time draft or bill of exchange drawn on and accepted by a commercial bank. This is different from “trade acceptance”, which is accepted by the buyer. (Morales, The Philippine GBL Annotation) (2) Issuing letters of credit (3) Discounting and negotiating promissory notes, drafts, bills of exchange, and other evidence of debt (4) Accepting or creating demand deposits

BANK POWERS AND LIABILITIES Apart from its general powers as a stock corporation, it can: (1) Exercise all the powers specified in Sec. 29 (2) Provide the other banking services in Sec 53 (3) Purchase, hold, and convey real estate under Secs. 51 and 52 (Morales, The Philippine GBL Annotation) Commercial Bank

Universal Bank

Deposit function General rule: Only a Universal Bank (UB) Commercial Bank (KB) can accept or create demand deposits.

Powers (a) Corporate Powers (Sec. 29, GBL) (b) Banking and Incidental Powers (Sec. 29, GBL) (c) Power to Invest in Allied enterprises (financial or non-financial) (Sec. 30, GBL)


(a) Corporate Powers (Sec. 29, GBL) (b) Banking and Incidental Powers (Sec. 23, GBL) (c) Power to invest in Allied (financial or nonfinancial) (Sec. 24, GBL) (d) Power to invest in Nonallied enterprises – (Sec. 24, GBL) (e) Powers of an investment house (Sec. 23, GBL)

Exception: Banks other than a UB or KB with prior approval of, and subject to such conditions and rules as may be prescribed by the Monetary Board (Sec. 33, GBL) Presumption of ownership of deposits It is presumed that money deposited in a bank account belongs to the person in whose name the deposit account is opened. A depositor is presumed to be the owner of funds standing in his name in a bank deposit; and where a bank is not chargeable with notice that the money deposited in such account is the property of some other person than the depositor, the bank is justified in paying out the money to the depositor or upon his order, and cannot be liable to any other person as the true owner. (Fultron Iron Works Co. v. China Banking Corporation, 1930)

CORPORATE POWERS

General powers incident to corporations (1) To sue and be sued in its corporate name; (2) Succession by its corporate name for the period stated in the AOI and the certificate of incorporation (3) To adopt and use a corporate seal (4) To amend its AOI (5) To adopt by-laws, not contrary to law, morals, or public policy, and to amend or repeal them (6) To issue or sell stocks to subscribers and to sell treasury stocks. (7) To purchase, receive, take or grant, hold, convey, sell, lease, pledge, mortgage and otherwise deal with such real and personal property, including securities and bonds of other corporations, as the transaction of the lawful business of the corporation may reasonably and necessarily require, subject to the limitations prescribed by law and the Constitution (8) To enter into merger or consolidation (9) To make reasonable donations, including those for the public welfare or for hospital, charitable, cultural,

A bank is under no duty or obligation to make an application or set-off against the deposit accounts of a borrower. To apply the deposit to the payment of a loan is a privilege, a right of set-off which the bank has the option (but not the obligation) to exercise. (BPI v. CA, 1994) The rent of safety deposit boxes is a special kind of deposit and cannot be characterized as an ordinary contract of lease because the full and absolute possession and control of the deposit box is not given to the renters. The prevailing rule is that the relation between the bank renting out and the renter is that of bailor and bailee the bailment being for hire and mutual benefit. (CA Agro-industrial Dev. Corp. v. CA, 1983)

PAGE 131

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(5) Receiving other types of deposits and deposit substitutes


Exception: The Monetary Board otherwise prescribes (Sec. 37)

Types of Deposits (a) Time Deposit – Interest rate stipulated depending on the number of days. During this period, the money deposited may not be withdrawn without incurring penalty. High interest rates. (b) Savings Deposit – Bank pays an interest rate, but not as high as time deposits. (c) Demand Deposits/Current Accounts - No interest is paid by the bank because the depositor can take out his funds any time. It is called demand deposit because the depositor can withdraw the money he deposited on the very same day when he deposited it or at any time thereafter. (Villanueva, Commercial Law Review, opinion)

Security of chattels and intangible properties (patents, trademarks, trade names, and copyrights)

General rule: Shall not exceed 75% of the appraised value of the security, and such loans and other credit accommodations may be made to the title-holder of the chattels and intangible properties or his assignees Exception: The Monetary Board otherwise prescribes (Sec. 38)

(6) Buying and selling foreign exchange and gold or silver bullion (7) Acquiring marketable bonds and other debt securities (8) Extending credit

Grant of loans (a) Only in amounts and for the periods of time essential for the effective completion of the operations to be financed; and (b) Consistent with safe and sound banking practices. (Sec. 39)

Loan Function “Know your customer” rule Before granting a loan or other credit accommodation, a bank must ascertain that the debtor is capable of fulfilling its commitments to the bank. (Sec. 40)

Purpose of loans Purpose must be stated in the application and in the contract between the bank and the borrower. (Sec. 39) Effect of usage of loan proceeds for purposes other than those agreed upon with the bank The bank shall have the right to terminate the loan or other credit accommodation and demand immediate repayment of the obligation. (Sec. 39)

The bank may demand from its credit applicants a statement of their assets and liabilities and of their income and expenditure and such information as may be prescribed by law or by rules and regulations of MB to enable the bank to properly evaluate the credit application which includes the corresponding financial statements submitted for taxation purposes to the BIR. (Sec. 40)

Amortization on loans and other credit accommodations (a) In case of loans and other credit accommodations with maturities of more than 5 years, provisions must be made for periodic amortization payments, but such payments must be made at least annually: Provided, however, That when the borrowed funds are to be used for purposes which do not initially produce revenues adequate for regular amortization payments therefrom, the bank may permit the initial amortization payment to be deferred until such time as said revenues are sufficient for such purpose, but in no case shall the initial amortization date be later than 5 years from the date on which the loan or other credit accommodation is granted. (b) In case of loans and other credit accommodations to microfinance sectors, the schedule of loan amortization shall take into consideration the projected cash flow of the borrower and adopt this into the terms and conditions formulated by banks. (Sec. 44)

Credit enhancement If the borrower is less than creditworthy, third persons may enhance his credit by providing guarantees and other security devices in favor of the bank. (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law, opinion) A bank cannot lend pesos to a nonresident (BSP Circular No. 22; Sec. 22, Manual of Regulations on Foreign Exchange Transactions). (Morales, The Philippine GBL Annotation) If there is material misrepresentation, the bank may: (a) Terminate any loan or other credit accommodation granted on the basis of said statements; and (b) Shall have the right to demand immediate repayment or liquidation of the obligation (Sec. 40) Limit on loans, credit accommodations and guarantees Real estate General rule: Shall not exceed 75% of the appraised value of the respective real estate security, plus 60% of the appraised value of the insured improvements, and such loans may be made to the owner of the real estate or to his assignees

All are subject to such rules as the Monetary Board may promulgate. (Sec. 29, GBL) DILIGENCE REQUIRED OF BANKS Banks should observe diligence that is higher than that expected from a good father of a family. Notwithstanding the degree of diligence required, a bank is not expected to be infallible (Prudential Bank vs. CA, 2000). PAGE 132

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS


(1) For disbursing funds to a dishonest employee despite the employee’s failure to strictly abide with the bank’s internal procedure. (PBC v. CA, 1997) (2) Allowing the execution of a mortgage on parcels of land as security for a loan not owned by the prospective borrower. (Canlas v. Court of Appeals, 2000) (3) Crediting the deposit in favor of another depositor, a check where the signature of the drawer was forged. (Westmont Bank v. Ong, 2002) (4) Encashing pre-signed checks of the depositor which were stolen by its employee. (Bank of America NT & SA v. Philippine Racing Club, 2009)

FIDUCIARY NATURE OF BANKS

(1) Failure on the part of the bank to satisfy the degree of diligence required of banks may warrant the award of damages. (2) Under Sec. 2, the degree of diligence is “high standards of integrity and performance” and no longer “highest degree of diligence” as was decided prior to the effectivity of the General Banking Law of 2000 but also (mistakenly) even thereafter. In numerous cases, the Supreme Court has held that the highest degree of diligence and care is expected from banks (Simex International v. CA [1990]; Philippine Bank of Commerce v. CA [1997]; Westmont Bank v. Ong [2002]; Solidbank v. Spouses Tan [2003]; Samsung Construction v. FEBTC [2004]; Citibank, N.A. v. Spouses Cabamongan [2006]; Philippine Savings Bank v. Chowking Food Corporation [2008]; Bank of America NT &SA v. Philippine Racing Club [2009].

A bank is liable to a depositor when it honored and paid on a forged check against the depositor’s account even if the bank followed its internal procedure in preventing a faulty discharge. (Samsung Construction v. FEBTC, 2004) In Gempesaw v. Court of Appeals (1993), a bank was held liable for damages for failing to follow its internal procedures in paying on a forged check despite the gross negligence on the part of the depositor.

As a business affected with public interest and because of the nature of its functions, the bank is under obligation to treat the accounts of its depositors with meticulous care, always having in mind the fiduciary nature of their relationship.

STIPULATION ON INTERESTS The Monetary Board may prescribe the maturities, as well as related terms and conditions for various types of bank loans and other credit accommodations.

In every case, the depositor expects the bank to treat his account with the utmost fidelity, whether such account consists only of a few hundred pesos or of millions. The bank must record every single transaction accurately, down to the last centavo, and as promptly as possible. This has to be done if the account is to reflect at any given time the amount of money the depositor can dispose as he sees fit, confident that the bank will deliver it as and to whomever he directs. A blunder on the part of the bank, such as the failure to duly credit him his deposits as soon as they are made, can cause the depositor not a little embarrassment if not financial loss and perhaps even civil and criminal litigation (Simex International v. CA, 1990).

Any change by the Board in the maximum maturities shall apply only to loans and other credit accommodations made after the date of such action. The Monetary Board shall regulate the interest imposed on micro finance borrowers by lending investors and similar lenders such as, but not limited to, the unconscionable rates of interest collected on salary loans and similar credit accommodations (Sec. 43, GBL) GRANT OF LOANS AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS (PRUDENTIAL MEASURES)

Banks are expected to exercise the highest degree of diligence in the selection and supervision of their employees (PCI Bank v. CA, 2001).

RATIO OF NET WORTH TO TOTAL RISK ASSETS

It cannot be over emphasized that the banking business is impressed with public interest. Of paramount importance is the trust and confidence of the public in general in the banking industry. Consequently, the diligence required of banks is more than that of a Roman pater familias or a good father of a family. The highest degree of diligence is expected (Phil. Savings Bank v. Chowking Food Corporation, 2008).

Risk-based capital ratio The minimum ratio which the net worth of a bank must bear to its total risk assets which may include contingent accounts [i.e. net worth: total risk assets] (Sec. 34, GBL) General rule: A bank must conform to the risk-based capital ratio prescribed by the MB Exceptions: The MB may alter or suspend compliance with such ratio whenever necessary for a maximum period of 1 year. (1) In case of a bank merger or consolidation; OR (2) When a bank is under rehabilitation under a program approved by the BSP; (Sec. 34, GBL)

The banking business is so impressed with public interest where the trust and confidence of the public in general is of paramount importance such that the appropriate standard of diligence must be a high degree of diligence, if not the utmost diligence (Bank of America NT&SA v. Phil. Racing Club, 2009).

Purpose A bank must not be allowed to expand the volume of its loans and investments in a manner that is disproportionate to its net worth. (MORALES, Phil. Gen. Banking Law)

Under the doctrine of last clear chance, a bank may be held liable for loss despite the negligence of a depositor. Examples of these cases are the following:

PAGE 133

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

Effect of non-compliance (1) The MB may limit or prohibit the distribution of net profits by such bank and may require that part or all of the net profits be used to increase the capital accounts of the bank until the minimum requirement has been met. (2) The MB may restrict or prohibit the acquisition of major assets and the making of new investments by the bank, with the exception of purchases of readily marketable evidences of indebtedness of the RP and the BSP and any other evidences of indebtedness or obligations the servicing and repayment of which are fully guaranteed by the RP, until the minimum required capital ratio has been restored. (Sec. 34, GBL)


(2) In the case of an individual who owns or controls a majority interest in a corporation, partnership, association or any other entity, the liabilities of said entities to such bank; (3) In the case of a corporation, all liabilities to such bank of all subsidiaries in which such corporation owns or controls a majority interest; and (4) In the case of a partnership, association or other entity, the liabilities of the members thereof to such bank. (Sec. 35.3, GBL) Guidelines on the wholesale lending of government banks (1) It shall apply only to loans granted by participating financial institutions (PFIs) on a wholesale basis for onlending to end-user borrowers; (2) It shall apply only to loan programs funded by multilateral, international, or local development agencies, organizations, or institutions, especially designed for wholesale lending activities of government banks; (3) The end-user borrowers of the PFIs shall be subject to the 25% SBL, not the increased ceiling of 35%; and (4) Government banks shall observe appropriate criteria for accrediting PFIs and for the grant/renewal of credit lines to accredited PFIs. (BSP Circular No. 425 dated March 25, 2004)

SINGLE BORROWER’S LIMIT

General rule: The total loans, credit accommodations and guarantees that may be extended by a bank to any person, partnership, association, or corporation or other entity shall at no time exceed 20% of the net worth of such bank. (Sec. 35.1,GBL) Exceptions: (1) The Monetary Board otherwise prescribes for reasons of national interest. (Sec. 35.1, GBL) Now, the single borrower’s limit is 25% of the net worth of the lending bank. (2) Wholesale lending activities of government banks to participating institutions for relending to end-user borrowers: separate limit of 35% net worth. (BSP Circular No. 425 dated March 25, 2004)

Exclusions from the ceiling Loans and other credit accommodations (1) Secured by obligations of the BSP or of the Philippine Government; (2) Fully guaranteed by the government as to the payment of principal and interest; (3) Covered by assignment of deposits maintained in the lending bank and held in the Philippines; (4) Under letters of credits to the extent covered by margin deposits; and (5) Specified by the Monetary Board as non-risk items (Sec. 35.5, GBL)

Increase of limit The Monetary Board may increase the limit prescribed by an additional 10% of the net worth, when: (1) The additional liabilities of any borrower are adequately secured by trust receipts, shipping documents, warehouse receipts or other similar documents transferring or securing title; (2) Covering readily marketable, non-perishable goods; and (3) Which must be fully covered by insurance (Sec. 35.2, GBL)

Combination of liabilities The MB may prescribe the combination of the liabilities of subsidiary corporations or members of the partnership, association, entity or such individual under certain circumstances, including but not limited to any of the following situations: (1) The parent corporation, partnership, association, entity or individual guarantees the repayment of the liabilities; (2) The liabilities were incurred for the accommodation of the parent corporation or another subsidiary or of the partnership or association or entity or such individual; or (3) The subsidiaries though separate entities operate merely as departments or divisions of a single entity. (Sec. 35.4, GBL)

Purpose To prevent the bank from making excessive loans and other credit accommodations to a single borrower or corporate group, including guarantees for the account of such borrower or group. The bank is prohibited from… placing many eggs in the basket of one client. [It] is a damagecontrol mechanism [and] a device for risk amelioration. (MORALES, The Philippine General Banking Law, Opinion) Basis for determining compliance The basis for determining compliance with the SBL is the total credit commitment of the bank to the borrower. (Sec. 35.1, GBL)

Loans and other credit accommodations, deposits maintained with, and usual guarantees by a bank to any other bank or non-bank entity, whether locally or abroad, shall be subject to the prescribed limits. (Sec. 35.6, GBL)

Inclusions in the ceiling (1) The direct liability of the maker or acceptor of paper discounted with or sold to such bank and the liability of a general indorser, drawer or guarantor who obtains a loan or other credit accommodation from or discounts paper with or sells papers to such bank; PAGE 134

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

RESTRICTIONS ON INSIDER LENDING: BANK EXPOSURE TO DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, STOCKHOLDERS AND THEIR RELATED INTERESTS (DOSRI)


this eventuality, the bank is required to set aside reserved for bad debts and other doubtful accounts or contingencies. (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law, Opinion)

General rule: No director or officer of any bank: (1) Shall, directly or indirectly, for himself or as the representative or agent of others, borrow from such bank, nor (2) Shall he become a guarantor, endorser or surety for loans from such bank to others, or in any manner be an obligor or incur any contractual liability to the bank

To address the non-performing asset problem, RA 9182 Special Purpose Vehicle Act was passed. The Monetary Board approved certain accounting guidelines on the sale by banks and other financial institutions for housing under the said Act. MORALES, The Philippine GBL Annotation) [N.B. RA 9182 is no longer in effect.]

Exceptions: (1) Valid insider lending (Sec. 36, GBL) (2) Loans, credit accommodations and guarantees extended by a cooperative bank to its cooperative shareholders (Sec. 36, GBL)

RESERVES

Purposes (1) To control the volume of money created by the credit operations of the banking system, the BSP requires all banks to maintain reserves against their deposit and deposit-substitute liabilities. (2) As a ready source of funds that will respond to unusually large number of withdrawals or preterminations of deposits or deposit-substitutes, taking in the shape of a bank run. (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law, Opinion)

Requirements for valid insider lending (1) In the regular course of business; (2) Upon terms not less favorable to the bank than those offered to others; (3) There is a written approval of the majority of all the directors of the bank, excluding the director concerned; (Except: granted to officers under a fringe benefit plan approved by the BSP; (4) The required approval shall be entered upon the record of the bank and a copy of such entry shall be transmitted forthwith to the appropriate supervising and examining department of the BSP; (5) Limited to an amount equivalent to the DOSRI borrower’s unencumbered deposits and book value of his paid-in capital contribution in the bank (Sec. 36, GBL)

Unified reserve (1) Statutory or legal and liquidity reserve [N.B. The two reserves have been combined or unified: 18% for deposits and deposit substitutes (BSP Circular No. 753 dated March 29, 2012) (a) For deposit-substitutes evidenced by repurchase agreements covering government securities: 2% (BSP Circular No. 444 dated August 18, 2004) (b) For foreign currency deposit units: 100% (BSP Circular No. 1389 dated April 13, 1993, as amended); 30% of this cover must be in the form of liquid assets (BSP CircularLetter dated June 6, 1997, as cited in MORALES) (2) Reserve: The required reserves are to be kept in the form of deposits placed in the banks’ Demand Deposit Account with the BSP (BSP Circular No. 753 dated March 29, 2012)

Exceptions: (1) Non-risk items; and (2) Loans in the form of fringe benefits. A DOSRI borrower is required to waive the secrecy of his “deposits of whatever nature in all banks in the Philippines.” (Sec. 26, NCBA)

The BSP shall not pay interest on the reserves maintained with it unless the Monetary Board decides otherwise as warranted by circumstances. (Sec. 94, NCBA)

Purpose The general policy behind DOSRI rules is to level the lending field between the “insiders” and the “outsiders”. The objective is to prevent the bank from becoming a captive source of finance for DOSRI. (Morales, The Philippine General Banking Law, Opinion)

PDIC INSURANCE

Banks are required to insure their deposit liabilities with the PDIC.

LOAN-LOSS PROVISIONING

Partial Insurance Each depositor is a beneficiary of the insurance for a maximum amount of P500,000, or its foreign currency equivalent in the case of an FCDU deposit. (RA 9576, 2009)

The following are subject to regulation by the Monetary Board: (1) The amount of reserves for bad debts or doubtful accounts or other contingencies; and (2) The writing off of loans, other credit accommodations, advances and other assets. (Sec. 49, GBL)

Note: PDIC only insures deposit (not deposit substitute) liabilities of a bank or banking institution (Sec.5, RA 3591, as amended)

Purpose For effective banking supervision. There is a problem of mismatch when a loan becomes non-performing. The bank is paying interest on the money it borrowed from the depositors or other placers of funds, but is not recouping that interest from the loan it made. Eventually, the bank may have to write off loan losses against profits. To cushion

Purpose Full insurance might encourage risky banking activities. A limited insurance of bank deposits serves to limit moral hazard.

PAGE 135

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(a) Fine: Not less than Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000) nor more than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000); or (b) Imprisonment: Not less than one (1) year nor more than five (5) years; or (c) Both fine and imprisonment: in the discretion of the Court.

EQUITY INVESTMENT LIMITS (ALLIED V. NON-ALLIED ENTERPRISES)

This is a prudential measure by limiting the exposure of banks in different businesses for the purpose of control, affiliation or other continuing business advantage. General Rule UB (Sec. 24) KB (Sec. 30) Total investment (allied & non-allied in equities: enterprises) Not exceeding 50% of the net worth of the bank


(of allied enterprises) Not exceeding 35% of the net worth of the bank

(2) Willful making of a false or misleading statement on a material fact to the Monetary Board or to the examiners of the Bangko Sentral (Sec. 35, NCBA) (a) Fine: Not less than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000) nor more than One hundred thousand pesos (P200,000); or (b) Imprisonment: Not more than five (5) years; or (c) Both fine and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court.

The equity (allied/non-allied) (allied) exceeding Not exceeding investment in any Not 25% of the net 25% of the net one enterprise: worth of the bank worth of the bank

(3) Willful violation of the NCBA and other pertinent banking laws (including the GBL) being enforced or implemented by the Bangko Sentral or any order, instruction, rule or regulation issued by the Monetary Board (Sec. 36, NCBA) (a) Fine: Not less than Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000) nor more than One hundred thousand pesos (P200,000); or (b) Imprisonment: Not less than two (2) years nor more than ten (10) years; or (c) Both fine and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court.

Net Worth – the total of the unimpaired paid-in capital including paid-in surplus, retained earnings and undivided profit, net of valuation reserves and other adjustments The acquisition of such equity is subject to the prior approval of the MB. The equity investment of a Universal Bank in: (1) Financial Allied Enterprises – 100% of the equity in a thrift bank, rural bank, or financial allied enterprise. (Sec 25 GBL). A publicly-listed UB or KN may own up to 100% of the voting stock of only one other UB or KB. (2) Non-Financial Allied Enterprises – 100% of the equity of that enterprise (Sec 26 GBL) (3) Non-Allied Enterprises – Not exceeding 35% of the total equity in a single non-allied enterprise not shall it exceed 35% of the voting stock in that enterprise. (Sec 27 GBL) (4) Quasi-banks – 40% of the equity of quasi-banks (Sec 28 GBL)

ADMINISTRATIVE SANCTIONS

(1) Willful violation of its charter or by-laws; willful delay in the submission of reports or publications thereof as required by law, rules and regulations; Criminal Acts in Nos. 1 to 3 above; and/or conducting business in an unsafe or unsound manner as may be determined by the Monetary Board (a) Fine not exceeding Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000) a day for each violation, taking into consideration the attendant circumstances, such as the nature and gravity of the violation or irregularity and the size of the bank or quasi-bank; or (b) Suspension of rediscounting privileges or access to Bangko Sentral credit facilities; (c) Suspension of lending or foreign exchange operations or authority to accept new deposits or make new investments; (d) Suspension of interbank clearing privileges; and/or (e) Revocation of quasi-banking license.

The equity investment of Commercial Banks in: (1) Financial Allied enterprises – 100% of the equity of a thrift or rural bank. (Sec 31 GBL). Where the equity investment of a KB is in other financial allied enterprises, including other KBs, such investment shall remain a minority holding in that enterprise. (2) Non-Financial Allied enterprises – 100% of the equity of said enterprises. (Sec 32 GBL) (3) Quasi-banks – 40% of the equity of quasi-banks. (Sec 28 GBL)

FINE/IMPRISONMENT

(2) Suspension or Removal of Director (a) If the offender is a director or officer of a bank, quasibank or trust entity, the Monetary Board may also suspend or remove such director or officer (Sec. 66, GBL). (b) Resignation or termination from office shall not exempt such director or officer from administrative or criminal sanctions. (Sec. 37, NCBA)

Criminal sanctions (1) Refusal by an institution subject to examination and supervision by the Monetary Board to file the required report or permit any lawful examination into its affairs (Sec. 34, NCBA)

(3) Dissolution of Bank (a) If the violation is committed by a corporation, such corporation may be dissolved by quo warranto proceedings instituted by the Solicitor General (Sec. 66, GBL)

PENALTIES FOR VIOLATION Violation of any of the provisions of the GBL shall be subject to Sections 34, 35, 36 and 37 of the New Central Bank Act, unless otherwise provided under therein.

PAGE 136

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

(b) Whenever a bank or quasi-bank persists in carrying on its business in an unlawful or unsafe manner, the Monetary Board may commence proceedings in liquidation. (Sec. 36, NCBA in relation to Sec. 30, NCBA)


DEPOSIT ACCOUNT NOT ENTITLED TO PAYMENT

The PDIC shall not pay deposit insurance for the following accounts or transactions, whether denominated, documented, recorded or booked as deposit by the bank: (1) Investment products such as bonds and securities, trust accounts, and other similar instruments; (2) Unfunded, fictitious or fraudulent deposit accounts or transactions; (3) Deposits accounts or transactions constituting, and/or emanating from, unsafe and unsound banking practice/s, as determined by the PDIC, in consultation with the BSP, after due notice and hearing, and publication of a cease and desist order issued by the PDIC against such deposit accounts or transactions; and (4) Deposits that are determined to be the proceeds of an unlawful activity as defined under Republic Act 9160, as amended.

Philippine Deposit Insurance Corporation Act (R.A. No. 3591, as amended) BASIC POLICY Promote and safeguard the interests of the depositing public by way of providing permanent and continuing insurance coverage on all insured deposits (Sec. 1, as amended)

Notes: ‘Unlawful Activity’ refers to any act or omission or series or combination thereof involving or having direct relation to following: (1) Kidnapping for ransom under Article 267 of Act No. 3815, otherwise known as the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (2) Sections 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 of Republic Act No. 9165, otherwise known as the Comprehensive Dangerous Act of 2002; (3) Section 3 paragraphs B, C, E, G, H and I of Republic Act No. 3019, as amended, otherwise known as the AntiGraft and Corrupt Practices Act; (4) Plunder under Republic Act No. 7080, as amended; (5) Robbery and extortion under Articles 294, 295, 296, 299, 300, 301 and 302 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (6) Jueteng and Masiao punished as illegal gambling under Presidential Decree No. 1602; (7) Piracy on the high seas under the Revised Penal Code, as amended and Presidential under the Revised Penal Code, as amended and Presidential Decree No. 532; (8) Qualified theft under Article 310 of the Revised penal Code, as amended; (9) Swindling under Article 315 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (10) Smuggling under Republic Act Nos. 455 and 1937; (11) Violations under Republic Act No. 8792, otherwise known as the Electronic Commerce Act of 2000; (12) Hijacking and other violations under Republic Act No. 6235; destructive arson and murder, as defined under the Revised Penal Code, as amended, including those perpetrated by terrorists against non-combatant persons and similar targets; (13) Fraudulent practices and other violations under Republic Act No. 8799, otherwise known as the Securities Regulation Code of 2000; (14) Felonies or offenses of a similar nature that are punishable under the penal laws of other countries (Sec. 3(i) of R.A. 9160, as amended).

CONCEPT OF INSURED DEPOSITS Insured deposit means the amount due to any bona fide depositor for legitimate deposits in an insured bank net of any obligation of the depositor to the insured bank as of the date of closure, but not to exceed 500,000 or its equivalent in foreign currency (Sec. 4(g), as amended) LIABILITY OF DEPOSITORS DEPOSIT LIABILITIES REQUIRED TO BE INSURED WITH PDIC

The deposit liabilities of any bank or banking institution, which is engaged in the business of receiving deposits on the effective date of this Act, or which thereafter may engage in the business of receiving deposits, shall be insured with the PDIC (Sec. 5) Notes: (1) ’Bank’ and ‘Banking Institution’ shall include banks, commercial banks, savings bank, mortgage banks, rural banks, development banks, cooperative banks, stock savings and loan associations and branches and agencies in the Philippines of foreign banks and all other corporations authorized to perform banking functions in the Philippines (Sec. 4(b), as amended) (2) ‘Deposit’ means the unpaid balance of money or its equivalent received by a bank in the usual course of business and for which it has given or is obliged to give credit to a commercial, checking, savings, time or thrift account, or issued in accordance with Bangko Sentral rules and regulations and other applicable laws, together with such other obligations of a bank, which, consistent with banking usage and practices, the Board of Directors shall determine and prescribe by regulations to be deposit liabilities of the bank (Sec. 4(f), as amended). (3) What is not considered a deposit? Any obligation of a bank which is payable at the office of the bank located outside of the Philippines (Sec. 4(f), as amended). COMMENCEMENT OF LIABILITY

Liability commences upon the approval of application.

PAGE 137

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS


If the account is held by two or more natural persons or two or more juridical persons General rule: The maximum insured deposit shall be divided into as many equal shares as there are individuals or juridical persons (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

EXTENT OF LIABILITY

The liability of the Corporation is to the extent of the insured deposit (Sec.14). Whenever an insured bank shall have been closed by the Monetary Board pursuant to Section 30 of R.A. 7653, payment of the insured deposits on such closed bank shall be made by the PDIC as soon as possible either (1) by cash or (2) by making available to each depositor a transferred deposit in another insured bank in an amount equal to insured deposit of such depositor (Sec. 14).

Exception: Unless a different sharing is stipulated in the document of deposit (Sec. 4(g), as amended). If the account is held by a juridical person or entity jointly with one or more natural persons The maximum insured deposits shall be presumed to belong entirely to such juridical person or entity (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

Note: Insured deposit shall not exceed 500,000 (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

Note: The aggregate of the interest of each co-owner over several joint accounts, whether owned by the same or different combinations of individuals, juridical persons or entities, shall likewise be subject to the maximum insured deposit of P500,000.00 (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

DETERMINATION OF INSURED DEPOSIT

The determination of insured deposits shall commence upon the PDIC’s actual takeover of the closed bank (Sec. 16(a), as amended). The amount of the insured deposit shall be determined according to such regulations as the Board of Directors may prescribe, In determining such amount due to any depositor, there shall be added together all deposits in the bank maintained in the same right and capacity for his benefits either in his own name or in the name of others (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

Mode of payment Payment of the insured deposits on such closed bank shall be made by the PDIC as soon as possible either: (1) by cash; (2) by making available to each depositor a transferred deposit in another insured bank in an amount equal to insured deposit of such depositor (Sec. 14)

Note: The PDIC may require proof of claims to be filed before paying the insured deposits, and that in any case where the PDIC is not satisfied as to the viability of a claim for an insured deposit, it may require final determination of a court of competent jurisdiction before paying such claim (Sec. 14)

Note: ‘Transfer Deposit’ means a deposit in an insured bank made available to a depositor by the PDIC as payment of insured deposit of such depositor in a closed bank and assumed by another insured bank (Sec. 4(h), as amended). Effect of Payment of Insured Deposit

Notice and publication requirement (1) The PDIC shall give notice to the depositors of the closed bank of the insured deposits due them by whatever means deemed appropriate by the Board of Directors. (2) The PDIC shall publish the notice once a week for at least three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation or, when appropriate, in a newspaper circulated in the community or communities where the closed bank or its branches are located (Sec. 16(a), as amended).

Discharge from liability to the depositor The PDIC shall be discharged from liability upon payment under Sec. 14, i.e.: (1) Payment of an insured deposit to any person by the PDIC; (2) Payment of a transferred deposit to any person by the new bank or by an insured bank in which a transferred deposit has been made available (Sec.16(b), as amended) Subrogation to all the rights of the depositor The PDIC, upon payment of any depositor as provided for in Section 14 shall be subrogated to all rights of the depositor against the closed bank to the extent of such payment. Such subrogation shall include the right on the part of the PDIC to receive the same dividends and payments from the proceeds of the assets of such closed bank and recoveries on account of stockholders liability as would have been payable to the depositor on a claim for the insured deposits.

CALCULATION OF LIABILITY

Per depositor, per capacity rule In determining the amount due to any depositor, there shall be added together all deposits in the bank maintained in the same right and capacity for his benefits either in his own name or in the name of others (Sec. 4(g), as amended) Joint accounts A joint account regardless of whether the conjunction 'and,' 'or,' 'and/or' is used, shall be insured separately from any individually-owned deposit account (Sec. 4(g), as amended).

BUT the depositor shall retain his claim for any uninsured portion of his deposit (Sec. 15).

PAGE 138

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

BANKING LAWS

Payment of insured deposits as preferred credit under Art. 2244 of the Civil Code All payments by the PDIC of insured deposits in closed banks partake of the nature of public funds, and as such, must be considered a preferred credit similar to taxes due to the National Government in the order of preference under Article 2244 of the New Civil Code (Sec. 15)


any court, legislative body, government agency or any administrative body whatsoever. (Sec. 8) Exceptions: (1) Upon written permission of the depositor (Sec. 8, Foreign Currency Deposit Act ; Intengan vs CA, 2002) (2) Upon order of a competent court in cases of violation of the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2001 [as in the case of peso deposits, supra] (3) During Bangko Sentral’s periodic or special examinations [as in the case of peso deposits, supra], and (4) Disclosure of the Treasurer of the Philippines when the unclaimed balances law applies (Act 3936, as amended by PD 679) (5) BSP/PDIC inquiry if there is a finding of unsafe and unsound banking practice (as in the case of peso deposits, supra) (6) In Salvacion vs. CB (1997), where a Filipino child was raped by a foreigner, the SC allowed, pro hac vice, garnishment of foreign currency deposits stating : If we rule that the questioned Section 113 of CB Circular No. 960 which exempts from attachment, garnishment, or any other order or process of any court, legislative body, government agency or any administrative body whatsoever, is applicable to a foreign transient, injustice would result especially to a citizen aggrieved by a foreign guest.

Failure to settle claim of insured depositor General rule: Failure to settle the claim within six (6) months from the date of filing of claim for insured deposit shall, upon conviction, subject the directors, officers or employees of the PDIC responsible for the delay to imprisonment from six (6) months to one (1) year. Exceptions: (1) Such failure was not due to grave abuse of discretion, gross negligence, bad faith, or malice of the directors, officers or employees; or (2) The validity of the claim requires the resolution of issues of facts and or law by another office, body or agency including the case mentioned in the first proviso or by PDIC together with such other office, body or agency. Failure of depositor to claim insured deposits All rights of the depositor against the PDIC with respect to the insured deposit shall be barred: (1) If he fails to claim the insured deposits within two (2) years from actual takeover of the closed bank by the receiver; or (2) If he does not enforce his claim filed with the corporation within two (2) years after the two-year period to file a claim.

PRIVILEGES (1) Tax exemption – the FCD, including interests and all other income or earnings of such deposits, are exempt from any and all taxes whatsoever if these deposits are made by non-residents and irrespective of whether or not the non-residents are engaged in trade or business in the Philippines (Sec. 6 as amended). Interests on FCDs of residents are subject to 7.5% withholding tax. (2) Exemption from attachment, garnishment or any other order or process of any court, legislative or administrative body, or government agency whatsoever (Sec. 8)

BUT all rights of the depositor against the closed bank and its shareholders or the receivership estate to which the PDIC may have become subrogated, shall thereupon revert to the depositor. Thereafter, the PDIC shall be discharged from any liability on the insured deposit (Sec. 16(e), as amended).

Exception: The CA, upon application ex parte by the AMLC and after determination that a probable cause exists that any monetary instrument or property is in any way related to an “unlawful activity”, the AMLC, may freeze the account (Sec. 10, RA 9160).

Foreign Currency Deposit Act (R.A. No. 6426)

The FCDA allows any person to deposit, and banks to accept deposit, any foreign currency acceptable as part of the Philippines’ international reserve. CONFIDENTIALITY All foreign currency deposits are declared as and considered of an absolutely confidential nature and, except upon the written permission of the depositor, in no instance shall be examined, inquired or looked into by any person, government official, bureau or office, whether judicial or administrative, or legislative or any other entity whether public or private. (Sec. 8) The foreign currency deposits shall be exempt from attachment, garnishment, or any other order or process of PAGE 139


INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CODE

PAGE 140




Intellectual Property Rights, In General


COPYRIGHT:

right granted by statute to the author or originator of literary, scholarly, scientific, or artistic productions, including computer programs. A copyright gives him the legal right to determine how the work is used and to obtain economic benefits from the work. For example, the owner of a copyright for a book or a piece of software has the exclusive rights to use, copy, distribute, and sell copies of the work, including later editions or versions of the work. If another person improperly uses material covered by a copyright, the copyright owner can obtain legal relief. [Rule 2, Copyright Safeguards and Regulations]

STATE POLICIES (1) To protect and secure the exclusive rights of scientists, inventors, artists and other gifted citizens to their intellectual property and creations, particularly when beneficial to the people, for such periods as provided in this Act. (2) To promote the diffusion of knowledge and information for the promotion of national development and progress and the common good. (3) To streamline administrative procedures of registering patents, trademarks and copyright, to liberalize the registration on the transfer of technology, and to enhance the enforcement of intellectual property rights in the Philippines. [Sec. 2, RA 8293]

Copyright is confined to literary and artistic works which are original intellectual creations in the literary and artistic domain protected from the moment of their creation. [Kho v. CA, et al. (2002)] It is vested from the moment of creation. OTHER FORMS OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

Geographic Indication One which identifies a good as originating in the territory of a TRIPS member, or a region or locality in that territory where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic of a good is essentially attributable to its geographical origin [Art. 22, TRIPS Agreement]

DEFINITION:

Those property rights which result from the physical manifestation of original thought. [Ballantine’s Law Dictionary] Note: There are no property rights protected by law in mere ideas or mental conceptions. When creations of mind are put in tangible form, there is appropriate subject of property that is protected by law. [63A Am Jur 3rd Property, Section 5]

Industrial Design Any composition of lines or colors or any threedimensional form, whether or not associated with lines or colors: Provided, that such composition or form gives a special appearance to and can serve as pattern for an industrial product or handicraft. (Sec. 112.1, RA 8293)

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS UNDER THE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CODE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Copyright; Related Rights of copyright; Trademarks and Service Marks; Geographic Indications; Industrial Designs; Patents; Layout-Designs (Topographies) of Integrated Circuits; [Sec. 4, RA 8293] (8) Protection of Undisclosed Information (TRIPS Agreement).

Layout Design (Topography) of an Integrated Circuit Layout Design (Topography). — The three-dimensional disposition, however expressed, of the elements, at least one of which is an active element, and of some or all the interconnections of an integrated circuit, or such a threedimensional disposition prepared for an integrated circuit intended for manufacture. (Sec. 112.3, RA 8293) Integrated Circuit. — a product, in its final form, or an intermediate form, in which the elements, at least one of which is an active element and some or all of the interconnections are integrally formed and/or on a piece of material, and which is intended to perform an electronic function. (Sec. 112.2, RA 8293)

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS AND PATENT PATENTABLE INVENTIONS

Refer to any technical solution of a problem in any field of human activity, which is new, involves an inventive step and is industrially applicable. It may be, or refer to, any product, process, or an improvement of any of the foregoing. [Sec. 21, RA 8293] It is vested from the issuance of letters of patent.

Undisclosed Information Information which: (1) Is a secret in a sense that it is not, as a body or in the precise configuration and assembly of components, generally known among or readily accessible to persons within the circles that normally deal with the kind of information in question; (2) Has a commercial value because it is secret; and (3) Has been subject to reasonable steps under the circumstances, by the person lawfully in control of the information, to keep it secret [Art. 39, TRIPS]

TRADEMARK

any visible sign capable of distinguishing the goods (trademark) or services (service mark) of an enterprise and shall include a stamped or marked container of goods. [Kho v. CA, et al. (2002)] It is vested from registration. TRADE NAME:

the name or designation identifying or distinguishing an enterprise [Sec. 121.3, RA 8293] PAGE 141



TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER ARRANGEMENTS Refers to contracts or agreements involving: (1) the transfer of systematic knowledge for the manufacture of a product; (2) the application of a process, or rendering of a service including management contracts; (3) The transfer, assignment or licensing of all forms of intellectual property rights, including licensing of computer software except computer software developed for mass market. [Sec. 4.2, RA 8293]


(a) Inventive Step. — An invention involves an inventive step if, having regard to prior art, it is not obvious to a person skilled in the art at the time of the filing date or priority date of the application claiming the invention. [Sec. 26.1, RA 8293, as amended by RA 9502] Cheaper Medicines Act: In case of drugs and medicines, there is no inventive step if the invention results from the mere discovery of a new form or new property of a known substance which does not result in enhancement of the known efficacy of that substance, or the mere discovery of any new property or new use of a known substance or the mere use of a known process unless such known process results in a new product that employs at least one reactant. [Sec. 26.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

Patents PATENTABLE INVENTIONS A patentable invention is any technical solution of a problem in any field of human activity which is new, involves an inventive step and is industrially applicable shall be Patentable. It may be, or may relate to, a product, or process, or an improvement of any of the foregoing. [Sec. 21, RA 8293]

(b) Industrial Applicability. —An invention that can be produced and used in any industry shall be industrially applicable. [Sec. 27, RA 8293]

INVENTION PATENT

Utility It is any technical solution of a problem in any field of human activity which is new and industrially applicable. Unlike an invention patent, a utility model need not be inventive. The law merely requires that it be novel and industrially applicable. [Sec. 109.1, RA 8293]

Standards: Novelty. —An invention shall not be considered new if it forms part of a prior art. [Sec. 23, RA 8293] Prior art shall consist of: (1) Everything which has been made available to the public anywhere in the world, before the filing date or the priority date of the application claiming the invention; [Sec. 24.1, RA 8293] (2) The whole contents of an application for a patent, utility model, or industrial design registration, published in accordance with this Act, filed or effective in the Philippines, with a filing or priority date that is earlier than the filing or priority date of the application: Provided, That the application which has validly claimed the filing date of an earlier application under Section 31 of this Act, shall be prior art with effect as of the filing date of such earlier application: Provided further, That the applicant or the inventor identified in both applications are not one and the same. [Sec. 24.2, RA 8293]

A utility model registration shall expire, without any possibility of renewal, at the end of the seventh year after the date of the filing of the application. [Sec. 109.3, RA 8293] STATUTORY CLASSES OF UTILITY MODELS

A Utility Model may be, or may relate to: (a) A useful machine; (b) An implement or tool; (c) A product or composition; (d) A method or process; or (e) An improvement of any of the foregoing. [Rule 201, Rules and Regulations on Utility Models and Industrial Designs as amended] GROUNDS FOR CANCELLATION OF UTILITY MODELS

Non-Prejudicial Disclosures: This is an exception to the General Rule on Prior Art under Sec. 24. It provides that the disclosure of the information contained in the application during the 12 months preceding the filing date or the priority date of the application shall not prejudice the applicant on the ground of lack of novelty if such disclosure was made by: (1) The inventor (2) A patent office and the information contained (1) in another application filed by the inventor and should not have been disclosed by the office, or (2) in an application filed without the knowledge or consent of the inventor by a third party which obtained the information directly or indirectly from the inventor (3) A third party which obtained the information directly or indirectly from the inventor [Sec. 25, RA 8293]

(a) That the claimed invention does not qualify for registration as a utility model and does not meet the requirements of registrability; (b) That the description and the claims do not comply with the prescribed requirements; (c) That any drawing which is necessary for the understanding of the invention has not been furnished; (d) That the owner of the utility model registration is not the inventor or his successor in title [Sec 109.4, RA 8293] INDUSTRIAL DESIGN

An industrial design is any composition of lines or colors or any three-dimensional form, whether or not associated with lines or colors: Provided that such composition or form gives a special appearance to and can serve as

PAGE 142



pattern for an industrial product or handicraft. [Sec. 112.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9150]


(1) The mere discovery of a new form or new property of a known substance which does not result in the enhancement of the known efficacy of that substance (2) the mere discovery of any new property or new use of a known substance (3) the mere use of a known process unless such known process results in a new product that employs at least one reactant (Sec. 26.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502)

LAY-OUT DESIGNS (TOPOGRAPHIES) OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Integrated Circuit means a product, in its final form, or an intermediate form, in which the elements, at least one of which is an active element and some or all of the interconnections are integrally formed in and/or on a piece of material, and which is intended to perform an electronic function. [Sec. 112.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9150]

OWNERSHIP OF A PATENT

Layout-Design is synonymous with 'Topography' and means the three-dimensional disposition, however expressed, of the elements, at least one of which is an active element, and of some or all of the interconnections of an integrated circuit, or such a three-dimensional disposition prepared for an integrated circuit intended for manufacture. [Sec. 112.3, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9150]

RIGHT TO A PATENT

General Rule: The right to patent belongs to the inventor, his heirs, or assigns. When two (2) or more persons have jointly made an invention, the right to a patent shall belong to them jointly. (Sec.28, RA 8293) Exception: Inventions created pursuant to a commission (Work for Hire Doctrine) (1) The employer has the right to the patent if the invention is the result of the performance of the employee’s regularly assigned duties [Sec. 30.2, RA 8293] (2) In case of inventions created pursuant to a commission, the person who commissions the work shall own the patent [Sec. 30.1, RA 8293]

NON-PATENTABLE INVENTIONS The following shall be excluded from patent protection: (1) Discoveries, scientific theories and mathematical methods, and in the case of drugs and medicines, the mere discovery of a new form or new property of a known substance which does not result in the enhancement of the known efficacy of that substance, or the mere discovery of any new property or new use for a known substance, or the mere use of a known process unless such known process results in a new product that employs at least one new reactant.

FIRST-TO-FILE RULE

If two (2) or more persons have made the invention separately and independently of each other, the right to the patent shall belong to the person who filed an application for such invention, or where two or more applications are filed for the same invention, to the applicant who has the earliest filing date or, the earliest priority date. [Sec. 29, RA 8293]

Salts, esters, ethers, polymorphs, metabolites, pure form, particle size, isomers, mixtures of isomers, complexes, combinations, and other derivatives of a known substance shall be considered to be the same substance, unless they differ significantly in properties with regard to efficacy; [Sec. 22.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

INVENTIONS CREATED PURSUANT TO A COMMISSION

Commission: Person who commissions the work shall own the patent, unless otherwise provided in the contract [Sec. 30.1, RA 8293)

(2) Schemes, rules and methods of performing mental acts, playing games or doing business, and programs for computers; [Sec. 22.2, RA 8293]

Employment Contract: Patent belongs to the employee if the inventive activity is not a part of his regular duties even if the employee uses the time, facilities and materials of the employer. [Sec. 30.2 (a), RA 8293]

(3) Methods for treatment of the human or animal body by surgery or therapy and diagnostic methods practiced on the human or animal body. This provision shall not apply to products and composition for use in any of these methods; [Sec. 22.3, RA 8293]

Patent belongs to the employer if the invention is the result of the performance of his regularly-assigned duties, unless there is an agreement, express or implied, to the contrary. [Sec. 30.2 (b), RA 8293]

(4) Plant varieties or animal breeds or essentially biological process for the production of plants or animals. This provision shall not apply to microorganisms and non-biological and microbiological processes; [Sec. 22.4, RA 8293]

RIGHT OF PRIORITY

An application for patent filed by any person who has previously applied for the same invention in another country which by treaty, convention, or law affords similar privileges to Filipino citizens, shall be considered as filed as of the date of filing the foreign application: Provided, That: (a) the local application expressly claims priority; (b) it is filed within twelve (12) months from the date the earliest foreign application was filed; and (c) a certified copy of the foreign application together with an English translation is filed within six (6) months from the date of filing in the Philippines. [Sec. 31, RA 8293]

(5) Aesthetic creations; [Sec. 22.5, RA 8293] (6) Anything which is contrary to public order or morality. [Sec. 22.6, RA 8293] Cheaper Medicines Act: In addition to discoveries, scientific theories and mathematical methods, the IP Code now includes, in case of drugs and medicines: PAGE 143



GROUNDS FOR CANCELLATION OF A PATENT Any interested person may, upon payment of the required fee, petition to cancel the patent or any claim thereof, or parts of the claim, on any of the following grounds: (a) That what is claimed as the invention is not new or patentable; (b) That the patent does not disclose the invention in a manner sufficiently clear and complete for it to be carried out by any person skilled in the art; or (c) That the patent is contrary to public order or morality. [Sec. 61.1, RA 8293]


such person may, within three (3) months after the decision has become final: (1) Prosecute the application as his own application in place of the applicant; (2) File a new patent application in respect of the same invention; (3) Request that the application be refused; or (4) Seek cancellation of the patent, if one has already been issued. [Sec. 67, RA 8293] RIGHTS CONFERRED BY A PATENT A patent shall confer on its owner the following exclusive rights: (1) Where the subject matter of a patent is a product, to restrain, prohibit and prevent any unauthorized person or entity from making, using, offering for sale, selling or importing that product. [Sec. 71.1(a), RA 8293] (2) Where the subject matter of a patent is a process, to restrain, prevent or prohibit any unauthorized person or entity from using the process, and from manufacturing, dealing in, using, selling or offering for sale, or importing any product obtained directly or indirectly from such process. [Sec. 71.1(b), RA 8293] (3) Patent owners shall also have the right to assign, or transfer by succession the patent, and to conclude licensing contracts for the same. [Sec. 71.2, RA 8293]

Where the grounds for cancellation relate to some of the claims or parts of the claim, cancellation may be effected to such extent only. [Sec. 61.2, RA 8293] REQUIREMENT OF THE PETITION

The petition for cancellation shall be in writing, verified by the petitioner or by any person in his behalf who knows the facts, specify the grounds upon which it is based, include a statement of the facts to be relied upon, and filed with the Office. Copies of printed publications or of patents of other countries, and other supporting documents mentioned in the petition shall be attached thereto, together with the translation thereof in English, if not in English language. [Sec. 62, RA 8293]

To be able to effectively and legally preclude others from copying and profiting from the invention, a patent is a primordial requirement. No patent, no protection. The ultimate goal of a patent system is to bring new designs and technologies into the public domain through disclosure. Ideas, once disclosed to the public without the protection of a valid patent, are subject to appropriation without significant restraint. [Pearl Dean, Inc. v. Shoemart, Inc. (2003)]

NOTICE OF HEARING

Upon filing of a petition for cancellation, the Director of Legal Affairs shall forthwith serve notice of the filing thereof upon the patentee and all persons having grants or licenses, or any other right, title or interest in and to the patent and the invention covered thereby, as appears of record in the Office, and of notice of the date of hearing thereon on such persons and the petitioner. Notice of the filing of the petition shall be published in the IPO Gazette. [Sec. 63, RA 8293]

LIMITATIONS OF PATENT RIGHTS The owner of a patent has no right to prevent third parties from performing, without his authorization, the acts referred to in Section 71 hereof in the following circumstances: (a) Using a patented product which has been put on the market in the Philippines by the owner of the product, or with his express consent, insofar as such use is performed after that product has been so put on the said market: Provided, That, with regard to drugs and medicines, the limitation on patent rights shall apply after a drug or medicine has been introduced in the Philippines or anywhere else in the world by the patent owner, or by any party authorized to use the invention: Provided, further, That the right to import the drugs and medicines contemplated in this section shall be available to any government agency or any private third party; [Sec. 72.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

EFFECT OF CANCELLATION OF PATENT OR CLAIM

The rights conferred by the patent or any specified claim or claims cancelled shall terminate. Notice of the cancellation shall be published in the IPO Gazette. Unless restrained by the Director General, the decision or order to cancel by Director of Legal Affairs shall be immediately executory even pending appeal. [Sec. 66, RA 8293] REMEDY OF THE TRUE AND ACTUAL INVENTOR If a person, who was deprived of the patent without his consent or through fraud is declared by final court order or decision to be the true and actual inventor, the court shall order for his substitution as patentee, or at the option of the true inventor, cancel the patent, and award actual and other damages in his favor if warranted by the circumstances. [Sec. 68, RA 8293] TIME TO FILE ACTION IN COURT

The action shall be filed within one (1) year from the date of publication made in accordance with Sections 44 and 51, respectively. (Sec. 70, RA 8293)

(b) Where the act is done privately and on a noncommercial scale or for a non-commercial purpose: Provided, That it does not significantly prejudice the economic interests of the owner of the patent; [Sec. 72.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

REMEDY OF PERSONS NOT HAVING THE RIGHT TO A PATENT

If a person other than the applicant, is declared by final court order or decision as having the right to the patent, PAGE 144



(c) Where the act consists of making or using exclusively for experimental use of the invention for scientific purposes or educational purposes and such other activities directly related to such scientific or educational experimental use; [Sec. 72.3, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]


(a) The public interest, in particular, national security, nutrition, health or the development of other sectors, as determined by the appropriate agency of the government, so requires; [Sec. 74.1(a), RA 8293] (b) A judicial or administrative body has determined that the manner of exploitation, by the owner of the patent or his licensee, is anti-competitive. [Sec. 74.1(b), RA 8293]

(d) In the case of drugs and medicines, where the act includes testing, using, making or selling the invention including any data related thereto, solely for purposes reasonably related to the development and submission of information and issuance of approvals by government regulatory agencies required under any law of the Philippines or of another country that regulates the manufacture, construction, use or sale of any product: Provided, That, in order to protect the data submitted by the original patent holder from unfair commercial use provided in Article 39.3 of the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS Agreement), the Intellectual Property Office, in consultation with the appropriate government agencies, shall issue the appropriate rules and regulations necessary therein not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after the enactment of this law; (Sec. 72.4, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502)

The use by the Government, or third person authorized by the Government shall be subject, mutatis mutandis, to the conditions set forth in Sections 95 to 97 and 100 to 102 on compulsory licensing. [Sec. 74.2, RA 8293] All cases arising from the implementation of this provision shall be cognizable by courts with appropriate jurisdiction provided by law. No court except the Supreme Court of the Philippines, shall issue any temporary restraining order or preliminary injunction or such other provisional remedies that will prevent its immediate execution. [Sec. 74.3, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502] PATENT INFRINGEMENT It is the making, using, offering for sale, selling, or importing a patented product or a product obtained directly or indirectly from a patented process, or the use of a patented process without the authorization of the patentee. [Sec 76.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

(e) Where the act consists of the preparation for individual cases, in a pharmacy or by a medical professional, of a medicine in accordance with a medical shall apply after a drug or medicine has been introduced in the Philippines or anywhere else in the world by the patent owner, or by any party authorized to use the invention: Provided, further, That the right to import the drugs and medicines contemplated in this section shall be available to any government agency or any private third party; (Sec. 72.5, RA 8293 as amended)

CONTRIBUTORY INFRINGER

One who actively induces the infringement of a patent or provides the infringer with a component of a patented product or of a product produced because of a patented process knowing it to be especially adopted for infringing and not suitable for substantial non-infringing. He is jointly and severally liable with the infringer. [Sec. 76.6, RA 8293]

There shall be no infringement of trademarks or tradenames of imported or sold drugs and medicines allowed as well as imported or sold off-patent drugs and medicines: Provided, That said drugs and medicines bear the registered marks that have not been tampered, unlawfully modified, or infringed. (Sec.159.4 RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502)

DOCTRINE OF PATENT EXHAUSTION

It espouses that the patentee who has already sold his invention and has received all the royalty and consideration for the same will be deemed to have released the invention from his monopoly. The invention thus becomes open to use of the purchaser without further restriction. [Adams v. Burke, in Notes on Selected Commercial Laws, Catindig 2003 ed.]

PRIOR USER

Notwithstanding Section 72 hereof, any prior user, who, in good faith was using the invention or has undertaken serious preparations to use the invention in his enterprise or business, before the filing date or priority date of the application on which a patent is granted, shall have the right to continue the use thereof as envisaged in such preparations within the territory where the patent produces its effect. [Sec. 73.1, RA 8293]

TESTS IN PATENT INFRINGEMENT

Literal infringement In using literal infringement as a test, resort must be had in the first instance to the words of the claim. To determine whether the particular item falls within the literal meaning of the patent claims, the court must juxtapose the claims of the patent and the accused product within the overall context of the claims and specifications, to determine whether there is exact identity of all material elements. [Godinez v. CA (1993)]

The right of the prior user may only be transferred or assigned together with his enterprise or business, or with that part of his enterprise or business in which the use or preparations for use have been made. [Sec. 73.2, RA 8293]

Doctrine of equivalents Under the doctrine of equivalents, an infringement also occurs when a device appropriates a prior invention by incorporating its innovative concept and, albeit with some modification and change, performs substantially the same function in substantially the same way to achieve substantially the same result. [Godinez v. CA (1993)]

USE BY THE GOVERNMENT

A Government agency or third person authorized by the Government may exploit the invention even without agreement of the patent owner where: PAGE 145



In order to infringe a patent, a machine or device must perform the same function, or accomplish the same result by identical or substantially identical means and the principle or mode of operation must be substantially the same. [Del Rosario v. CA (1996)]


Rules of the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) or the Rules of Conciliation and Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) shall apply and the venue of arbitration shall be the Philippines or any neutral country; [Sec. 88.3, RA 8293]

The doctrine of equivalents provides that an infringement also takes place when a device appropriates a prior invention by incorporating its innovative concept and, although with some modification and change, performs substantially the same function in substantially the same way to achieve substantially the same result. The principle or mode of operation must be the same or substantially the same. The doctrine of equivalents thus requires satisfaction of the function-means-and-result test, the patentee having the burden to show that all three components of such equivalency test are met. [Smith Klein Beckman Corp. v. CA (2003)]

(4) The Philippine taxes on all payments relating to the technology transfer arrangement shall be borne by the licensor. [Sec. 88.4, RA 8293] Prohibited clauses The following provisions shall be deemed prima facie to have an adverse effect on competition and trade: (a) Those which impose upon the licensee the obligation to acquire from a specific source capital goods, intermediate products, raw materials, and other technologies, or of permanently employing personnel indicated by the licensor; [Sec. 87.1, RA 8293]

DEFENSES IN ACTION FOR INFRINGEMENT

In an action for infringement, the defendant, in addition to other defenses available to him, may show the invalidity of the patent, or any claim thereof, on any of the grounds on which a petition of cancellation can be brought under Section 61. [Sec 81, RA 8293]

(b) Those pursuant to which the licensor reserves the right to fix the sale or resale prices of the products manufactured on the basis of the license; [Sec. 87.2, RA 8293] (c) Those that contain restrictions regarding the volume and structure of production; [Sec. 87.3, RA 8293]

Patent found invalid may be cancelled: In an action for infringement, if the court shall find the patent or any claim to be invalid, it shall cancel the same, and the Director of Legal Affairs upon receipt of the final judgment of cancellation by the court, shall record that fact in the register of the Office and shall publish a notice to that effect in the IPO Gazette. [Sec 82, RA 8293]

(d) Those that prohibit the use of competitive technologies in a non-exclusive technology transfer agreement; [Sec. 87.4, RA 8293] (e) Those that establish a full or partial purchase option in favor of the licensor; (Sec. 87.5, RA 8293)

Doctrine of File Wrapper Estoppel Patentee is precluded from claiming as part of patented product that which he had to excise or modify in order to avoid patent office rejection, and he may omit any additions he was compelled to add by patent office regulations. [Advance Transformer Co. v. Levinson 837 F.2d 1081(1988)]

(f) Those that obligate the licensee to transfer for free to the licensor the inventions or improvements that may be obtained through the use of the licensed technology; (Sec. 87.6, RA 8293) (g) Those that require payment of royalties to the owners of patents for patents which are not used; (Sec. 87.7, RA 8293)

LICENSING VOLUNTARY

Voluntary Licensing is the grant by the patent owner to a third person of the right to exploit the patented invention. [Sec. 85, RA 8293]

(h) Those that prohibit the licensee to export the licensed product unless justified for the protection of the legitimate interest of the licensor such as exports to countries where exclusive licenses to manufacture and/or distribute the licensed product(s) have already been granted; (Sec. 87.8, RA 8293)

Mandatory Provisions The following provisions shall be included in voluntary license contracts: (1) That the laws of the Philippines shall govern the interpretation of the same and in the event of litigation, the venue shall be the proper court in the place where the licensee has its principal office; [Sec. 88.1, RA 8293]

(i) Those which restrict the use of the technology supplied after the expiration of the technology transfer arrangement, except in cases of early termination of the technology transfer arrangement due to reason(s) attributable to the licensee; (Sec. 87.9, RA 8293)

(2) Continued access to improvements in techniques and processes related to the technology shall be made available during the period of the technology transfer arrangement; [Sec. 88.2, RA 8293]

(j) Those which require payments for patents and other industrial property rights after their expiration, termination arrangement; (Sec. 87.10, RA 8293)

(3) In the event the technology transfer arrangement shall provide for arbitration, the Procedure of Arbitration of the Arbitration Law of the Philippines or the Arbitration

(k) Those which require that the technology recipient shall not contest the validity of any of the patents of the technology supplier; (Sec. 87.11, RA 8293) PAGE 146



(l) Those which restrict the research and development activities of the licensee designed to absorb and adapt the transferred technology to local conditions or to initiate research and development programs in connection with new products, processes or equipment; (Sec. 87.12, RA 8293)


person who has shown his capability to exploit the invention, under any of the following circumstances: (a) National emergency or other circumstances of extreme urgency; [Sec. 93.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502] (b) Where the public interest, in particular, national security, nutrition, health or the development of other vital sectors of the national economy as determined by the appropriate agency of the Government, so requires; [Sec. 93.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

(m) Those which prevent the licensee from adapting the imported technology to local conditions, or introducing innovation to it, as long as it does not impair the quality standards prescribed by the licensor; (Sec. 87.13, RA 8293)

(c) Where a judicial or administrative body has determined that the manner of exploitation by the owner of the patent or his licensee is anti-competitive; [Sec. 93.3, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

(n) Those which exempt the licensor for liability for nonfulfillment of his responsibilities under the technology transfer arrangement and/or liability arising from third party suits brought about by the use of the licensed product or the licensed technology; (Sec. 87.14, RA 8293)

(d) In case of public non-commercial use of the patent by the patentee, without satisfactory reason; [Sec. 93.4, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

(o) Other clauses with equivalent effects. (Sec. 87.15, RA 8293)

(e) If the patented invention is not being worked in the Philippines on a commercial scale, although capable of being worked, without satisfactory reason: Provided, That the importation of the patented article shall constitute working or using the patent; [Sec. 93.5, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

Effect of Non-compliance with any provisions of Secs. 87 and 88 The technology transfer arrangement shall automatically be rendered unenforceable, unless said technology transfer arrangement is approved and registered with the Documentation, Information and Technology Transfer Bureau under the provisions of Section 91 on exceptional cases. [Sec. 92, RA 8293]

(f) Where the demand for patented drugs and medicines is not being met to an adequate extent and on reasonable terms, as determined by the Secretary of the Department of Health. [Sec. 93.6, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

Right of Licensor. —Unless otherwise provided in the technology transfer agreement, the licensor shall have the right to: (a) Grant further licenses to third person (b) Exploit the subject matter of the technology transfer agreement [Sec. 89, RA 8293]

(g) If the invention protected by a patent, hereafter referred to as the "second patent," within the country cannot be worked without infringing another patent, hereafter referred to as the "first patent," granted on a prior application or benefiting from an earlier priority, a compulsory license may be granted to the owner of the second patent to the extent necessary for the working of his invention, subject to certain conditions. [Sec. 97, RA 8293]

Right of the Licensee. — To exploit the subject matter of the technology transfer agreement during the whole term of the agreement. [Sec. 90, RA 8293] Exceptional cases (a) In exceptional or meritorious cases where substantial benefits will accrue to the economy, such as high technology content, increase in foreign exchange earnings, employment generation, regional dispersal of industries and/or substitution with or use of local raw materials (b) The case of BOI-registered companies with pioneer status [Sec. 91, RA 8293]

(h) Manufacture and export of drugs and medicines to any country having insufficient or no manufacturing capacity in the pharmaceutical sector to address public health problems: Provided, That, a compulsory license has been granted by such country or such country has, by notification or otherwise, allowed importation into its jurisdiction of the patented drugs and medicines from the Philippines in compliance with the TRIPS Agreement. [Sec. 93-A.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

COMPULSORY

Compulsory Licensing is the grant of the Director of Legal Affairs of a license to exploit a patented invention, even without the agreement of the patent owner, in favor of any person who has shown his capability to exploit the invention. (Sec. 93, Ra 8293 as amended by RA 9502)

Period of filing a Petition for Compulsory License: At any time after the grant of patent. However, a compulsory license may not be applied for on the ground stated in Sec. 93.5 before the expiration of a period of four (4) years from the date of filing of the application or three (3) years from the date of the patent whichever period expires last. [Sec. 94, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

Grounds The Director General of the Intellectual Property Office may grant a license to exploit a patented invention, even without the agreement of the patent owner, in favor of any PAGE 147



Requirement to Obtain a License on Reasonable Commercial Terms General Rule: The license will only be granted after the petitioner has made efforts to obtain authorization from the patent owner on reasonable commercial terms and conditions but such efforts have not been successful within a reasonable period of time. [Sec. 95.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]


TRANSMISSION OF RIGHTS:

Patents or applications for patents and invention to which they relate, shall be protected in the same way as the rights of other property under the Civil Code. [Sec. 103.1, RA 8293] Inventions and any right, title or interest in and to patents and inventions covered thereby, may be assigned or transmitted by inheritance or bequest or may be the subject of a license contract. (Sec. 103.2, RA 8293)

Exceptions: The requirement of authorization shall not apply in the following cases: (a) Where the petition for compulsory license seeks to remedy a practice determined after judicial or administrative process to be anti-competitive; (b) In situations of national emergency or other circumstances of extreme urgency; (c) In cases of public non-commercial use. (d) In cases where the demand for the patented drugs and medicines in the Philippines is not being met to an adequate extent and on reasonable terms, as determined by the Secretary of the Department of Health. [Sec. 95.2, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORDING OF ASSIGNMENT

(a) It must be in writing and accompanied by an English translation, if it is in a language other than English or Filipino (b) It must be notarized (c) It must be accompanied by an appointment of a resident agent, if the assignee is not residing in the Philippines (d) It must identify the letters patent involved by number and date and give the name of the owner of the patent and the title of the invention. In the case of an application for a patent, it should state the application number and the filing date of the application and give the name of the applicant and the title of the invention. If the assignment was executed concurrently with or subsequent to the execution of the application but before the application is filed or before its application number is ascertained, it should adequately identify the application by its date of execution, the name of the applicant, and the title of the invention. (e) It must be accompanied by the required fees. [Sec. 105; Rules and Regulations on Inventions, Rule 1200]

Terms and Conditions of Compulsory License (a) The scope and duration of such license shall be limited to the purpose for which it was authorized; [Sec. 100.1, RA 8293] (b) The license shall be non-exclusive; [Sec. 100.2, RA 8293] (c) The license shall be non-assignable, except with that part of the enterprise or business with which the invention is being exploited; ; [Sec. 100.3, RA 8293]

EFFECT OF NON-RECORDING OF ASSIGNMENT WITH THE IPO

(d) Use of the subject matter of the license shall be devoted predominantly for the supply of the Philippine market: Provided, that this limitation shall not apply where the grant of the license is based on the ground that the patentee's manner of exploiting the patent is determined by judicial or administrative process, to be anti-competitive. ;[Sec. 100.4, RA 8293]

The non-recording will not affect the binding agreement between the assignor and assignee. However, such registration would be necessary to bind third parties. An assignment would be void as against any subsequent purchaser or mortgagee for valuable consideration and without notice unless recorded in the IPO within 3 months from the date of the assignment or prior to the subsequent purchase or mortgage. (Sec. 106, RA 8293)

(e) The license may be terminated upon proper showing that circumstances which led to its grant have ceased to exist and are unlikely to recur: Provided, That adequate protection shall be afforded to the legitimate interest of the licensee; ; [Sec. 100.5, RA 8293]

Trademarks DEFINITION OF MARKS, COLLECTIVE MARKS, TRADE NAMES

(f) The patentee shall be paid adequate remuneration taking into account the economic value of the grant or authorization, except that in cases where the license was granted to remedy a practice which was determined after judicial or administrative process, to be anti-competitive, the need to correct the anticompetitive practice may be taken into account in fixing the amount of remuneration. [Sec. 100.6]

MARKS

Any visible sign capable of distinguishing the goods (trademark) or services (service mark) of an enterprise and shall include a stamped or marked container of goods (Sec. 121.1, RA 8293) Trademark

ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSMISSION OF RIGHTS

Service Mark

Any visible sign which is Any visible sign capable of adopted and used to identify distinguishing the services the source of origin of goods, of an enterprise from the and which is capable of

ASSIGNMENT OF RIGHTS

The assignment may be of the entire patent or a portion thereof, or be limited to a specified territory. [Sec. 104, RA 8293] PAGE 148




NON-REGISTRABLE MARKS A mark cannot be registered if it: (1) Consists of immoral, deceptive or scandalous matter, or matter which may disparage or falsely suggest a connection with persons, living or dead, institutions, beliefs, or national symbols, or bring them into contempt or disrepute; [Sec 123.1(a), RA 8293]

distinguishing them from service of other enterprises. goods emanating from a competitor.

COLLECTIVE MARKS

Any visible sign designated as such in the application for registration and capable of distinguishing the origin or any other common characteristic, including the quality of goods or services of different enterprises which use the sign under the control of the registered owner of the collective mark. (Sec. 121.2, RA 8293)

(2) Consists of flags, coat of arms or other insignia of the Philippines or any foreign country; [Sec 123.1(b), RA 8293] (3) Consists of a name, portrait or signature identifying a particular living individual except by his written consent, or of a deceased President of the Philippines, during the life of his widow, except by written consent of the widow; [Sec 123.1(c), RA 8293]

TRADE NAME

The name or designation identifying or distinguishing an enterprise (Sec. 121.3, RA 8293). Any individual name or surname, firm name, device or word used by manufacturers, industrialists, merchants, and others to identify their businesses, vocations or occupations. [Converse Rubber Corp. v. Universal Rubber Products, Inc. (1980)]

(4) Is identical with a registered mark of another or a mark with an earlier filing or priority date, in respect of: (a) The same goods or services, or (b) Closely related goods or services, or (c) If it nearly resembles such a mark as to be likely to deceive or cause confusion; [Sec 123.1(d), RA 8293]

FUNCTIONS OF A TRADEMARK

(1) To point out distinctly the origin or ownership of the goods and to which it is affixed; (2) To secure him, who has been instrumental in bringing into the market a superior article of merchandise, the fruit of his industry and skill; (3) To assure the public that they are producing the genuine article; (4) To prevent fraud and imposition; and (5) To protect the manufacturer against substitution and sale of an inferior and different article as its product [Mirpuri v. CA (1998)]

(5) Is identical with, or confusingly similar to, or constitutes a translation of a well-known mark, whether or not registered in the Philippines, and used for identical or similar goods or services; [Sec 123.1(e), RA 8293] (6) Is identical with, or confusingly similar to, or constitutes a translation of a well-known mark which is registered in the Philippines, and used for goods or services which are not similar; [Sec 123.1(f), RA 8293] (7) Likely to mislead the public, particularly as to the nature, quality, characteristics or geographical origin of the goods or services; [Sec 123.1(g), RA 8293]

ACQUISITION OF OWNERSHIP OF MARK The rights to a mark shall be acquired through registration made validly in accordance with law. [Sec. 122, RA 8293]

(8) Consists exclusively of signs that are generic for the goods or services that they seek to identify; [Sec 123.1(h), RA 8293]

A certificate of registration shall remain in force for 10 years (Sec. 145, RA 8293) and may be renewed for periods of 10 years at its expiration upon payment of the prescribed fee and upon filing of a request. [Sec 146, RA 8293]

(9) Consists exclusively of signs or of indications that have become customary or usual to designate the goods or services in everyday language or in a bona fide and established trade practice; [Sec 123.1(i), RA 8293]

ACQUISITION OF OWNERSHIP OF TRADE NAME Notwithstanding any laws or regulations providing for any obligation to register trade names, such names shall be protected, even prior to or without registration, against any unlawful act committed by third parties. [Sec. 165.2 (a), RA 8293) The ownership of a trade name is acquired through adoption and use.

(10)Consists exclusively of signs or of indications that may serve in trade to designate the kind, quality, quantity, intended purpose, value, geographical origin, time or production of the goods or rendering of the services, or other characteristics of the goods or services; [Sec 123.1(j), RA 8293]

A name or designation may not be used as a trade name if by its nature or the use to which such name or designation may be put, it is contrary to public order or morals and if, in particular, it is liable to deceive trade circles or the public as to the nature of the enterprise identified by that name. [Sec. 165.1, RA 8293]

(11) Consists of shapes that may be necessitated by technical factors or by the nature of the goods themselves or factors that affect their intrinsic value; [Sec 123.1(k), RA 8293]

Any change in the ownership of a trade name shall be made with the transfer of the enterprise or part thereof identified by that name. [Sec. 165.4, RA 8293]

(12) Consists of color alone, unless defined by a given form; [Sec 123.1(l), RA 8293]

PAGE 149



(13) Is contrary to public order or morality. [Sec 123.1(m), RA 8293]

TESTS TO DETERMINE BETWEEN MARKS


CONFUSING

SIMILARITY

DOMINANCY TEST

Infringement is determined by the test of “dominancy” rather than by differences or variations in the details of one trademark and of another. Similarity in size, form and color, while relevant is not conclusive. If the competing trademark contains the main or essential or dominant features of another, and confusion is likely to result, infringement takes place. [Asia Brewery v. CA and San Miguel (1993)]

DOCTRINE OF SECONDARY MEANING

When the marks referred to in nos. 10, 11 and 12 has become distinctive, because of its long, continuous and exclusive use for 5 years, as used in connection with the applicant’s goods or services in commerce and in the mind of the public indicates a single source to consumers, it may be registered. The Office may accept as prima facie evidence that the mark has become distinctive, as used in connection with the applicant's goods or services in commerce, proof of substantially exclusive and continuous use thereof by the applicant in commerce in the Philippines for five (5) years before the date on which the claim of distinctiveness is made. [Sec 123.2, RA 8293]

HOLISTIC TEST

To determine whether a trademark has been infringed, we must consider the mark as a whole and not as dissected. If the buyer is deceived, it is attributable to the marks as a totality, not usually to any part of it. The court therefore should be guided by its first impression, for the buyer acts quickly and is governed by a casual glance, the value of which may be dissipated as soon as the court assumed to analyze carefully the respective features of the mark. [Del Monte Corporation, et al. v. CA (1990)]

The nature of the goods to which the mark is applied will not constitute an obstacle to registration. [Sec 123.3, RA 8293] PRIOR USE OF MARK AS A REQUIREMENT USE OF MARK AS A REQUIREMENT

The applicant or the registrant shall file a declaration of actual use of the mark with evidence to that effect, as prescribed by the Regulations within three (3) years from the filing date of the application. Otherwise, the application shall be refused or the mark shall be removed from the Register by the Director. [Sec. 124.2, RA 8293]

The dominancy test considers the dominant features in the competing marks in determining whether they are confusingly similar. Under the dominancy test, courts give greater weight to the similarity of the appearance of the product arising from the adoption of the dominant features of the registered mark, disregarding minor differences. Courts will consider more the aural and visual impressions created by the marks in the public mind, giving little weight to factors like prices, quality, sales outlets and market segments. [McDonald’s Corporation v. L.C. Big Mak Burger, Inc., et al. (2004)]

For the requirement of “actual use in commerce in the Philippines” before one may register a trademark, trade name and service mark under the law pertains to the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines and is not only confined to a certain region, province, city or barangay. [McDonald’s Corporation v. MacJoy Fastfood (2007)]

AS TO THE GOODS OR SERVICES IN CONNECTION WITH WHICH THE MARKS ARE USED (DOCTRINE OF RELATED GOODS/SERVICES)

Trademark is a creation of use and, therefore, actual use is a pre-requisite to exclusive ownership; registration is only an administrative confirmation of the existence of the right of ownership of the mark, but does not perfect such right; actual use thereof is the perfecting ingredient. [Shangri-La International Hotel v. DCC (2006)]

(1) Goods are related when they belong to the same class or have the same descriptive properties or physical attributes, or they serve the same purpose or flow through the same channel of trade. (2) The use of identical marks on non-competing but related goods may likely cause confusion. (3) Corollarily, the use of identical marks on noncompeting and unrelated goods is not likely to cause confusion.

NON-USE OF MARK WHEN EXCUSED

(1) If caused by circumstances arising independently of the will of the trademark owner. Lack of funds shall not excuse non-use of a mark; [Sec. 152.1, RA 8293] (2) A use which does not alter its distinctive character though the use is different from the form in which it is registered. [Sec. 152.2, RA 8293] (3) Use of a mark in connection with one or more of the goods/services belonging to the class in which the mark is registered. [Sec. 152.3, RA 8293] (4) The use of mark by a company related to the applicant or registrant (5) The use of mark by a person controlled by the registrant. [Sec. 152.4, RA 8293]

WELL-KNOWN MARKS A well-known mark is a mark which a competent authority of the Philippines has designated to be well-known internationally and in the Philippines. In determining whether a mark is well-known, account shall be taken of the knowledge of the relevant sector of the public, rather than the public at large, including knowledge in the Philippines which has been obtained as a result of the promotion of the mark. (Sec 123.1(e), RA 8293) DETERMINANTS (NEED NOT CONCUR)

The use of a mark by a company related with the registrant or applicant shall inure to the latter's benefit, and such use shall not affect the validity of such mark or of its registration: Provided, that such mark is not used in such manner as to deceive the public. [Sec.152.4, Ra 8293]

(a) The duration, extent and geographical area of any use of the mark; (b) The market share in the Philippines and other countries of the goods/services to which the mark applies; PAGE 150



(c) The degree of the inherent or acquired distinction of the mark; (d) The quality-image or reputation acquired by the mark; (e) The extent to which the mark has been registered in the world; (f) The exclusivity of the registration attained by the mark in the world; (g) The extent of use of the mark in the world; (h) The exclusivity of use in the world; (i) The commercial value attributed to the mark in the world; (j) The record of successful protection of the rights in the mark; (k) The outcome of litigations dealing with the issue of whether the mar is well-known; and (l) The presence or absence of identical or similar testmarks validly registered or used on other similar goods [Rule 102, Rule on Trademarks]


(2) If registered under Sec 123.1(e), extension of protection to goods and services which are not similar to those in respect of which the mark is registered, provided that: (a) The use of the mark in relation to unrelated or dissimilar goods or services would indicate a connection between those goods or services and the owner of the mark; and (b) The interests of the owner of the registered mark are likely to be damaged by such use. [Sec. 147.2, RA 8293] RIGHTS CONFERRED BY REGISTRATION Except in cases of importation of drugs and medicines allowed under Section 72.1 of this Act and of off-patent drugs and medicines, the owner of a registered mark shall have the exclusive right to prevent all third parties not having the owner's consent from using in the course of trade identical or similar signs or containers for goods or services which are identical or similar to those in respect of which the trademark is registered where such use would result in a likelihood of confusion. In case of the use of an identical sign for identical goods or services, a likelihood of confusion shall be presumed. [Sec. 147.1, RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

PROTECTION EXTENDED TO WELL-KNOWN MARKS

If not registered in the Philippines A mark cannot be registered if it is identical with or confusingly similar to, or constitutes a translation of a mark which is considered by the competent authority of the Philippines to be well-known internationally and in the Philippines, whether or not it is registered here, as being already the mark of a person other than the applicant for registration and used for identical goods or services. [(Sec 123.1(e), RA 8293]

LIMITATIONS ON SUCH RIGHTS

(1) Duration (except that, inasmuch as the registration of a trademark could be renewed every 10 years, a trademark could conceivably remain registered forever); (2) Territorial (except well-known marks).

If registered in the Philippines A mark cannot be registered if it is identical with or confusingly similar to, or constitutes a translation of a mark considered well-known in accordance with the Sec. 123.1 (e), which is registered in the Philippines with respect to goods or services which are not similar to those with respect to which registration is applied for. [Sec 123.1(f), RA 8293]

Registration of the mark shall not confer on the registered owner the right to preclude third parties from using bona fide their names, addresses, pseudonyms, a geographical name, or exact indications concerning the kind, quality, quantity, destination, value, place of origin, or time of production or of supply, of their goods or services: Provided, That such use is confined to the purposes of mere identification or information and cannot mislead the public as to the source of the goods or services. [Sec. 148, RA 8293]

Priority Right. An application for registration of a mark filed in the Philippines by a person referred to in Section 3, and who previously duly filed an application for registration of the same mark in one of those countries, shall be considered as filed as of the day the application was first filed in the foreign country. [Sec. 131.1, RA 8293]

ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER OF APPLICATION AND REGISTRATION

(1) An application for registration of a mark, or its registration, may be assigned or transferred with or without the transfer of the business using the mark. [Sec. 149.1, RA 8293] (2) Such assignment or transfer shall, however, be null and void if it is liable to mislead the public, particularly as regards the nature, source, manufacturing process, characteristics, or suitability for their purpose, of the goods or services to which the mark is applied. [Sec. 149.2, RA 8293] (3) The assignment of the application for registration of a mark, or of its registration, shall be in writing and require the signatures of the contracting parties. Transfers by mergers or other forms of succession may be made by any document supporting such transfer. [Sec. 149.3, RA 8293] (4) Assignments and transfers of registrations of marks shall be recorded at the Office on payment of the prescribed fee; assignment and transfers of applications for registration shall, on payment of the

No registration of a mark in the Philippines by a person described in this section shall be granted until such mark has been registered in the country of origin of the applicant. [Sec. 131.2, RA 8293] Significance of Priority Right A Philippine application filed by another applicant after the priority date but earlier than the foreign applicant’s actual filing may be refused registration if it is identical to the mark with a priority date. [The Law on Trademark, Infringement and Unfair Competition, Agpalo] RIGHTS CONFERRED BY A WELL-KNOWN MARK

(1) Right to be protected whether or not it is registered in the Philippines; PAGE 151



same fee, be provisionally recorded, and the mark, when registered, shall be in the name of the assignee or transferee. [Sec. 149.4, RA 8293] (5) Assignments and transfers shall have no effect against third parties until they are recorded at the Office. [Sec. 149.5, RA 8293]


consequence of using a certain mark. Likelihood of confusion is admittedly a relative term, to be determined rigidly according to the particular (and sometimes peculiar) circumstances of each case. In determining likelihood of confusion, the court must consider: (a) the resemblance between the trademarks; (b) the similarity of the goods to which the trademarks are attached; (c) the likely effect on the purchaser; and (d) the registrant’s express or implied consent and other fair and equitable considerations.

Any license contract concerning the registration of a mark, or an application therefor, shall provide for effective control by the licensor of the quality of the goods or services of the licensee in connection with which the mark is used. If the license contract does not provide for such quality control, or if such quality control is not effectively carried out, the license contract shall not be valid. [Sec. 150.1, RA 8293]

McDonald’s Corporation v. L.C. Big Mak Burger, Inc., et al., (2004): To establish trademark infringement, the following elements must be shown: (1) the validity of the mark; (2) the plaintiff’s ownership of the mark; and (3) the use of the mark or its colorable imitation by the alleged infringer results in “likelihood of confusion.” Of these, it is the element of likelihood of confusion that is the gravamen of trademark infringement. Two types of confusion arise from the use of similar or colorable imitation marks, namely, confusion of goods (product confusion) and confusion of business (source or origin confusion). While there is confusion of goods when the products are competing, confusion of business exists when the products are noncompeting but related enough to produce confusion or affiliation.

PROTECTION LIMITED TO GOODS SPECIFIED IN REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE

The certificate of registration can confer upon the petitioner the exclusive right to use its own symbol only to those goods specified in the certificate, subject to any conditions a limitations stated therein. One who has adopted and used a trademark on his goods does not prevent the adoption and use of the same trademark by others for products which are of a different description. [Faberge, Inc. v. IAC and Co Beng Kay (1992)] USE BY THIRD PARTIES OF NAMES, ETC. SIMILAR TO REGISTERED MARK The IPC deems unlawful any subsequent use of the trade name by a third party, whether as a trade name or a mark or collective mark, or any such use of a similar trade name or mark, likely to mislead the public. [Sec. 165.2 (b), RA 8293]

In order to bring a civil action for infringement, it is not required that there is an actual sale of the goods or services using the infringing material. [Sec. 155.2, RA 8293] Infringement takes place upon the mere use or reproduction of the registered mark. No article of imported merchandise which shall copy or simulate the name of any domestic product, or manufacturer, or dealer, or which shall copy or simulate a mark registered in accordance with the provisions of this Act, or shall bear a mark or trade name calculated to induce the public to believe that the article is manufactured in the Philippines, or that it is manufactured in any foreign country or locality other than the country or locality where it is in fact manufactured, shall be admitted to entry at any customhouse of the Philippines. [Sec. 166, RA 8293]

INFRINGEMENT AND REMEDIES TRADEMARK INFRINGEMENT

Any person who shall, without the consent of the owner of the registered mark: (1) Use in commerce any reproduction, counterfeit, copy, or colorable imitation of a registered mark or the same container or a dominant feature thereof in connection with the sale, offering for sale, distribution, advertising of any goods or services including other preparatory steps necessary to carry out the sale of any goods or services on or in connection with which such use is likely to cause confusion, or to cause mistake, or to deceive; [Sec. 155.1, RA 8293] (2) Reproduce, counterfeit, copy or colorably imitate a registered mark or a dominant feature thereof and apply such reproduction, counterfeit, copy or colorable imitation to labels, signs, prints, packages, wrappers, receptacles or advertisements intended to be used in commerce upon or in connection with the sale, offering for sale, distribution, or advertising of goods or services on or in connection with which such use is likely to cause confusion, or to cause mistake, or to deceive. [Sec. 155.2, RA 8293]

A mere distributor and not the owner cannot assert any protection from trademark infringement as it had no right in the first place to the registration of the disputed trademarks. [Superior Commercial Enterprises v. Kunnan Enterprises (2010)] FALSE DESIGNATIONS OF ORIGIN; FALSE DESCRIPTION OR REPRESENTATION

Any person who, on or in connection with any goods or services, or any container for goods, uses in commerce any word, term, name, symbol, or device, or any combination thereof, or any false designation of origin, false or misleading description of fact, or false or misleading representation of fact, which: (a) Is likely to cause confusion, or to cause mistake, or to deceive as to the affiliation, connection, or association of such person with another person, or as to the origin, sponsorship, or approval of his or her goods, services,

Mighty Corporation v. E. & J. Gallo Winery (2004): A crucial issue in any trademark infringement case is the likelihood of confusion, mistake or deceit as to the identity, source or origin of the goods or identity of the business as a PAGE 152



or commercial activities by another person; [Sec. 169.1(a), RA 8293] (b) In commercial advertising or promotion, misrepresents the nature, characteristics, qualities, or geographic origin of his or her or another person's goods, services, or commercial activities, shall be liable to a civil action for damages and injunction [Sec. 169.1 (b), RA 8293]


the defendant had otherwise actual notice of the registration. [Sec. 158, RA 8293] Should damages be recoverable, the measure of the damages suffered shall be either: (a) The reasonable profit which the complaining party would have made, had the defendant not infringed his rights; or (b) The profit which the defendant actually made out of the infringement; or (c) A reasonable percentage based upon the amount of gross sales of the defendant or the value of the services in connection with which the mark or trade name was used in the infringement of the rights of the complaining party if such measure of damages cannot be readily ascertained with reasonable certainty. [Sec. 156.1, RA 8293]

Any goods marked or labeled in contravention of the provisions of this Section shall not be imported into the Philippines or admitted entry at any customhouse of the Philippines. The owner, importer, or consignee of goods refused entry at any customhouse under this section may have any recourse under the customs revenue laws or may have the remedy given by this Act in cases involving goods refused entry or seized. [Sec. 169.2, RA 8293] INFRINGEMENT OF NAME AND MARKS OF OWNERSHIP STAMP ON CONTAINERS

REQUIREMENT OF NOTICE

General Rule: It is unlawful for any person, without the consent of the manufacturer, bottler or seller who has registered the mark of ownership to fill such bottles, boxes, kegs, barrels or other containers so marked and stamped, for the purpose of sale, dispose of, or wantonly destroy the same, whether filled or not, to use the same for drinking vessels or drain pipes, foundation pipes, for any other purpose than that registered. [Sec. 2, RA 623 as amended by RA 5700]

Notice of registration of trademark is necessary for an owner of a trademark to recover damages in an action for infringement since knowledge that such imitation is likely to cause confusion, or to cause mistake, or to deceive is an element of infringement. Requirement of notice may be complied by displaying with the mark the words '"Registered Mark" or the letter R within a circle. [Sec. 158, RA 8293] OTHER REMEDIES AVAILABLE:

The use of the same without apparent permission from the trademark owners thereof shall be prima facie presumption that such possession or use is unlawful. [Sec. 3, RA 623 as amended by RA 5700]

(1) Injunction [Sec. 156.4]; (2) Impounding of sales invoices and other documents [Sec. 156.2]; (3) Double damages in case of actual intent to defraud or to mislead [Sec. 156.3]; (4) Court order for the disposal or destruction of the infringing goods [Sec. 157]; (5) Criminal Action; (6) Administration sanctions

Exceptions: (1) Use of the bottles as containers for sisi, bagoong, patis, and similar native products [Sec. 6 RA 623 as amended by RA 5700] (2) Persons in whose favor the containers were sold [Distelleria Washington v. LA Tondena Distillers (1997)]

Any foreign national, who qualifies under the principle on reciprocity and does not engage in business in the Philippines, whether or not it is licensed to do business in the Philippines, may bring civil or administrative action for: (1) Opposition (2) Cancellation (3) Infringement (4) Unfair Competition (5) False designation of origin or false description (Sec. 160. RA 8293)

DAMAGES

The owner of a registered mark may recover damages from any person who infringes his rights, and the measure of the damages suffered shall be either the reasonable profit which the complaining party would have made, had the defendant not infringed his rights, or the profit which the defendant actually made out of the infringement, or in the event such measure of damages cannot be readily ascertained with reasonable certainty, then the court may award as damages a reasonable percentage based upon the amount of gross sales of the defendant or the value of the services in connection with which the mark or trade name was used in the infringement of the rights of the complaining party. [Sec. 156.1, RA 8293]

LIMITATIONS TO ACTIONS FOR INFRINGEMENT

The remedies given to the owner of a right infringed shall be limited as follows: (a) Registered mark shall have no effect against any person who, in good faith, before the filing date or the priority date, was using the mark for the purposes of his business or enterprise: Provided, That his right may only be transferred or assigned together with his enterprise or business or with that part of his enterprise or business in which the mark is used. [Sec. 159.1, RA 8293]

The owner of the registered mark shall not be entitled to recover profits or damages unless the acts have been committed with knowledge that such imitation is likely to cause confusion, or to cause mistake, or to deceive. Such knowledge is presumed if the registrant gives notice that his mark is registered by displaying with the mark the words '"Registered Mark" or the letter R within a circle or if

(b) Where an infringer who is engaged solely in the business of printing the mark or other infringing PAGE 153



materials for others is an innocent infringer, the owner of the right infringed shall be entitled as against such infringer only to an injunction against future printing. [Sec. 159.2, RA 8293]


themselves or in the wrapping of the packages in which they are contained, or the devices or words thereon, or in any other feature of their appearance, which would be likely to influence purchasers to believe that the goods offered are those of a manufacturer or dealer, other than the actual manufacturer or dealer, or who otherwise clothes the goods with such appearance as shall deceive the public and defraud another of his legitimate trade, or any subsequent vendor of such goods or any agent of any vendor engaged in selling such goods with a like purpose; [Sec. 168.3(a), RA 8293]

(c) Where the infringement complained of is contained in or is part of paid advertisement in a newspaper, magazine, or other similar periodical or in an electronic communication, the remedies of the owner of the right infringed as against the publisher or distributor of such newspaper, magazine, or other similar periodical or electronic communication shall be limited to an injunction against the presentation of such advertising matter in future issues of such newspapers, magazines, or other similar periodicals or in future transmissions of such electronic communications.

(b) Any person who by any artifice, or device, or who employs any other means calculated to induce the false belief that such person is offering the services of another who has identified such services in the mind of the public; [Sec. 168.3(b), RA 8293]

The limitations shall apply only to innocent infringers: Provided, That such injunctive relief shall not be available to the owner of the right infringed with respect to an issue of a newspaper, magazine, or other similar periodical or an electronic communication containing infringing matter where restraining the dissemination of such infringing matter in any particular issue of such periodical or in an electronic communication would delay the delivery of such issue or transmission of such electronic communication is customarily conducted in accordance with the sound business practice, and not due to any method or device adopted to evade this section or to prevent or delay the issuance of an injunction or restraining order with respect to such infringing matter. [Sec. 159.3, RA 8293]

(c) Any person who shall make any false statement in the course of trade or who shall commit any other act contrary to good faith of a nature calculated to discredit the goods, business or services of another. (Sec. 168.3(c), RA 8293) McDonald’s Corporation v. L.G. Big Mak Burger, Inc., et al. (2004): The elements of an action for unfair competition are: (1) confusing similarity in the general appearance of the goods, and (2) intent to deceive the public and defraud a competitor. The confusing similarity may or may not result from similarity in the marks, but may result from other external factors in the packaging or presentation of the goods. The intent to deceive and defraud may be inferred from the similarity in appearance of the goods as offered for sale to the public. Actual fraudulent intent need not be shown.

(d) There shall be no infringement of trademarks or tradenames of imported or sold drugs and medicines allowed under Section 72.1 as well as imported or sold off-patent drugs and medicines: Provided, That said drugs and medicines bear the registered marks that have not been tampered, unlawfully modified, or infringed upon as defined under Section 155. [Sec. 159.4 RA 8293 as amended by RA 9502]

Caterpillar, Inc v. Samson (2006): An action for unfair competition is based on the proposition that no dealer in merchandise should be allowed to dress his goods in simulation of the goods of another dealer, so that purchasers desiring to buy the goods of the latter would be induced to buy the goods of the former. The most usual devices employed in committing this crime are the simulation of labels and the reproduction of form, color and general appearance of the package used by the pioneer manufacturer or dealer.

UNFAIR COMPETITION A person who has identified in the mind of the public the goods he manufactures or deals in, his business or services from those of others, whether or not a registered mark is employed, has a property right in the goodwill of the said goods, business or services so identified, which will be protected in the same manner as other property rights. [Sec. 168.1, RA 8293]

Coca-Cola v. Gomez (2008): Articles 168.1 and 168.2 provide the concept and general rule on the definition of unfair competition. The law does not thereby cover every unfair act committed in the course of business; it covers only acts characterized by “deception or any other means contrary to good faith” in the passing off of goods and services as those of another who has established goodwill in relation with these goods or services, or any other act calculated to produce the same result.

Any person who shall employ deception or any other means contrary to good faith by which he shall pass off the goods manufactured by him or in which he deals, or his business, or services for those of the one having established such goodwill, or who shall commit any acts calculated to produce said result, shall be guilty of unfair competition, and shall be subject to an action therefor. [Sec. 168.2, RA 8293]

What unfair competition is, is further particularized under Section 168.3 when it provides specifics of what unfair competition is “without in any way limiting the scope of protection against unfair competition.” Part of these particulars is provided under Section 168.3(c) which

The following shall be deemed guilty of unfair competition: (a) Any person, who is selling his goods and gives them the general appearance of goods of another manufacturer or dealer, either as to the goods PAGE 154



provides the general “catch-all” phrase that the petitioner cites. Under this phrase, a person shall be guilty of unfair competition “who shall commit any other act contrary to good faith of a nature calculated to discredit the goods, business or services of another.”

WHAT MAY NOT BE USED AS TRADE NAME

(1) If by its nature or the use to which the name or designation may be put, it is contrary to public order or morals. (2) If it is liable to deceive trade circles or the public as to the nature of the enterprise identified by the name (3) If the trade name is similar to a mark or a trade name owned by another person and its use would likely mislead the public. [Sec.165.1, RA 8293]

From jurisprudence, unfair competition has been defined as the passing off (or palming off) or attempting to pass off upon the public the goods or business of one person as the goods or business of another with the end and probable effect of deceiving the public. It formulated the “true test” of unfair competition: whether the acts of defendant are such as are calculated to deceive the ordinary buyer making his purchases under the ordinary conditions which prevail in the particular trade to which the controversy relates. One of the essential requisites in an action to restrain unfair competition is proof of fraud; the intent to deceive must be shown before the right to recover can exist. The advent of the IP Code has not significantly changed these rulings as they are fully in accord with what Section 168 of the Code in its entirety provides. Deception, passing off and fraud upon the public are still the key elements that must be present for unfair competition to exist. Infringement of Trademark Unauthorized trademark

use

Fraudulent unnecessary

intent

of


Acquisition of ownership: Trade names are protected even prior to or without registration. The ownership of a trade name is acquired through adoption and use. Right of owner: The IPC deems unlawful any subsequent use of the trade name by a third party, whether as a trade name or a mark or collective mark, or any such use of a similar trade name or mark, likely to mislead the public. [Sec. 165.2 (b), RA 8293] Trade names, unlike trademarks, need not be registered with the IPO before an infringement suit may be filed by its owner against the owner of an infringing trademark. All that is required is that the trade name is previously used in trade or commerce in the Philippines. [Prosource International v. Horphag Research Management (2009)]

Unfair Competition

COLLECTIVE MARKS A Collective mark is any visible sign designated as such in the application for registration and capable of distinguishing the origin or any other common characteristic, including the quality of goods or services of different enterprises which use the sign under the control of the registered owner of the collective mark [Sec. 121.2]

a Passing off of one’s goods as those of another is Fraudulent intent is essential

An application for registration of a collective mark shall designate the mark as a collective mark and shall be accompanied by a copy of the agreement, if any, governing the use of the collective mark. [Sec. 167.2, Ra 8293]

Prior registration of the Registration is not necessary trademark is a prerequisite to the action

GROUNDS FOR CANCELLATION

[Del Monte Corporation, et al. v. CA (1990)]

In addition to the grounds under Section 149, the Court shall cancel the registration of a collective mark if the person requesting the cancellation proves: (1) That only the registered owner uses the mark; or (2) That he uses or permits its use in contravention of the agreements referred to in Subsection 166.2; or (3) That he uses or permits its use in a manner liable to deceive trade circles or the public as to the origin or any other common characteristics of the goods or services concerned. [Sec. 167.3, RA 8293]

The law on unfair competition is broader and more inclusive than the law on trademark infringement. The latter is more limited but it recognizes a more exclusive right derived from the trademark adoption and registration by the person whose goods or business is first associated with it. Hence, even if one fails to establish his exclusive property right to a trademark, he may still obtain relief on the ground of his competitor’s unfairness or fraud. Conduct constitutes unfair competition if the effect is to pass off on the public the goods of one man as the goods of another. [Mighty Corporation v. E. & J. Gallo Winery (2004)]

The registration of a collective mark, or an application therefor shall not be the subject of a license contract. [Sec. 167.4, RA 8293]

TRADE NAMES OR BUSINESS NAMES It is the name or designation identifying or distinguishing an enterprise. [Sec. 121.3, RA 8293]

Copyrights

Any individual name or surname, firm name, device or word used by manufacturers, industrialists, merchants, and others to identify their businesses, vocations or occupations [Converse Rubber Corp. v. Universal Rubber Products, Inc. (1980)]

DEFINITION Is that system of legal protection an author enjoys of the form of expression of ideas. [Aquino, Intellectual Property Law] PAGE 155



BASIC PRINCIPLES, SECTIONS 172.2, 175 AND 181


(i) Illustrations, maps, plans, sketches, charts and threedimensional works relative to geography, topography, architecture or science; (j) Drawings or plastic works of a scientific or technical character; (k) Photographic works including works produced by a process analogous to photography; lantern slides; (l) Audiovisual works and cinematographic works and works produced by a process analogous to cinematography or any process for making audio-visual recordings; (m) Pictorial illustrations and advertisements; (n) Computer programs; and (o) Other literary, scholarly, scientific and artistic works

WORKS ARE PROTECTED BY THE SOLE FACT OF THEIR CREATION Principle of Automatic Protection: Copyright is vested from the very moment of creation. [Sec. 172.2, RA 8293] The enjoyment and exercise of copyright, including moral rights, shall not be the subject of any formality; such enjoyment and such exercise shall be independent of the existence of protection in the country of origin of the work. [Article 5(2), Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works] The Denicola Test in intellectual property law states that if design elements of an article reflect a merger of aesthetic and functional considerations, the artistic aspects of the work cannot be conceptually separable from the utilitarian aspects; thus, the article cannot be copyrighted.

When a work is considered original: (1) The work is an independent creation of the author; and (2) It must not be copied from the work of another. A person to be entitled to a copyright must be the original creator of the work. He must have created it by his own skill, labor and judgment without directly copying or evasively imitating the work of another. [Ching Kian Chuan vs. CA (2001)]

PROTECTION EXTENDS ONLY TO THE EXPRESSION OF AN IDEA, NOT THE IDEA ITSELF. No protection shall extend, under this law, to any idea, procedure, system method or operation, concept, principle, discovery or mere data as such, even if they are expressed, explained, illustrated or embodied in a work. [Sec 175, RA 8293]

By originality is meant that the material was not copied, and evidences at least minimal creativity; that it was independently created by the author and that it possesses at least some minimal degree of creativity. Copying is shown by proof of access to copyrighted material and substantial similarity between the two works. The applicant must thus demonstrate the existence and validity of copyright because in the absence of copyright protection, even the original creation may be freely copied. [Ching v. Salinas (2005)]

THE COPYRIGHT IS DISTINCT FROM THE PROPERTY IN THE MATERIAL OBJECT SUBJECT TO IT. [Sec 181, RA 8293] COPYRIGHT IS A STATUTORY RIGHT.

Copyright, in the strict sense of the term is purely a statutory right. Being a mere statutory grant, the rights are limited to what the statute confers. It may be obtained and enjoyed only with respect to the subjects and by the persons, and on terms and conditions specified in the statute. Accordingly, it can cover only the works falling within the statutory enumeration or description. [Pearl and Dean vs. Shoemart (2003)]

Originality is not determined by novelty, aesthetic merit or ingenuity but that it is an independent creation. The requirement in US Law that the expression should be fixed in a tangible medium is not applicable here since our law expressly provides that works are protected irrespective of their mode or form of expression. [Sec. 172.2, RA 8293]

COPYRIGHTABLE WORKS ORIGINAL LITERARY AND ARTISTIC WORKS

Sec. 172.1, RA 8293. Literary and artistic works, hereinafter referred to as "works", are original intellectual creations in the literary and artistic domain protected from the moment of their creation and shall include in particular: (a) Books, pamphlets, articles and other writings; (b) Periodicals and newspapers; (c) Lectures, sermons, addresses, dissertations prepared for oral delivery, whether or not reduced in writing or other material form; (d) Letters; (e) Dramatic or dramatico-musical compositions; choreographic works or entertainment in dumb shows; (f) Musical compositions, with or without words; (g) Works of drawing, painting, architecture, sculpture, engraving, lithography or other works of art; models or designs for works of art; (h) Original ornamental designs or models for articles of manufacture, whether or not registrable as an industrial design, and other works of applied art;

DERIVATIVE WORKS

The following derivative works shall also be protected by copyright: (a) Dramatizations, translations, adaptations, abridgments, arrangements, and other alterations of literary or artistic works; and (b) Collections of literary, scholarly or artistic works, and compilations of data and other materials which are original by reason of the selection or coordination or arrangement of their contents. [Sec. 173.1, RA 8293] Derivative works are protected as new works provided they shall not: (a) Affect the force of any subsisting copyright upon the original works employed or any part thereof; or (b) Be construed to imply any right to such use of the original works, or to secure or extend copyright in such original works. [Sec. 173.2, RA 8293] PAGE 156



NON-COPYRIGHTABLE WORKS


In writing judicial decisions, a judge should make the proper attribution in copying passages from any judicial decision, statute, regulation, or other Works of the Government. However, the failure to make such attribution does not violate the Law on Copyright. The law expressly provides that Works of the Government are not subject to copyright. This means that there is neither a legal right by anyone to demand attribution, nor any legal obligation from anyone to make an attribution, when Works of the Government are copied. The failure to make the proper attribution of a Work of the Government is not actionable but is merely a case of sloppy writing. Clearly, there is no legal obligation, by a judge or by any person, to make an attribution when copying Works of the Government. However, misquoting or twisting, with or without attribution, any judicial decision, statute, regulation or other Works of the Government in judicial writing, if done to mislead the parties or the public, is actionable. [J. Carpio Dissenting Opinion, In The Matter Of the Charges of Plagiarism, Etc., Against Assoc. Justice Mariano Del Castillo, A.M. 10-7-17-SC (2011)]

UNPROTECTED SUBJECT MATTER

(a) Any idea, procedure, system method or operation, concept, principle, discovery or mere data as such, even if they are expressed, explained, illustrated or embodied in a work; (b) News of the day and other miscellaneous facts having the character of mere items of press information; (c) Any official text of a legislative, administrative or legal nature, as well as any official translation thereof; (d) Pleadings; (e) Original decisions of courts and tribunals (This pertains to the “original decisions” not the SCRA published volumes since these are protected under derivative works under Sec 173.1) [Sec. 175, RA 8293] The format or mechanics of a TV show is not copyrightable as copyright does not extend to ideas, procedures, processes, systems, methods of operation, concepts, principles or discoveries regardless of the form in which they are described, explained, illustrated or embodied. [Joaquin Jr. et al vs. Drilon, et al (1999)]

WORKS OF THE PUBLIC DOMAIN

These include works whose term of copyright has expired. USEFUL ARTICLES

Useful Article Doctrine: Works whose sole purpose is utilitarian have no separate artistic value. This can be distinguished from a work of applied art, which has utilitarian functions but there is an identifiable artistic work or creation incorporated thereto.

No one may claim originality as to facts as these do not owe their origin to an act of authorship. The first person to find and report a particular fact has not created the same; he has merely discovered its existence. [Feist Publication v Rural Telephone Services (1991)]

RIGHTS OF COPYRIGHT OWNER

WORKS OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES

COPYRIGHT OR ECONOMIC RIGHTS

Work of the Government of the Philippines: Is a work created by an officer or employee of the Philippine Government or any of its subdivisions and instrumentalities, including government-owned or controlled corporations as a part of his regularly prescribed official duties. [Sec. 171.11, RA 8293]

Copyright or economic rights shall consist of the exclusive right to carry out, authorize or prevent the following acts: (a) Reproduction of the work or substantial portion of the work; [Sec. 177.1, RA 8293] (b) Dramatization, translation, adaptation, abridgment, arrangement or other transformation of the work; [Sec. 177.2, RA 8293]

General Rule: Government cannot own copyright Exceptions: (1) When copyright is assigned or bequested in favor of the government [Sec 176.3]; (2) Author of speeches, lectures, sermons, addresses and dissertations shall have exclusive right of making a collection of his work.

(c) The first public distribution of the original and each copy of the work by sale or other forms of transfer of ownership; [Sec. 177.3, RA 8293] (d) Rental of the original or a copy of an audiovisual or cinematographic work, a work embodied in a sound recording, a computer program, a compilation of data and other materials or a musical work in graphic form, irrespective of the ownership of the original or the copy which is the subject of the rental; [Sec. 177.4, RA 8293]

However, prior approval of the government agency or the office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for the exploitation of such work for profit. [Sec. 176.1] Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, the Government is not precluded from receiving and holding copyrights transferred to it by assignment, bequest or otherwise; nor shall publication or republication by the Government in a public document of any work in which copyright is subsisting be taken to cause any abridgment or annulment of the copyright or to authorize any use or appropriation of such work without the consent of the copyright owner. [Sec. 176.3, RA 8293]

(e) Public display of the original or a copy of the work; [Sec. 177.5, RA 8293] (f) Public performance of the work; [Sec. 177.6, RA 8293] (g) Other communication to the public of the work [Sec. 177.7, RA 8293]

PAGE 157




MORAL RIGHTS [SEC. 193]

Economic rights also give the author the right to assign the copyright and/or the material object in whole or in part, and they allow the owner to derive financial reward from the use of his works by others. [Sec. 180.1, RA 8293]

The author of a work shall, independently of the economic rights in Section 177 or the grant of an assignment or license with respect to such right, have the right: (1) To require that the authorship of the works be attributed to him, in particular, the right that his name, as far as practicable, be indicated in a prominent way on the copies, and in connection with the public use of his work; [Sec. 193.1, RA 8293]

Copyright in a work of architecture: shall include the right to control the erection of any building which reproduces the whole or a substantial part of the work either in its original form or in any form recognizably derived from the original: Provided, That the copyright in any such work shall not include the right to control the reconstruction or rehabilitation in the same style as the original of a building to which that copyright relates. [Sec. 186, RA 8293]

(2) To make any alterations of his work prior to, or to withhold it from publication; [Sec. 193.2, RA 8293] (3) To object to any distortion, mutilation or other modification of, or other derogatory action in relation to, his work which would be prejudicial to his honor or reputation; [Sec. 193.3, RA 8293]

Communication to the Public of Copyrighted Works: Includes point-to-point transmission of a work, including video on demand, and providing access to an electronic retrieval system, such as computer databases, servers, or similar electronic storage devices. Broadcasting, rebroadcasting, retransmission by cable, and broadcast and retransmission by satellite are all acts of “communication to the public” within the meaning of the IPC. [Rule 11, Copyright Safeguards and Regulations]

(4) To restrain the use of his name with respect to any work not of his own creation or in a distorted version of his work. [Sec. 193.4, RA 8293] In addition to the right to publish granted by the author, his heirs, or assigns, the publisher shall have a copyright consisting merely of the right of reproduction of the typographical arrangement of the published edition of the work. [Sec.174, RA 8293]

First Public Distribution of Work: An exclusive right of first distribution of work includes all acts involving distribution, specifically including the first importation of an original and each copy of the work into the jurisdiction of the Republic of the Philippines. [Rule 12, Copyright Safeguards and Regulations]

The author of speeches, lectures, sermons, addresses, and dissertations mentioned in the preceding paragraphs shall have the exclusive right of making a collection of his works. [Sec. 176.2, Ra 8293]

Civil Code Provisions on Ownership of Intellectual Creation: Article 721. By intellectual creation, the following persons acquire ownership: (1) The author with regard to his literary, dramatic, historical, legal, philosophical, scientific or other work; (2) The composer; as to his musical composition; (3) The painter, sculptor, or other artist, with respect to the product of his art; (4) The scientist or technologist or any other person with regard to his discovery or invention.

WAIVER OF MORAL RIGHTS

General Rule: Moral rights can be waived in writing, expressly stating such waiver [Sec. 195, RA 8293] or by contribution to a collective work unless such is expressly reserved [Sec. 196, RA 8293]. Exceptions: Even if made in writing, waiver is still not valid if: (a) Use of the name of the author, title of his work, or his reputation with respect to any version or adaptation of his work, which because of alterations substantially tends to injure the literary or artistic reputation of another author; [Sec. 195.1, RA 8293] (b) It uses the name of the author in a work that he did not create. [Sec. 195.1, RA 8293]

Article 722. The author and the composer, mentioned in Nos. 1 and 2 of the preceding article, shall have the ownership of their creations even before the publication of the same. Once their works are published, their rights are governed by the Copyright laws.

Moral rights are not assignable or subject to license. [Sec. 198, RA 8293]

The painter, sculptor or other artist shall have dominion over the product of his art even before it is copyrighted. The scientist or technologist has the ownership of his discovery or invention even before it is patented.

RIGHTS TO PROCEEDS IN SUBSEQUENT TRANSFERS (DROIT DE SUITE OR FOLLOW UP RIGHTS)

In every sale or lease of an original work of painting or sculpture or of the original manuscript of a writer or composer, subsequent to the first disposition thereof by the author, the author or his heirs shall have an inalienable right to participate in the gross proceeds of the sale or lease to the extent of five percent (5%). This right shall exist during the lifetime of the author and for fifty (50) years after his death. [Sec. 200, RA 8293]

Article 723. Letters and other private communications in writing are owned by the person to whom they are addressed and delivered, but they cannot be published or disseminated without the consent of the writer or his heirs. However, the court may authorize their publication or dissemination if the public good or the interest of justice so requires.

PAGE 158



Works not covered: Prints, etchings, engravings, works of applied art, or works of similar kind wherein the author primarily derives gain from the proceeds of reproductions. (Sec. 201, RA 8293)


remuneration equivalent to at least five percent (5%) of the original compensation he or she received for the first communication or broadcast. [Sec. 206, RA 8293] RIGHTS OF PRODUCERS OF SOUND RECORDING

First Sale Doctrine: After the first sale of the lawfully made copy of the copyrighted work, anyone who is the owner of that copy can sell or dispose of that copy in any way without any liability for copyright infringement. The first sale of an authorized copy of the work exhausts the author’s right to control distribution of copies.

(1) The right to authorize the direct or indirect reproduction of their sound recordings, in any manner or form; the placing of these reproductions in the market and the right of rental or lending; [Sec. 208.1, RA 8293] (2) The right to authorize the first public distribution of the original and copies of their sound recordings through sale or rental or other forms of transferring ownership; [Sec. 208.2, RA 8293]

NEIGHBORING RIGHTS PERFORMER’S RIGHTS

(1) As regards their performances, the right of authorizing: (a) The broadcasting and other communication to the public of their performance; and (b) The fixation of their unfixed performance. [Sec. 203.1, RA 8293]

(3) The right to authorize the commercial rental to the public of the original and copies of their sound recordings, even after distribution by them by or pursuant to authorization by the producer. [Sec. 208.3, RA 8293]

Such right shall be maintained and exercised fifty (50) years after his death, by his heirs, and in default of heirs, the government, where protection is claimed. [Sec. 204.2, RA 8293]

(4) If a sound recording published for commercial purposes, or a reproduction of such sound recording, is used directly for broadcasting or for other communication to the public, or is publicly performed with the intention of making and enhancing profit, a single equitable remuneration for the performer or performers, and the producer of the sound recording shall be paid by the user to both the performers and the producer, who, in the absence of any agreement shall share equally. [Sec. 209, RA 8293]

(2) The right of authorizing the direct or indirect reproduction of their performances fixed in sound recordings, in any manner or form; [Sec. 203.2, RA 8293] (3) Subject to the provisions of Section 206, the right of authorizing the first public distribution of the original and copies of their performance fixed in the sound recording through sale or rental or other forms of transfer of ownership; [Sec. 203.3, RA 8293]

RIGHTS OF BROADCASTING ORGANIZATIONS

(1) The rebroadcasting of their broadcasts; [Sec. 211.1, RA 8293]

(4) The right of authorizing the commercial rental to the public of the original and copies of their performances fixed in sound recordings, even after distribution of them by, or pursuant to the authorization by the performer; [Sec. 203.4, RA 8293]

(2) The recording in any manner, including the making of films or the use of video tape, of their broadcasts for the purpose of communication to the public of television broadcasts of the same; [Sec. 211.2, RA 8293] (3) The use of such records for fresh transmissions or for fresh recording. [Sec. 211.3, RA 8293]

(5) The right of authorizing the making available to the public of their performances fixed in sound recordings, by wire or wireless means, in such a way that members of the public may access them from a place and time individually chosen by them. [Sec. 203.5, RA 8293]

Must-Carry Rule: Prevents cable television companies from excluding broadcasting organization especially in those places not reached by signal. Also, the rule prevents cable television companies from depriving viewers in far-flung areas the enjoyment of programs available to city viewers. [ABS-CBN Broadcasting vs. Philippine Multi-Media System (2009)]

(6) Independently of a performer's economic rights, the performer, shall, as regards his live aural performances or performances fixed in sound recordings, have the right to claim to be identified as the performer of his performances, except where the omission is dictated by the manner of the use of the performance, and to object to any distortion, mutilation or other modification of his performances that would be prejudicial to his reputation. [Sec. 204.1, RA 8293]

Limitations on Protection Sections 203, 208 and 209 shall not apply where the acts referred to in those Sections are related to: (1) The use by a natural person exclusively for his own personal purposes; (2) Using short excerpts for reporting current events; (3) Use solely for the purpose of teaching or for scientific research; and (4) Fair use of the broadcast subject to certain conditions. (Sec. 212, RA 8293)

(7) Unless otherwise provided in the contract, in every communication to the public or broadcast of a performance subsequent to the first communication or broadcast thereof by the broadcasting organization, the performer shall be entitled to an additional PAGE 159



Term of Protection Works For performances incorporated in recordings


Term not Fifty (50) years from the end of the year in which the performance took place [Sec. 215.1(a), RA 8293]

For sound or image and sound Fifty (50) years from the end recordings and for performances of the year in which the recording took place. [Sec. incorporated therein 215.1(b), RA 8293]

Broadcasts

Twenty (20) years from the date the broadcast took place [Sec. 215.2, RA 8293]

RULES ON OWNERSHIP OF COPYRIGHT OWNERSHIP OF COPYRIGHT

Work

Ownership

Single Creator of an Original Work

Belongs to the author of the work [Sec. 178.1, RA 8293]

Works of Joint Authorship

Belongs of the co-authors; in the absence of agreement, their rights shall be governed by the rules on co-ownership. However, if the work consists of parts that can be used separately and identified, the author of each part owns the copyright of the part he has created. [Sec. 178.2, RA 8293; Asked in ‘95, ‘04]

Work created during the course of employment

Belongs to the employee if the creation is not a part of his regular duties, even if he used the time, facilities and materials of the employer. However, belongs to the employer if the work is in the performance of the employee’s regular duties unless there is an agreement to the contrary. [Sec. 178.3, RA 8293; Asked in ‘08]

Work commissioned by a person other than the employer

The person who commissioned the work holds ownership of the work per se, but copyright remains with the creator unless there was a stipulation to the contrary. [Sec. 178.4, RA 8293; Asked in ‘95, ‘04]

Audio visual works

Belongs to the producer, author of the scenario, composer of the music, film director, and author of the adapted work. However, subject to stipulations, the producers shall exercise the copyright as may be required for the exhibition of the work, except for the right to collect license fees for the performance of musical compositions in the work. [Sec. 178.5, RA 8293]

Letters

Belongs to the writer, but the court may authorize their publication or dissemination of the public good or interest of justice requires, pursuant to Art. 723, New Civil Code. [Sec. 178.6, RA 8293]

PAGE 160




Anonymous and pseudonymous works

Publishers are deemed to represent the authors, unless the contrary appears, the pseudonyms or adopted names leave no doubt as to the author’s identity or if the author discloses his identity. [Sec. 179, RA 8293]

Collective works

A contributor is deemed to have waived his right unless he expressly reserves it. [Sec. 196, RA 8293]

DURATION OF COPYRIGHT

Works

Term

Original Literary and Artistic Works including Posthumous Works Lifetime of author and for fifty (50) years after his death (Sec 213.1, RA 8293) Derivative Works including Posthumous Works

Lifetime of author and for fifty (50) years after his death [Sec 213.1, RA 8293]

Joint Authorship

Lifetime of the last surviving author and for fifty (50) years after his death (Sec 213.2, RA 8293)

Anonymous or Pseudonymous Works

Fifty (50) years from date of first lawful publication [Sec. 213.3, RA 8293]

Applied Art

Twenty-five (25) years from date of making [Sec. 213.4, RA 8293]

Published Photographic Works

Fifty (50) years from publication [Sec. 213.5, RA 8293]

Unpublished Photographic Works

Fifty (50) years from the making [Sec. 213.5, RA 8293]

Published Audio-visual Works

Fifty (50) years from publication [Sec. 213.6, RA 8293]

Unpublished Audio-visual Works

Fifty (50) years from the making [Sec. 213.6, RA 8293]

the rights and remedies which the assignor had with respect to the copyright. [Sec. 180.1, RA 8293]

PRESUMPTION OF AUTHORSHIP

The natural person whose name is indicated on a work in the usual manner as the author shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be the author of the work. This provision shall be applicable even if the name is a pseudonym, where the pseudonym leaves no doubt as to the identity of the author. The person or body, corporate whose name appears on an audio-visual work in the usual manner shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be the maker of said work. [Sec. 219, RA 8293]

The copyright is not deemed assigned inter vivos in whole or in part unless there is a written indication of such intention. [Sec. 180.2, RA 8293] The submission of a literary, photographic or artistic work to a newspaper, magazine or periodical for publication shall constitute only a license to make a single publication unless a greater right is expressly granted. If two (2) or more persons jointly own a copyright or any part thereof, neither of the owners shall be entitled to grant licenses without the prior written consent of the other owner or owners. [Sec. 180.3, RA 8293]

The term of protection subsequent to the death of the author shall run from the date of his death or of publication, but such terms shall always be deemed to begin on the first day of January of the year following the event which gave rise to them. [Sec. 214, RA 8293]

The transfer or assignment of copyright shall not itself constitute a transfer of the materials object. A transfer or assignment of the copyright of the sole copy or one of the

TRANSFER OR ASSIGNMENT OF COPYRIGHT

The copyright may be assigned in whole or in part. Within the scope of the assignment, the assignee is entitled to all PAGE 161

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


several copies of the work shall not imply transfer or assignment of copyright [Sec. 181, RA 8293] The copyright owners or their heirs may designate a society of artists, writers or composers to enforce their economic rights and moral rights on their behalf. [Sec. 183, RA 8293]


of the copyright, of anything the sole right to do which is conferred by statute on the owner of the copyright. For there to be substantial reproduction of a book, it does not necessarily require that the entire copyrighted work, or even a large portion of it, be copied. If so much is taken that the value of the original work is substantially diminished, there is an infringement of copyright and to an injurious extent, the work appropriated. It is no defense that the pirate did not know whether or not he was infringing any copyright; he at least knew that what he was copying was not his, and he copied at his peril. In cases of infringement, copying alone is not what is prohibited. The copying must produce an “injurious effect.”

LIMITATIONS ON COPYRIGHT DOCTRINE OF FAIR USE

The fair use of copyrighted work for criticism, news reporting, teaching (including multiple copies for classroom use), research and similar purposes is not an infringement of copyright. A PRIVILEGE, IN PERSONS OTHER THAN THE OWNER OF THE COPYRIGHT, TO USE THE COPYRIGHTED MATERIAL IN A REASONABLE MANNER WITHOUT HIS CONSENT, NOTWITHSTANDING THE MONOPOLY GRANTED TO THE OWNER BY THE COPYRIGHT. IT IS MEANT TO BALANCE THE MONOPOLIES ENJOYED BY THE COPYRIGHT OWNER WITH THE INTERESTS OF THE PUBLIC AND OF SOCIETY.

Copyright infringement and unfair competition are not limited to the act of selling counterfeit goods. They cover a whole range of acts from copying, assembling, packaging to marketing, including the mere offering for sale of counterfeit goods. [Microsoft Corp vs. Maxicorp Inc. (2004)] Columbia Pictures v. CA (1996): A copy of a piracy is an infringement of the original, and it is no defense that the pirate, in such cases, did not know what works he was indirectly copying, or did not know whether or not he was infringing any copyright; he at least knew that what he was copying was not his, and he copied at his peril. In determining the question of infringement, the amount of matter copied from the copyrighted work is an important consideration. To constitute infringement, it is not necessary that the whole or even a large portion of the work shall have been copied. If so much is taken that the value of the original is sensibly diminished, or the labors of the original author are substantially and to an injurious extent appropriated by another, that is sufficient in point of law to constitute a piracy.

DECOMPILATION: REFERS TO THE REPRODUCTION OF THE CODE AND TRANSLATION OF THE FORMS OF THE COMPUTER PROGRAM TO ACHIEVE THE INTEROPERABILITY OF AN INDEPENDENTLY CREATED COMPUTER PROGRAM WITH OTHER PROGRAMS. THIS MAY ALSO CONSTITUTE FAIR USE [SEC. 185.1, RA 8293]. The fact that a work is unpublished shall not by itself bar a finding of fair use if such finding is made upon consideration of all the above factors. [Sec 185.2, RA 8293] Factors to consider in determining Fair Use (1) The purpose and character of the use, including whether such use is of a commercial nature or is for non-profit educational purposes; (2) The nature of the copyrighted work; (3) The amount and substantiality of the portion used in relation to the copyrighted work as a whole; and (4) The effect of the use upon the potential market for or value of the copyrighted work [Sec. 185.1, RA 8293; (Harper & Row v. Nation Enterprise, 471 US 539, 105 S.Ct. 2218, 85 L.Ed.2d 588]

THE FOLLOWING SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT: (a) Recitation or performance of a work once it has been made accessible to the public if (1) privately done AND free of charge OR (2) strictly for a charitable or religious institution; [Sec. 184.1(a), RA 8293]

COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT

(b) Making of quotations from a published work: (i) compatible with fair use, (ii) extent is justified by the purpose, (iii) source and name of the author, appearing on work, must be mentioned; [Sec. 184.1(b), RA 8293]

Infringement of Copyright and Related Rights: means any violation of the rights under the Intellectual Property Code and/or the applicable Intellectual Property Law, including the act of any person who at the time when copyright subsists in a work has in his possession an article which he known, or ought to know, to be an infringing copy of the work f or the purpose of: (a) Selling, letting for hire, or by way of trade offering or exposing for sale, or hire, the article (b) Distributing the article for purpose of trade, or for any other purpose to an extent that will prejudice the rights of the copyright owner in the work; or (c) Trade exhibit of the article in public. [Sec. 1(l), Rule 1, Rules and Regulations on Administrative Complaints for Violation of Laws involving Intellectual Property Rights]

(c) Reproduction or communication to the public by mass media of articles on current political, social, economic, scientific or religious topic, lectures, addresses and other works, delivered in public: (i) for information purposes, (ii) not expressly reserved, and (iii) source is already indicated; [Sec. 184.1(c), RA 8293] (d) Reproduction and communication to the public of literary, scientific or artistic works as part of reports of current events by means of photography, cinematography or broadcasting to the extent necessary for the purpose; [Sec. 184.1(d), RA 8293]

Habana et al vs. Robles et al. (1999): Infringement consists in the doing by any person, without the consent of the owner PAGE 162

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


(e) Inclusion of a work in a publication, broadcast or other communication to the public, sound recording or film if made by way of illustration for teaching purposes compatible with fair use and the source and the name of the author appearing on work, must be mentioned; [Sec. 184.1(e), RA 8293]


make a single copy of the work by reprographic reproduction: (a) Where the work by reason of its fragile character or rarity cannot be lent to user in its original form; (b) Where the works are isolated articles contained in composite works or brief portions of other published works and the reproduction is necessary to supply them, when this is considered expedient, to persons requesting their loan for purposes of research or study instead of lending the volumes or booklets which contain them; and (c) Where the making of such a copy is in order to preserve and, if necessary in the event that it is lost, destroyed or rendered unusable, replace a copy, or to replace, in the permanent collection of another similar library or archive, a copy which has been lost, destroyed or rendered unusable and copies are not available with the publisher. [Sec. 188.1, RA 8293]

(f) Recording made in schools, universities, or educational institutions of a work included in a broadcast for the use of schools, universities or educational institutions. Such recording must be deleted within a reasonable period; such recording may not be made from audio-visual works which are part of the general cinema, repertoire of feature films except of brief excerpts of the work; [Sec. 184.1(f), RA 8293] (g) Making of ephemeral recordings; (i) by a broadcasting organization, (ii) by means of its work or facilities, (iii) for use in its own broadcast; [Sec. 184.1(g), RA 8293]

It shall not be permissible to produce a volume of a work published in several volumes or to produce missing tomes or pages of magazines or similar works, unless the volume, tome or part is out of stock: Provided, That every library which, by law, is entitled to receive copies of a printed work, shall be entitled, when special reasons so require, to reproduce a copy of a published work which is considered necessary for the collection of the library but which is out of stock. [Sec. 188.2, RA 8293)]

(h) Use made of a work by or under the direction or control of the government for public interest compatible with fair use; [Sec. 184.1(h), RA 8293] (i) Public performance or the communication to the public of a work in a place where no admission fee is charged by a club on institution for charitable or educational purpose only and the aim is not profit-making; [Sec. 184.1(i), RA 8293]

Reproduction of Computer Program The reproduction in one (1) back-up copy or adaptation of a computer program shall be permitted, without the authorization of the author of, or other owner of copyright in, a computer program, by the lawful owner of that computer program: Provided, That the copy or adaptation is necessary for: (a) The use of the computer program in conjunction with a computer for the purpose, and to the extent, for which the computer program has been obtained; and (b) Archival purposes, and, for the replacement of the lawfully owned copy of the computer program in the event that the lawfully obtained copy of the computer program is lost, destroyed or rendered unusable. [Sec. 189.1, RA 8293]

(j) Public display of the original or a copy of the work not made by means of a film, slide, television, image or otherwise on screen or by means of any other device or process either the work has been published, sold, given away, or transferred to another person by the author or his successor in title; [Sec. 184.1(j), RA 8293] (k) Use made of a work for the purpose of any judicial proceedings or for the giving of professional advice by a legal practitioner. [Sec. 184.1(k), RA 8293] Reproduction of Published Work General Rule: The private reproduction of a published work in a single copy, where the reproduction is made by a natural person exclusively for research and private study, shall be permitted, without the authorization of the owner of copyright in the work. [Sec. 187.1, RA 8293]

No copy or adaptation mentioned in this Section shall be used for any purpose other than the ones determined in this Section, and any such copy or adaptation shall be destroyed in the event that continued possession of the copy of the computer program ceases to be lawful. [Sec. 189.2, RA 8293] Importation for Personal Purposes The importation of a copy of a work by an individual for his personal purposes shall be permitted without the authorization of the author of, or other owner of copyright in, the work under the following circumstances: (a) When copies of the work are not available in the Philippines and: (1) Not more than one (1) copy at one time is imported for strictly individual use only; or (2) The importation is by authority of and for the use of the Philippine Government; or (3) The importation, consisting of not more than three (3) such copies or likenesses in any one invoice, is not

Exceptions: Such permission shall not extend to: (a) A work of architecture in the form of building or other construction; (b) An entire book, or a substantial part thereof, or of a musical work in graphic form by reprographic means; (c) A compilation of data and other materials; (d) A computer program except as provided in Section 189; and (e) Any work in cases where reproduction would unreasonably conflict with a normal exploitation of the work or would otherwise unreasonably prejudice the legitimate interests of the author. [187.2, RA 8293] Reprographic Reproduction by Libraries Any library or archive whose activities are not for profit may, without the authorization of the author of copyright owner, PAGE 163

UP COLLEGE OF LAW


for sale but for the use only of any religious, charitable, or educational society or institution duly incorporated or registered, or is for the encouragement of the fine arts, or for any state school, college, university, or free public library in the Philippines. (b) When such copies form parts of libraries and personal baggage belonging to persons or families arriving from foreign countries and are not intended for sale: Provided, that such copies do not exceed three (3). [Sec. 190.1, RA 8293]


Copies imported as allowed by this Section may not lawfully be used in any way to violate the rights of owner the copyright or annul or limit the protection secured by this Act, and such unlawful use shall be deemed an infringement and shall be punishable as such without prejudice to the proprietor's right of action. [Sec. 190.2, RA 8293]

PAGE 164

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS

PAGE 165


UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS

Chattel and Real Estate Mortgage Laws


The provisions of existing laws to the contrary notwithstanding, anonymous accounts, accounts under fictitious names, and all other similar accounts shall be absolutely prohibited. Peso and foreign currency nonchecking numbered accounts shall be allowed. The BSP may conduct annual testing solely limited to the determination of the existence and true identity of the owners of such accounts.

[Excluded and made part of the Civil Law coverage.]

Anti-Money Laundering Act

RECORD KEEPING

All records of all transactions of covered institutions shall bemaintained and safely stored for five (5) years from the dates of transactions. With respect to closed accounts, the records on customer identification, account files and businesscorrespondence, shall be preserved and safely stored for at least five (5) years from the dates when they were closed.

(R.A. No. 9160, as amended by R.A. No. 9194) DEFINITION Money laundering is a crime whereby the proceeds of an unlawful activity are transacted, thereby making them appear to have originated from legitimate sources. (Sec. 4, RA 9160)

REPORTING OF COVERED AND SUSPICIOUS TRANSACTIONS

POLICY OF THE LAW It is the policy of the State to protect and preserve the integrity and confidentiality of bank accounts and to ensure that the Philippines shall not be used as a money laundering site for the proceeds of any unlawful activity. Consistent with its foreign policy, the State shall extend cooperation in transnational investigations and prosecutions of persons involved in money laundering activities whenever committed. (Sec. 2, RA 9160)

Covered institutions shall report to the AMLC all covered transactions and suspicious transactions within five (5) working days from occurrence thereof, unless the Supervising Authority prescribes a longer period notexceeding ten (10) working days. Should a transaction be determined to be both a covered transaction and a suspicious transaction, the covered institution shall be required to report the same as a suspicious transaction.

COVERED INSTITUTIONS (1) banks, non-banks, quasi-banks, trust entities, and all other institutions and their subsidiaries and affiliates supervised or regulated by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP); (2) Insurance companies and all other institutions supervised or regulated by the Insurance Commission; and (3) (i) securities dealers, brokers, salesmen, investment houses and other similar entities managing securities or rendering services as investment agent, advisor, or consultant, (ii) mutual funds, close and investment companies, common trust funds, pre-need companies and other similar entities, (iii) foreign exchange corporations, money changers, money payment, remittance, and transfer companies and other similar entities, and (iv) other entities administering or otherwise dealing in currency, commodities or financial derivatives based thereon, valuable objects, cash substitutes and other similar monetary instruments or property supervised or regulated by Securities and Exchange Commission. (Sec. 3[a], RA 9160)

When reporting covered or suspicious transactions to the AMLC, covered institutions and their officers and employees [,representatives, agents, advisors, consultants or associates] shall not be deemed to have violated Republic Act No. 1405, as amended, Republic Act No. 6426, as amended, Republic Act No. 8791 and other similar laws, but are prohibited from communicating, directly or indirectly, in any manner or by any means, to any person, the fact that a covered or suspicious transaction report was made, the contents thereof, or any other information in relation thereto. In case of violation thereof, the concerned officer and employee [, representative, agent, advisor, consultant or associate] of the covered institution shall be criminally liable. However, no administrative, criminal or civil proceedings, shall lie against any person for having made a covered or suspicious transaction report in the regular performance of his duties in good faith, whether or not such reporting results in any crimina l prosecution under this Act or any other law. When reporting covered or suspicious transactions to the AMLC, covered institutions and their officers and employees [,representatives, agents, advisors, consultants or associates] are prohibited from communicating directly or indirectly, in any manner or by any means, to any person or entity, the media, the fact that a covered or suspicious transaction report was made, the contents thereof, or any other information in relation thereto. Neither may such reporting be published or aired in any manner or form by the mass media, electronic mail, or other similar devices. In case of violation thereof, the concerned officer and employee [, representative, agent, advisor, consultant or associate] of the covered institution and media shall be held criminally liable.(Sec. 9, RA 9160)

OBLIGATIONS OF COVERED INSTITUTIONS CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION

Covered institutions shall establish and record the true identity of its clients based on official documents. They shall maintain a system of verifying the true identity of their clients and, in case of corporate clients, require a system of verifying their legal existence and organizational structure, as well as the authority and identification of all persons purporting to act on their behalf. PAGE 166

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS

COVERED TRANSACTIONS 'Covered transaction' is a transaction in cash or other equivalent monetary instrument involving a total amount in excess of Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00) within one (1) banking day. (Sec. 3[b], RA 9160)


(5) Robbery and extortion under Articles 294, 295, 296, 299, 300, 301 and 302 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (6) Jueteng and Masiao punished as illegal gambling under Presidential Decree No. 1602; (7) Piracy on the high seas under the Revised Penal Code, as amended and Presidential Decree No. 532; (8) Qualified theft under Article 310 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (9) Swindling under Article 315 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (10) Smuggling under Republic Act Nos. 455 and 1937; (11) Violations under Republic Act No. 8792, otherwise known as the Electronic Commerce Act of 2000; (12) Hijacking and other violations under Republic Act No. 6235; destructive arson and murder, as defined under the Revised Penal Code, as amended, including those perpetrated by terrorists against non-combatant persons and similar targets; (13) Fraudulent practices and other violations under Republic Act No. 8799, otherwise known as the Securities Regulation Code of 2000; (14) Felonies or offenses of a similar nature that are punishable under the penal laws of other countries. (Sec. 3[i], RA 9160)

SUSPICIOUS TRANSACTIONS 'Suspicious transaction' are transactions with covered institutions, regardless of the amounts involved, where any of the following circumstances exist: (1) there is no underlying legal or trade obligation, purpose or economic justification; (2) the client is not properly identified; (3) the amount involved is not commensurate with the business or financial capacity of the client; (4) taking into account all known circumstances, it may be perceived that the client’s transaction is structured in order to avoid being the subject of reporting requirements under the Act; (5) any circumstance relating to the transaction which is observed to deviate from the profile of the client and/or the client’s past transactions with the covered institution; (6) the transaction is in any way related to an unlawful activity or offense under this Act that is about to be, is being or has been committed; or (7) any transaction that is similar or analogous to any of the foregoing. (Sec. 3[b-1], RA 9160 as amended)

ANTI-MONEY LAUNDERING COUNCIL The Anti-Money Laundering Council shall be composed of the Governor of the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas as chairman, the Commissioner of the Insurance Commission and the Chairman of the Securities and Exchange Commission as members. (Sec. 7, RA 9160)

WHEN IS MONEY LAUNDERING COMMITTED Money laundering is a crime whereby the proceeds of an unlawful activity are transacted, thereby making them appear to have originated from legitimate sources. It is committed by the following: (1) Any person knowing that any monetary instrument or property represents, involves, or relates to the proceeds of any unlawful activity, transacts or attempts to transact said monetary instrument or property. (2) Any person knowing that any monetary instrument or property involves the proceeds of any unlawful activity, performs or fails to perform any act as a result of which he facilitates the offense of money laundering referred to in paragraph (a) above. (3) Any person knowing that any monetary instrument or property is required under this Act to be disclosed and filed with the Anti-Money Laundering Council (AMLC), fails to do so. (Sec. 4, RA 9160)

FUNCTIONS The AMLC shall act unanimously in the discharge of its functions as defined hereunder: (1) to require and receive covered or suspicious transaction reports from covered institutions; (2) to issue orders addressed to the appropriate Supervising Authority or the covered institution to determine the true identity of the owner of any monetary instrument or property subject of a covered transaction or suspicious transaction report or request for assistance from a foreign State, or believed by the Council, on the basis of substantial evidence, to be, in whole or in part, wherever located, representing, involving, or related to, directly or indirectly, in any manner or by any means, the proceeds of an unlawful activity. (3) to institute civil forfeiture proceedings and all other remedial proceedings through the Office of the Solicitor General; (4) to cause the filing of complaints with the Department of Justice or the Ombudsman for the prosecution of money laundering offenses; (5) to [initiate investigations of] investigate suspicious transactions and covered transactions deemed suspicious after an investigation by AMLC, money laundering activities, and other violations of this Act; (6) to apply before the Court of Appeals, ex parte, for the freezing of any monetary instrument or property alleged to be the proceeds of any unlawful activity as defined in Section 3(i) hereof;

UNLAWFUL ACTIVITIES OR PREDICATE CRIMES Unlawful activity' refers to any act or omission or series or combination thereof involving or having direct relation to the following: (1) Kidnapping for ransom under Article 267 of Act No. 3815, otherwise known as the Revised Penal Code, as amended; (2) Sections 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 of Republic Act No. 9165, otherwise known as the Comprehensive Dangerous Drugs Act of 2002; (3) Section 3 paragraphs B, C, E, G, H and I of Republic Act No. 3019, as amended; otherwise known as the AntiGraft and Corrupt Practices Act; (4) Plunder under Republic Act No. 7080, as amended;

PAGE 167

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS


(7) to implement such measures as may be necessary and justified under this Act to counteract money laundering; (8) to receive and take action in respect of, any request from foreign states for assistance in their own anti-money laundering operations provided in this Act; (9) to develop educational programs on the pernicious effects of money laundering, the methods and techniques used in money laundering, the viable means of preventing money laundering and the effective ways of prosecuting and punishing offenders; (10) to enlist the assistance of any branch, department, bureau, office, agency or instrumentality of the government, including government-owned and controlled corporations, in undertaking any and all antimoney laundering operations, which may include the use of its personnel, facilities and resources for the more resolute prevention, detection and investigation of money laundering offenses and prosecution of offenders; and (11) to impose administrative sanctions for the violation of laws, rules, regulations and orders and resolutions issued pursuant thereto. (Sec. 9, RA 9160)

Foreign Investments Act

FREEZING OF MONETARY INSTRUMENT OR PROPERTY The Court of Appeals, upon application ex parte by the AMLC and after determination that probable cause exists that any monetary instrument or property is in any way related to an unlawful activity as defined in Section 3(i) hereof, may issue a freeze order which shall be effective immediately. The freeze order shall be for a period not exceeding six (6) months depending upon the circumstances of the case. No court can issue a temporary restraining order or a writ of injunction against any freeze order, except the Supreme Court. (Sec. 10, RA 9160, as amended by RA 10365)

As a general rule, there are no restrictions on extent of foreign ownership of export enterprises. In domestic market enterprises, foreigners can invest as much as one hundred percent (100%) equity except in areas included in the negative list. Foreign owned firms catering mainly to the domestic market shall be encouraged to undertake measures that will gradually increase Filipino participation in their businesses by taking in Filipino partners, electing Filipinos to the board of directors, implementing transfer of technology to Filipinos, generating more employment for the economy and enhancing skills of Filipino workers. (Sec. 2, RA 7092)

(R.A. No. 7042) POLICY OF THE LAW It is the policy of the State to attract, promote and welcome productive investments from foreign individuals, partnerships, corporations, and governments, including their political subdivisions, in activities which significantly contribute to national industrialization and socio-economic development to the extent that foreign investment is allowed in such activity by the Constitution and relevant laws. Foreign investments shall be encouraged in enterprises that significantly expand livelihood and employment opportunities for Filipinos; enhance economic value of farm products; promote the welfare of Filipino consumers; expand the scope, quality and volume of exports and their access to foreign markets; and/or transfer relevant technologies in agriculture, industry and support services. Foreign investments shall be welcome as a supplement to Filipino capital and technology in those enterprises serving mainly the domestic market.

DEFINITION OF TERMS

AUTHORITY TO INQUIRE INTO BANK DEPOSITS Notwithstanding the provisions of Republic Act No. 1405, as amended[;], Republic Act No. 6426, as amended[;], Republic Act No. 8791, and other laws, the AMLC may inquire into or examine any particular deposit or investment with any banking institution or non-bank financial institution upon order of any competent court in cases of violation of this Act when it has been established that there is probable cause that the deposits or investments involved are [in any way] related to an unlawful activity as defined in Section 3(i) hereof or a money laundering offense under Section 4 hereof; except that no court order shall be required in cases involving unlawful activities defined in Sections 3(i)(1), (2) and (12) [:Provided, That this provision shall not apply to deposits and investments made prior to the effectivity of this Act].

FOREIGN INVESTMENT

“Foreign investment” shall mean an equity investment made by a nonPhilippine national in the form of foreign exchange and/or other assets actually transferred to the Philippines and duly registered with the Central Bank which shall assess and appraise the value of such assets other than foreign exchange; (Sec. 3[c], RA 7092) DOING BUSINESS IN THE PHILIPPINES

“Doing business” shall include soliciting orders, service contracts, opening offices, whether called “liaison” offices or branches; appointing representatives or distributors domiciled in the Philippines or who in any calendar year stay in the country for a period or periods totaling one hundred eighty (180) days or more; participating in the management, supervision or control of any domestic business, firm, entity or corporation in the Philippines; and any other act or acts that imply a continuity of commercial dealings or arrangements, and contemplate to that extent the performance of acts or works, or the exercise of some of the functions normally incident to, and in progressive prosecution of, commercial gain or of the purpose and object of the business organization: Provided, however, That

To ensure compliance with this Act, the BangkoSentralngPilipinas (BSP) may inquire into or examine any deposit or investment with any banking institution or non-bank financial institution when the examination is made in the course of a periodic or special examination, in accordance with the rules of examination of the BSP. (Sec. 11, RA 9160)

PAGE 168

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS

the phrase “doing business” shall not be deemed to include mere investment as a shareholder by a foreign entity in domestic corporations duly registered to do business, and/or the exercise of rights as such investor; nor having a nominee director or officer to represent its interests in such corporation; nor appointing a representative or distributor domiciled in the Philippines which transacts business in its own name and for its own account; (Sec. 3[d], RA 7092)


FOREIGN INVESTMENTS IN EXPORT ENTERPRISE Foreign investment in export enterprises whose products and services do not fall within Lists A and B of the Foreign Investment Negative List provided under Section 8 hereof is allowed up to one hundred percent (100%) ownership. Export enterprises which are non-Philippine nationals shall register with BOI and submit the reports that may be required to ensure continuing compliance of the export enterprise with its export requirement. BOI shall advise SEC or BTRCP, as the case may be, of any export enterprise that fails to meet the export ratio requirement. The SEC or BTRCP shall thereupon order the non-complying export enterprise to reduce its sales to the domestic market to not more than forty percent (40%) of its total production; failure to comply with such SEC or BTRCP order, without justifiable reason, shall subject the enterprise to cancellation of SEC or BTRCP registration, and/or the penalties provided in Section 14 hereof. (Sec. 6, RA 7092)

EXPORT ENTERPRISE

“Export enterprise” shall mean an enterprise wherein a manufacturer, processor or service (including tourism) enterprise exports sixty percent (60%) or more of its output, or wherein a trader purchases products domestically and exports sixty percent (60%) or more of such purchases; (Sec. 3[e], RA 7092) DOMESTIC MARKET ENTERPRISE

“Domestic market enterprise” shall mean an enterprise which produces goods for sale, or renders services to the domestic market entirely or if exporting a portion of its output fails to consistently export at least sixty percent (60%) thereof; (Sec. 3[e], RA 7092)

FOREIGN INVESTMENTS IN DOMESTIC MARKET ENTERPRISE Non-Philippine nationals may own up to one hundred percent (100%) of domestic market enterprises unless foreign ownership therein is prohibited or limited by the Constitution existing law or the Foreign Investment Negative List under Section 8 hereof. (Sec. 7, RA 7092, as amended by R.A. 8179)

REGISTRATION OF INVESTMENTS ON NON-PHILIPPINE NATIONALS Without need of prior approval, a non-Philippine national, as that term is defined in Section 3 a), and not otherwise disqualified by law may, upon registration with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), or with the Bureau of Trade Regulation and Consumer Protection (BTRCP) of the Department of Trade and Industry in the case of single proprietorships, do business as defined in Section 3 d) of this Act or invest in a domestic enterprise up to one hundred percent (100%) of its capital, unless participation of non-Philippine nationals in the enterprise is prohibited or limited to a smaller percentage by existing law and/or under the provisions of this Act. The SEC or BTRCP, as the case may be, shall not impose any limitations on the extent of foreign ownership in an enterprise additional to those provided in this Act: Provided, however, That any enterprise seeking to avail of incentives under the Omnibus Investment Code of 1987 must apply for registration with the Board of Investments (BOI), which shall process such application for registration in accordance with the criteria for evaluation prescribed in said Code: Provided, finally, That a non-Philippine national intending to engage in the same line of business as an existing joint venture, in which he or his majority shareholder is a substantial partner, must disclose the fact and the names and addresses of the partners in the existing joint venture in his application for registration with SEC. During the transitory period as provided in Section 15 hereof, SEC shall disallow registration of the applying non-Philippine national if the existing joint venture enterprise, particularly the Filipino partners therein, can reasonably prove they are capable to make the investment needed for the domestic market activities to be undertaken by the competing applicant. Upon effectivity of this Act, SEC shall effect registration of any enterprise applying under this Act within fifteen (15) days upon submission of completed requirements. (Sec. 5, RA 7092)

FOREIGN INVESTMENT NEGATIVE LIST The Foreign Investment Negative List shall have two (2) components lists; A, and B. (1) List A shall enumerate the areas of activities reserved to Philippine nationals by mandate of the Constitution and specific laws. (2) List B shall contain the areas of activities and enterprises regulated pursuant to law: (a) which are defense-related activities, requiring prior clearance and authorization from Department of National Defense (DND) to engage in such activity, such as the manufacture, repair, storage and/or distribution of firearms, ammunition, lethal weapons, military ordinance, explosives, pyrotechnics and similar materials; unless such manufacturing or repair activity is specifically authorized, with a substantial export component, to a non-Philippine national by the Secretary of National Defense; or (b) which have implications on public health and morals, such as the manufacture and distribution of dangerous drugs; all forms of gambling; nightclubs, bars, beerhouses, dance halls; sauna and steam bathhouses and massage clinics. “Small and medium-sized domestic market enterprises, with paid-in equity capital less thanthe equivalent two hundred thousand US dollars (US$200,000) are reserved to Philippine nationals, Provided that if: (1) they involve advanced technology as determined by the Department of Science and Technology or (2) they employ at least fifty (50) direct employees,then a minimum paid-in capital of one hundred thousand US dollars (US$100,000.00) shall be allowed to non-Philippine nationals.

PAGE 169

UP COLLEGE OF LAW

SPECIAL LAWS

Amendments to List B may be made upon recommendation of the Secretary of National Defense, or the Secretary of Health, or the Secretary of Education, Culture and Sports, endorsed by the NEDA, approved by the President, and promulgated by a Presidential Proclamation. “Transitory Foreign Investment Negative List” established in Sec. 15 hereof shall be replaced at the end of the transitory period by the first Regular Negative List to be formulated and recommended by NEDA, following the process and criteria provided in Sections 8 of this Act. The first Regular Negative List shall be published not later than sixty (60) days before the end of the transitory period provided in said section, and shall become immediately effective at the end of the transitory period. Subsequent Foreign Investment Negative Lists shall become effective fifteen (15) days after publication in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines: Provided, however, That each Foreign Investment Negative List shall be prospective in operation and shall in no way affect foreign investment existing on the date of its publication. “Amendments to List B after promulgation and publication of the first Regular Foreign Investment Negative List at the end of the transitory period shall not be made more often than once every two (2) years”. (Sec. 8, RA 7092, as amended by R.A. 8179)

PAGE 170


UP Bar Reviewer 2013 - Mercantile Law

Recommend Documents